FCC ID: PD93165NG Intel Dual Band Wireless - AC 3165

PROD Intel 802.1 F DUCT BRIEF Wireless-AC 3 Dual Band W 1ac, Dual Band d, 1x1 Wi-Fi +

165 0 Bluetooth 4.0 Int el Du ual Ba and W Wireles ss-AC 5 C 3165 Excepti ional Wi-Fi. Ex xceptional Fea atures. Excepti onal Connecte ed Experience e The Inte adapter higher c Intel C Band W work or el Dual Band W r lets you move capacity, broad Core processo Wireless-AC 316 r on the go. Wireless-AC 31 e at the speed der coverage a ors and except 65 dramatically 165 802.11ac, of life with fas nd longer batt ional Intel wire y reshapes you dual band, 1x ster speeds (up tery life. Comb eless innovatio ur connected e tooth x1 Wi-Fi + Bluet 1), p to 433 Mbps1 ined with 5th G Gen Dual ons, the Intel D experience at h home, Next-G Gen 802.11ac W Wireless d More Speed erage Better Cove Larger Capa acity 802.11a ac, Dual Band, 80 0MHz, 1x1 Bluetooth 4.0

(Low Energy) Smart Ready Microsoft Insta antGo*2 Support Delivers more use power co improve up to 3x faster W ers, broader cov onsumption). Ad channel reliabil Wi-Fi speeds (up verage and bette dvanced optiona ity resulting in b p to 433 Mbps1) t r battery life (mo l 802.11ac speci better coverage a r more capacity for than 802.11n, m duce ore data transmi t efficiencies red ification features s implemented t that and performance e. Dual mod your fam de Bluetooth 4.0 miliar devices, suc 0 connects to th ch as headsets, k he newest low en keyboard, mice a nergy Bluetooth and more. products as we ll as Maintain email, so ns network conne ocial networks, e ectivity with very tc. when your sc y low power con creen is off in sta nsumption to ena andby mode. able updates to y your Experi ence the Intel Difference Your Ultraboo Intel Wireless ok , On Your TV s Display3 Always Ready Intel Smart C to Go onnect Technolo ogy4 Watch yo stunning upgrade experien Stay curr your dev connect worldwid our PC or Ultrab g image clarity an

. Stream movies nce it all, bigger a rent with automa vice is asleep. Co to millions of fre de. ook content ins nd sound. Intel s, videos, games, and better than e atic, no-wait upd ombine it with Int ee and paid hots stantly without w Wireless Display photos, connec ever before. dates to your em tel WiFi HotSpo spots to refresh y wires on the big y gives you a ser ct with friends, an HD screen with rious entertainm nd more ent mail and social ne ot Assistant and your content in etworks, even wh automatically more locations hen Instant Interne Intel WiFi Ho et Worldwide tspot Assistant6 Delivers acceptin on auto-

Combine social ne instant Internet g a one-time on

-pilot as you roam e it with Intel Sm etworks, news, et connectivity at m ly terms and con m the Wi-Fi hots mart Connect Te tc.) is automatica millions of free a nditions (T&C) lo spot universee echnology and yo ally refreshed as and paid hotspo ogin, your Interne even as your mo our favorite clou s you roam. er t worldwide. Aft are et connections a bile device sleep ps. il, ud content (emai Inte l Confidential Intel Dual Band Wireless-AC 3165 Technical Specifications General Dimensions (H x W x D) Weight Diversity Radio ON/OFF Control Connector interface LED Output Operating Temperature (Adapter Shield) Humidity Non-Operating Operating Systems Wi-Fi Alliance IEEE WLAN Standard Architecture Roaming11 Bluetooth Security12 Authentication Authentication Protocols Encryption Wi-Fi Direct* Encryption and Authentication Product Safety Management Frame Protection Compliance Government Product Name Intel Dual Band Wireless-AC 3165 M.2 2230: 22 mm x 30 mm x 2.4 mm [1.5mm Max (Top Side)/ 0.1mm Max (Bottom Side)]

M.2 2230: 2.4g Supported Supported in both hardware and software M.2: PCIe, USB On/Off 0 to +80 C 50% to 90% RH non-condensing (at temperatures of 25C to 35C) Microsoft Windows 7*, Microsoft Windows 8.1*, Linux* (most features not available on Linux) Wi-Fi CERTIFIED* for 802.11ac, Wi-Fi CERTIFIED* a/b/g, Wi-Fi CERTIFIED* n, WMM*, WPA*, WPA2*, and WPS, WPS 2.0, Protected Management Frames, Wi-Fi Direct* for peer to peer device connections Wi-Fi Miracast Source IEEE 802.11abgn, 802.11ac, 802.11d, 802.11e, 802.11i, 802.11h, 802.11w Infrastructure and SoftAP; Supports simultaneous Client and SoftAP modes Supports seamless roaming between respective access points

(802.11b, 802.11g, 802.11a/b/g, 802.11a/b/g/n, and 802.11ac) Dual Mode Bluetooth* 2.1, 2.1+EDR, 3.0, 4.0 (BLE) WPA and WPA2, 802.1X (EAP-TLS, TTLS, PEAP, LEAP, EAP-FAST), EAP-SIM, EAP-AKA PAP, CHAP, TLS, GTC, MS-CHAP*, MS-CHAPv2 64-bit and 128-bit WEP, AES-CCMP, TKIP WPA2, AES-CCMP UL, C-UL, CB (IEC 60950-1) 802.11w (WFA- Protected Management Frames) FIPS13 ,FISMA Model Number 3165NGW Version 802.11ac, 1x1, Bluetooth 4.0, PCIe, USB, M.2 2230 For more information on Intel Wireless products, visit intel.com/wireless 1 Based on the theoretical maximum bandwidth enabled by 2x2 802.11ac implementations. Actual wireless throughput and/or range will vary depending on your specific operating system, hardware and software configurations. Check with your PC manufacturer for details. 2 InstantGo is a Microsoft Windows OS feature in 8.1(known as Connected Standby in Microsoft Windows 8 and Microsoft Windows RT). 3 Intel Wireless Display requires an Intel Wireless Display enabled PC, tablet, or smartphone, a compatible adapter, and a TV. 1080p and Blu-Ray* or other protected content playback only available on select Intel processors with built-in visuals enabled. Consult your PC manufacturer. For more information, see www.intel.com/go/widi 4 Intel Smart Connect Technology requires a select Intel processor, Intel software and BIOS update, Intel Wireless adaptor, and Internet connectivity. Solid state memory or drive equivalent may be required. Depending on system configuration, your results may vary. Contact your system manufacturer for more information. 5 Intel WiFi Hotspot Assistant requires an Intel wireless adapter, Intel PROSet/Wireless WiFi Software v15.6 or later, and an Internet connection for initial setup with the Easy WiFi* network. 6 Roaming is supported only within each respective band and mode of access points. 7 Some security solutions may not be supported by your PCs operating system and/or by your PC manufacturer. Check with your PC manufacturer for details on availability. 8 Microsoft Windows 7 and Microsoft Windows 8/8.1. Software and workloads used in performance tests may have been optimized for performance only on Intel microprocessors. Performance tests, such as SYSmark and MobileMark, are measured using specific computer systems, components, software, operations and functions. Any change to any of those factors may cause the results to vary. You should consult other information and performance tests to assist you in fully evaluating your contemplated purchases, including the performance of that product when combined with other products. No license, express or implied, by estoppel or otherwise, to any intellectual property rights is granted by this document. Except as provided in Intels Terms and Conditions of Sale for such products, Intel assumes no liability whatsoever, and Intel disclaims any express or implied warranty, relating to sale and/or use of Intel products including without limitation, liability or warranties relating to fitness for a particular purpose, merchantability, or infringement of any patent, copyright or other intellectual property right. Intel products are not intended for use in medical, lifesaving, or life sustaining applications. Intel may make changes to specifications and product descriptions at any time, without notice. For the most current product information, please visit: http://www.intel.com/wireless Intel, the Intel logo, Intel, and Intel Centrino are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries.

*Other names and brands may be claimed as the property of others Copyright 2014 Intel Corporation. All rights reserved. XXXXXX-001US Intel Confidential

Intel WiFi Adapter Information Guide Intel WiFi Adapter Information Guide This version of Intel PROSet/Wireless WiFi Software is compatible with the adapters listed below. However, note that newer features provided in this software release are generally not supported for older, legacy adapters. The following adapters are supported on this release for Windows* 8 and Windows* 8.1 with Windows* 7 drivers from Intel:

Intel Centrino Wireless-N 100 Intel Centrino Wireless-N 130 Intel Centrino Wireless-N 1000 Intel Centrino Wireless-N 1030 Intel Centrino Advanced-N 6200 Intel Centrino Advanced-N 6230 The following adapters are supported on this release for Windows* 8 with Windows* 8 drivers from Intel:

Intel Centrino Wireless-N 105 Intel Centrino Wireless-N 135 Intel Centrino Wireless-N 2200 Intel Centrino Wireless-N 2230 Intel Centrino Wireless-N + WiMAX 6150 Intel Centrino Advanced-N 6205 Intel Centrino Advanced-N 6235 Intel Centrino Advanced-N + WiMAX 6250 Intel Centrino Ultimate-N 6300 Intel Dual Band Wireless-AC 7260 Intel Dual Band Wireless-N 7260 Intel Wireless-N 7260 Intel Dual Band Wireless-AC 3160 Intel Dual Band Wireless-AC 3165 Intel Dual Band Wireless-AC 7265 Intel Dual Band Wireless-N 7265 Intel Wireless-N 7265 The following adapters are supported on this release for Windows* 8.1 with Windows* 8 drivers from Intel:

Intel Centrino Wireless-N 105 Intel Centrino Wireless-N 135 Intel Centrino Wireless-N 2200 Intel Centrino Wireless-N 2230 Intel Centrino Wireless-N + WiMAX 6150 Intel Centrino Advanced-N 6205 Intel Centrino Advanced-N 6235 Intel Centrino Advanced-N + WiMAX 6250 Intel Centrino Ultimate-N 6300 The following adapters are supported on this release for Windows* 8.1 with Windows* 8.1 drivers from Intel:

Intel Dual Band Wireless-AC 7260 Intel Dual Band Wireless-N 7260 Intel Wireless-N 7260 Intel Dual Band Wireless-AC 3160 Intel Dual Band Wireless-AC 3165 Intel Dual Band Wireless-AC 7265 Intel Dual Band Wireless-N 7265 Intel Wireless-N 7265 Intel Tri-Band Wireless-AC 17260 With your WiFi network card, you can access WiFi networks, share files or printers, or even share your Internet index.htm[12/16/2014 4:29:04 PM]

Intel WiFi Adapter Information Guide connection. All of these features can be explored using a WiFi network in your home or office. This WiFi network solution is designed for both home and business use. Additional users and features can be added as your networking needs grow and change. This guide contains basic information about Intel adapters. It includes information about several adapter properties that you can set to control and enhance the performance of your adapter with your particular wireless network and environment. Intel wireless adapters enable fast connectivity without wires for desktop and notebook PCs. Adapter Settings Regulatory Information Specifications Important Information Support Warranty Glossary Depending on the model of your Intel WiFi adapter, your adapter is compatible with 802.11a, 802.11b, 802.11g, and 802.11n (draft 2.0) wireless standards. Operating at 5GHz or 2.4GHz frequency at data rates of up to 450 Mbps, you can now connect your computer to existing high-speed networks that use multiple access points within large or small environments. Your WiFi adapter maintains automatic data rate control according to the access point location and signal strength to achieve the fastest possible connection. All of your wireless network connections are easily managed by the WiFi connection utility. Profiles that are set up through the WiFi connection utility provide enhanced security measures with 802.1X network authentication. Information in this document is subject to change without notice. 20042014 Intel Corporation. All rights reserved. Intel Corporation, 5200 N.E. Elam Young Parkway, Hillsboro, OR 97124-6497 USA The copying or reproducing of any material in this document in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Intel Corporation is strictly forbidden. Intel is a trademark or registered trademark of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries. Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this document to refer to either the entities claiming the marks and names or their products. Intel disclaims any proprietary interest in trademarks and trade names other than its own. Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Windows Vista is either a registered trademark or trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

*Other names and brands may be claimed as the property of others. Intel Corporation assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions in this document. Nor does Intel make any commitment to update the information contained herein.

"IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR ALL USERS OR DISTRIBUTORS:

Intel wireless LAN adapters are engineered, manufactured, tested, and quality checked to ensure that they meet all necessary local and governmental regulatory agency requirements for the regions that they are designated and/or marked to ship into. Because wireless LANs are generally unlicensed devices that share spectrum with radars, satellites, and other licensed and unlicensed devices, it is sometimes necessary to dynamically detect, avoid, and limit usage to avoid interference with these devices. In many instances Intel is required to provide test data to prove regional and local compliance to regional and governmental regulations before certification or approval to use the product is granted. Intel's wireless LAN's EEPROM, firmware, and software driver are designed to carefully control parameters that affect radio operation and to ensure electromagnetic compliance (EMC). These parameters include, without limitation, RF power, spectrum usage, channel scanning, and human exposure. For these reasons Intel cannot permit any manipulation by third parties of the software provided in binary format with the wireless LAN adapters (e.g., the EEPROM and firmware). Furthermore, if you use any patches, utilities, or code with the Intel wireless LAN adapters that have been manipulated by an unauthorized party (i.e., patches, utilities, or code (including open source code modifications) which have not been validated by Intel), (i) you will be solely responsible for ensuring the regulatory compliance of the products, (ii) Intel will bear no liability, under any theory of liability for any issues associated with the modified products, including without limitation, claims under the warranty and/or issues arising from regulatory non-compliance, and (iii) Intel will not provide or be required to index.htm[12/16/2014 4:29:04 PM]

Intel WiFi Adapter Information Guide assist in providing support to any third parties for such modified products. Note: Many regulatory agencies consider Wireless LAN adapters to be "modules", and accordingly, condition system-

level regulatory approval upon receipt and review of test data documenting that the antennas and system configuration do not cause the EMC and radio operation to be non-compliant."

November 3, 2014 index.htm[12/16/2014 4:29:04 PM]

Adapter Settings Back to Contents Adapter Settings The Advanced tab displays the device properties for the WiFi adapter installed on your computer. How to Access At the Intel PROSet/Wireless WiFi Connection Utility, Advanced Menu click Adapter Settings. Select the Advanced tab. WiFi Adapter Settings Description Name 802.11ac Mode

(5GHz) 802.11n Channel Width

(2.4 GHz) Description The 802.11ac standard builds on 802.11n standard. 802.11ac Mode delivers up to 867Mbps

(theoretical) by increasing channel bandwidth to 80MHz and adding higher density modulation

(256 QAM). Select Enabled or Disabled to set the 802.11ac mode of the WiFi adapter. Enabled is the default setting. This setting applies to 802.11ac capable adapters only. Set high throughput channel width to maximize performance. Set the channel width to Auto or 20MHz. Use 20MHz if 802.11n channels are restricted. This setting applies to 802.11n capable adapters only. 802.11n Channel Width

(5.2 GHz) NOTE: This setting does not apply to the Intel Wireless WiFi Link 4965AGN (uses 20 MHz channel width only). Set high throughput channel width to maximize performance. Set the channel width to Auto or 20MHz. Use 20MHz if 802.11n channels are restricted. This setting applies to 802.11n capable adapters only. NOTE: This setting does not apply to the following adapters:

Intel WiFi Link 1000 Intel Wireless WiFi Link 4965AGN 802.11n Mode The 802.11n standard builds on previous 802.11 standards by adding multiple-input multiple-

output (MIMO). MIMO increases data throughput to improve transfer rate. Select Enabled or Disabled to set the 802.11n mode of the WiFi adapter. Enabled is the default setting. This setting applies to 802.11n capable adapters only. Ad Hoc Channel 802.11b/g Ad Hoc QoS Mode NOTE: To achieve transfer rates greater than 54 Mbps on 802.11n connections, WPA2*-AES security must be selected. No security (None) can be selected to enable network setup and troubleshooting. An administrator can enable or disable support for high throughput mode to reduce power-

consumption or conflicts with other bands or compatibility issues. Select Enabled or Disabled. Quality of Service (QoS) control in ad hoc networks. QoS provides prioritization of traffic from the access point over a wireless LAN based on traffic classification. WMM (Wi-Fi Multimedia) is the QoS certification of the Wi-Fi Alliance (WFA). When WMM is enabled, the WiFi adapter uses WMM to support priority tagging and queuing capabilities for Wi-Fi networks. WMM Enabled (Default) WMM Disabled Bluetooth Enable or disable Bluetooth AMP. AMP stands for alternate MAC/PHY and uses the 802.11 (Wi-

adaptusr.htm[12/16/2014 4:29:05 PM]

Adapter Settings AMP HT Mode/VHT Mode/Disabled Fat Channel Intolerant Fi) as the high-speed transport. If disabled, Bluetooth HS is turned off. This settings lets you select HT Mode (High Throughput mode), VHT Mode (Very High Throughput Mode) or to disable both modes. HT Mode supports 802.11n compatibility, whereas VHT Mode supports 802.11ac compatibility. This setting communicates to access points that this WiFi adapter does not prefer 40MHz channels in the 2.4GHz band. The default setting is for this to be turned off (disabled), so that the adapter does not send this notification. If the access point continues to use 40MHz channels, the WiFi adapter will also use 40MHz channels if the 802.11n Channel Width (2.4GHz) setting is AUTO. NOTE: This setting does not apply to the following adapters:

Intel Wireless WiFi Link 4965AG_ Intel PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection Mixed mode protection Use to avoid data collisions in a mixed 802.11b and 802.11g environment. Request to Send/Clear to Send (RTS/CTS) should be used in an environment where clients may not hear each other. CTS-to-self can be used to gain more throughput in an environment where clients are in close proximity and can hear each other. Preferred Band In an environment with other radiating devices nearby (such as microwave ovens, cordless telephones, access points, or client devices), in order to reduce interference you may prefer the 5GHz band over the 2.4GHz band, or vice-versa. Your choices are:

No Preference Prefer 2.4GHz band Prefer 5GHz band Here are the various Wi-Fi bands:

802.11 legacy - 2.4GHz 802.11a - 3.7GHz and 5GHz 802.11b - 2.4GHz 802.11g - 2.4GHz 802.11n - 2.4GHz and 5GHz 802.11ac - 5GHz 802.11ad - 60GHz Roaming Aggressiveness This setting lets you define how aggressively your wireless client roams to improve connection to an access point. There are five available settings. Transmit Power 3. Medium: This is the default. A balanced setting between not roaming and performance. 1. Lowest: Your wireless client will not roam. Only significant link quality degradation causes it to roam to another access point. 5. Highest: Your wireless client continuously tracks the link quality. If any degradation occurs, it tries to find and roam to a better access point. Default Setting: Highest power setting. Lowest: Minimum Coverage: Set the adapter to the lowest transmit power. Enables you to expand the number of coverage areas or confine a coverage area. Reduces the coverage area in high traffic areas to improve overall transmission quality and avoids congestion and interference with other devices. Highest: Maximum Coverage: Set the adapter to a maximum transmit power level. Select for maximum performance and range in environments with limited additional WiFi radio devices. NOTE: The optimal setting is for a user to always set the transmit power at the lowest possible level that is still compatible with the quality of their communication. This allows the maximum number of wireless devices to operate in dense areas and reduce interference with other devices that it shares the same radio spectrum with. adaptusr.htm[12/16/2014 4:29:05 PM]

Adapter Settings Wake on Magic Packet NOTE: This setting takes effect when either Network (Infrastructure) or Device to Device (ad hoc) mode is used. This setting, enabled, wakes the computer from a sleep state when it receives a "magic packet"

from a sending computer. The magic packet contains the MAC address of the intended destination computer. Wake on Pattern Match Enabling turns on Wake on Magic Packet. Disabling turns off Wake on Magic Packet. Disabling this only disables the magic packet feature, not Wake on Wireless LAN. This feature wakes the computer from a sleep state when a particular wake pattern is received at the adapter. This feature is supported by the Window* 7 and Windows 8. Such patterns typically are:

Wake on new incoming TCP connection for IPv4 and IPv6 (TCP SYN IPv4 and TCP SYN IPv6). Wake on 802.1x re-authentication packets. Disabling this only disables the pattern match feature, not Wake on Wireless LAN. Wireless Mode Select which mode to use for connection to a wireless network:

802.11a only: Connect the wireless WiFi adapter to 802.11a networks only. Not applicable for all adapters. 802.11b only: Connect the wireless WiFi adapter to 802.11b networks only. Not applicable for all adapters. 802.11g only: Connect the wireless WiFi adapter to 802.11g networks only. 802.11a and 802.11g: Connect the WiFi adapter to 802.11a and 802.11g networks only. Not applicable for all adapters. 802.11b and 802.11g: Connect the WiFi adapter to 802.11b and 802.11g networks only. Not applicable for all adapters. 802.11a, 802.11b, and 802.11g: (Default) - Connect to either 802.11a, 802.11b or 802.11g wireless networks. Not applicable for all adapters. OK Cancel Saves settings and returns to the previous page. Closes and cancels any changes. Back to Top Back to Contents Trademarks and Disclaimers adaptusr.htm[12/16/2014 4:29:05 PM]

Regulatory Information Back to Contents Regulatory Information This section provides regulatory information for the following wireless adapters:

Intel Centrino Wireless-N 100 Intel Centrino Wireless-N 105 Intel Centrino Wireless-N 130 Intel Centrino Wireless-N 135 Intel Centrino Wireless-N 1000 Intel Centrino Wireless-N 1030 Intel Centrino Wireless-N 2200 Intel Centrino Wireless-N 2230 Intel Centrino Wireless-N + WiMAX 6150 Intel Centrino Advanced-N 6200 Intel Centrino Advanced-N 6205 Intel Centrino Advanced-N 6230 Intel Centrino Advanced-N 6235 Intel Centrino Advanced-N + WiMAX 6250 Intel Centrino Ultimate-N 6300 Intel Dual Band Wireless-AC 7260 Intel Dual Band Wireless-N 7260 Intel Wireless-N 7260 Intel Dual Band Wireless-AC 3160 Intel Dual Band Wireless-AC 3165 Intel Dual Band Wireless-AC 7265 Intel Dual Band Wireless-N 7265 Intel Wireless-N 7265 Intel Tri-Band Wireless-AC 17265 Intel Wireless Gigabit Sink W13100 NOTE: Due to the evolving state of regulations and standards in the wireless LAN field (IEEE 802.11 and similar standards), the information provided herein is subject to change. Intel Corporation assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions in this document. Intel WiFi/WiMAX Wireless Adapters Information in this section supports the following wireless adapters:

Intel Centrino Wireless-N + WiMAX 6150 Intel Centrino Advanced-N + WiMAX 6250 See Specifications for complete wireless adapter specifications. NOTE: In this section, all references to the "wireless adapter" refer to all adapters listed above. The following information is provided:

Information for the User Regulatory Information Information for OEMs and Host Integrators INFORMATION FOR THE USER Safety Notices USA FCC Radio Frequency Exposure regs.htm[12/16/2014 4:29:05 PM]

Regulatory Information The FCC with its action in ET Docket 96-8 has adopted a safety standard for human exposure to radio frequency (RF) electromagnetic energy emitted by FCC certified equipment. The wireless adapter meets the Human Exposure requirements found in FCC Part 2, 15C, 15E along with guidance from KDB 447498, KDB 248227 and KDB 616217. Proper operation of this radio according to the instructions found in this manual will result in exposure substantially below the FCCs recommended limits. The following safety precautions should be observed:

Do not touch or move antenna while the unit is transmitting or receiving. Do not hold any component containing the radio such that the antenna is very close or touching any exposed parts of the body, especially the face or eyes, while transmitting. Do not operate the radio or attempt to transmit data unless the antenna is connected; this behavior may cause damage to the radio. Use in specific environments:

The use of wireless adapters in hazardous locations is limited by the constraints posed by the safety directors of such environments. The use of electronic devices equipped with wireless adapters on airplanes is governed by rules for each commercial airline operator. The use of wireless adapters in hospitals is restricted to the limits set forth by each hospital. Explosive Device Proximity Warning Warning: Do not operate a portable transmitter (including this wireless adapter) near unshielded blasting caps or in an explosive environment unless the transmitter has been modified to be qualified for such use. Antenna Warnings Warning: The wireless adapter is not designed for use with high-gain directional antennas. Use On Aircraft Caution Caution: Regulations of commercial airline operators may prohibit airborne operation of certain electronic devices equipped with radio-frequency wireless devices (wireless adapters) because their signals could interfere with critical aircraft instruments. Caution: 60 GHz/802.11ad equipment is not permitted on aircraft per FCC 15.255. OEM and host integrators should consider this FCC rule in host devices. Other Wireless Devices Safety Notices for Other Devices in the Wireless Network: See the documentation supplied with wireless adapters or other devices in the wireless network. Local Restrictions on 802.11a, 802.11b, 802.11d, 802.11g, 802.11n, 802.11ac, and 802.16e Radio Usage Caution: Due to the fact that the frequencies used by 802.11a, 802.11b, 802.11d, 802.11g, 802.11n, 802.11ac, and 802.16e wireless LAN devices may not yet be harmonized in all countries, 802.11a, 802.11b, 802.11d, 802.11g, 802.11n, 802.11ac, and 802.16e products are designed for use only in specific countries, and are not allowed to be operated in countries other than those of designated use. As a user of these products, you are responsible for ensuring that the products are used only in the countries for which they were intended and for verifying that they are configured with the correct selection of frequency and channel for the country of use. The device transmit power control (TPC) interface is part of the Intel PROSet/Wireless WiFi Connection Utility Software. Operational restrictions for Equivalent Isotropic Radiated Power (EIRP) are provided by the system manufacturer. Any deviation from the permissible power and frequency settings for the country of use is an infringement of national law and may be punished as such. Wireless Interoperability regs.htm[12/16/2014 4:29:05 PM]

Regulatory Information The wireless adapter is designed to be interoperable with other wireless LAN products that are based on direct sequence spread spectrum (DSSS) radio technology and to comply with the following standards:

IEEE Std. 802.11b compliant Standard on Wireless LAN IEEE Std. 802.11g compliant Standard on Wireless LAN IEEE Std. 802.11a compliant Standard on Wireless LAN IEEE Std. 802.11n draft 2.0 compliant on Wireless LAN IEEE 802.16e-2005 Wave 2 compliant Wireless Fidelity certification, as defined by the Wi-Fi Alliance WiMAX certification as defined by the WiMAX Forum The Wireless Adapter and Your Health The wireless adapter, like other radio devices, emits radio frequency electromagnetic energy. The level of energy emitted by the wireless adapter, however, is less than the electromagnetic energy emitted by other wireless devices such as mobile phones. The wireless adapter operates within the guidelines found in radio frequency safety standards and recommendations. These standards and recommendations reflect the consensus of the scientific community and result from deliberations of panels and committees of scientists who continually review and interpret the extensive research literature. In some situations or environments, the use of the wireless adapter may be restricted by the proprietor of the building or responsible representatives of the applicable organization. Examples of such situations may include:

Using the wireless adapter on board airplanes, or Using the wireless adapter in any other environment where the risk of interference with other devices or services is perceived or identified as being harmful. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of wireless adapters in a specific organization or environment (an airport, for example), you are encouraged to ask for authorization to use the adapter before you turn it on. REGULATORY INFORMATION USA - Federal Communications Commission (FCC) This wireless adapter is restricted to indoor use due to its operation in the 5.15 to 5.25 and 5.470 to 5.75GHz frequency ranges. No configuration controls are provided for Intel wireless adapters allowing any change in the frequency of operations outside the FCC grant of authorization for U.S. operation according to Part 15.407 of the FCC rules. Intel wireless adapters are intended for OEM integrators only. Intel wireless adapters cannot be co-located with any other transmitter unless approved by the FCC. This wireless adapter complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation of the device is subject to the following two conditions:

This device may not cause harmful interference. This device must accept any interference that may cause undesired operation. Class B Device Interference Statement This wireless adapter has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This wireless adapter generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If the wireless adapter is not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, the wireless adapter may cause harmful interference to radio communications. There is no guarantee, however, that such interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this wireless adapter does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception

(which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on), the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by taking one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna of the equipment experiencing the interference. regs.htm[12/16/2014 4:29:05 PM]

Regulatory Information Increase the distance between the wireless adapter and the equipment experiencing the interference. Connect the computer with the wireless adapter to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the equipment experiencing the interference is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. NOTE: The adapter must be installed and used in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions as described in the user documentation that comes with the product. Any other installation or use will violate FCC Part 15 regulations. Safety Approval Considerations This device has been safety approved as a component and is for use only in complete equipment where the acceptability of the combination is determined by the appropriate safety agencies. When installed, consideration must be given to the following:

It must be installed into a compliant host device meeting the requirement of UL/EN/IEC 60950-1 2nd edition including the general provisions of enclosure design 1.6.2 and specifically paragraph 1.2.6.2 (Fire Enclosure). The device shall be supplied by a SELV source when installed in the end-use equipment. A heating test shall be considered in the end-use product for meeting the requirement of UL/EN/IEC 60950-1 2nd edition. Low Halogen Applies only to brominated and chlorinated flame retardants (BFRs/CFRs) and PVC in the final product. Intel components as well as purchased components on the finished assembly meet JS-709 requirements, and the PCB /

substrate meet IEC 61249-2-21 requirements. The replacement of halogenated flame retardants and/or PVC may not be better for the environment. Japan 5GHz Korea

. 5150-5250MHz . Mexico La operacin de este equipo est sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2) este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operacin no deseada. Taiwan regs.htm[12/16/2014 4:29:05 PM]

Regulatory Information 5.25-5.35 Radio Approvals To determine whether you are allowed to use your wireless network device in a specific country, please check to see if the radio type number that is printed on the identification label of your device is listed in the manufacturer's OEM Regulatory Guidance document. Modular Regulatory Certification Country Markings A list of countries requiring regulatory markings is available. Note that the lists include only countries requiring marking but not all certified countries. To find the regulatory country marking information for your adapter, perform these steps:

1. Open this web site: http://www.intel.com/support/wireless/wlan/

2. Click on the link for your adapter. 3. Click Document and Guides. 4. Under Regulatory Information, click Regulatory documents for your adapter. Regulatory ID Due to the very small size of the 7265D2W (12x16), the marking has been placed in this user manual because the product label on the device is considered too small to be readable. USA: Model 7265D2W, FCC ID: PD97265D2 Canada: Model 7265D2W, IC: 1000M-7265D2 Japan: Model 7265D2W:

Korea: Model 7265D2W, MSIP-CRM-INT-7265D2W Taiwan: Model 7265D2W, regs.htm[12/16/2014 4:29:05 PM]

Regulatory Information China: Model 7265D2W, CMIIT ID: 2014AJ3467 (M) Australia: Model 7265D2W, Due to the very small size of the 17265NGW/13100NGW, the marking has been placed in this user manual because the product label on the device is considered too small to be readable. Singapore: Model 17265NGW/13100NGW:

INFORMATION FOR OEMs and HOST INTEGRATORS The guidelines described within this document are provided to OEM integrators installing Intel wireless adapters in notebook and tablet PC host platforms. Adherence to these requirements is necessary to meet the conditions of compliance with FCC rules, including RF exposure. When all antenna type and placement guidelines described herein are fulfilled the Intel wireless adapters may be incorporated into notebook and tablet PC host platforms with no further restrictions. If any of the guidelines described herein are not satisfied it may be necessary for the OEM or integrator to perform additional testing and/or obtain additional approval. The OEM or integrator is responsible to determine the required host regulatory testing and/or obtaining the required host approvals for compliance. Intel wireless adapters are intended for OEMs and host integrators only. The Intel wireless adapter FCC Grant of Authorization describes any limited conditions of modular approval. The Intel wireless adapters must be operated with an access point that has been approved for the country of operation. Changes or modification to Intel wireless adapters by OEMs, integrators or other third parties is not permitted. Any changes or modification to Intel wireless adapters by OEMs, integrators or other third parties will void authorization to operate the adapter. Antenna Type and Gains Only antennas of the same type and with equal or less gains as shown below may be used with the Intel wireless adapters. Other types of antennas and/or higher gain antennas may require additional authorization for operation. Antenna Type PIFA Antenna Location

(Main/Aux) Main regs.htm[12/16/2014 4:29:05 PM]

2.4GHz Peak Gain in dBi*

2.6GHz Peak Gain in dBi*

5.2GHz Peak Gain in dBi*

5.5GHz Peak Gain in dBi*

5.7GHz Peak Gain in dBi*

Regulatory Information Aux MIMO

*All antenna gains include cable loss. 3.24 3.47 3.73 4.77 4.77 Antenna Placement Within the Host Platform To ensure RF exposure compliance the antenna(s) used with the Intel wireless adapters must be installed in notebook or tablet PC host platforms to provide a minimum separation distance from all persons, in all operating modes and orientations of the host platform, with strict adherence to the table below. The antenna separation distance applies to both horizontal and vertical orientation of the antenna when installed in the host system. Intel Wireless Adapter Minimum required antenna-to-user separation distance Intel Centrino Wireless-N + WiMAX 6150 Intel Centrino Wireless-N + WiMAX 6350 18 mm 17 mm Simultaneous Transmission of Intel Wireless Adapters with Other Integrated or Plug-In Transmitters Based upon FCC Knowledge Database publication number 616217 when there are multiple transmitting devices installed in a host device, an RF exposure transmitting assessment shall be performed to determine the necessary application and test requirements. OEM integrators must identify all possible combinations of simultaneous transmission configurations for all transmitters and antennas installed in the host system. This includes transmitters installed in the host as mobile devices (>20 cm separation from user) and portable devices (<20 cm separation from user). OEM integrators should consult the actual FCC KDB 616217 document for all details in making this assessment to determine if any additional requirements for testing or FCC approval is necessary. Information To Be Supplied to the End User by the OEM or Integrator The following regulatory and safety notices must be published in documentation supplied to the end user of the product or system incorporating the Intel wireless adapter, in compliance with local regulations. Host system must be labeled with "Contains FCC ID: XXXXXXXX", FCC ID displayed on label. The Intel wireless adapter must be installed and used in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions as described in the user documentation that comes with the product. Intel Corporation is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by unauthorized modification of the devices included with the wireless adapter kit or the substitution or attachment of connecting cables and equipment other than that specified by Intel Corporation. The correction of interference caused by such unauthorized modification, substitution or attachment is the responsibility of the user. Intel Corporation and authorized resellers or distributors are not liable for any damage or violation of government regulations that may arise from the user failing to comply with these guidelines. Local Restriction of 802.11a, 802.11b, 802.11g, 802.11n, and 802.11e Radio Usage The following statement on local restrictions must be published as part of the compliance documentation for all 802.11a, 802.11b, 802.11g and 802.11n products. Caution: Due to the fact that the frequencies used by 802.11a, 802.11b, 802.11g, 802.11n, and 802.16e wireless LAN devices may not yet be harmonized in all countries, 802.11a, 802.11b, 802.11g, 802.11n, and 802.16e products are designed for use only in specific countries, and are not allowed to be operated in countries other than those of designated use. As a user of these products, you are responsible for ensuring that the products are used only in the countries for which they were intended and for verifying that they are configured with the correct selection of frequency and channel for the country of use. Any deviation from the permissible power and frequency settings for the country of use is an infringement of national law and may be punished as such. regs.htm[12/16/2014 4:29:05 PM]

Regulatory Information Intel WiFi Adapters, 802.11n Compliant The information in this section applies to the following products:

Intel Centrino Wireless-N 100 Intel Centrino Wireless-N 105 Intel Centrino Wireless-N 130 Intel Centrino Wireless-N 135 Intel Centrino Wireless-N 1000 Intel Centrino Wireless-N 1030 Intel Centrino Wireless-N 2200 Intel Centrino Wireless-N 2230 Intel Centrino Advanced-N 6200 Intel Centrino Advanced-N 6205 Intel Centrino Advanced-N 6230 Intel Centrino Advanced-N 6235 Intel Centrino Ultimate-N 6300 Intel Dual Band Wireless-AC 7260 Intel Dual Band Wireless-N 7260 Intel Wireless-N 7260 Intel Dual Band Wireless-AC 3160 Intel Dual Band Wireless-AC 3165 Intel Dual Band Wireless-AC 7265 Intel Dual Band Wireless-N 7265 Intel Wireless-N 7265 Intel Tri-Band Wireless-AC 17265 Intel Wireless Gigabit Sink W13100 See Specifications for complete wireless adapter specifications. NOTE: In this section, all references to the "wireless adapter" refer to all adapters listed above. The following information is provided:

Information for the User Regulatory Information Information for OEMs and Host Integrators Statements of European Compliance INFORMATION FOR THE USER Safety Notices USA FCC Radio Frequency Exposure The FCC with its action in ET Docket 96-8 has adopted a safety standard for human exposure to radio frequency (RF) electromagnetic energy emitted by FCC certified equipment. The wireless adapter meets the Human Exposure requirements found in FCC Part 2, 15C, 15E along with guidance from KDB 447498, KDB 248227 and KDB 616217. Proper operation of this radio according to the instructions found in this manual will result in exposure substantially below the FCCs recommended limits. The following safety precautions should be observed:

Do not touch or move antenna while the unit is transmitting or receiving. Do not hold any component containing the radio such that the antenna is very close or touching any exposed parts of the body, especially the face or eyes, while transmitting. Do not operate the radio or attempt to transmit data unless the antenna is connected; this behavior may cause damage to the radio. Use in specific environments:

The use of wireless adapters in hazardous locations is limited by the constraints posed by the safety regs.htm[12/16/2014 4:29:05 PM]

Regulatory Information directors of such environments. The use of wireless adapters on airplanes is governed by the Federal Aviation Administration (FAA). The use of wireless adapters in hospitals is restricted to the limits set forth by each hospital. Explosive Device Proximity Warning Warning: Do not operate a portable transmitter (including this wireless adapter) near unshielded blasting caps or in an explosive environment unless the transmitter has been modified to be qualified for such use. Antenna Warnings Warning: The wireless adapter is not designed for use with high-gain directional antennas. Use On Aircraft Caution Caution: Regulations of commercial airline operators may prohibit airborne operation of certain electronic devices equipped with radio-frequency wireless devices (wireless adapters) because their signals could interfere with critical aircraft instruments. Caution: 60 GHz/802.11ad equipment is not permitted on aircraft per FCC 15.255. OEM and host integrators should consider this FCC rule in host devices. Other Wireless Devices Safety Notices for Other Devices in the Wireless Network: See the documentation supplied with wireless adapters or other devices in the wireless network. Local Restrictions on 802.11a, 802.11b, 802.11d, 802.11g, 802.11n, and 802.11ac Radio Usage Caution: Due to the fact that the frequencies used by 802.11a, 802.11b, 802.11d, 802.11g, 802.11n, and 802.11ac wireless LAN devices may not yet be harmonized in all countries, 802.11a, 802.11b, 802.11d, 802.11g, 802.11n, and 802.11ac products are designed for use only in specific countries, and are not allowed to be operated in countries other than those of designated use. As a user of these products, you are responsible for ensuring that the products are used only in the countries for which they were intended and for verifying that they are configured with the correct selection of frequency and channel for the country of use. The device transmit power control (TPC) interface is part of the Intel PROSet/Wireless WiFi Connection Utility Software. Operational restrictions for Equivalent Isotropic Radiated Power (EIRP) are provided by the system manufacturer. Any deviation from the permissible power and frequency settings for the country of use is an infringement of national law and may be punished as such. Wireless Interoperability The wireless adapter is designed to be interoperable with other wireless LAN products that are based on direct sequence spread spectrum (DSSS) radio technology and to comply with the following standards:

IEEE Std. 802.11b compliant Standard on Wireless LAN IEEE Std. 802.11g compliant Standard on Wireless LAN IEEE Std. 802.11a compliant Standard on Wireless LAN IEEE Std. 802.11n compliant Standard on Wireless LAN IEEE Std. 802.11ac draft compliant on Wireless LAN Wireless Fidelity certification, as defined by the Wi-Fi Alliance The Wireless Adapter and Your Health The wireless adapter, like other radio devices, emits radio frequency electromagnetic energy. The level of energy emitted by the wireless adapter, however, is less than the electromagnetic energy emitted by other wireless devices such as mobile phones. The wireless adapter operates within the guidelines found in radio frequency safety standards and recommendations. These standards and recommendations reflect the consensus of the scientific regs.htm[12/16/2014 4:29:05 PM]

Regulatory Information community and result from deliberations of panels and committees of scientists who continually review and interpret the extensive research literature. In some situations or environments, the use of the wireless adapter may be restricted by the proprietor of the building or responsible representatives of the applicable organization. Examples of such situations may include:

Using the wireless adapter on board airplanes, or Using the wireless adapter in any other environment where the risk of interference with other devices or services is perceived or identified as being harmful. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of wireless adapters in a specific organization or environment (an airport, for example), you are encouraged to ask for authorization to use the adapter before you turn it on. REGULATORY INFORMATION USA - Federal Communications Commission (FCC) This wireless adapter is restricted to indoor use due to its operation in the 5.15 to 5.25 and 5.470 to 5.75GHz frequency ranges. No configuration controls are provided for Intel wireless adapters allowing any change in the frequency of operations outside the FCC grant of authorization for U.S. operation according to Part 15.407 of the FCC rules. Intel wireless adapters are intended for OEM integrators only. Intel wireless adapters cannot be co-located with any other transmitter unless approved by the FCC. This wireless adapter complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation of the device is subject to the following two conditions:

This device may not cause harmful interference. This device must accept any interference that may cause undesired operation. NOTE: The radiated output power of the adapter is far below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the adapter should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact during normal operation is minimized. To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, you should keep a distance of at least 20cm between you (or any other person in the vicinity), or the minimum separation distance as specified by the FCC grant conditions, and the antenna that is built into the computer. Details of the authorized configurations can be found at http://www.fcc.gov/oet/ea/

by entering the FCC ID number on the device. Class B Device Interference Statement This wireless adapter has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This wireless adapter generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If the wireless adapter is not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, the wireless adapter may cause harmful interference to radio communications. There is no guarantee, however, that such interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this wireless adapter does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception

(which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on), the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by taking one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna of the equipment experiencing the interference. Increase the distance between the wireless adapter and the equipment experiencing the interference. Connect the computer with the wireless adapter to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the equipment experiencing the interference is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. NOTE: The adapter must be installed and used in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions as described in the user documentation that comes with the product. Any other installation or use will violate FCC Part 15 regulations. regs.htm[12/16/2014 4:29:05 PM]

Regulatory Information Safety Approval Considerations This device has been safety approved as a component and is for use only in complete equipment where the acceptability of the combination is determined by the appropriate safety agencies. When installed, consideration must be given to the following:

It must be installed into a compliant host device meeting the requirement of UL/EN/IEC 60950-1 2nd edition including the general provisions of enclosure design 1.6.2 and specifically paragraph 1.2.6.2 (Fire Enclosure). The device shall be supplied by a SELV source when installed in the end-use equipment. A heating test shall be considered in the end-use product for meeting the requirement of UL/EN/IEC 60950-1 2nd edition. Low Halogen Applies only to brominated and chlorinated flame retardants (BFRs/CFRs) and PVC in the final product. Intel components as well as purchased components on the finished assembly meet JS-709 requirements, and the PCB /

substrate meet IEC 61249-2-21 requirements. The replacement of halogenated flame retardants and/or PVC may not be better for the environment. Canada Industry Canada (IC) This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Cet appareil se conforme aux normes Canada d'Industrie de RSS permis-exempt. L'utilisation est assujetti aux deux conditions suivantes: (1) cet appareil ne peut pas causer d'interfrences, et (2) cet appareil doit accepter des interfrences , y compris des interfrences qui peuvent causer desoprations non dsires de l'appareil. Caution: When using IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use due to its operation in the 5.15- to 5.25-GHz frequency range. Industry Canada requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15GHz to 5.25GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. High power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-GHz and 5.65 to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. The maximum allowed antenna gain for use with this device is 6dBi in order to comply with the E.I.R.P limit for the 5.25- to 5.35 and 5.725 to 5.85GHz frequency range in point-to-point operation. To comply with RF exposure requirements all antennas should be located at a minimum distance of 20cm, or the minimum separation distance allowed by the module approval, from the body of all persons. Attention: l'utilisation d'un rseau sans fil IEEE802.11a est restreinte une utilisation en intrieur cause du fonctionnement dans la bande de frquence 5.15-5.25 GHz. Industry Canada requiert que ce produit soit utilis l'intrieur des btiments pour la bande de frquence 5.15-5.25 GHz afin de rduire les possibilits d'interfrences nuisibles aux canaux co-existants des systmes de transmission satellites. Les radars de puissances ont fait l'objet d'une allocation primaire de frquences dans les bandes 5.25-5.35 GHz et 5.65-5.85 GHz. Ces stations radar peuvent crer des interfrences avec ce produit et/ou lui tre nuisible. Le gain d'antenne maximum permissible pour une utilisation avec ce produit est de 6 dBi afin d'tre conforme aux limites de puissance isotropique rayonne quivalente (P.I.R.E.) applicable dans les bandes 5.25-5.35 GHz et 5.725-5.85 GHz en fonctionnement point--

point. Pour se conformer aux conditions d'exposition de RF toutes les antennes devraient tre localises une distance minimum de 20 cm, ou la distance de sparation minimum permise par l'approbation du module, du corps de toutes les personnes. Under Industry Canada regulations, this radio transmitter may only operate using an antenna of a type and maximum (or lesser) gain approved for the transmitter by Industry Canada. To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated power

(e.i.r.p.) is not more than that necessary for successful communication. Selon les rglements de Canada d'Industrie, cet metteur de radio peut seulement fonctionner en utilisant une antenne du type et de gain maximum (ou moindre) que le gain approuv pour l'metteur par Canada d'Industrie. Pour rduire lesinterfrences radio potentielles avec les autres utilisateurs, le type d'antenne et son gain devraient regs.htm[12/16/2014 4:29:05 PM]

Regulatory Information tre choisis de faon ce que la puissance isotrope rayonne quivalente(P.I.R.E.) ne soit pas suprieure celle qui est ncessaire pour une communication russie. European Union The low band 5.15 - 5.35GHz is for indoor use only. This equipment complies with the essential requirements of the European Union directive 1999/5/EC. See Statements of European Union Compliance. European Union Declarations of Conformity To view the European Union Declaration of Conformity for your adapter, perform these steps. 1. Open this web site: http://developer.intel.com/design/litcentr/ce_docs/index.htm. 2. Under the Wireless Products menu select your adapter. 3. Click Go. To view additional regulatory information for your adapter, perform these steps:

1. Open this web site: http://www.intel.com/support/wireless/wlan/

2. Click on the link for your adapter. 3. Click Document and Guides. 4. Under Regulatory Information, click Regulatory documents for your adapter. Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment Directive (WEEE) Restriction of Hazardous Substances Directive (RoHS) Compliant All products described herein are compliant with the European Union's RoHS Directive. For CE Mark-Related Questions related to the wireless adapter, contact:

Intel Corporation Attn: Corporate Quality 2200 Mission College Blvd. Santa Clara, CA 95054-1549 USA Japan 5GHz Korea

. 5150-5250MHz . Mexico La operacin de este equipo est sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2) este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la regs.htm[12/16/2014 4:29:05 PM]

Regulatory Information que pueda causar su operacin no deseada. Morocco The operation of this product in the radio channel 2 (2417 MHz) is not authorized in the following cities: Agadir, Assa-Zag, Cabo Negro, Chaouen, Goulmima, Oujda, Tan Tan, Taourirt, Taroudant and Taza. The operation of this product in the radio channels 4, 5, 6 et 7 (2425 - 2442 MHz) is not authorized in the following cities: Aroport Mohamed V, Agadir, Aguelmous, Anza, Benslimane, Bni Hafida, Cabo Negro, Casablanca, Fs, Lakbab, Marrakech, Merchich, Mohammdia, Rabat, Sal, Tanger, Tan Tan, Taounate, Tit Mellil, Zag. Pakistan

"PTA APPROVED MODEL"

Taiwan 5.25-5.35 Singapore Radio Approvals To determine whether you are allowed to use your wireless network device in a specific country, please check to see if the radio type number that is printed on the identification label of your device is listed in the manufacturer's OEM Regulatory Guidance document. Modular Regulatory Certification Country Markings regs.htm[12/16/2014 4:29:05 PM]

Regulatory Information A list of countries requiring regulatory markings is available. Note that the lists include only countries requiring marking but not all certified countries. To find the regulatory country marking information for your adapter, perform these steps:

1. Open this web site: http://www.intel.com/support/wireless/wlan/

2. Click on the link for your adapter. 3. Click Document and Guides 4. Under Regulatory Information, click Regulatory documents for your adapter. Regulatory ID Due to the very small size of the 7265D2W (12x16), the marking has been placed in this user manual because the product label on the device is considered too small to be readable. USA: Model 7265D2W, FCC ID: PD97265D2 Canada: Model 7265D2W, IC: 1000M-7265D2 Japan: Model 7265D2W:

Korea: Model 7265D2W, MSIP-CRM-INT-7265D2W Taiwan: Model 7265D2W, China: Model 7265D2W, CMIIT ID: 2014AJ3467 (M) Australia: Model 7265D2W, Due to the very small size of the 17265NGW/13100NGW, the marking has been placed in this user manual because the product label on the device is considered too small to be readable. Singapore: Model 17265NGW/13100NGW:

regs.htm[12/16/2014 4:29:05 PM]

Regulatory Information INFORMATION FOR OEMS and HOST INTEGRATORS The guidelines described within this document are provided to OEM integrators installing Intel wireless adapters in notebook and tablet PC host platforms. Adherence to these requirements is necessary to meet the conditions of compliance with FCC rules, including RF exposure. When all antenna type and placement guidelines described herein are fulfilled the Intel wireless adapters may be incorporated into notebook and tablet PC host platforms with no further restrictions. If any of the guidelines described herein are not satisfied it may be necessary for the OEM or integrator to perform additional testing and/or obtain additional approval. The OEM or integrator is responsible to determine the required host regulatory testing and/or obtaining the required host approvals for compliance. Intel wireless adapters are intended for OEMs and host integrators only. The Intel wireless adapter FCC Grant of Authorization describes any limited conditions of modular approval. The Intel wireless adapters must be operated with an access point that has been approved for the country of operation. Changes or modification to Intel wireless adapters by OEMs, integrators or other third parties is not permitted. Any changes or modification to Intel wireless adapters by OEMs, integrators or other third parties will void authorization to operate the adapter. Antenna Type and Gains Only antennas of the same type and with equal or less gains as shown below may be used with the Intel wireless adapters. Other types of antennas and/or higher gain antennas may require additional authorization for operation. Antenna Type PIFA Antenna Location

(Main/Aux) 2.4GHz Peak Gain in dBi*

2.6GHz Peak Gain in dBi*

5.2GHz Peak Gain in dBi*

5.5GHz Peak Gain in dBi*

5.7GHz Peak Gain in dBi*

Main Aux MIMO 3.24 3.47 3.73 4.77 4.77

*All antenna gains include cable loss. Antenna Placement Within the Host Platform To ensure RF exposure compliance the antenna(s) used with the Intel wireless adapters must be installed in notebook or tablet PC host platforms to provide a minimum separation distance from all persons, in all operating modes and orientations of the host platform, with strict adherence to the table below. The antenna separation distance applies to both horizontal and vertical orientation of the antenna when installed in the host system. Wireless Adapter Intel Centrino Wireless-N 100 Intel Centrino Wireless-N 105 Intel Centrino Wireless-N 130 Intel Centrino Wireless-N 135 Intel Centrino Wireless-N 1000*

Intel Centrino Wireless-N 1030 Intel Centrino Wireless-N 2200 Intel Centrino Wireless-N 2230 Intel Centrino Advanced-N 6200*

Intel Centrino Advanced-N 6205 Minimum required antenna-to-user separation distance 9 mm 9 mm 8 mm 9 mm 20 mm 8 mm 9 mm 6 mm 20 mm 12 mm regs.htm[12/16/2014 4:29:05 PM]

Regulatory Information Intel Centrino Advanced-N 6230 Intel Centrino Advanced-N 6235 Intel Centrino Ultimate-N 6300 Intel Dual Band Wireless-AC 7260 Intel Dual Band Wireless-N 7260 Intel Wireless-N 7260 Intel Dual Band Wireless-AC 3160 Intel Dual Band Wireless-AC 3165 Intel Dual Band Wireless-AC 7265 Intel Dual Band Wireless-N 7265 Intel Wireless-N 7265 Intel Tri-Band Wireless-AC 17265

* This wireless adapter may be installed in mobile devices only

(requires > 20 cm antenna separation from the body of user). 12 mm 8 mm 13 mm 8 mm 8 mm 8 mm 8 mm 8 mm 8 mm 8 mm 8 mm 8 mm For WiFi/Bluetooth combination adapters it is recommended that a 5 cm separation distance between transmitting antennas be provided within the host system to maintain an adequate separation ratio for simultaneous WiFi and Bluetooth transmission. For less than 5 cm separation the separation ratio must be verified according to FCC publication KDB 447498 for the specific adapter. Additional regulatory authorization process may be required if wishing to place the 60 GHz/802.11ad RFEM (antenna array) closer than 20 cm to the user. Simultaneous Transmission of Intel Wireless Adapters with Other Integrated or Plug-In Transmitters Based upon FCC Knowledge Database publication number 616217, when there are multiple transmitting devices installed in a host device, an RF exposure transmitting assessment shall be performed to determine the necessary application and test requirements. OEM integrators must identify all possible combinations of simultaneous transmission configurations for all transmitters and antennas installed in the host system. This includes transmitters installed in the host as mobile devices (>20 cm separation from user) and portable devices (<20 cm separation from user). OEM integrators should consult the actual FCC KDB 616217 document for all details in making this assessment to determine if any additional requirements for testing or FCC approval is necessary. Information To Be Supplied to the End User by the OEM or Integrator The following regulatory and safety notices must be published in documentation supplied to the end user of the product or system incorporating the Intel wireless adapter, in compliance with local regulations. Host system must be labeled with "Contains FCC ID: XXXXXXXX", FCC ID displayed on label. The wireless adapter must be installed and used in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions as described in the user documentation that comes with the product. For country-specific approvals, see Radio Approvals. Intel Corporation is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by unauthorized modification of the devices included with the wireless adapter kit or the substitution or attachment of connecting cables and equipment other than that specified by Intel Corporation. The correction of interference caused by such unauthorized modification, substitution or attachment is the responsibility of the user. Intel Corporation and authorized resellers or distributors are not liable for any damage or violation of government regulations that may arise from the user failing to comply with these guidelines. Local Restriction of 802.11a, 802.11b, 802.11g, 802.11n, and 802.11ad Radio Usage The following statement on local restrictions must be published as part of the compliance documentation for all regs.htm[12/16/2014 4:29:05 PM]

Regulatory Information 802.11a, 802.11b, 802.11g, 802.11n, and 802.11ad products. Caution: Due to the fact that the frequencies used by 802.11a, 802.11b, 802.11g, 802.11n, and 802.11ad wireless LAN devices may not yet be harmonized in all countries, 802.11a, 802.11b, 802.11g and 802.11n products are designed for use only in specific countries, and are not allowed to be operated in countries other than those of designated use. As a user of these products, you are responsible for ensuring that the products are used only in the countries for which they were intended and for verifying that they are configured with the correct selection of frequency and channel for the country of use. Any deviation from permissible settings and restrictions in the country of use could be an infringement of national law and may be punished as such. Statements of European Compliance Each of the adapters listed below comply with the essential requirements of the European Union directive 1999/5/EC. Intel Centrino Wireless-N 100 Intel Centrino Wireless-N 105 Intel Centrino Wireless-N 130 Intel Centrino Wireless-N 135 Intel Centrino Wireless-N 1000 Intel Centrino Wireless-N 1030 Intel Centrino Wireless-N 2200 Intel Centrino Wireless-N 2230 Intel Centrino Advanced-N 6200 Intel Centrino Advanced-N 6205 Intel Centrino Advanced-N 6230 Intel Centrino Advanced-N 6235 Intel Centrino Ultimate-N 6300 Intel Dual Band Wireless-AC 7260 Intel Dual Band Wireless-N 7260 Intel Wireless-N 7260 Intel Dual Band Wireless-AC 3160 Intel Dual Band Wireless-AC 3165 Intel Dual Band Wireless-AC 7265 Intel Dual Band Wireless-N 7265 Intel Wireless-N 7265 Intel Tri-Band Wireless-AC 17265 Intel Wireless Gigabit Sink W13100 Back to Top Back to Contents Trademarks and Disclaimers regs.htm[12/16/2014 4:29:05 PM]

Specifications Back to Contents Specifications This section provides specification information for the family of Intel wireless adapters. The following list may not be all inclusive. Intel Centrino Wireless-N 100 Intel Centrino Wireless-N 105 Intel Centrino Wireless-N 130 Intel Centrino Wireless-N 135 Intel Centrino Wireless-N 1000 Intel Centrino Wireless-N 1030 Intel Centrino Wireless-N 2200 Intel Centrino Wireless-N 2230 Intel Centrino Wireless-N + WiMAX 6150 Intel Centrino Advanced-N 6200 Intel Centrino Advanced-N 6205 Intel Centrino Advanced-N 6230 Intel Centrino Advanced-N 6235 Intel Centrino Advanced-N + WiMAX 6250 Intel Centrino Ultimate-N 6300 Intel Dual Band Wireless-AC 7260 Intel Dual Band Wireless-N 7260 Intel Wireless-N 7260 Intel Dual Band Wireless-AC 3160 Intel Dual Band Wireless-AC 3165 Intel Dual Band Wireless-AC 7265 Intel Dual Band Wireless-N 7265 Intel Wireless-N 7265 Intel Tri-Band Wireless-AC 17265 Intel Wireless Gigabit Sink W13100 Intel Centrino Wireless-N 100, Intel Centrino Wireless-N 105, Intel Centrino Wireless-N 130 and Intel Centrino Wireless-N 135 Form Factor Dimensions PCI Express* Half-Mini Card Half-Mini Card: Width 1.049 in x Length 1.18 in x Height 0.18 in (26.64 mm x 30 mm x 4.5 mm) Hirose U.FL-R-SMT mates with cable connector U.FL-LP-066 On-board diversity 3.3 V 0 to +80 degrees Celsius Antenna Interface Connector Antenna Diversity Connector Interface 52-pin Mini Card edge connector Voltage Operating Temperature Humidity WiFi Frequency Modulation Frequency band Modulation 50% to 95% non-condensing (at temperatures of 25 C to 35 C) 2.4 GHz (802.11b/g/n) 2.400 - 2.4835 GHz (dependent on country) BPSK, QPSK, 16 QAM, 64 QAM CCK, DQPSK, DBPSK specs.htm[12/16/2014 4:29:07 PM]

Wi-Fi Alliance*

certification Cisco Compatible Extensions certification IEEE Feature Sets Architecture Security Product Safety Specifications Wireless Medium Channels IEEE 802.11n Data Rates IEEE 802.11g Data Rates IEEE 802.11b Data Rates Bluetooth Support 2.4 GHz ISM: Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) All channels as defined by the relevant specification and country rules. MIMO Configuration: 1X1 Tx/Rx: 150, 144, 135, 130, 120, 117, 115.5, 90, 86.667, 72.2, 65, 60, 57.8, 45, 43.3, 30, 28.9, 21.7, 15, 14.4, 7.2 Mbps 54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 12, 9, 6 Mbps 11, 5.5, 2, 1 Mbps Intel Centrino Wireless-N 100: None Intel Centrino Wireless-N 105: None Intel Centrino Wireless-N 130: Bluetooth 2.1, 2.1 + EDR, 3.0, 3.0+HS Intel Centrino Wireless-N 135: Bluetooth 4.0 (Bluetooth Low-Energy and Bluetooth 3.0 +HS) General Operating Systems Windows* 7 (32-bit and 64-bit), Windows* 8 (32-bit and 64-bit), Windows* 8.1 (32-bit and 64-bit) Wi-Fi* certification for 802.11b, 802.11g, 802.11n, WPA-Personal, WPA-Enterprise, WPA2-

Personal, WPA2-Enterprise, WMM, WPS Cisco Compatible Extensions, v4.0 IEEE 802.11b, 802.11g, 802.11n, 802.11e, 802.11i, 802.11d, 802.11h Infrastructure or ad hoc (peer-to-peer) operating modes WPA-Personal, WPA2-Personal, WPA-Enterprise, WPA2-Enterprise, AES-CCMP 128-bit, WEP 128-bit and 64-bit; 802.1X: EAP-SIM, LEAP, PEAP, TKIP, EAP-FAST, EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, EAP-

AKA UL, C-UL, CB (IEC/EN 60950-1) Intel Centrino Wireless-N 1000 WiFi / WiMAX Form Factor SKUs Dimensions Antenna Interface Connector Antenna Diversity Connector Interface Voltage Operating Temperature Humidity WiFi Frequency Modulation specs.htm[12/16/2014 4:29:07 PM]

PCI Express* Mini Card and Half-Mini Card Intel Centrino Wireless-N 1000 - 1X2 MC/HMC Mini Card: Width 2.0 in x Length 1.18 in x Height 0.18 in (50.80 mm x 30 mm x 4.5 mm) Half-Mini Card: Width 1.049 in x Length 1.18 in x Height 0.18 in (26.64 mm x 30 mm x 4.5 mm) Hirose U.FL-R-SMT mates with cable connector U.FL-LP-066 On-board diversity 52-pin Mini Card edge connector 3.3 V 0 to +80 degrees Celsius 50% to 90% non-condensing (at temperatures of 25 C to 35 C) 2.4 GHz (802.11b/g/n) Specifications Frequency band Modulation Wireless Medium Channels IEEE 802.11n Data Rates 300, 270, 243, 240, 180, 150, 144, 135, 130, 120, 117, 115.5, 90, 86.667, 72.2, 65, 2.41-2.474 GHz (dependent on country) BPSK, QPSK, 16 QAM, 64 QAM, CCK, DQPSK, DBPSK 2.4 GHz ISM: Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) All channels as defined by the relevant specification and country rules. 60, 57.8, 45, 43.3, 30, 28.9, 21.7, 15, 14.4, 7.2 Mbps IEEE 802.11g Data Rates 54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 12, 9, 6 Mbps IEEE 802.11b Data Rates 11, 5.5, 2, 1 Mbps WiFi General Operating Systems Wi-Fi Alliance*

certification Cisco Compatible Extensions certification WLAN Standard Architecture Security Encryption Product Safety Microsoft Windows* XP (32 and 64 bit) and Windows Vista* (32 and 64 bit), Ubuntu Linux*

Wi-Fi* certification for 802.11b, 802.11g, 802.11n, WPA-Personal, WPA-Enterprise, WPA2-Personal, WPA2-Enterprise, WMM, WPS Cisco Compatible Extensions, v4.0 IEEE 802.11g, 802.11b, 802.11n, 802.11d, 802.11e, 802.11i, Infrastructure or ad hoc (peer-to-peer) operating modes WPA-Personal, WPA2-Personal, WPA-Enterprise, WPA2-Enterprise, 802.1X: EAP-SIM, LEAP, PEAP, EAP-FAST, EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, EAP-AKA AES-CCMP 128-bit, WEP 128-bit and 64-bit, CKIP, TKIP UL, C-UL, CB (IEC/EN 60950-1) Intel Centrino Wireless-N 2200 and Intel Centrino Wireless-N 2230 Form Factor Dimensions PCI Express* Half-Mini Card Half-Mini Card: Width 1.049 in x Length 1.18 in x Height 0.18 in (26.64 mm x 30 mm x 4.5 mm) Hirose U.FL-R-SMT mates with cable connector U.FL-LP-066 On-board diversity 3.3 V 0 to +80 degrees Celsius Antenna Interface Connector Antenna Diversity Connector Interface 52-pin Mini Card edge connector Voltage Operating Temperature Humidity WiFi Frequency Modulation Frequency band Modulation Wireless Medium Channels IEEE 802.11n Data Rates 50% to 95% non-condensing (at temperatures of 25 C to 35 C) 2.4 GHz (802.11b/g/n) 2.400 - 2.4835 GHz (dependent on country) BPSK, QPSK, 16 QAM, 64 QAM 2.4 GHz ISM: Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) All channels as defined by the relevant specification and country rules. MIMO Configuration: 2X2 CCK, DQPSK, DBPSK Tx/Rx: 300, 150, 144, 135, 130, 120, 117, 115.5, 90, 86.667, 72.2, 65, 60, 57.8, 45, 43.3, 30, 28.9, 21.7, 15, 14.4, 7.2 Mbps specs.htm[12/16/2014 4:29:07 PM]

Wi-Fi Alliance*

certification Cisco Compatible Extensions certification IEEE Feature Sets Architecture Security Product Safety Specifications IEEE 802.11g Data Rates IEEE 802.11b Data Rates Bluetooth Support 54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 12, 9, 6 Mbps 11, 5.5, 2, 1 Mbps Intel Centrino Wireless-N 2200: None Intel Centrino Wireless-N 2230: Bluetooth 4.0 (Bluetooth Low-Energy and Bluetooth 3.0 +HS) General Operating Systems Windows* 7 (32-bit and 64-bit), Windows* 8 (32-bit and 64-bit), Windows* 8.1 (32-bit and 64-bit) Wi-Fi* certification for 802.11b, 802.11g, 802.11n, WPA-Personal, WPA-Enterprise, WPA2-

Personal, WPA2-Enterprise, WMM, WPS Cisco Compatible Extensions, v4.0 IEEE 802.11b, 802.11g, 802.11n, 802.11e, 802.11i, 802.11d, 802.11h Infrastructure or ad hoc (peer-to-peer) operating modes WPA-Personal, WPA2-Personal, WPA-Enterprise, WPA2-Enterprise, AES-CCMP 128-bit, WEP 128-bit and 64-bit; 802.1X: EAP-SIM, LEAP, PEAP, TKIP, EAP-FAST, EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, EAP-

AKA UL, C-UL, CB (IEC/EN 60950-1) Intel Centrino Wireless-N 1030 and Intel Centrino Advanced-N 6230 Form Factor Dimensions Antenna Interface Connector Antenna Diversity Network Standards Connector Interface Voltage Operating Temperature Humidity WiFi Network Standards PCI Express* Half-Mini Card Half-Mini Card: Width 1.049 in x Length 1.18 in x Height 0.18 in (26.64 mm x 30 mm x 4.5 mm) Hirose U.FL-R-SMT mates with cable connector U.FL-LP-066 On-board diversity 802.11a/b/g/n (varies by adapter) and Bluetooth 3.0 + HS 52-pin Mini Card edge connector 3.3 V 0 to +80 degrees Celsius 50% to 95% non-condensing (at temperatures of 25 C to 35 C) Intel Centrino Wireless-N 1030: 802.11b/g/n Intel Centrino Advanced-N 6230: 802.11a/g/n 5 GHz (802.11a/n) Frequency Modulation Frequency band 5.15 GHz - 5.85 GHz (dependent on country) Modulation Wireless Medium BPSK, QPSK, 16 QAM, 64 QAM 5 GHz UNII: Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) 2.4 GHz (802.11b/g/n) 2.400 - 2.4835 GHz (dependent on country) CCK, DQPSK, DBPSK 2.4 GHz ISM: Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) specs.htm[12/16/2014 4:29:07 PM]

Specifications Channels IEEE 802.11n Data Rates IEEE 802.11a Data Rates IEEE 802.11g Data Rates IEEE 802.11b Data Rates Bluetooth General Operating Systems Wi-Fi Alliance*

certification All channels as defined by the relevant specification and country rules. Intel Centrino Advanced-N 6230:

Tx/Rx (Mbps): 300, 270, 243, 240, 216.7, 195, 180, 173.3, 150, 144, 135, 130, 120, 117, 115.5, 90, 86.667, 72.2, 65, 60, 57.8, 45, 43.3, 30, 28.9, 21.7, 15, 14.4, 7.2 Intel Centrino Wireless-N 1030:

Rx (Mbps): 300, 270, 243, 240, 180 Rx/Tx (Mbps): 150, 144, 135, 130, 120, 117, 115.5, 90, 86.667, 72.2, 65, 60, 57.8, 45, 43.3, 30, 28.9, 21.7, 15, 14.4, 7.2 54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 12, 9, 6 Mbps 54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 12, 9, 6 Mbps 11, 5.5, 2, 1 Mbps Bluetooth Version 3.0 + HS Microsoft Windows* XP (32-bit and 64-bit) Windows Vista* (32-bit and 64-bit) Windows* 7 (32-bit and 64-bit) Windows* 8 (32-bit and 64-bit) Windows* 8.1 (32-bit and 64-bit) Wi-Fi* certification for 802.11b, 802.11g, 802.11a, 802.11h, 802.11d, WPA-Personal, WPA-

Enterprise, WPA2-Personal, WPA2-Enterprise, WPS, WMM, WMM Power Save, EAP-SIM, LEAP, PEAP, TKIP, EAP-FAST, EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, EAP-AKA, P2P Cisco Compatible Extensions, v4.0 Cisco Compatible Extensions certification WLAN Standard IEEE 802.11g, 802.11b, 802.11a, 802.11n Architecture Security Infrastructure or ad hoc (peer-to-peer) operating modes WPA-Personal, WPA2-Personal, WPA-Enterprise, WPA2-Enterprise, AES-CCMP 128-bit, WEP 128-

bit and 64-bit; 802.1X: EAP-SIM, LEAP, PEAP, TKIP, EAP-FAST, EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, EAP-AKA Product Safety UL, C-UL, CB (IEC/EN 60950-1) Intel Centrino Advanced-N 6235 Form Factor Dimensions Antenna Interface Connector Antenna Diversity Network Standards Connector Interface Voltage PCI Express* Half-Mini Card Half-Mini Card: Width 1.049 in x Length 1.18 in x Height 0.18 in (26.64 mm x 30 mm x 4.5 mm) Hirose U.FL-R-SMT mates with cable connector U.FL-LP-066 On-board diversity 802.11a/b/g/n and Bluetooth 4.0 52-pin Mini Card edge connector 3.3 V specs.htm[12/16/2014 4:29:07 PM]

50% to 95% non-condensing (at temperatures of 25 C to 35 C) 5 GHz (802.11a/n) 2.4 GHz (802.11b/g/n) 2.400 - 2.4835 GHz (dependent on country) CCK, DQPSK, DBPSK BPSK, QPSK, 16 QAM, 64 QAM 2.4 GHz ISM: Orthogonal Frequency Division 5 GHz UNII: Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) Multiplexing (OFDM) All channels as defined by the relevant specification and country rules. Tx/Rx (Mbps): 300, 270, 243, 240, 216.7, 195, 180, 173.3, 150, 144, 135, 130, 120, 117, 115.5, 90, 86.667, 72.2, 65, 60, 57.8, 45, 43.3, 30, 28.9, 21.7, 15, 14.4, 7.2 54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 12, 9, 6 Mbps Specifications 0 to +80 degrees Celsius Operating Temperature Humidity Frequency Modulation Frequency band 5.15 GHz - 5.85 GHz (dependent on country) Modulation Wireless Medium Channels IEEE 802.11n Data Rates IEEE 802.11a Data Rates IEEE 802.11g Data Rates IEEE 802.11b Data Rates Bluetooth General Operating Systems Wi-Fi Alliance*

certification 54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 12, 9, 6 Mbps Bluetooth Version 4.0 (3.0 +HS ) 11, 5.5, 2, 1 Mbps Cisco Compatible Extensions certification WLAN Standard IEEE 802.11g, 802.11b, 802.11a, 802.11n Architecture Security Windows* 7 (32-bit and 64-bit), Windows* 8 (32-bit and 64-bit), Windows* 8.1 (32-bit and 64-

bit) Wi-Fi* certification for 802.11b, 802.11g, 802.11a, 802.11h, 802.11d, WPA-Personal, WPA-

Enterprise, WPA2-Personal, WPA2-Enterprise, WPS, WMM, WMM Power Save, EAP-SIM, LEAP, PEAP, TKIP, EAP-FAST, EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, EAP-AKA, P2P Cisco Compatible Extensions, v4.0 Infrastructure or ad hoc (peer-to-peer) operating modes WPA-Personal, WPA2-Personal, WPA-Enterprise, WPA2-Enterprise, AES-CCMP 128-bit, WEP 128-

bit and 64-bit; 802.1X: EAP-SIM, LEAP, PEAP, TKIP, EAP-FAST, EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, EAP-AKA Product Safety UL, C-UL, CB (IEC/EN 60950-1) Intel Centrino Advanced-N + WiMAX 6250 and Intel Centrino Wireless-N + WiMAX 6150 Form Factor Dimensions Antenna Interface Connector Antenna Diversity Connector Interface Voltage Operating PCI Express* Half-Mini Card Half-Mini Card: Width 1.049 in x Length 1.18 in x Height 0.18 in (26.64 mm x 30 mm x 4.5 mm) Hirose U.FL-R-SMT mates with cable connector U.FL-LP-066 On-board diversity 52-pin Mini Card edge connector 3.3 V 0 to +80 degrees Celsius specs.htm[12/16/2014 4:29:07 PM]

Specifications Temperature Humidity WiFi Frequency Modulation 50% to 95% non-condensing (at temperatures of 25 C to 35 C) Intel Centrino Advanced-N + WiMAX 6250 Intel Centrino Wireless-N + WiMAX 6150 2.4 GHz (802.11b/g/n), 5 GHz (802.11a/n) Frequency band 5.15 GHz - 5.85 GHz (dependent on country) Modulation Wireless Medium Channels IEEE 802.11n Data Rates 2.4 GHz (802.11b/g/n) 2.400 - 2.4835 GHz (dependent on country) CCK, DQPSK, DBPSK BPSK, QPSK, 16 QAM, 64 QAM 2.4 GHz ISM: Orthogonal Frequency Division 5 GHz UNII: Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) Multiplexing (OFDM) All channels as defined by the relevant specification and country rules. Intel Centrino Wireless-N + WiMAX 6150 MIMO Configuration: 1X2 Rx: 300, 270, 243, 240, 180 Mbps Rx/Tx: 150, 144, 135, 130, 120, 117, 115.5, 90, 86.667, 72.2, 65, 60, 57.8, 45, 43.3, 30, 28.9, 21.7, 15, 14.4, 7.2 Mbps Intel Centrino Advanced-N + WiMAX 6250 MIMO Configuration: 2X2 Tx/Rx: 300, 270, 243, 240, 180, 150, 144, 135, 130, 120, 117, 115.5, 90, 86.667, 72.2, 65, 60, 57.8, 45, 43.3, 30, 28.9, 21.7, 15, 14.4, 7.2 Mbps 54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 12, 9, 6 Mbps 54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 12, 9, 6 Mbps 11, 5.5, 2, 1 Mbps Microsoft Windows* XP (32-bit and 64-bit) Windows Vista* (32-bit and 64-bit) Windows* 7 (32-bit and 64-bit) Windows* 8 (32-bit and 64-bit) Windows* 8.1 (32-bit and 64-bit) Wi-Fi* certification for 802.11b, 802.11g, 802.11a, 802.11h, 802.11d, WPA-Personal, WPA-

Enterprise, WPA2-Personal, WPA2-Enterprise, WMM, WMM Power Save, EAP-SIM, LEAP, PEAP, TKIP, EAP-FAST, EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, EAP-AKA Cisco Compatible Extensions, v4.0 Intel Centrino Wireless-N + WiMAX 6150:

IEEE 802.11b, 802.11g, 802.11n, 802.11e, 802.11i, 802.11h, 802.11d Intel Centrino Advanced-N + WiMAX 6250:

802.11a, IEEE 802.11b, 802.11g, 802.11n, 802.11e, 802.11i, 802.11h, 802.11d Infrastructure or ad hoc (peer-to-peer) operating modes WPA-Personal, WPA2-Personal, WPA-Enterprise, WPA2-Enterprise, AES-CCMP 128-bit, WEP 128-

bit and 64-bit; 802.1X: EAP-SIM, LEAP, PEAP, TKIP, EAP-FAST, EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, EAP-AKA UL, C-UL, CB (IEC/EN 60950-1) IEEE 802.11a Data Rates IEEE 802.11g Data Rates IEEE 802.11b Data Rates General Operating Systems Wi-Fi Alliance*

certification Cisco Compatible Extensions certification IEEE Feature Sets Architecture Security Product Safety WiMAX specs.htm[12/16/2014 4:29:07 PM]

Specifications General Operating Systems Standard Compliance WiMAX System Profile Feature set Microsoft Windows* XP (32-bit and 64-bit) Windows Vista* (32-bit and 64-bit) Windows* 7 (32-bit and 64-bit) Windows* 8 (32-bit and 64-bit) Windows* 8.1 (32-bit and 64-bit) 802.16e-2005 Corrigenda 2 (D4) Intel Centrino Wireless-N + WiMAX 6150:

Mobile WiMAX release 1, Wave II. Supports 3A and 1A/B profiles Intel Centrino Advanced-N + WiMAX 6250:

Mobile WiMAX release 1, Wave II. Supports 3A, 5A/C, 1A/B, and 5BL profiles Key Management Protocol (PKMv2) 128-bit CCMP (Counter-Mode/CBC-MAC) based on AES encryption Security Encryption WiMAX Frequency band Intel Centrino Wireless-N + WiMAX 6150: 2.3-2.4 GHz / 2.496-2.690 GHz Modulation Wireless Medium WiMAX Network Release Feature set Rate Performance RF Transmitter Output Power Intel Centrino Advanced-N + WiMAX 6250: 2.3-2.4 GHz / 2.496-2.690 GHz / 3.4-3.8 GHz UL - QPSK, 16 QAM Scalable OFDMA (SOFDMA): 512 and 1024 FFT Intel Centrino Wireless-N + WiMAX 6150:

Channel bandwidths: 5 and 10 MHz Intel Centrino Advanced-N + WiMAX 6250:

Channel bandwidths: 5, 7, 8.75 and 10 MHz DL - QPSK, 16 QAM, 64 QAM Duplex mode: TDD operations sub-carrier permutation: PUSC SPWG/NWG Release 1.5 Intel Centrino Wireless-N + WiMAX 6150:

Up to 10 Mbps DL and 4 Mbps UL @ peak rate

(OTA performance, 10MHz channel) Intel Centrino Advanced-N + WiMAX 6250:

Up to 20 Mbps DL and 6 Mbps UL @ peak rate

(OTA performance, 10MHz channel) Compliance with Power class 2 Intel Centrino Advanced-N 6200, Intel Centrino Advanced-N 6205 and Intel Centrino Ultimate-N 6300 Form Factor Intel Centrino Advanced-N 6200, Intel Centrino Ultimate-N 6300:

PCI Express* Full-Mini Card and Half-Mini Card. Dimensions Antenna Interface Intel Centrino Advanced-N 6205: PCI Express* Half-Mini Card. Full-Mini Card: Width 2.00 in x Length 1.18 in x Height 0.18 in (50.95 mm x 30 mm x 4.5 mm) Half-Mini Card: Width 1.049 in x Length 1.18 in x Height 0.18 in (26.64 mm x 30 mm x 4.5 mm) Hirose U.FL-R-SMT mates with cable connector U.FL-LP-066 specs.htm[12/16/2014 4:29:07 PM]

Specifications On-board diversity 52-pin Mini Card edge connector 3.3 V 0 to +80 degrees Celsius Connector Antenna Diversity Connector Interface Voltage Operating Temperature Humidity Frequency Modulation Frequency band 5.15 GHz - 5.85 GHz (dependent on country) Modulation Wireless Medium Channels IEEE 802.11n Data Rates 50% to 95% non-condensing (at temperatures of 25 C to 35 C) 5 GHz (802.11a/n) 2.4 GHz (802.11b/g/n) 2.400 - 2.4835 GHz (dependent on country) CCK, DQPSK, DBPSK BPSK, QPSK, 16 QAM, 64 QAM 2.4 GHz ISM: Orthogonal Frequency Division 5 GHz UNII: Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) Multiplexing (OFDM) All channels as defined by the relevant specification and country rules. Intel Centrino Ultimate-N 6300:

Tx/Rx: 450, 405, 360, 300, 270, 243, 240, 216.7, 195, 180, 173.3, 150, 144, 135, 130, 120, 117, 115.5, 90, 86.667, 72.2, 65, 60, 57.8, 45, 43.3, 30, 28.9, 21.7, 15, 14.4, 7.2 Mbps Intel Centrino Advanced-N 6200, Intel Centrino Advanced-N 6205:

Tx/Rx: 300, 270, 243, 240, 180, 150, 144, 135, 130, 120, 117, 115.5, 90, 86.667, 72.2, 65, 60, 57.8, 45, 43.3, 30, 28.9, 21.7, 15, 14.4, 7.2 Mbps 54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 12, 9, 6 Mbps 54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 12, 9, 6 Mbps 11, 5.5, 2, 1 Mbps Microsoft Windows* XP (32-bit and 64-bit) Windows Vista* (32-bit and 64-bit) Windows* 7 (32-bit and 64-bit) Windows* 8 (32-bit and 64-bit) Windows* 8.1 (32-bit and 64-bit) Wi-Fi* certification for 802.11b, 802.11g, 802.11a, 802.11h, 802.11d, WPA-Personal, WPA-

Enterprise, WPA2-Personal, WPA2-Enterprise, WMM, WMM Power Save, EAP-SIM, LEAP, PEAP, TKIP, EAP-FAST, EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, EAP-AKA Cisco Compatible Extensions, v4.0 IEEE 802.11a Data Rates IEEE 802.11g Data Rates IEEE 802.11b Data Rates General Operating Systems Wi-Fi Alliance*

certification Cisco Compatible Extensions certification WLAN Standard IEEE 802.11g, 802.11b, 802.11a, 802.11n Architecture Security Infrastructure or ad hoc (peer-to-peer) operating modes WPA-Personal, WPA2-Personal, WPA-Enterprise, WPA2-Enterprise, AES-CCMP 128-bit, WEP 128-

bit and 64-bit; 802.1X: EAP-SIM, LEAP, PEAP, TKIP, EAP-FAST, EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, EAP-AKA UL, C-UL, CB (IEC/EN 60950-1) Product Safety Intel Dual Band Wireless-AC 7260 specs.htm[12/16/2014 4:29:07 PM]

Specifications Form Factors Electrical interfaces Antenna Interface Connector Antenna Diversity IEEE 802.11 Networking Standards Operating Temperature Humidity Frequency Modulation Frequency band Modulation Wireless Medium Channels Spatial streams Data Rates IEEE 802.11ac Data Rates IEEE 802.11n Data Rates IEEE 802.11a Data Rates IEEE 802.11g Data Rates IEEE 802.11b Data Rates Bluetooth General Operating Systems Wi-Fi Alliance*

certification Architecture Cisco Compatible Extensions certification Security Authentication Authentication Protocols Encryption Wi-Fi Direct*

Encryption and Authentication Product Safety specs.htm[12/16/2014 4:29:07 PM]

Half-Mini Card and M.2 (Next Generation Form Factor - NGFF) PCIe and USB 2.0 for both form factors Hirose U.FL-R-SMT mates with cable connector U.FL-LP-066 On-board diversity 802.11ac, 802.11abgn, 802.11d, 802.11e, 802.11i, 802.11h, 802.11w 0 to +80 degrees Celsius 50% to 95% non-condensing (at temperatures of 25 C to 35 C) 5GHz (802.11ac/n) 2.4GHz (802.11b/g/n) 5.15GHz - 5.85GHz (dependent on country) 2.400 - 2.4835GHz (dependent on country) BPSK, QPSK, 16 QAM, 64 QAM, 256 QAM 5GHz UNII: Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) All channels as defined by the relevant specification and country rules. Intel Dual Band Wireless-AC 7260: 2 X 2 All data rates are theoretical maximums. Intel Dual Band Wireless-AC 7260: Up to 867 Mbps CCK, DQPSK, DBPSK 2.4GHz ISM: Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) Tx/Rx (Mbps): 300, 270, 243, 240, 216.7, 195, 180, 173.3, 150, 144, 135, 130, 120, 117, 115.5, 90, 86.667, 72.2, 65, 60, 57.8, 45, 43.3, 30, 28.9, 21.7, 15, 14.4, 7.2 54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 12, 9, 6 Mbps 54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 12, 9, 6 Mbps 11, 5.5, 2, 1 Mbps Dual Mode Bluetooth* 2.1, 2.1+EDR, 3.0, 3.0+HS, 4.0 (BLE) Windows* 7 (32-bit and 64-bit), Windows* 8 (32-bit and 64-bit), Windows* 8.1 (64-bit) Wi-Fi CERTIFIED* for 802.11ac, a/b/g, n, WMM*, WPA*, WPA2*, and WPS, WPS 2.0, Protected Management Frames. Wi-Fi Direct* for peer-to-peer device connections. Infrastructure and SoftAP; Supports simultaneous Client and SoftAP modes Cisco Compatible Extensions, v4.0 WPA and WPA2, 802.1X (EAP-TLS, TTLS, PEAP, LEAP, EAP-FAST), EAP-SIM, EAP-AKA PAP, CHAP, TLS, GTC, MS-CHAP*, MS-CHAPv2 64-bit and 128-bit WEP, AES-CCMP, TKIP WPA2, AES-CCMP UL, C-UL, CB (IEC/EN 60950-1) Specifications Intel Dual Band Wireless-N 7260 Intel Wireless-N 7260 Half-Mini Card, M.2 (Next Generation Form Factor - NGFF) PCIe, USB 2.0 for both form factors Hirose U.FL-R-SMT mates with cable connector U.FL-LP-066 Form Factors Electrical interfaces Antenna Interface Connector Antenna Diversity On-board diversity IEEE 802.11 Networking Standards Intel Dual Band Wireless-N 7260 Model 7260HMW AN - 802.11agn, 2x2, Bluetooth 4.0, PCIe, USB, HMC Model 7260NGW AN - 802.11agn, 2x2, Bluetooth 4.0, PCIe, USB, M.2 Model 7260HMW NB - 802.11agn, 2x2, PCIe, USB, HMC Model 7260NGW NB - 802.11agn, 2x2, PCIe, USB, M.2 Intel Wireless-N 7260 Model 7260HMW BN - 802.11agn, 2x2, PCIe, USB, M.2 Model 7260NGW BN - 802.11bgn, 2x2, Bluetooth 4.0, PCIe, USB, M.2 0 to +80 degrees Celsius 50% to 95% non-condensing (at temperatures of 25 C to 35 C) 5GHz (802.11a/n) 2.4GHz (802.11b/g/n) 5.15GHz - 5.85GHz

(dependent on country) BPSK, QPSK, 16 QAM, 64 QAM 2.400 - 2.4835GHz (dependent on country) CCK, DQPSK, DBPSK Operating Temperature Humidity Frequency Modulation

(See above, not all bands supported by all adapters) Frequency band Modulation Wireless Medium 5GHz UNII: Orthogonal 2.4GHz ISM: Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) All channels as defined by the relevant specification and country rules. All adapters: 2 X 2 spatial streams All data rates are theoretical maximums. Tx/Rx (Mbps): 300, 270, 243, 240, 216.7, 195, 180, 173.3, 150, 144, 135, 130, 120, 117, 115.5, 90, 86.667, 72.2, 65, 60, 57.8, 45, 43.3, 30, 28.9, 21.7, 15, 14.4, 7.2 54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 12, 9, 6 Mbps 54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 12, 9, 6 Mbps 11, 5.5, 2, 1 Mbps Dual Mode Bluetooth* 2.1, 2.1+EDR, 3.0, 3.0+HS, 4.0 (BLE) supported by the following adapters Channels 802.11n spatial streams Data Rates IEEE 802.11n Data Rates IEEE 802.11a Data Rates IEEE 802.11g Data Rates IEEE 802.11b Data Rates Bluetooth specs.htm[12/16/2014 4:29:07 PM]

Specifications Model 7260HMW AN Model 7260NGW AN Model 7260NGW BN General Operating Systems Wi-Fi Alliance*

certification Architecture Cisco Compatible Extensions certification Security Authentication Authentication Protocols Encryption Wi-Fi Direct*

Encryption and Authentication Product Safety Windows* 7 (32-bit and 64-bit), Windows 8 (32-bit and 64-bit), Windows* 8.1 (64-bit) Wi-Fi CERTIFIED* for 802.11ac, a/b/g, n, WMM*, WPA*, WPA2*, and WPS, WPS 2.0, Protected Management Frames. Wi-Fi Direct* for peer-to-peer device connections. Infrastructure and SoftAP; Supports simultaneous Client and SoftAP modes Cisco Compatible Extensions, v4.0 WPA and WPA2, 802.1X (EAP-TLS, TTLS, PEAP, LEAP, EAP-FAST), EAP-SIM, EAP-AKA PAP, CHAP, TLS, GTC, MS-CHAP*, MS-CHAPv2 64-bit and 128-bit WEP, AES-CCMP, TKIP WPA2, AES-CCMP UL, C-UL, CB (IEC/EN 60950-1) Intel Dual Band Wireless-AC 3160 Half-Mini Card and M.2 (Next Generation Form Factor - NGFF) PCIe and USB 2.0 for both form factors Hirose U.FL-R-SMT mates with cable connector U.FL-LP-066 On-board diversity 802.11ac, 802.11abgn, 802.11d, 802.11e, 802.11i, 802.11h, 802.11w Form Factors Electrical interfaces Antenna Interface Connector Antenna Diversity IEEE 802.11 Networking Standards Operating Temperature 0 to +80 degrees Celsius Humidity Frequency Modulation Frequency band Modulation Wireless Medium 50% to 90% non-condensing (at temperatures of 25 C to 35 C) 5GHz (802.11ac/n) 2.4GHz (802.11b/g/n) 5.15GHz - 5.85GHz (dependent on country) 2.400 - 2.4835GHz (dependent on country) BPSK, QPSK, 16 QAM, 64 QAM, 256 QAM 5GHz UNII: Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) All channels as defined by the relevant specification and country rules. Intel Dual Band Wireless-AC 3160: 1 X 1 All data rates are theoretical maximums. Intel Dual Band Wireless-AC 3160: Up to 433 Mbps CCK, DQPSK, DBPSK 2.4GHz ISM: Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) Tx/Rx (Mbps): 150, 144, 135, 130, 120, 117, 115.5, 90, 86.667, 72.2, 65, 60, 57.8, 45, 43.3, 30, 28.9, 21.7, 15, 14.4, 7.2 54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 12, 9, 6 Mbps Channels Spatial streams Data Rates IEEE 802.11ac Data Rates IEEE 802.11n Data Rates IEEE 802.11a Data Rates specs.htm[12/16/2014 4:29:07 PM]

Specifications IEEE 802.11g Data Rates IEEE 802.11b Data Rates Bluetooth General Operating Systems Wi-Fi Alliance*

certification Architecture Cisco Compatible Extensions certification Security Authentication Authentication Protocols Encryption Wi-Fi Direct*

Encryption and Authentication Product Safety 54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 12, 9, 6 Mbps 11, 5.5, 2, 1 Mbps Dual Mode Bluetooth* 2.1, 2.1+EDR, 3.0, 3.0+HS, 4.0 (BLE) Windows* 7 (32-bit and 64-bit), Windows 8 (32-bit and 64-bit), Windows* 8.1 (64-bit) Wi-Fi CERTIFIED* for 802.11ac, a/b/g, n, WMM*, WPA*, WPA2*, and WPS, WPS 2.0, Protected Management Frames. Wi-Fi Direct* for peer-to-peer device connections. Infrastructure and SoftAP; Supports simultaneous Client and SoftAP modes Cisco Compatible Extensions, v4.0 WPA and WPA2, 802.1X (EAP-TLS, TTLS, PEAP, LEAP, EAP-FAST), EAP-SIM, EAP-AKA PAP, CHAP, TLS, GTC, MS-CHAP*, MS-CHAPv2 64-bit and 128-bit WEP, AES-CCMP, TKIP WPA2, AES-CCMP UL, C-UL, CB (IEC/EN 60950-1) Intel Dual Band Wireless-AC 3165 (Model 3165NGW) Form Factors Electrical interfaces Antenna Interface Connector Antenna Diversity IEEE 802.11 Networking Standards M.2 (Next Generation Form Factor - NGFF) PCIe and USB 2.0 Hirose U.FL-R-SMT mates with cable connector U.FL-LP-066 On-board diversity 802.11abgn, 802.11ac, 802.11d, 802.11e, 802.11i, 802.11h, 802.11w Operating Temperature 0 to +80 degrees Celsius Humidity Frequency Modulation Frequency band Modulation Wireless Medium 50% to 90% RH non-condensing (at temperatures of 25 C to 35 C) 5GHz (802.11ac/n) 2.4GHz (802.11b/g/n) 5.15GHz - 5.85GHz (dependent on country) 2.400 - 2.4835GHz (dependent on country) BPSK, QPSK, 16 QAM, 64 QAM, 256 QAM 5GHz UNII: Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) All channels as defined by the relevant specification and country rules. Intel Dual Band Wireless-AC 3165: 1 X 1 All data rates are theoretical maximums. Intel Dual Band Wireless-AC 3165: Up to 433 Mbps CCK, DQPSK, DBPSK 2.4GHz ISM: Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) Tx/Rx (Mbps): 150, 144, 135, 130, 120, 117, 115.5, 90, 86.667, 72.2, 65, 60, 57.8, 45, 43.3, 30, 28.9, 21.7, 15, 14.4, 7.2 Channels Spatial streams Data Rates IEEE 802.11ac Data Rates IEEE 802.11n Data Rates specs.htm[12/16/2014 4:29:07 PM]

Specifications IEEE 802.11a Data Rates IEEE 802.11g Data Rates IEEE 802.11b Data Rates Bluetooth General Operating Systems Wi-Fi Alliance*

certification Architecture Cisco Compatible Extensions certification Security Authentication Authentication Protocols Encryption Wi-Fi Direct*

Encryption and Authentication Product Safety 54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 12, 9, 6 Mbps 54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 12, 9, 6 Mbps 11, 5.5, 2, 1 Mbps Dual Mode Bluetooth* 2.1, 2.1+EDR, 3.0, 3.0+HS, 4.0 (BLE) Windows* 7 (32-bit and 64-bit), Windows* 8 (32-bit and 64-bit), Windows* 8.1 (64-bit) Wi-Fi CERTIFIED* for 802.11ac, a/b/g, n, WMM*, WPA*, WPA2*, and WPS, WPS 2.0, Protected Management Frames. Wi-Fi Direct* for peer-to-peer device connections. Infrastructure and SoftAP; Supports simultaneous Client and SoftAP modes Cisco Compatible Extensions, v4.0 WPA and WPA2, 802.1X (EAP-TLS, TTLS, PEAP, LEAP, EAP-FAST), EAP-SIM, EAP-AKA PAP, CHAP, TLS, GTC, MS-CHAP*, MS-CHAPv2 64-bit and 128-bit WEP, AES-CCMP, TKIP WPA2, AES-CCMP UL, C-UL, CB (IEC/EN 60950-1) Intel Dual Band Wireless-AC 7265 (Model 7265NGW) Form Factors Electrical interfaces Antenna Interface Connector Antenna Diversity IEEE 802.11 Networking Standards Operating Temperature Humidity Frequency Modulation Frequency band Modulation Wireless Medium Channels Spatial streams Data Rates IEEE 802.11ac Data specs.htm[12/16/2014 4:29:07 PM]

M.2 (Next Generation Form Factor - NGFF) PCIe and USB 2.0 Hirose U.FL-R-SMT mates with cable connector U.FL-LP-066 On-board diversity 802.11abgn, 802.11ac, 802.11d, 802.11e, 802.11i, 802.11h, 802.11w 0 to +80 degrees Celsius 50% to 90% RH non-condensing (at temperatures of 25 C to 35 C) 5GHz (802.11ac/n) 2.4GHz (802.11b/g/n) 5.15GHz - 5.85GHz (dependent on country) 2.400 - 2.4835GHz (dependent on country) BPSK, QPSK, 16 QAM, 64 QAM, 256 QAM 5GHz UNII: Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) All channels as defined by the relevant specification and country rules. Intel Dual Band Wireless-AC 7265: 2 X 2 All data rates are theoretical maximums. Intel Dual Band Wireless-AC 7265: Up to 867 Mbps CCK, DQPSK, DBPSK 2.4GHz ISM: Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) Specifications Rates IEEE 802.11n Data Rates IEEE 802.11a Data Rates IEEE 802.11g Data Rates IEEE 802.11b Data Rates Bluetooth General Operating Systems Wi-Fi Alliance*

certification Architecture Cisco Compatible Extensions certification Security Authentication Authentication Protocols Encryption Wi-Fi Direct*

Encryption and Authentication Product Safety Tx/Rx (Mbps): 300, 270, 243, 240, 216.7, 195, 180, 173.3, 150, 144, 135, 130, 120, 117, 115.5, 90, 86.667, 72.2, 65, 60, 57.8, 45, 43.3, 30, 28.9, 21.7, 15, 14.4, 7.2 54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 12, 9, 6 Mbps 54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 12, 9, 6 Mbps 11, 5.5, 2, 1 Mbps Dual Mode Bluetooth* 2.1, 2.1+EDR, 3.0, 3.0+HS, 4.0 (BLE) Windows* 7 (32-bit and 64-bit), Windows* 8 (32-bit and 64-bit), Windows* 8.1 (64-bit) Wi-Fi CERTIFIED* for 802.11ac, a/b/g, n, WMM*, WPA*, WPA2*, and WPS, WPS 2.0, Protected Management Frames. Wi-Fi Direct* for peer-to-peer device connections. Infrastructure and SoftAP; Supports simultaneous Client and SoftAP modes Cisco Compatible Extensions, v4.0 WPA and WPA2, 802.1X (EAP-TLS, TTLS, PEAP, LEAP, EAP-FAST), EAP-SIM, EAP-AKA PAP, CHAP, TLS, GTC, MS-CHAP*, MS-CHAPv2 64-bit and 128-bit WEP, AES-CCMP, TKIP WPA2, AES-CCMP UL, C-UL, CB (IEC/EN 60950-1) Intel Dual Band Wireless-N 7265 (Models 7265NGW AN and 7265NGW NB) Intel Wireless-N 7265 (Model 7265NGW BN) M.2 (Next Generation Form Factor - NGFF) PCIe, USB 2.0 Hirose U.FL-R-SMT mates with cable connector U.FL-LP-066 Form Factors Electrical interfaces Antenna Interface Connector Antenna Diversity On-board diversity IEEE 802.11 Networking Standards Intel Dual Band Wireless-N 7265 Model 7265NGW AN - 802.11agn, 2x2, Bluetooth 4.0, PCIe, USB, M.2 Model 7265NGW NB - 802.11agn, 2x2, PCIe, USB, M.2 Intel Wireless-N 7265 Model 7265NGW BN - 802.11bgn, 2x2, Bluetooth 4.0, PCIe, USB, M.2 Operating Temperature Humidity 0 to +80 degrees Celsius 50% to 90% non-condensing (at temperatures of 25 C to 35 C) specs.htm[12/16/2014 4:29:07 PM]

Specifications Frequency Modulation

(See above, not all bands supported by all adapters) Frequency band Modulation 5GHz (802.11a/n) 2.4GHz (802.11b/g/n) 5.15GHz - 5.85GHz

(dependent on country) BPSK, QPSK, 16 QAM, 64 QAM 2.400 - 2.4835GHz (dependent on country) CCK, DQPSK, DBPSK Wireless Medium 5GHz UNII: Orthogonal 2.4GHz ISM: Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) All channels as defined by the relevant specification and country rules. All adapters: 2 X 2 spatial streams Channels 802.11n spatial streams Data Rates IEEE 802.11n Data Rates IEEE 802.11a Data Rates IEEE 802.11g Data Rates IEEE 802.11b Data Rates Bluetooth General Operating Systems Wi-Fi Alliance*

certification Architecture Cisco Compatible Extensions certification Security Authentication Authentication Protocols Encryption Wi-Fi Direct*

Encryption and Authentication Product Safety All data rates are theoretical maximums. Tx/Rx (Mbps): 300, 270, 243, 240, 216.7, 195, 180, 173.3, 150, 144, 135, 130, 120, 117, 115.5, 90, 86.667, 72.2, 65, 60, 57.8, 45, 43.3, 30, 28.9, 21.7, 15, 14.4, 7.2 54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 12, 9, 6 Mbps 54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 12, 9, 6 Mbps 11, 5.5, 2, 1 Mbps Dual Mode Bluetooth* 2.1, 2.1+EDR, 3.0, 3.0+HS, 4.0 (BLE) supported by the following adapters Model 7265HMW AN Model 7265NGW AN Model 7265NGW BN Windows* 7 (32-bit and 64-bit), Windows 8 (32-bit and 64-bit), Windows* 8.1 (64-bit) Wi-Fi CERTIFIED* for 802.11ac, a/b/g, n, WMM*, WPA*, WPA2*, and WPS, WPS 2.0, Protected Management Frames. Wi-Fi Direct* for peer-to-peer device connections. Infrastructure and SoftAP; Supports simultaneous Client and SoftAP modes Cisco Compatible Extensions, v4.0 WPA and WPA2, 802.1X (EAP-TLS, TTLS, PEAP, LEAP, EAP-FAST), EAP-SIM, EAP-AKA PAP, CHAP, TLS, GTC, MS-CHAP*, MS-CHAPv2 64-bit and 128-bit WEP, AES-CCMP, TKIP WPA2, AES-CCMP UL, C-UL, CB (IEC/EN 60950-1) specs.htm[12/16/2014 4:29:07 PM]

Specifications Intel Tri-Band Wireless-AC 17265 (17265NGW/17265NGW LC) Form Factors Electrical interfaces Antenna Interface Connector Antenna Diversity IEEE 802.11 Networking Standards Operating Temperature Humidity Frequency Modulation Frequency band Modulation Wireless Medium Channels Spatial streams Data Rates IEEE 802.11ac Data Rates IEEE 802.11ad Data Rates IEEE 802.11n Data Rates IEEE 802.11a Data Rates IEEE 802.11g Data Rates IEEE 802.11b Data Rates Bluetooth General Operating Systems Wi-Fi Alliance*

certification Architecture Cisco Compatible Extensions certification Security specs.htm[12/16/2014 4:29:07 PM]

M.2 Type 3030 M.2 Key 1-DP: 2xPCIe, USB, DP. Interface to Intel Wireless Gigabit-Antenna M10041 Module using X-FL, and one dedicated for Bluetooth X.FL; Hirose U.FL-R-SMT mates with cable connector U.FL-LP-066 On-board diversity 802.11ac, 802.11ad, 802.11abgn, 802.11a, 802.11d, 802.11e, 802.11i, 802.11h, 802.11w 0 to +80 degrees Celsius 50% to 90% RH non-condensing (at temperatures of 25 C to 35 C) 60GHz (802.11ad) 5GHz (802.11ac/n) 2.4GHz (802.11b/g/n) 57GHz - 64GHz

(dependent on country) DPSK, BPSK, QPSK, 16 QAM, DMG control PHY, DMG SC PHY 5.15GHz - 5.85GHz (dependent on country) 2.400 - 2.4835GHz (dependent on country) CCK, DQPSK, DBPSK BPSK, QPSK, 16 QAM, 64 QAM, 256 QAM 5GHz UNII: Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing

(OFDM) All channels as defined by the relevant specification and country rules. Intel Tri-Band Wireless-AC 17265 2.4GHz ISM: Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing

(OFDM) 1, 2 and 3, subject to country rules N/A All data rates are theoretical maximums. Intel Tri-Band Wireless-AC 17265: Up to 867 Mbps 4620, 3850, 3080, 2503, 2310, 1925, 1540, 1251, 1155, 963, 770, 385 Mbps Tx/Rx (Mbps): 300, 270, 243, 240, 216.7, 195, 180, 173.3, 150, 144, 135, 130, 120, 117, 115.5, 90, 86.667, 72.2, 65, 60, 57.8, 45, 43.3, 30, 28.9, 21.7, 15, 14.4, 7.2 54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 12, 9, 6 Mbps 54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 12, 9, 6 Mbps 11, 5.5, 2, 1 Mbps Dual Mode Bluetooth* 2.1, 2.1+EDR, 3.0, 3.0+HS, 4.0 (BLE) Microsoft Windows 7*, Microsoft Windows 8.1* with connected standby Wi-Fi CERTIFIED* for 802.11ac, a/b/g, n, WMM*, WPA*, WPA2*, and WPS, WPS 2.0, Protected Management Frames. Wi-Fi Direct* for peer-to-peer device connections. Infrastructure and SoftAP; Supports simultaneous Client and SoftAP modes Cisco Compatible Extensions, v4.0 Specifications Authentication Authentication Protocols Encryption Wi-Fi Direct*

Encryption and Authentication Product Safety WPA and WPA2, 802.1X (EAP-TLS, TTLS, PEAP, LEAP, EAP-FAST), EAP-SIM, EAP-AKA PAP, CHAP, TLS, GTC, MS-CHAP*, MS-CHAPv2 64-bit and 128-bit WEP, AES-CCMP, AES-CGMP, TKIP WPA2, AES-CCMP UL, C-UL, CB (IEC/EN 60950-1) Intel Wireless Gigabit Sink W13100 Form Factors Electrical interfaces Antenna Interface Connector Antenna Diversity IEEE 802.11 Networking Standards M.2 Type 3030 M.2 Key 1-DP: 2xPCIe, USB, DP. Interface to Intel Wireless Gigabit-Antenna M10041 Module using X-FL, and one dedicated for Bluetooth X.FL On-board diversity 802.11ac, 802.11ad, 802.11abgn, 802.11a, 802.11d, 802.11e, 802.11i, 802.11h, 802.11w 0 to +80 degrees Celsius 50% to 90% RH non-condensing (at temperatures of 25 C to 35 C) 60GHz (802.11ad) 57GHz - 64GHz (dependent on country) DPSK, BPSK, QPSK, 16 QAM, DMG control PHY, DMG SC PHY 1, 2 and 3, subject to country rules Intel Wireless Gigabit Sink W13100 All data rates are theoretical maximums. Operating Temperature Humidity Frequency Modulation Frequency band Modulation Wireless Medium Channels Spatial streams Data Rates IEEE 802.11ad Data Rates 4620, 3850, 3080, 2503, 2310, 1925, 1540, 1251, 1155, 963, 770, 385 Mbps General Operating Systems Architecture Cisco Compatible Extensions certification Security Authentication Authentication Protocols Encryption Wi-Fi Direct* Encryption and Authentication Product Safety WPA and WPA2, 802.1X (EAP-TLS, TTLS, PEAP, LEAP, EAP-FAST), EAP-SIM, EAP-AKA PAP, CHAP, TLS, GTC, MS-CHAP*, MS-CHAPv2 64-bit and 128-bit WEP, AES-CCMP, AES-CGMP, TKIP WPA2, AES-CCMP Microsoft Windows 7*, Microsoft Windows 8.1* with connected standby Infrastructure and SoftAP; Supports simultaneous Client and SoftAP modes Cisco Compatible Extensions, v4.0 UL, C-UL, CB (IEC/EN 60950-1) Back to Top Back to Contents specs.htm[12/16/2014 4:29:07 PM]

Specifications Trademarks and Disclaimers specs.htm[12/16/2014 4:29:07 PM]

Important Information Back to Contents Important Information Safety Information Third Party Software Notices Safety Information It is important that you read the safety information regarding your WiFi adapter. Please see the User's Guide for safety and regulatory notices. Third Party Software Notices Portions of Intel PROSet/Wireless WiFi Connection Utility include software under the following terms:

OpenSSL License Copyright (c) 1998-2006 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment: "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)"

4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission. For written permission, please contact openssl-

core@openssl.org. 5. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL" nor may "OpenSSL" appear in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project. 6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment: "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)"

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES

(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com). Original SSLeay License Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com) All rights reserved. safety.htm[12/16/2014 4:29:08 PM]

Important Information This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscape's SSL. This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are adhered to. The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com). Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed. If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used. This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement: "This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)"

The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the routines from the library being used are not cryptographic related. 4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement: "This product includes software written by Tim Hudson

(tjh@cryptsoft.com)"

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG "AS IS:' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. The license and distribution terms for any publicly available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution license [including the GNU Public License.]

zlib.h -- interface of the 'zlib' general purpose compression library, version 1.2.3, July 18th, 2005 Copyright (C) 1995-2005 Jean-loup Gailly and Mark Adler This software is provided 'as-is', without any express or implied warranty. In no event will the authors be held liable for any damages arising from the use of this software. Permission is granted to anyone to use this software for any purpose, including commercial applications, and to alter it and redistribute it freely, subject to the following restrictions:

1. The origin of this software must not be misrepresented; you must not claim that you wrote the original software. If you use this software in a product, an acknowledgment in the product documentation would be appreciated but is not required. 2. Altered source versions must be plainly marked as such, and must not be misrepresented as being the original software. 3. This notice may not be removed or altered from any source distribution. Jean-loup Gailly jloup@gzip.org Mark Adler madler@alumni.caltech.edu safety.htm[12/16/2014 4:29:08 PM]

Important Information Adapter Driver Portions of the driver include software under the following terms:

WPA Supplicant Copyright (c) 2003-2007, Jouni Malinen <jkmaline@cc.hut.fi> and contributors. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. Neither the name of Jouni Malinen nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. __________ Copyright (c) 2001, Dr Brian Gladman <brg@gladman.me.uk>, Worcester, UK. All rights reserved. LICENSE TERMS The free distribution and use of this software in both source and binary form is allowed (with or without changes) provided that:

1. Distributions of this source code include the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following 2. distributions in binary form include the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other associated materials;

3. the copyright holder's name is not used to endorse products built using this software without specific written disclaimer;

permission. DISCLAIMER This software is provided 'as is' with no explicit or implied warranties in respect of its properties, including, but not limited to, correctness and fitness for purpose. Issue Date: 29/07/2002 This file contains the definitions required to use AES (Rijndael) in C. Portions Licensed from Devicescape Software, Inc. Intel PROSet/Wireless WiFi Connection Utility contains software licensed from Devicescape Software, Inc. Copyright

(c) 2004 - 2008 Devicescape Software, Inc. All rights reserved.

"Odd Button" Artistic License safety.htm[12/16/2014 4:29:08 PM]

Important Information Portions of this software contain the standard version of "Odd Button" licensed under the Artistic License. The source code for "Odd Button" may be found online at http://sourceforge.net/projects/oddbutton. Back to Top Back to Contents Trademarks and Disclaimers safety.htm[12/16/2014 4:29:08 PM]

Customer Support Back to Contents Customer Support Intel support is available online or by telephone. Available services include the most up-to-date product information, installation instructions about specific products, and troubleshooting tips. Online Support Technical Support: http://www.intel.com/support Network Product Support: http://www.intel.com/network Corporate Web Site: http://www.intel.com Back to Top Back to Contents Trademarks and Disclaimers support.htm[12/16/2014 4:29:09 PM]

Warranty Information Back to Contents Warranty Information One-Year Limited Hardware Warranty Limited Warranty In this warranty statement, the term "Product" applies to the wireless adapters listed in Specifications. Intel warrants to the purchaser of the Product that the Product, if properly used and installed, will be free from defects in material and workmanship and will substantially conform to Intels publicly available specifications for the Product for a period of one (1) year beginning on the date the Product was purchased in its original sealed packaging. SOFTWARE OF ANY KIND DELIVERED WITH OR AS PART OF THE PRODUCT IS EXPRESSLY PROVIDED "AS IS", SPECIFICALLY EXCLUDING ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS, IMPLIED (INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, NON-INFRINGEMENT OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE), provided however, that Intel warrants that the media on which the software is furnished will be free from defects for a period of ninety (90) days from the date of delivery. If such a defect appears within the warranty period, you may return the defective media to Intel for replacement or alternative delivery of the software at Intel's discretion and without charge. Intel does not warrant or assume responsibility for the accuracy or completeness of any information, text, graphics, links or other items contained within the software. If the Product which is the subject of this Limited Warranty fails during the warranty period for reasons covered by this Limited Warranty, Intel, at its option, will:

REPAIR the Product by means of hardware and/or software; OR REPLACE the Product with another product, OR, if Intel is unable to repair or replace the Product, REFUND the then-current Intel price for the Product at the time a claim for warranty service is made to Intel under this Limited Warranty. THIS LIMITED WARRANTY, AND ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES THAT MAY EXIST UNDER APPLICABLE STATE, NATIONAL, PROVINCIAL OR LOCAL LAW, APPLY ONLY TO YOU AS THE ORIGINAL PURCHASER OF THE PRODUCT. Extent of Limited Warranty Intel does not warrant that the Product, whether purchased stand-alone or integrated with other products, including without limitation, semi-conductor components, will be free from design defects or errors known as "errata." Current characterized errata are available upon request. Further, this Limited Warranty does NOT cover: (i) any costs associated with the replacement or repair of the Product, including labor, installation or other costs incurred by you, and in particular, any costs relating to the removal or replacement of any Product soldered or otherwise permanently affixed to any printed circuit board or integrated with other products; (ii) damage to the Product due to external causes, including accident, problems with electrical power, abnormal, mechanical or environmental conditions, usage not in accordance with product instructions, misuse, neglect, accident, abuse, alteration, repair, improper or unauthorized installation or improper testing, or (iii) any Product which has been modified or operated outside of Intels publicly available specifications or where the original product identification markings (trademark or serial number) have been removed, altered or obliterated from the Product; or (iv) issues resulting from modification (other than by Intel) of software products provided or included in the Product, (v) incorporation of software products, other than those software products provided or included in the Product by Intel, or (vi) failure to apply Intel-supplied modifications or corrections to any software provided with or included in the Product. How to Obtain Warranty Service To obtain warranty service for the Product, you may contact your original place of purchase in accordance with its instructions or you may contact Intel. To request warranty service from Intel, you must contact the Intel Customer Support ("ICS") center in your region (http://www.intel.com/support/wireless/) within the warranty period during normal business hours (local time), excluding holidays and return the Product to the designated ICS center. Please be prepared to provide: (1) your name, mailing address, email address, telephone numbers and, in the USA, valid warranty.htm[12/16/2014 4:29:09 PM]

Warranty Information credit card information; (2) proof of purchase; (3) model name and product identification number found on the Product; and (4) an explanation of the problem. The Customer Service Representative may need additional information from you depending on the nature of the problem. Upon ICS's verification that the Product is eligible for warranty service, you will be issued a Return Material Authorization ("RMA") number and provided with instructions for returning the Product to the designated ICS center. When you return the Product to the ICS center, you must include the RMA number on the outside of the package. Intel will not accept any returned Product without an RMA number, or that has an invalid RMA number, on the package. You must deliver the returned Product to the designated ICS center in the original or equivalent packaging, with shipping charges pre-paid (within the USA), and assume the risk of damage or loss during shipment. Intel may elect to repair or replace the Product with either a new or reconditioned Product or components, as Intel deems appropriate. The repaired or replaced product will be shipped to you at the expense of Intel within a reasonable period of time after receipt of the returned Product by ICS. The returned Product shall become Intels property on receipt by ICS. The replacement product is warranted under this written warranty and is subject to the same limitations of liability and exclusions for ninety (90) days or the remainder of the original warranty period, whichever is longer. If Intel replaces the Product, the Limited Warranty period for the replacement Product is not extended. WARRANTY LIMITATIONS AND EXCLUSIONS THIS WARRANTY REPLACES ALL OTHER WARRANTIES FOR THE PRODUCT AND INTEL DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, NON-INFRINGEMENT, COURSE OF DEALING AND USAGE OF TRADE. Some states (or jurisdictions) do not allow the exclusion of implied warranties so this limitation may not apply to you. ALL EXPRESS AND IMPLIED WARRANTIES ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE LIMITED WARRANTY PERIOD. NO WARRANTIES APPLY AFTER THAT PERIOD. Some states (or jurisdictions) do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, so this limitation may not apply to you. LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY INTELS RESPONSIBILITY UNDER THIS OR ANY OTHER WARRANTY, IMPLIED OR EXPRESS, IS LIMITED TO REPAIR, REPLACEMENT OR REFUND, AS SET FORTH ABOVE. THESE REMEDIES ARE THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES FOR ANY BREACH OF WARRANTY. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW, INTEL IS NOT RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY DIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES RESULTING FROM ANY BREACH OF WARRANTY OR UNDER ANY OTHER LEGAL THEORY (INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, LOST PROFITS, DOWNTIME, LOSS OF GOODWILL, DAMAGE TO OR REPLACEMENT OF EQUIPMENT AND PROPERTY, AND ANY COSTS OF RECOVERING, REPROGRAMMING, OR REPRODUCING ANY PROGRAM OR DATA STORED IN OR USED WITH A SYSTEM CONTAINING THE PRODUCT), EVEN IF INTEL HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Some states (or jurisdictions) do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitations or exclusions may not apply to you. THIS LIMITED WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS, AND YOU MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS THAT VARY BY STATE OR JURISDICTION. ANY AND ALL DISPUTES ARISING UNDER OR RELATED TO THIS LIMITED WARRANTY SHALL BE ADJUDICATED IN THE FOLLOWING FORUMS AND GOVERNED BY THE FOLLOWING LAWS: FOR THE UNITED STATES OF AMERICA, CANADA, NORTH AMERICA AND SOUTH AMERICA, THE FORUM SHALL BE SANTA CLARA, CALIFORNIA, USA AND THE APPLICABLE LAW SHALL BE THAT OF THE STATE OF DELAWARE. FOR THE ASIA PACIFIC REGION (EXCEPT FOR MAINLAND CHINA), THE FORUM SHALL BE SINGAPORE AND THE APPLICABLE LAW SHALL BE THAT OF SINGAPORE. FOR EUROPE AND THE REST OF THE WORLD, THE FORUM SHALL BE LONDON AND THE APPLICABLE LAW SHALL BE THAT OF ENGLAND AND WALES IN THE EVENT OF ANY CONFLICT BETWEEN THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE VERSION AND ANY OTHER TRANSLATED VERSION(S)OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY (WITH THE EXCEPTION OF THE SIMPLIFIED CHINESE VERSION), THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE VERSION SHALL CONTROL. IMPORTANT! UNLESS OTHERWISE AGREED IN WRITING BY INTEL, THE INTEL PRODUCTS SOLD HEREUNDER ARE NOT DESIGNED, OR INTENDED FOR USE IN ANY MEDICAL, LIFE SAVING OR LIFE SUSTAINING SYSTEMS, TRANSPORTATION SYSTEMS, NUCLEAR SYSTEMS, OR FOR ANY OTHER MISSION CRITICAL APPLICATION IN WHICH THE FAILURE OF THE INTEL PRODUCT COULD CREATE A SITUATION WHERE PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH MAY OCCUR. WEEE warranty.htm[12/16/2014 4:29:09 PM]

Warranty Information Back to Top Back to Contents Trademarks and Disclaimers warranty.htm[12/16/2014 4:29:09 PM]

Glossary Back to Contents Glossary Term 802.11 802.11a 802.11b 802.11g 802.11n 802.1X AAA Server AES-CCMP Definition The 802.11 standard refers to a family of specifications developed by the IEEE for wireless LAN technology. The 802.11 specifies an over-the-air interface between a wireless client and a base station or between two wireless clients and provides 1 or 2 Mbps transmission in the 2.4 GHz band using either frequency hopping spread spectrum (FHSS) or direct sequence spread spectrum (DSSS). The 802.11a standard specifies a maximum data transfer rate of 54 Mbps and an operating frequency of 5 GHz. The 802.11a standard uses the Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing

(OFDM) transmission method. Additionally, the 802.11a standard supports 802.11 features such as WEP encryption for security. 802.11b is an extension to 802.11 that applies to wireless networks and provides 11 Mbps transmission (with a fallback to 5.5, 2 and 1 Mbps) in the 2.4 GHz band. 802.11b uses only DSSS. Throughput data rate 5+ Mbps in the 2.4 GHz band. The 802.11g standard specifies a maximum data transfer rate of 54 Mbps, an operating frequency of 2.4GHz, and WEP encryption for security. 802.11g networks are also referred to as Wi-Fi*

networks. A task group of the IEEE 802.11 committee has defined a new draft specification that provides for increased throughput speeds of up to 540 Mbps. The specification provides for Multiple-Input-

Multiple-Output (MIMO) technology, or using multiple receivers and multiple transmitters in both the client and access point, to achieve improved performance. 802.1X is the IEEE Standard for Port-Based Network Access Control. This is used in conjunction with EAP methods to provide access control to wired and wireless networks. Authentication, Authorization and Accounting Server. A system to control access to computer resources and track user activity. A device that connects wireless devices to another network. For example, a wireless LAN, Internet modem or others. computer can initiate a communication session. Also known as a peer-to-peer network, a device to device network or a computer-to-computer network. Advanced Encryption Standard - Counter CBC-MAC Protocol is the new method for privacy protection of wireless transmissions specified in the IEEE 802.11i standard. AES-CCMP provides a stronger encryption method than TKIP. The AES algorithm is capable of using cryptographic keys of 128, 192, and 256 bits to encrypt and decrypt data in 128-bit blocks. AES-CCMP uses the AES block cipher, but restricts the key length to 128 bits. AES-CCMP incorporates two sophisticated cryptographic techniques (counter mode and CBC-MAC) to provide improved security between the mobile client and the access point. Access Point

(AP) Ad Hoc Network A communication configuration in which every computer has the same capabilities, and any Available network Authentication Verifies the identity of a user logging onto a network. Passwords, digital certificates, smart cards and biometrics are used to prove the identity of the client to the network. Passwords and digital certificates are also used to identify the network to the client. One of the networks listed under Available networks on the Wireless Networks tab of the Wireless Network Connection Properties (Windows* XP environment). Any wireless network that is broadcasting and is within receiving range of the WiFi adapter appears on the list. Bit Error Rate. The ratio of errors to the total number of bits being sent in a data transmission from one location to another. The total number of bits (ones and zeros) per second that a network connection can support. Note that this bit rate will vary, under software control, with different signal path conditions. Bit Rate BER Broadcast SSID Used to allow an access point to respond to clients on a wireless network by sending probes. BSSID A unique identifier for each wireless client on a wireless network. The Basic Service Set Identifier

(BSSID) is the Ethernet MAC address of each adapter on the network. glossary.htm[12/16/2014 4:29:10 PM]

Glossary CA (Certificate Authority) CCX (Cisco Compatible eXtension) Certificate CKIP A corporate certification authority implemented on a server. In addition, Internet Explorer's certificate can import a certificate from a file. A trusted CA certificate is stored in the root store. Cisco Compatible Extensions Program ensures that devices used on Cisco wireless LAN infrastructure meet the security, management and roaming requirements. Used for client authentication. A certificate is registered on the authentication server (for example, RADIUS server) and used by the authenticator. Cisco Key Integrity Protocol (CKIP) is a Cisco proprietary security protocol for encryption in 802.11 media. CKIP uses a key message integrity check and message sequence number to improve 802.11 security in infrastructure mode. CKIP is Cisco's version of TKIP. Client computer The computer that gets its Internet connection by sharing either the host computer's connection DSSS EAP EAP-AKA EAP-FAST EAP-GTC EAP-OTP EAP-SIM or the access point's connection. Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum. Technology used in radio transmission. Incompatible with FHSS. Short for Extensible Authentication Protocol, EAP sits inside of Point-to-Point Protocol's (PPP) authentication protocol and provides a generalized framework for several different authentication methods. EAP is supposed to head off proprietary authentication systems and let everything from passwords to challenge-response tokens and public-key infrastructure certificates all work smoothly. EAP-AKA (Extensible Authentication Protocol Method for UMTS Authentication and Key Agreement) is an EAP mechanism for authentication and session key distribution, using the Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS) Subscriber Identity Module (USIM). The USIM card is a special smart card used with cellular networks to validate a given user with the network. EAP-FAST, like EAP-TTLS and PEAP, uses tunneling to protect traffic. The main difference is that EAP-FAST does not use certificates to authenticate. Provisioning in EAP-FAST is negotiated solely by the client as the first communication exchange when EAP-FAST is requested from the server. If the client does not have a pre-shared secret Protected Access Credential (PAC), it can request to initiate a provisioning EAP-FAST exchange to dynamically obtain one from the server. EAP-FAST documents two methods to deliver the PAC: manual delivery through an out-of-band secure mechanism, and automatic provisioning. Manual delivery mechanisms can be any delivery mechanism that the administrator of the network feels is sufficiently secure for their network. Automatic provisioning establishes an encrypted tunnel to protect the authentication of the client and the delivery of the PAC to the client. This mechanism, while not as secure as a manual method may be, is more secure than the authentication method used in LEAP. The EAP-FAST method can be divided into two parts: provisioning, and authentication. The provisioning phase involves the initial delivery of the PAC to the client. This phase only needs to be performed once per client and user. The EAP-GTC (Generic Token Card) is similar to the EAP-OTP except with hardware token cards. The request contains a displayable message, and the response contains the string read from the hardware token card. EAP-OTP (One-Time Password) is similar to MD5, except it uses the OTP as the response. The request contains a displayable message. The OTP method is defined in RFC 2289. Extensible Authentication Protocol-Subscriber Identity Module (EAP-SIM) authentication can be used with:

Network Authentication types: Open, Shared, and WPA*-Enterprise, WPA2*-Enterprise. Data Encryption types: None, WEP and CKIP. A SIM card is a special smart card that is used by Global System for Mobile Communications

(GSM) based digital cellular networks. The SIM card is used to validate your credentials with the glossary.htm[12/16/2014 4:29:10 PM]

Glossary EAP-TLS EAP-TTLS Encryption FHSS network A type of authentication method that uses EAP and a security protocol called the Transport Layer Security (TLS). EAP-TLS uses certificates that use passwords. EAP-TLS authentication supports dynamic WEP key management. A type of authentication method that uses EAP and Tunneled Transport Layer Security (TTLS). EAP-TTLS uses a combination of certificates and another security method such as passwords. Scrambling data so that only the authorized recipient can read it. Usually a key is needed to interpret the data. Frequency-Hop Spread Spectrum. Technology used in radio transmission. Incompatible with DSSS. A capability that allows a number of people to view, modify, and print the same file(s) from different computers. The threshold at which the wireless adapter breaks the packet into multiple frames. This determines the packet size and affects the throughput of the transmission. A unit of frequency equal to 1,000,000,000 cycles per second. File and printer sharing Fragmentation threshold GHz

(Gigahertz) Host computer The computer that is directly connected to the Internet via a modem or network adapter. Infrastructure network A wireless network centered around an access point. In this environment, the access point not only provides communication with the wired network, but also mediates wireless network traffic in the immediate neighborhood. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) is an organization involved in defining computing and communications standards. The address of a computer that is attached to a network. Part of the address designates which network the computer is on, and the other part represents the host identification. IEEE A high-speed, low-error data network covering a relatively small geographic area. A version of Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP). LEAP is a proprietary extensible authentication protocol developed by Cisco that provides a challenge-response authentication mechanism and dynamic key assignment. A hardwired address applied at the factory. It uniquely identifies network hardware, such as a wireless adapter, on a LAN or WAN. Internet Protocol (IP) address LAN (Local Area Network) LEAP (Light Extensible Authentication Protocol) MAC (Media Access Control) Address Mbps

(Megabits-per-

second) MHz

(Megahertz) MIC (Michael) Message Integrity Check (commonly called Michael). MS-CHAP Transmission speed of 1,000,000 bits per second. A unit of frequency equal to 1,000,000 cycles per second. An EAP mechanism used by the client. Microsoft Challenge Authentication Protocol (MS-CHAP) Version 2, is used over an encrypted channel to enable server validation. The challenge and response packets are sent over a non-exposed TLS encrypted channel. ns(Nanosecond) 1 billionth (1/1,000,000,000) of a second. OFDM Open authentication PEAP Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing. Allows any device network access. If encryption is not enabled on the network, any device that knows the Service Set Identifier (SSID) of the access point can gain access to the network. Protected Extensible Authentication Protocol (PEAP) is an Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF) draft protocol sponsored by Microsoft, Cisco, and RSA Security. PEAP creates an encrypted tunnel similar to the tunnel used in secure web pages (SSL). Inside the encrypted tunnel, a number of other EAP authentication methods can be used to perform client authentication. PEAP requires a glossary.htm[12/16/2014 4:29:10 PM]

Glossary Peer-to-Peer mode Power save mode Preferred network RADIUS

(Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service) RF (Radio Frequency) Roaming RTS threshold Shared key SIM (Subscriber Identity Module) Silent mode TLS certificate on the RADIUS server, but unlike EAP-TLS there is no requirement to have a certificate on the client. PEAP has not been ratified by the IETF. The IETF is currently comparing PEAP and TTLS (Tunneled TLS) to determine an authentication standard for 802.1X authentication in 802.11 wireless systems. PEAP is an authentication type designed to take advantage of server-

side EAP-Transport Layer Security (EAP-TLS) and to support various authentication methods, including user passwords and one-time passwords, and Generic Token Cards. A wireless network structure that allows wireless clients to communicate directly with each other without using an access point. The state in which the radio is periodically powered down to conserve power. When the portable computer is in Power Save mode, received packets are stored in the access point until the wireless adapter wakes up. One of the networks that has been configured. Such networks are listed under Preferred networks on the Wireless Networks tab of the Wireless Network Connection Properties (Windows* XP environment). RADIUS is an authentication and accounting system that verifies user's credentials and grants access to requested resources. The international unit for measuring frequency is Hertz (Hz), which is equivalent to the older unit of cycles per second. One MegaHertz (MHz) is one million Hertz. One GigaHertz (GHz) is one billion Hertz. For reference: the standard US electrical power frequency is 60 Hz, the AM broadcast radio frequency band is 0.55 -1.6 MHz, the FM broadcast radio frequency band is 88-

108 MHz, and microwave ovens typically operate at 2.45 GHz. Movement of a wireless node between two micro cells. Roaming usually occurs in infrastructure networks built around multiple access points. Current wireless network roaming is only supported in the same subnet of a network. The number of frames in the data packet at or above which an RTS/CTS (request to send/clear to send) handshake is turned on before the packet is sent. The default value is 2347. An encryption key known only to the receiver and sender of data. This is also referred to as a pre-

shared key. A SIM card is used to validate credentials with the network. A SIM card is a special smart card used by GSM-based digital cellular networks. Silent Mode Access Points or Wireless Routers have been configured to not broadcast the SSID for the wireless network. This makes it necessary to know the SSID in order to configure the wireless profile to connect to the access point or wireless router. Single Sign On Single Sign On feature set allows the 802.1X credentials to match your Windows log on user name SSID (Service Set Identifier) stealth TKIP (Temporal Key Integrity Protocol) and password credentials for wireless network connections. SSID or network name is a value that controls access to a wireless network. The SSID for your wireless network card must match the SSID for any access point that you want to connect with. If the value does not match, you are not granted access to the network. Each SSID may be up to 32 alphanumeric characters long and is case-sensitive. A stealth access point is one that has the capability and is configured to not broadcast its SSID. This is the WiFi network name that appears when a DMU (Device Management Utility, such as Intel PROSet/Wireless WiFi Connection Utility) scans for available wireless networks. Although this can enhance wireless network security, it is commonly considered a weak security feature. To connect to a stealth access point, a user must specifically know the SSID and configure their DMU accordingly. The feature is not a part of the 802.11 specification, and is known by differing names by various vendors: closed mode, private network, SSID broadcasting. Temporal Key Integrity protocol improves data encryption. Wi-Fi Protected Access* uses its TKIP. TKIP provides important data encryption enhancements including a re-keying method. TKIP is part of the IEEE 802.11i encryption standard for wireless networks. TKIP is the next generation of WEP, the Wired Equivalency Protocol, which is used to secure 802.11 wireless networks. TKIP provides per packet key mixing, a message integrity check and a re-keying mechanism, thus glossary.htm[12/16/2014 4:29:10 PM]

Glossary TLS (Transport Layer Security) TTLS (Tunneled Transport Layer Security) WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) WEP Key Wi-Fi*

(Wireless Fidelity) WiMAX fixing the flaws of WEP. A type of authentication method using the Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) and a security protocol called the Transport Layer Security (TLS). EAP-TLS uses certificates which use passwords. EAP-TLS authentication supports dynamic WEP key management. The TLS protocol is intended to secure and authenticate communications across a public network through data encryption. The TLS Handshake Protocol allows the server and client to provide mutual authentication and to negotiate an encryption algorithm and cryptographic keys before data is transmitted. These settings define the protocol and the credentials used to authenticate a user. In TTLS, the client uses EAP-TLS to validate the server and create a TLS-encrypted channel between the client and server. The client can use another authentication protocol. Typically password-based protocols challenge over this encrypted channel to enable server validation. The challenge and response packets are sent over a non-exposed TLS encrypted channel. TTLS implementations today support all methods defined by EAP, as well as several older methods (CHAP, PAP, MS-

CHAP and MS-CHAP-V2). TTLS can easily be extended to work with new protocols by defining new attributes to support new protocols. Wired Equivalent Privacy, 64- and 128-bit (64-bit is sometimes referred to as 40-bit). This is a low-level encryption technique designed to give the user about the same amount of privacy that he would expect from a LAN. WEP is a security protocol for wireless local area networks (WLANs) defined in the 802.11b standard. WEP is designed to provide the same level of security as that of a wired LAN. WEP aims to provide security by data over radio waves so that it is protected as it is transmitted from one end point to another. Either a pass phrase or hexadecimal key. The pass phrase must be 5 ASCII characters for 64-bit WEP or 13 ASCII characters for 128-bit WEP. For pass phrases, 0-9, a-z, A-Z, and ~!@#$%^&*()_+|`-={}|[]\:";'<>?,./ are all valid characters. The hex key must be 10 hexadecimal characters (0-9, A-F) for 64-bit WEP or 26 hexadecimal characters (0-9, A-F) for 128-bit WEP. Is meant to be used generically when referring of any type to 802.11 network, whether 802.11b, 802.11a, or dual-band. WiMAX, the Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access, is a telecommunications technology aimed at providing wireless data over long distances in a variety of ways, from point-to-point links to full mobile cellular type access. It is based on the IEEE 802.16 standard. The name WiMAX was created by the WiMAX Forum, which was formed in June 2001 to promote conformance and interoperability of the standard. The forum describes WiMAX as "a standards-

based technology enabling the delivery of last mile wireless broadband access as an alternative to cable and DSL."

Wireless router A stand-alone wireless hub that allows any computer that has a wireless network adapter to communicate with another computer within the same network and to connect to the Internet. A type of local-area network that uses high-frequency radio waves rather than wires to communicate between nodes. This is a security enhancement that strongly increases the level of data protection and access control to a wireless network. WPA is an interim standard that will be replaced with the IEEE's 802.11i standard upon its completion. WPA consists of RC4 and TKIP and provides support for BSS (Infrastructure) mode only. WPA and WPA2 are compatible. This is the second generation of WPA that complies with the IEEE TGi specification. WPA2 consists of AES encryption, pre-authentication and PMKID caching. It provides support for BSS

(Infrastructure) mode and IBSS (ad hoc) mode. WPA and WPA2 are compatible. WPA2* (Wi-Fi Protected Access 2) WPA-Enterprise Wi-Fi Protected Access-Enterprise applies to corporate users. A new standards-based, interoperable security technology for wireless LAN (subset of IEEE 802.11i draft standard) that encrypts data sent over radio waves. WPA is a Wi-Fi standard that was designed to improve upon the security features of WEP as follows:

Improved data encryption through the temporal key integrity protocol (TKIP). TKIP uses a glossary.htm[12/16/2014 4:29:10 PM]

WLAN (Wireless Local-Area Network) WPA* (Wi-Fi Protected Access) Glossary hashing algorithm to scramble the encryption keys and adds an integrity-checking feature to ensure that the keys have not been tampered with. User authentication, which is generally missing in WEP, through the extensible authentication protocol (EAP). WEP regulates access to a wireless network based on a computer's hardware-specific MAC address, which is relatively simple to be sniffed out and stolen. EAP is built on a more secure public-key encryption system to ensure that only authorized network users can access the network. WPA is an interim standard that will be replaced with the IEEE's 802.11i standard upon its completion. WPA-Personal Wi-Fi Protected Access-Personal provides a level of security in the small network or home WPA-PSK (Wi-Fi Protected-

Access Pre-

Shared Key) environment. WPA-PSK mode does not use an authentication server. It can be used with the data encryption types WEP or TKIP. WPA-PSK requires configuration of a pre-shared key (PSK). You must enter a pass phrase or 64 hex characters for a pre-shared key of length 256-bits. The data encryption key is derived from the PSK. Back to Top Back to Contents Trademarks and Disclaimers glossary.htm[12/16/2014 4:29:10 PM]

User Guide Copyright 2016 HP Development Company, L.P. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by HP Inc. under license. Intel, Celeron, and Pentium are trademarks of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and other countries. Windows is a registered trademark or trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. First Edition: May 2016 Document Part Number: 862395-001 Product notice Software terms By installing, copying, downloading, or otherwise using any software product preinstalled on this computer, you agree to be bound by the terms of the HP End User License Agreement (EULA). If you do not accept these license terms, your sole remedy is to return the entire unused product (hardware and software) within 14 days for a full refund subject to the refund policy of your seller. For any further information or to request a full refund of the price of the computer, please contact your seller. This guide describes features that are common to most products. Some features may not be available on your computer. Not all features are available in all editions or versions of Windows. Systems may require upgraded and/or separately purchased hardware, drivers, software or BIOS update to take full advantage of Windows functionality. Windows 10 is automatically updated, which is always enabled. ISP fees may apply and additional requirements may apply over time for updates. Go to http://www.microsoft.com for details. To access the latest user guides or manuals for your product, go to http://www.hp.com/

support, and select your country. Select Find your product, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Safety warning notice WARNING! To reduce the possibility of heat-related injuries or of overheating the computer, do not place the computer directly on your lap or obstruct the computer air vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, to block airflow. Also, do not allow the AC adapter to come into contact with the skin or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, during operation. The computer and the AC adapter comply with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by the International Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment (IEC 60950-1). iii iv Safety warning notice Processor configuration setting (select products only) IMPORTANT: Select products are configured with an Intel Pentium N35xx/N37xx series or a Celeron N28xx/N29xx/N30xx/N31xx series processor and a Windows operating system. If your computer is configured as described, do not change the processor configuration setting in msconfig.exe from 4 or 2 processors to 1 processor. If you do so, your computer will not restart. You will have to perform a factory reset to restore the original settings. v vi Processor configuration setting (select products only) Table of contents 1 Starting right ................................................................................................................................................ 1 Visit the HP Apps Store .......................................................................................................................................... 1 Best practices ......................................................................................................................................................... 1 More HP resources ................................................................................................................................................. 2 2 Getting to know your computer ...................................................................................................................... 4 Locating hardware ................................................................................................................................................. 4 Locating software .................................................................................................................................................. 4 Right side ............................................................................................................................................................... 5 Left side ................................................................................................................................................................. 7 Display ................................................................................................................................................................... 9 Changing your notebook position (select products only) ................................................................ 10 Changing your notebook to an entertainment stand (select products only) .................................. 11 Changing your notebook to an interactive stand (select products only) ........................................ 12 Changing your notebook to a tablet (select products only) ............................................................ 12 Top ....................................................................................................................................................................... 13 TouchPad ........................................................................................................................................... 13 Lights ................................................................................................................................................. 14 Keys ................................................................................................................................................... 15 Using the action keys ........................................................................................................................ 16 Bottom ................................................................................................................................................................. 17 Labels ................................................................................................................................................................... 18 3 Connecting to a network .............................................................................................................................. 19 Connecting to a wireless network ....................................................................................................................... 19 Using the wireless controls ............................................................................................................... 19 Airplane mode key .......................................................................................................... 19 Operating system controls ............................................................................................. 19 Connecting to a WLAN ....................................................................................................................... 20 Using HP Mobile Broadband (select products only) ......................................................................... 20 Using GPS (select products only) ...................................................................................................... 21 Using Bluetooth wireless devices (select products only) ................................................................ 21 Connecting Bluetooth devices ........................................................................................ 21 Connecting to a wired networkLAN (select products only) ............................................................................ 22 Sharing data and drives and accessing software ............................................................................................... 22 vii 4 Enjoying entertainment features .................................................................................................................. 23 Using the camera ................................................................................................................................................. 23 Using audio .......................................................................................................................................................... 23 Connecting speakers ......................................................................................................................... 23 Connecting headsets ......................................................................................................................... 23 Using sound settings ......................................................................................................................... 24 Using video .......................................................................................................................................................... 24 Connecting video devices using an HDMI cable ................................................................................ 25 Setting up HDMI audio .................................................................................................... 25 Discovering and connecting to Miracast-compatible wireless displays (select products only) ..... 26 Discovering and connecting to Intel WiDi certified displays (select Intel products only) ............... 26 5 Navigating the screen .................................................................................................................................. 27 Using TouchPad and touch screen gestures ....................................................................................................... 27 Tap ..................................................................................................................................................... 27 Two-finger pinch zoom ..................................................................................................................... 28 Two-finger slide (TouchPad only) ..................................................................................................... 28 Two-finger tap (TouchPad only) ....................................................................................................... 28 Four-finger tap (TouchPad only) ...................................................................................................... 29 Three-finger swipe (TouchPad only) ................................................................................................ 29 One-finger slide (touch screen only) ................................................................................................ 29 Using the keyboard and optional mouse ............................................................................................................ 30 Using the on-screen keyboard .......................................................................................................... 30 Using the integrated numeric keypad ................................................................................................................. 30 6 Managing power .......................................................................................................................................... 31 Initiating and exiting Sleep and Hibernation ...................................................................................................... 31 Manually initiating and exiting Sleep ................................................................................................ 32 Manually initiating and exiting Hibernation (select products only) ................................................. 32 Setting password protection on wakeup (exiting Sleep or Hibernation) ......................................... 32 Using the power meter and power settings ........................................................................................................ 33 Running on battery power ................................................................................................................................... 33 Factory-sealed battery ..................................................................................................................... 33 Finding battery information .............................................................................................................. 34 Conserving battery power ................................................................................................................. 34 Identifying low battery levels ........................................................................................................... 34 Resolving a low battery level ............................................................................................................ 35 Resolving a low battery level when external power is available .................................. 35 Resolving a low battery level when no power source is available ................................ 35 Resolving a low battery level when the computer cannot exit Hibernation ................. 35 viii Running on AC power ........................................................................................................................................... 35 Troubleshooting power problems .................................................................................................... 36 Shutting down (turning off) the computer ......................................................................................................... 36 7 Maintaining your computer .......................................................................................................................... 38 Improving performance ....................................................................................................................................... 38 Using Disk Defragmenter .................................................................................................................. 38 Using Disk Cleanup ............................................................................................................................ 38 Using HP 3D DriveGuard (select products only) ............................................................................... 38 Identifying HP 3D DriveGuard status .............................................................................. 39 Updating programs and drivers .......................................................................................................................... 39 Cleaning your computer ...................................................................................................................................... 39 Cleaning procedures ......................................................................................................................... 39 Cleaning the display ........................................................................................................ 40 Cleaning the sides or cover ............................................................................................. 40 Cleaning the TouchPad, keyboard, or mouse (select products only) ............................ 40 Traveling with or shipping your computer .......................................................................................................... 40 8 Securing your computer and information ...................................................................................................... 42 Using passwords .................................................................................................................................................. 42 Setting Windows passwords ............................................................................................................. 42 Setting Setup Utility (BIOS) passwords ............................................................................................ 43 Using Windows Hello (select products only) ....................................................................................................... 43 Using Internet security software ......................................................................................................................... 43 Using antivirus software ................................................................................................................... 44 Using firewall software ..................................................................................................................... 44 Installing software updates ................................................................................................................................ 44 Using HP Touchpoint Manager (select products only) ........................................................................................ 45 Securing your wireless network .......................................................................................................................... 45 Backing up your software applications and information ................................................................................... 45 Using an optional security cable (select products only) ..................................................................................... 45 9 Using Setup Utility (BIOS) ............................................................................................................................. 46 Starting Setup Utility (BIOS) ................................................................................................................................ 46 Updating Setup Utility (BIOS) .............................................................................................................................. 46 Determining the BIOS version ........................................................................................................... 46 Downloading a BIOS update .............................................................................................................. 47 10 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) ..................................................................................................... 48 Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) to a USB device .................................................................... 48 ix 11 Backing up, restoring, and recovering ......................................................................................................... 50 Creating recovery media and backups ................................................................................................................ 50 Creating HP Recovery media (select products only) ........................................................................ 50 Using Windows tools ........................................................................................................................................... 51 Restore and recovery .......................................................................................................................................... 52 Recovering using HP Recovery Manager .......................................................................................... 52 What you need to know before you get started ............................................................ 52 Using the HP Recovery partition (select products only) ................................................ 53 Using HP Recovery media to recover ............................................................................. 53 Changing the computer boot order ................................................................................ 54 Removing the HP Recovery partition (select products only) ......................................... 55 12 Specifications ........................................................................................................................................... 56 Input power .......................................................................................................................................................... 56 Operating environment ....................................................................................................................................... 56 13 Electrostatic Discharge .............................................................................................................................. 58 14 Accessibility .............................................................................................................................................. 59 Supported assistive technologies ....................................................................................................................... 59 Contacting support .............................................................................................................................................. 59 Index ............................................................................................................................................................. 60 x 1 Starting right This computer is a powerful tool designed to enhance your work and entertainment. Read this chapter to learn about best practices after you set up your computer, fun things to do with your computer, and where to find additional HP resources. Visit the HP Apps Store The HP Apps Store offers a wide choice of popular games, entertainment and music apps, productivity apps, and apps exclusive to HP that you can download to the desktop. The selection is updated regularly and includes regional content and country-specific offers. Be sure to check the HP Apps Store frequently for new and updated features. IMPORTANT: You must be connected to the Internet to access the HP Apps Store. To view and download an app:

1. 2. Select the Start button, and then select the Store app. or Select the Store icon next to the taskbar search box. Select the app you want to download, and then follow the on-screen instructions. When the download is complete, the app appears on the All apps screen. Best practices After you set up and register the computer, we recommend the following steps to get the most out of your smart investment:

Back up your hard drive by creating recovery media. See Backing up, restoring, and recovering on page 50. If you havent already done so, connect to a wired or wireless network. See details in Connecting to a network on page 19. Become familiar with the computer hardware and software. For more information, see Getting to know your computer on page 4 and Enjoying entertainment features on page 23. Update or purchase antivirus software. See Using antivirus software on page 44. Visit the HP Apps Store 1 More HP resources To locate resources that provide product details, how-to information, and more, use this table. Contents Overview of computer setup and features Online chat with an HP technician Support telephone numbers HP service center locations Proper workstation setup Guidelines for posture and work habits that increase your comfort and decrease your risk of injury Electrical and mechanical safety information Important regulatory notices, including information about proper battery disposal, if needed. Resource Setup Instructions HP support For HP support, go to http://www.hp.com/support. Safety & Comfort Guide To access this guide:

Select the Start button, select All apps, select HP Help and Support, and then select HP Documentation. or Select the Start button, select All apps, select HP, and then select HP Documentation. or Type support in the taskbar search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. Select My PC, select the Specifications tab, and then select User Guides. or Click the question mark icon in the taskbar. Select My PC, select the Specifications tab, and then select User Guides. or Go to http://www.hp.com/ergo. IMPORTANT: You must be connected to the Internet to access the latest version of the user guide. Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices To access this document:

Select the Start button, select All apps, select HP Help and Support, and then select HP Documentation. or Select the Start button, select All apps, select HP, and then select HP Documentation. or Type support in the taskbar search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. Select My PC, select the Specifications tab, and then select User Guides. or 2 Chapter 1 Starting right Resource Contents Click the question mark icon in the taskbar. Select My PC, select the Specifications tab, and then select User Guides. Specific warranty information about this computer Limited Warranty*

To access this document:

Select the Start button, select All apps, select HP Help and Support, and then select HP Documentation. or Select the Start button, select All apps, select HP, and then select HP Documentation. or Type support in the taskbar search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. Select My PC, select the Specifications tab, and then select User Guides. or Click the question mark icon in the taskbar. Select My PC, select the Specifications tab, and then select User Guides. or Go to http://www.hp.com/go/orderdocuments. IMPORTANT: You must be connected to the Internet to access the latest version of the user guide.

*You can find your HP Limited Warranty located with the user guides on your product and/or on the CD or DVD provided in the box. In some countries or regions, HP may provide a printed warranty in the box. For countries or regions where the warranty is not provided in printed format, you can request a copy from http://www.hp.com/go/orderdocuments. For products purchased in Asia Pacific, you can write to HP at POD, PO Box 161, Kitchener Road Post Office, Singapore 912006. Include your product name, and your name, phone number, and postal address. More HP resources 3 2 Getting to know your computer Locating hardware To find out what hardware is installed on your computer:

Type device manager in the taskbar search box, and then select the Device Manager app. A list displays all the devices installed on your computer. For information about system hardware components and the system BIOS version number, press fn+esc

(select products only). Locating software To find out what software is installed on your computer:

Select the Start button, and then select All apps. or Right-click the Start button, and then select Programs and Features. 4 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer Right side Component

(1) Audio-out (headphone)/Audio-in (microphone) combo jack Description Connects optional powered stereo speakers, headphones, earbuds, a headset, or a television audio cable. Also connects an optional headset microphone. This jack does not support optional standalone microphones. WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, adjust the volume before putting on headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, refer to the Regulatory, Safety, and Environmental Notices. To access this guide:

Select the Start button, select All apps, select HP Help and Support, and then select HP Documentation. NOTE: When a device is connected to the jack, the computer speakers are disabled.

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6) Windows button Opens the Start menu. USB 3.0 port USB 3.0 charging (powered) port HDMI port NOTE: Pressing the Windows button again will close the Start menu. Connects an optional USB device, such as a keyboard, mouse, external drive, printer, scanner, or USB hub. Connects an optional USB device, such as a keyboard, mouse, external drive, printer, scanner or USB hub. Standard USB ports will not charge all USB devices or will charge using a low current. Some USB devices require power and require you to use a powered port. NOTE: USB charging ports can also charge select models of cell phones and MP3 players, even when the computer is off. Connects an optional video or audio device, such as a high-

definition television, any compatible digital or audio component, or a high-speed High-Definition Multimedia Interface (HDMI) device. RJ-45 (network) jack/status lights Connects a network cable.

(7) AC adapter and battery light White: The network is connected. Amber: Activity is occurring on the network. White: The AC adapter is connected and the battery is fully charged. Blinking white: The AC adapter is disconnected and the battery has reached a low battery level. Right side 5 Component Description

(8) Power connector Connects an AC adapter. Amber: The AC adapter is connected and the battery is charging. Off: The battery is not charging. 6 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer Left side Component

(1) Power button Description When the computer is off, press the button to turn on the computer. When the computer is on, press the button briefly to initiate Sleep. When the computer is in the Sleep state, press the button briefly to exit Sleep. When the computer is in Hibernation, press the button briefly to exit Hibernation. CAUTION: Pressing and holding down the power button results in the loss of unsaved information. If the computer has stopped responding and shutdown procedures are ineffective, press and hold the power button down for at least 5 seconds to turn off the computer. To learn more about your power settings, see your power options. Type power in the taskbar search box, and then select Power and sleep settings. or Right-click the Start button, and then select Power Options.

(2) Security cable slot Attaches an optional security cable to the computer. NOTE: The security cable is designed to act as a deterrent, but it may not prevent the computer from being mishandled or stolen.

(3) Vent Enables airflow to cool internal components.

(4)

(5) USB 2.0 port Memory card reader NOTE: The computer fan starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation. Connects an optional USB device, such as a keyboard, mouse, external drive, printer, scanner or USB hub. Reads optional memory cards that enable you to store, manage, share, or access information. To insert a card:

1. Hold the card label-side up, with connectors facing the computer. Left side 7 Component Description 2. Insert the card into the memory card reader, and then press in on the card until it is firmly seated. To remove a card:

Press in on the card, and then remove it from the memory card reader.

(6) Volume button Controls speaker volume on the computer.

(7) Drive light 1. 2. To increase speaker volume, press the edge closest to the hinge. To decrease speaker volume, press the edge closest to the TouchPad. Blinking white: The hard drive is being accessed. Amber: HP 3D DriveGuard has temporarily parked the hard drive. For information about HP 3D DriveGuard, see Using HP NOTE:

3D DriveGuard (select products only) on page 38. 8 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer Display Component

(1)

(2)

(3) Internal microphones (2) Camera light Camera

(4) WLAN antennas*

Description Record sound. On: The camera is in use. Allows you to video chat, record video, and record still images. Some products also provide HD (high-definition) or 3D capability, apps for gaming, or facial recognition software like Windows Hello. For details about Windows Hello, see Securing your computer and information on page 42. To use your camera:

Type camera in the taskbar search box, and then select Camera. Send and receive wireless signals to communicate with wireless local area networks (WLANs).

*The antennas are not visible from the outside of the computer, and antenna location varies. For optimal transmission, keep the areas immediately around the antennas free from obstructions. For wireless regulatory notices, see the section of the Regulatory, Safety, and Environmental Notices that applies to your country or region. To access this guide:

Select the Start button, select All apps, select HP Help and Support, and then select HP Documentation. Display 9 Changing your notebook position (select products only) Your computer can function as a classic notebook, and in addition, the display can be rotated so that the computer transforms into an entertainment stand, an interactive stand, or a tablet. NOTE: The TouchPad and keyboard functions are locked during the entertainment and tablet modes. 10 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer Changing your notebook to an entertainment stand (select products only) To change your notebook to an entertainment stand, raise the display, and then rotate the display backward to a stand position (about 315 degrees). Display 11 Changing your notebook to an interactive stand (select products only) To change your notebook to an interactive stand, raise the display, and then rotate the display backward to a stand position (about 315 degrees). Position the notebook on its edges. Changing your notebook to a tablet (select products only) To change your notebook to a tablet, raise the display, and then rotate the display backward until it is flush with the computer bottom (360 degrees). NOTE: When the computer is in tablet mode, you can use the on-screen keyboard. 12 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer Top TouchPad Component

(1)

(2)

(3) TouchPad zone Description Reads your finger gestures to move the pointer or activate items on the screen. For more information, see Using TouchPad and touch NOTE:

screen gestures on page 27. Left TouchPad button Right TouchPad button Functions like the left button on an external mouse. Functions like the right button on an external mouse. Top 13 Lights Component Description

(1) Caps lock light

(2) Mute light On: Caps lock is on, which switches the key input to all capital letters. Amber: Computer sound is off. Off: Computer sound is on. 14 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer Keys Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6) esc key fn key Displays system information when pressed in combination with the fn key. Executes specific functions when pressed in combination with the esc key. Windows key Opens the Start menu. NOTE: Pressing the Windows key again will close the Start menu. Action keys Execute frequently used system functions. num lock key Integrated numeric keypad NOTE: On select products, the f5 action key turns the keyboard backlight feature off or on. Alternates between the navigational and numeric functions on the integrated numeric keypad. When num lock is on, the keypad can be used like an external numeric keypad. Top 15 Using the action keys An action key performs an assigned function. The icon on each action key illustrates the function for that key. Icon Description Opens the Get started app. Decreases the screen brightness incrementally as long as you hold down the key. Increases the screen brightness incrementally as long as you hold down the key. Switches the screen image between display devices connected to the system. For example, if a monitor is connected to the computer, repeatedly pressing this key alternates the screen image from the computer display to the monitor display to a simultaneous display on both the computer and the monitor. On select products, turns the keyboard backlight off or on. NOTE: To conserve battery power, turn off this feature. Mutes or restores speaker sound. Decreases speaker volume incrementally while you hold down the key. Increases speaker volume incrementally while you hold down the key. Plays the previous track of an audio CD or the previous section of a DVD or a Blu-ray Disc (BD). Starts, pauses, or resumes playback of an audio CD, a DVD, or a BD. Plays the next track of an audio CD or the next section of a DVD or a BD. Turns the airplane mode and wireless feature on or off. NOTE: The airplane mode key is also referred to as the wireless button. NOTE: A wireless network must be set up before a wireless connection is possible. 16 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer Bottom Component

(1)

(2) Vent Enables airflow to cool internal components. Description NOTE: The computer fan starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation. Speakers (2) Produce sound. Bottom 17 Labels The labels affixed to the computer provide information you may need when you troubleshoot system problems or travel internationally with the computer. IMPORTANT: Check the following locations for the labels described in this section: the bottom of the computer, inside the battery bay, under the service door, or on the back of the display. Service labelProvides important information to identify your computer. When contacting support, you will probably be asked for the serial number, and possibly for the product number or the model number. Locate these numbers before you contact support. Your service label will resemble one of the examples shown below. Refer to the illustration that most closely matches the service label on your computer. Component

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) Serial number Product number Warranty period Model number (select products only) Component

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) Model name (select products only) Product number Serial number Warranty period Regulatory label(s)Provide(s) regulatory information about the computer. Wireless certification label(s)Provide(s) information about optional wireless devices and the approval markings for the countries or regions in which the devices have been approved for use. 18 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer 3 Connecting to a network Your computer can travel with you wherever you go. But even at home, you can explore the globe and access information from millions of websites using your computer and a wired or wireless network connection. This chapter will help you get connected to that world. Connecting to a wireless network Your computer may be equipped with one or more of the following wireless devices:

WLAN deviceConnects the computer to wireless local area networks (commonly referred to as Wi-Fi networks, wireless LANs, or WLANs) in corporate offices, your home, and public places such as airports, restaurants, coffee shops, hotels, and universities. In a WLAN, the mobile wireless device in your computer communicates with a wireless router or a wireless access point. HP Mobile Broadband ModuleGives you wireless connectivity over a wireless wide area network

(WWAN), a much larger area. Mobile network operators install base stations (similar to cell phone towers) throughout large geographic areas, effectively providing coverage across entire states, regions, or even countries. Bluetooth deviceCreates a personal area network (PAN) to connect to other Bluetooth-enabled devices such as computers, phones, printers, headsets, speakers, and cameras. In a PAN, each device communicates directly with other devices, and devices must be relatively close togethertypically within 10 meters (approximately 33 feet) of each other. For more information about wireless technology, the Internet, and networking, see the Get started app. Select the Start button, and then select the Get started app. Using the wireless controls You can control the wireless devices in your computer using one or more of these features:

Airplane mode key (also called wireless button or wireless key) (referred to in this chapter as airplane mode key) Operating system controls Airplane mode key The computer may have an airplane mode key, one or more wireless devices, and one or two wireless lights. All the wireless devices on your computer are enabled at the factory. The wireless light indicates the overall power state of your wireless devices, not the status of individual devices. Operating system controls The Network and Sharing Center allows you to set up a connection or network, connect to a network, and diagnose and repair network problems. Connecting to a wireless network 19 To use operating system controls:

1. 2. Type control panel in the taskbar search box, and then select Control Panel. Select Network and Internet, and then select Network and Sharing Center. For more information, see the information provided in the Get started app. Select the Start button, and then select the Get started app. Connecting to a WLAN NOTE: When you are setting up Internet access in your home, you must establish an account with an Internet service provider (ISP). To purchase Internet service and a modem, contact a local ISP. The ISP will help set up the modem, install a network cable to connect your wireless router to the modem, and test the Internet service. To connect to a WLAN, follow these steps:

1. 2. Be sure that the WLAN device is on. Select the network status icon in the taskbar, and then connect to one of the available networks. If the WLAN is a security-enabled WLAN, you are prompted to enter a security code. Enter the code, and then select Next to complete the connection. NOTE:

If no WLANs are listed, you may be out of range of a wireless router or access point. If you do not see the WLAN you want to connect to, right-click the network status icon in the NOTE:

taskbar, and then select Open Network and Sharing Center. Select Set up a new connection or network. A list of options is displayed, allowing you to manually search for and connect to a network or to create a new network connection. 3. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the connection. After the connection is made, select the network status icon at the far right of the taskbar, to verify the name and status of the connection. NOTE: The functional range (how far your wireless signals travel) depends on WLAN implementation, router manufacturer, and interference from other electronic devices or structural barriers such as walls and floors. Using HP Mobile Broadband (select products only) Your HP Mobile Broadband computer has built-in support for mobile broadband service. Your new computer, when used with a mobile operators network, gives you the freedom to connect to the Internet, send e-mail, or connect to your corporate network without the need for Wi-Fi hotspots. You might need the HP Mobile Broadband Module IMEI and/or MEID number to activate mobile broadband service. The number may be printed on a label located on the bottom of your computer, inside the battery bay, under the service door, or on the back of the display. or You can find the number following these steps:

1. 2. 3. From the taskbar, select the network status icon. Select View Connection Settings. Under the Mobile broadband section, select the network status icon. 20 Chapter 3 Connecting to a network Some mobile network operators require the use of a subscriber identity module (SIM) card. A SIM card contains basic information about you, such as a personal identification number (PIN), as well as network information. Some computers include a SIM card that is preinstalled. If the SIM card is not preinstalled, it may be included with the HP Mobile Broadband documents provided with your computer, or the mobile network operator may provide it separately from the computer. For information about HP Mobile Broadband and how to activate service with a preferred mobile network operator, see the HP Mobile Broadband information included with your computer. Using GPS (select products only) Your computer may be equipped with a Global Positioning System (GPS) device. GPS satellites deliver location, speed, and direction information to GPS-equipped systems. To enable GPS, make sure location is enabled under the Windows privacy setting. 1. 2. Type location in the taskbar search box, and then select Location privacy settings. Follow the on-screen instructions for using location settings. For more information, see the Get started app. Select the Start button, and then select the Get started app. Using Bluetooth wireless devices (select products only) A Bluetooth device provides short-range wireless communications that replace the physical cable connections that traditionally link electronic devices such as the following:

Computers (desktop, notebook) Phones (cellular, cordless, smartphone) Imaging devices (printer, camera) Audio devices (headset, speakers) Mouse External keyboard Bluetooth devices provide peer-to-peer capability that allows you to set up a PAN of Bluetooth devices. For information about configuring and using Bluetooth devices, see the Get started app. Select the Start button, and then select the Get started app. Connecting Bluetooth devices Before you can use a Bluetooth device, you must establish a Bluetooth connection. 1. 2. 3. Type bluetooth in the taskbar search box, and then select Bluetooth settings. Turn on Bluetooth, if it is not already turned on. Select your device from the list, and then follow the on-screen instructions. If the device requires verification, a pairing code is displayed. On the device you are adding, follow NOTE:

the on-screen instructions to verify that the code on your device matches the pairing code. For more information, refer to the documentation provided with the device. NOTE:

devices may have additional requirements; refer to the documentation provided with the device. If your device does not appear in the list, be sure that Bluetooth on that device is turned on. Some Connecting to a wireless network 21 Connecting to a wired networkLAN (select products only) Use a LAN connection if you want to connect the computer directly to a router in your home (instead of working wirelessly), or if you want to connect to an existing network at your office. Connecting to a LAN requires an 8-pin, RJ-45 (network) cable and a network jack or an optional docking device or expansion port, if there is no RJ-45 jack on the computer. To connect the network cable, follow these steps:

1. 2. Plug the network cable into the network jack (1) on the computer. Plug the other end of the network cable into a network wall jack (2) or router. If the network cable contains noise suppression circuitry (3), which prevents interference from NOTE:

TV and radio reception, orient the circuitry end of the cable toward the computer. Sharing data and drives and accessing software When your computer is part of a network, you are not limited to using only the information that is stored in your computer. Computers connected to the network can exchange software and data with each other. For more information about sharing files, folders, or drives, see the information provided in the Get started app. Select the Start button, and then select the Get started app. NOTE: When a disc like a DVD movie or game is copy-protected, it cannot be shared. 22 Chapter 3 Connecting to a network 4 Enjoying entertainment features Use your HP computer as an entertainment hub to socialize via the camera, enjoy and manage your music, and download and watch movies. Or, to make your computer an even more powerful entertainment center, connect external devices like a monitor, projector, TV, speakers, or headphones. Using the camera Your computer has one or more cameras that enable you to connect with others for work or play. Cameras may be front facing, rear facing, or pop up. See Getting to know your computer on page 4 for camera details. Most cameras allow you to video chat, record video, and record still images. Some also provide HD (high-

definition) or 3D capability, apps for gaming, or facial recognition software like Windows Hello. See Securing your computer and information on page 42 for details about using Windows Hello. To use your camera:

Type camera in the taskbar search box, and then select Camera from the list of applications. Using audio On your computer, or on select products using an external optical drive, you can play music CDs, download and listen to music, stream audio content from the web (including radio), record audio, or mix audio and video to create multimedia. To enhance your listening enjoyment, attach external audio devices such as speakers or headphones. Connecting speakers You can attach wired speakers to your computer by connecting them to a USB port or to the audio-out

(headphone)/audio-in (microphone) combo jack on your computer or on a docking station. To connect wireless speakers to your computer, follow the device manufacturer's instructions. To connect high-definition speakers to the computer, see Setting up HDMI audio on page 25. Before connecting speakers, lower the volume setting. Connecting headsets WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, lower the volume setting before putting on headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, see the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices. To access this document:

Select the Start button, select All apps, select HP Help and Support, and then select HP Documentation. Headphones combined with a microphone are called headsets. You can connect wired headsets to the audio-

out (headphone)/audio-in (microphone) combo jack on your computer. To connect wireless headsets to your computer, follow the device manufacturer's instructions. Using the camera 23 Using sound settings Use sound settings to adjust system volume, change system sounds, or manage audio devices. To view or change sound settings:

Type control panel in the taskbar search box, select Control Panel, select Hardware and Sound, and then select Sound. or Right-click the Start button, select Control Panel, select Hardware and Sound, and then select Sound. Your computer may include an enhanced sound system by Bang & Olufsen, B&O Play, DTS, or another provider. As a result, your computer may include advanced audio features that can be controlled through an audio control panel specific to your sound system. Use the audio control panel to view and control audio settings. Type control panel in the taskbar search box, select Control Panel, select Hardware and Sound, and then select the audio control panel specific to your system. or Right-click the Start button, select Control Panel, select Hardware and Sound, and then select the audio control panel specific to your system. Using video Your computer is a powerful video device that enables you to watch streaming video from your favorite websites and download video and movies to watch on your computer when you are not connected to a network. To enhance your viewing enjoyment, use one of the video ports on the computer to connect an external monitor, projector, or TV. IMPORTANT: Be sure that the external device is connected to the correct port on the computer, using the correct cable. Follow the device manufacturer's instructions. For information on using your video features, refer to HP Support Assistant. 24 Chapter 4 Enjoying entertainment features Connecting video devices using an HDMI cable NOTE: To connect an HDMI device to your computer, you need an HDMI cable, purchased separately. To see the computer screen image on a high-definition TV or monitor, connect the high-definition device according to the following instructions:

1. Connect one end of the HDMI cable to the HDMI port on the computer. 2. 3. Connect the other end of the cable to the high-definition TV or monitor. Press f4 to alternate the computer screen image between 4 display states:

PC screen only: View the screen image on the computer only. Duplicate: View the screen image simultaneously on both the computer and the external device. Extend: View the screen image extended across both the computer and the external device. Second screen only: View the screen image on the external device only. Each time you press f4, the display state changes. NOTE:

For best results, especially if you choose the "Extend" option, increase the screen resolution of the external device, as follows. Type control panel in the taskbar search box, select Control Panel, and then select Appearance and Personalization. Under Display, select Adjust resolution. Setting up HDMI audio HDMI is the only video interface that supports high-definition video and audio. After you connect an HDMI TV to the computer, you can then turn on HDMI audio by following these steps:

1. 2. 3. Right-click the Speakers icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, and then select Playback devices. On the Playback tab, select the name of the digital output device. Click Set Default, and then click OK. Using video 25 To return the audio stream to the computer speakers:

1. 2. 3. Right-click the Speakers icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, and then click Playback devices. On the Playback tab, click Speakers. Click Set Default, and then click OK. Discovering and connecting to Miracast-compatible wireless displays (select products only) NOTE: To learn what type of display you have (Miracast-compatible or Intel WiDi), refer to the documentation that came with your TV or secondary display device. To discover and connect to Miracast-compatible wireless displays without leaving your current apps, follow the steps below. To open Miracast:

Type project in the taskbar search box, and then click Project to a second screen. Click Connect to a wireless display, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Discovering and connecting to Intel WiDi certified displays (select Intel products only) Use Intel WiDi to wirelessly project individual files such as photos, music, or videos, or to duplicate your entire computer screen to a TV or a secondary display device. Intel WiDi, a premium Miracast solution, makes it easy and seamless to pair your secondary display device;

provides for full-screen duplication; and improves speed, quality, and scaling. To connect to Intel WiDi certified displays:

Type project in the taskbar search box, and then click Project to a second screen. Click Connect to a wireless display, and then follow the on-screen instructions. To open Intel WiDi:

Type Intel WiDi in the taskbar search box, and then click Intel WiDi. 26 Chapter 4 Enjoying entertainment features 5 Navigating the screen You can navigate the computer screen in the following ways:

Use touch gestures directly on the computer screen (select products only) Use touch gestures on the TouchPad Use keyboard and optional mouse (mouse purchased separately) Use an on-screen keyboard (select products only) Using TouchPad and touch screen gestures The TouchPad helps you navigate the computer screen and control the pointer using simple touch gestures. You can also use the left and right TouchPad buttons as you would use the corresponding buttons on an external mouse. To navigate a touch screen (select products only), touch the screen directly using gestures described in this chapter. You can also customize gestures and view demonstrations of how they work. Type control panel in the taskbar search box, select Control Panel, and then select Hardware and Sound. Under Devices and Printers, select Mouse. NOTE: Unless noted, gestures can be used on the TouchPad or a touch screen (select products only). Tap Use the tap/double-tap gesture to select or open an item on the screen. Point to an item on the screen, and then tap one finger on the TouchPad zone or touch screen to select the item. Double-tap an item to open it. Using TouchPad and touch screen gestures 27 Two-finger pinch zoom Use the two-finger pinch zoom to zoom out or in on images or text. Zoom out by placing two fingers apart on the TouchPad zone or touch screen and then moving your fingers together. Zoom in by placing two fingers together on the TouchPad zone or touch screen and then moving your fingers apart. Two-finger slide (TouchPad only) Use the two-finger slide to move up, down, or sideways on a page or image. Place two fingers slightly apart on the TouchPad zone and then drag them up, down, left, or right. Two-finger tap (TouchPad only) Use the two-finger tap to open the menu for an object on the screen. NOTE: The two-finger tap performs the same function as right-clicking with the mouse. Tap two fingers on the TouchPad zone to open the options menu for the selected object. 28 Chapter 5 Navigating the screen Four-finger tap (TouchPad only) Use the four-finger tap to open the action center. Tap four fingers on the Touchpad to open the action center and view current settings and notifications. Three-finger swipe (TouchPad only) Use the three-finger swipe to view open windows and to switch between open windows and the desktop. Swipe 3 fingers away from you to see all open windows. Swipe 3 fingers toward you to show the desktop. Swipe 3 fingers left or right to switch between open windows. One-finger slide (touch screen only) Use the one-finger slide to pan or scroll through lists and pages, or to move an object. To scroll across the screen, lightly slide one finger across the screen in the direction you want to move. To move an object, press and hold your finger on an object, and then drag your finger to move the object. Using TouchPad and touch screen gestures 29 Using the keyboard and optional mouse The keyboard and optional mouse allow you to type, select items, scroll and to perform the same functions as you do using touch gestures. The keyboard also allows you to use action keys and key combinations to perform specific functions. NOTE: Depending on the country or region, your keyboard may have different keys and keyboard functions than those discussed in this section. Using the on-screen keyboard The computer has an on-screen keyboard that is displayed when you are in tablet mode. 1. 2. To display the on-screen keyboard, tap the keyboard icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. Begin typing. To access settings for the on-screen keyboard, select the Start button, select Settings, select Devices, and then select Typing. NOTE: Action keys do not display or function on the on-screen keyboard. NOTE: Suggested words may be displayed above the on-screen keyboard. Tap a word to select it. Using the integrated numeric keypad The computer includes an integrated numeric keypad, and it also supports an optional external numeric keypad or an optional external keyboard that includes a numeric keypad. For more details about the integrated numeric keypad, see Keys on page 15. Component Description num lock key Integrated numeric keypad Controls the function of the integrated numeric keypad. Press the key to alternate between the standard numeric function found on an external keypad (this function is turned on at the factory) and the navigational function (indicated by the directional arrows on the keys). NOTE: The keypad function that is active when the computer is turned off, is reinstated when the computer is turned back on. Set at the factory to function like an external numeric keypad. To alternate between this numeric function and the navigational function (indicated by the directional arrow keys), press the num lock key. 30 Chapter 5 Navigating the screen 6 Managing power Your computer can operate on either battery power or external power. When the computer is running on battery power only and an AC power source is not available to charge the battery, it is important to monitor and conserve the battery charge. Initiating and exiting Sleep and Hibernation CAUTION: Several well-known vulnerabilities exist when a computer is in the Sleep state. To prevent an unauthorized user from accessing data on your computer, even encrypted data, HP recommends that you always initiate Hibernation instead of Sleep anytime the computer will be out of your physical possession. This practice is particularly important when you travel with your computer. Windows has two power-saving states, Sleep and Hibernation. SleepThe Sleep state is automatically initiated after a period of inactivity. Your work is saved to memory, allowing you to resume your work very quickly. You can also initiate Sleep manually. For more information, see Manually initiating and exiting Sleep on page 32. HibernationThe Hibernation state is automatically initiated if the battery reaches a critical level. In the Hibernation state, your work is saved to a hibernation file and the computer powers down. You can also initiate Hibernation manually. For more information, see Manually initiating and exiting Hibernation

(select products only) on page 32. CAUTION: To reduce the risk of possible audio and video degradation, loss of audio or video playback functionality, or loss of information, do not initiate the Sleep state while reading from or writing to a disc or an external media card. Initiating and exiting Sleep and Hibernation 31 Manually initiating and exiting Sleep You can initiate Sleep in any of the following ways:

Close the display. Select the Start button, select the Power icon, and then select Sleep. You can exit Sleep in any of the following ways:

Briefly press the power button. If the computer is closed, raise the display. Press a key on the keyboard. Tap the TouchPad. When the computer exits Sleep, your work returns to the screen. NOTE:

before your work returns to the screen. If you have set a password to be required on exiting Sleep, you must enter your Windows password Manually initiating and exiting Hibernation (select products only) You can enable user-initiated Hibernation and change other power settings and timeouts using Power Options. 1. 2. 3. Type power options in the taskbar search box, and then select Power Options. or Right-click the Power meter icon

, and then select Power Options. In the left pane, select Choose what the power button does. Select Change Settings that are currently unavailable, and then, in the When I press the power button area, select Hibernate. or Under Shutdown settings, select the Hibernate box to show the Hibernate option in the Power menu. 4. Select Save changes. To exit Hibernation:

Briefly press the power button. When the computer exits Hibernation, your work returns to the screen. NOTE:

password before your work returns to the screen. If you have set a password to be required on exiting Hibernation, you must enter your Windows Setting password protection on wakeup (exiting Sleep or Hibernation) To set the computer to prompt for a password when the computer exits Sleep or Hibernation, follow these steps:

1. Type power options in the taskbar search box, and then select Power Options. or 32 Chapter 6 Managing power Right-click the Power meter icon

, and then select Power Options. 2. 3. 4. In the left pane, select Require a password on wakeup. Select Change Settings that are currently unavailable. Select Require a password (recommended). NOTE: To create a user account password or change your current user account password, select Create or change your user account password, and then follow the on-screen instructions. If you do not need to create or change a user account password, go to step 5. 5. Select Save changes. Using the power meter and power settings The power meter is located on the Windows taskbar. The power meter allows you to quickly access power settings and view the remaining battery charge. To view the percentage of remaining battery charge and the current power plan, place the mouse pointer over the power meter icon

. To use Power Options, rightclick the power meter icon can also type power options in the task bar search box, and then select Power Options.

, and then select an item from the list. You Different power meter icons indicate whether the computer is running on battery or external power. Placing the mouse pointer over the icon reveals a message if the battery has reached a low or critical battery level. Running on battery power When a charged battery is in the computer and the computer is not plugged into external power, the computer runs on battery power. When the computer is off and unplugged from external power, the battery in the computer slowly discharges. The computer displays a message when the battery reaches a low or critical battery level. Computer battery life varies, depending on power management settings, programs running on the computer, screen brightness, external devices connected to the computer, and other factors. Factory-sealed battery To monitor the status of the battery, or if the battery is no longer holding a charge, run HP Battery Check in the HP Support Assistant app. 1. 2. Type support in the taskbar search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. or Click the question mark icon in the taskbar. Select My PC, select the Diagnostics and tools tab, and then select HP Battery Check. If HP Battery Check indicates that your battery should be replaced, contact support. The battery[ies] in this product cannot be easily replaced by users themselves. Removing or replacing the battery could affect your warranty coverage. If a battery is no longer holding a charge, contact support. When Using the power meter and power settings 33 a battery has reached the end of its useful life, do not dispose of the battery in general household waste. Follow the local laws and regulations in your area for battery disposal. Finding battery information To access battery information:

1. 2. Type support in the taskbar search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. or Click the question mark icon in the taskbar. Select My PC, select the Diagnostics and tools tab, and then select HP Battery Check. If HP Battery Check indicates that your battery should be replaced, contact support. HP Support Assistant provides the following tools and information about the battery:

HP Battery Check Information about battery types, specifications, life cycles, and capacity Conserving battery power To conserve battery power and maximize battery life:

Lower the brightness of the display. Select the Power saver setting in Power Options. Turn off wireless devices when you are not using them. Disconnect unused external devices that are not plugged into an external power source, such as an external hard drive connected to a USB port. Stop, disable, or remove any external media cards that you are not using. Before you leave your work, initiate Sleep or shut down the computer. Identifying low battery levels When a battery that is the sole power source for the computer reaches a low or critical battery level, the following behavior occurs:

The battery light (select products only) indicates a low or critical battery level. or The power meter icon shows a low or critical battery notification. NOTE:

settings on page 33. For additional information about the power meter, see Using the power meter and power The computer takes the following actions for a critical battery level:

If Hibernation is disabled and the computer is on or in the Sleep state, the computer remains briefly in the Sleep state and then shuts down and loses any unsaved information. If Hibernation is enabled and the computer is on or in the Sleep state, the computer initiates Hibernation. 34 Chapter 6 Managing power Resolving a low battery level Resolving a low battery level when external power is available Connect one of the following to the computer and to external power:

AC adapter Optional docking or expansion device Optional power adapter purchased as an accessory from HP Resolving a low battery level when no power source is available Save your work and shut down the computer. Resolving a low battery level when the computer cannot exit Hibernation 1. 2. Connect the AC adapter to the computer and to external power. Exit Hibernation by pressing the power button. Running on AC power For information about connecting to AC power, refer to the Setup Instructions poster provided in the computer box. The computer does not use battery power when the computer is connected to AC power with an approved AC adapter or an optional docking/expansion device. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, use only the AC adapter provided with the computer, a replacement AC adapter provided by HP, or a compatible AC adapter purchased from HP. Connect the computer to AC power under any of the following conditions:

WARNING! Do not charge the computer battery while you are aboard aircraft. When charging or calibrating a battery When installing or modifying system software When writing information to a disc (select products only) When running Disk Defragmenter on computers with internal hard drives When performing a backup or recovery When you connect the computer to AC power:

The battery begins to charge. The screen brightness increases. The power meter icon changes appearance. When you disconnect AC power:

Running on AC power 35 The computer switches to battery power. The screen brightness automatically decreases to save battery life. The power meter icon changes appearance. Troubleshooting power problems Test the AC adapter if the computer exhibits any of the following symptoms when it is connected to AC power:

The computer does not turn on. The display does not turn on. The power lights do not turn on. To test the AC adapter:

1. 2. 3. Shut down the computer. Connect the AC adapter to the computer and to the power cord, and then plug the power cord into an AC outlet. Turn on the computer. If the power lights turn on, the AC adapter is working properly. If the power lights remain off, check the connection from the AC adapter to the computer and the connection from the power cord to the AC outlet to be sure that the connections are secure. If the connections are secure and the power lights remain off, the AC adapter is not functioning and should be replaced. Contact support for information about obtaining a replacement AC power adapter. Shutting down (turning off) the computer CAUTION: Unsaved information is lost when the computer shuts down. Be sure to save your work before shutting down the computer. The Shut down command closes all open programs, including the operating system, and then turns off the display and computer. Shut down the computer under any of the following conditions:

When you need to access components inside the computer When you are connecting an external hardware device that does not connect to a USB or video port When the computer will be unused and disconnected from external power for an extended period Although you can turn off the computer with the power button, the recommended procedure is to use the Windows Shut down command. NOTE:

pressing the power button. If the computer is in the Sleep state or in Hibernation, first exit Sleep or Hibernation by briefly 1. 2. Save your work and close all open programs. Select the Start button, select the Power icon, and then select Shut down. 36 Chapter 6 Managing power If the computer is unresponsive and you are unable to use the preceding shutdown procedures, try the following emergency procedures in the sequence provided:

Press ctrl+alt+delete, select the Power icon, and then select Shut down. Press and hold the power button for at least 10 seconds. Disconnect the computer from external power. Shutting down (turning off) the computer 37 7 Maintaining your computer It is important to perform regular maintenance to keep your computer in optimal condition. This chapter explains how to use tools like Disk Defragmenter and Disk Cleanup. It also provides instructions for updating programs and drivers, steps to clean the computer, and tips for traveling with (or shipping) the computer. Improving performance You can improve the performance of your computer by performing regular maintenance tasks with tools such as Disk Defragmenter and Disk Cleanup. Using Disk Defragmenter HP recommends using Disk Defragmenter to defragment your hard drive at least once a month. NOTE:

It is not necessary to run Disk Defragmenter on solid-state drives. To run Disk Defragmenter:

1. 2. 3. Connect the computer to AC power. Type defragment in the taskbar search box, and then select Defragment and optimize your drives. Follow the on-screen instructions. For additional information, access the Disk Defragmenter software Help. Using Disk Cleanup Use Disk Cleanup to search the hard drive for unnecessary files that you can safely delete to free up disk space and help the computer run more efficiently. To run Disk Cleanup:

1. 2. Type disk in the taskbar search box, and then select Free up disk space by deleting unnecessary files or Uninstall apps to free up disk space. Follow the on-screen instructions. Using HP 3D DriveGuard (select products only) HP 3D DriveGuard protects a hard drive by parking the drive and halting data requests under either of the following conditions:

You drop the computer. You move the computer with the display closed while the computer is running on battery power. A short time after the end of one of these events, HP 3D DriveGuard returns the hard drive to normal operation. NOTE: Only internal hard drives are protected by HP 3D DriveGuard. A hard drive installed in an optional docking device or connected to a USB port is not protected by HP 3D DriveGuard. 38 Chapter 7 Maintaining your computer NOTE: Because solid-state drives (SSDs) lack moving parts, HP 3D DriveGuard is unnecessary for these drives. For more information, see the HP 3D DriveGuard software Help. Identifying HP 3D DriveGuard status The hard drive light on the computer changes color to show that the drive in a primary hard drive bay and/or the drive in a secondary hard drive bay (select products only) is parked. To determine whether a drive is currently protected or whether it is parked, view the icon on the Windows desktop in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. Updating programs and drivers HP recommends that you update your programs and drivers on a regular basis. Updates can resolve issues and bring new features and options to your computer. For example, older graphics components might not work well with the most recent gaming software. Without the latest driver, you would not be getting the most out of your equipment. Go to http://www.hp.com/support to download the latest versions of HP programs and drivers. In addition, register to receive automatic notifications when updates become available. If you would like to update your programs and drivers, follow these instructions:

1. 2. 3. Type support in the taskbar search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app.

- or -

Click the question mark icon in the taskbar. Select My PC, select the Updates tab, and then select Check for updates and messages. Follow the on-screen instructions. Cleaning your computer Use the following products to safely clean your computer:

Dimethyl benzyl ammonium chloride 0.3 percent maximum concentration (for example, disposable wipes, which come in a variety of brands) Alcohol-free glass-cleaning fluid Solution of water and mild soap Dry microfiber cleaning cloth or a chamois (static-free cloth without oil) Static-free cloth wipes CAUTION: Avoid strong cleaning solvents that can permanently damage your computer. If you are not sure that a cleaning product is safe for your computer, check the product contents to make sure that ingredients such as alcohol, acetone, ammonium chloride, methylene chloride, and hydrocarbons are not included in the product. Fibrous materials, such as paper towels, can scratch the computer. Over time, dirt particles and cleaning agents can get trapped in the scratches. Cleaning procedures Follow the procedures in this section to safely clean your computer. Updating programs and drivers 39 WARNING! To prevent electric shock or damage to components, do not attempt to clean your computer while it is on. 1. 2. 3. Turn off the computer. Disconnect AC power. Disconnect all powered external devices. CAUTION: To prevent damage to internal components, do not spray cleaning agents or liquids directly on any computer surface. Liquids dripped on the surface can permanently damage internal components. Cleaning the display Gently wipe the display using a soft, lint-free cloth moistened with an alcohol-free glass cleaner. Be sure that a display is dry before you close the computer. Cleaning the sides or cover To clean the sides or cover, use a soft microfiber cloth or chamois moistened with one of the cleaning solutions listed previously, or use an acceptable disposable wipe. NOTE: When cleaning the cover of the computer, use a circular motion to aid in removing dirt and debris. Cleaning the TouchPad, keyboard, or mouse (select products only) WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to internal components, do not use a vacuum cleaner attachment to clean the keyboard. A vacuum cleaner can deposit household debris on the keyboard surface. CAUTION: To prevent damage to internal components, do not allow liquids to drip between the keys. To clean the TouchPad, keyboard, or mouse, use a soft microfiber cloth or a chamois moistened with one of the cleaning solutions listed previously or use an acceptable disposable wipe. To prevent keys from sticking and to remove dust, lint, and particles from the keyboard, use a can of compressed air with a straw extension. Traveling with or shipping your computer If you have to travel with or ship your computer, follow these tips to keep your equipment safe. Prepare the computer for traveling or shipping:

Back up your information to an external drive. Remove all discs and all external media cards, such as memory cards. Turn off and then disconnect all external devices. Shut down the computer. Take along a backup of your information. Keep the backup separate from the computer. When traveling by air, carry the computer as hand luggage; do not check it in with the rest of your luggage. CAUTION: Avoid exposing a drive to magnetic fields. Security devices with magnetic fields include airport walk-through devices and security wands. Airport conveyer belts and similar security devices that check carry-on baggage use X-rays instead of magnetism and do not damage drives. 40 Chapter 7 Maintaining your computer If you plan to use the computer during a flight, listen for the in-flight announcement that tells you when you are allowed to use your computer. In-flight computer use is at the discretion of the airline. If you are shipping the computer or a drive, use suitable protective packaging and label the package FRAGILE. The use of wireless devices may be restricted in some environments. Such restrictions may apply aboard aircraft, in hospitals, near explosives, and in hazardous locations. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of a wireless device in your computer, ask for authorization to use your computer before you turn it on. If you are traveling internationally, follow these suggestions:

Check the computer-related customs regulations for each country or region on your itinerary. Check the power cord and adapter requirements for each location in which you plan to use the computer. Voltage, frequency, and plug configurations vary. WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not attempt to power the computer with a voltage converter kit sold for appliances. Traveling with or shipping your computer 41 8 Securing your computer and information Computer security is essential for protecting the confidentiality, integrity, and availability of your information. Standard security solutions provided by the Windows operating system, HP applications, the Setup Utility (BIOS), and other third-party software can help protect your computer from a variety of risks, such as viruses, worms, and other types of malicious code. IMPORTANT: Some security features listed in this chapter may not be available on your computer. Using passwords A password is a group of characters that you choose to secure your computer information and to protect online transactions. Several types of passwords can be set. For example, when you set up your computer for the first time, you were asked to create a user password to secure your computer. Additional passwords can be set in Windows or in HP Setup Utility (BIOS), which is preinstalled on your computer. You may find it helpful to use the same password for a Setup Utility (BIOS) feature and for a Windows security feature. To create and save passwords, use the following tips:

To reduce the risk of being locked out of the computer, record each password and store it in a secure place away from the computer. Do not store passwords in a file on the computer. When creating passwords, follow requirements set by the program. Change your passwords at least every 3 months. An ideal password is long and has letters, punctuation, symbols, and numbers. Before you send your computer for service, back up your files, delete confidential files, and then remove all password settings. For additional information about Windows passwords, such as screen-saver passwords:

Type support in the taskbar search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. or Click the question mark icon in the taskbar. Setting Windows passwords Password User password Function Protects access to a Windows user account. Administrator password Protects administrator-level access to computer contents. NOTE: This password cannot be used to access Setup Utility

(BIOS) contents. 42 Chapter 8 Securing your computer and information Setting Setup Utility (BIOS) passwords Password Administrator password Power-on password Function Must be entered each time you access Setup Utility (BIOS). If you forget your administrator password, you cannot access Setup Utility (BIOS). Must be entered each time you turn on or restart the computer. If you forget your power-on password, you cannot turn on or restart the computer. To set, change, or delete an administrator or power-on password in Setup Utility (BIOS):

CAUTION: Use extreme care when making changes in Setup Utility (BIOS). Errors can prevent the computer from operating properly. NOTE: To start Setup Utility, your computer must be in notebook mode and you must use the keyboard attached to your notebook. The on-screen keyboard, which displays in tablet mode, cannot access Setup Utility. 1. Start Setup Utility (BIOS):

Computers or tablets with keyboards:

Turn on or restart the computer, quickly press esc, and then press f10. Tablets without keyboards:

1. Turn on or restart the tablet, and then quickly hold down the volume down button.

- or -

Turn on or restart the tablet, and then quickly hold down the Windows button. 2. Tap f10. 2. Select Security, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Your changes take effect when the computer restarts. Using Windows Hello (select products only) On products equipped with a fingerprint reader or an infrared camera, you can use Windows Hello to sign in by swiping your finger or looking at the camera. To set up Windows Hello, follow these steps:

1. 2. Select the Start button, select Settings, select Accounts, and then select Sign-in options. Under Windows Hello, follow the on-screen instructions to add both a password and a 4-digit PIN, and then enroll your fingerprint or facial ID. Using Internet security software When you use your computer to access email, a network, or the Internet, you potentially expose your computer to computer viruses, spyware, and other online threats. To help protect your computer, Internet Using Windows Hello (select products only) 43 security software that includes antivirus and firewall features may be preinstalled on your computer as a trial offer. To provide ongoing protection against newly discovered viruses and other security risks, security software must be kept up to date. It is strongly recommended that you upgrade the security software trial offer or purchase the software of your choice in order to fully protect your computer. Using antivirus software Computer viruses can disable programs, utilities, or the operating system, or cause them to function abnormally. Antivirus software can detect most viruses, destroy them, and in most cases, repair any damage they have caused. To provide ongoing protection against newly discovered viruses, antivirus software must be kept up to date. An antivirus program may be preinstalled on your computer. It is strongly recommended that you use the antivirus program of your choice in order to fully protect your computer. For more information about computer viruses, type support in the taskbar search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. or Click the question mark icon in the taskbar. Using firewall software Firewalls are designed to prevent unauthorized access to a system or network. A firewall can be software you install on your computer and/or network, or it can be a combination of both hardware and software. There are two types of firewalls to consider:

Host-based firewallsSoftware that protects only the computer it is installed on. Network-based firewallsInstalled between your DSL or cable modem and your home network to protect all the computers on the network. When a firewall is installed on a system, all data sent to and from the system is monitored and compared with a set of user-defined security criteria. Any data that does not meet those criteria is blocked. Installing software updates HP, Windows, and third-party software installed on your computer should be regularly updated to correct security problems and improve software performance. CAUTION: Microsoft sends out alerts regarding Windows updates, which may include security updates. To protect the computer from security breaches and computer viruses, install all updates from Microsoft as soon as you receive an alert. You can install these updates automatically. To view or change the settings:

1. 2. 3. Select the Start button, select Settings, and then select Update & Security. Select Windows Update, and then follow the on-screen instructions. To schedule a time for installing updates, select Advanced Options, and then follow the on-screen instructions. 44 Chapter 8 Securing your computer and information Using HP Touchpoint Manager (select products only) HP Touchpoint Manager is a cloud-based IT solution that enables businesses to effectively manage and secure their company assets. HP Touchpoint Manager helps protect devices against malware and other attacks, monitors device health, and enables you to reduce time spent solving end-user device and security issues. You can quickly download and install the software, which is highly cost effective relative to traditional in-house solutions. Securing your wireless network When you set up a WLAN or access an existing WLAN, always enable security features to protect your network from unauthorized access. WLANs in public areas (hotspots) like coffee shops and airports may not provide any security. Backing up your software applications and information Regularly back up your software applications and information to protect them from being permanently lost or damaged through a virus attack or a software or hardware failure. Using an optional security cable (select products only) A security cable (purchased separately) is designed to act as a deterrent, but it may not prevent the computer from being mishandled or stolen. To connect a security cable to your computer, follow the device manufacturer's instructions. Using HP Touchpoint Manager (select products only) 45 9 Using Setup Utility (BIOS) Setup Utility, or Basic Input/Output System (BIOS), controls communication between all the input and output devices on the system (such as disk drives, display, keyboard, mouse, and printer). Setup Utility (BIOS) includes settings for the types of devices installed, the startup sequence of the computer, and the amount of system and extended memory. NOTE: To start Setup Utility on convertible computers, your computer must be in notebook mode and you must use the keyboard attached to your notebook. Starting Setup Utility (BIOS) CAUTION: Use extreme care when making changes in Setup Utility (BIOS). Errors can prevent the computer from operating properly. Turn on or restart the computer, quickly press esc, and then press f10. Updating Setup Utility (BIOS) Updated versions of Setup Utility (BIOS) may be available on the HP website. Most BIOS updates on the HP website are packaged in compressed files called SoftPaqs. Some download packages contain a file named Readme.txt, which contains information regarding installing and troubleshooting the file. Determining the BIOS version To decide whether you need to update Setup Utility (BIOS), first determine the BIOS version on your computer. To reveal the BIOS version information (also known as ROM date and System BIOS), use one of these options. HP Support Assistant 1. Type support in the taskbar search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. or Click the question mark icon in the taskbar. 2. Select My PC, and then select Specifications. Setup Utility (BIOS) 1. 2. 3. Start Setup Utility (BIOS) (see Starting Setup Utility (BIOS) on page 46). Select Main, select System Information, and then make note of the BIOS version. Select Exit, select No, and then follow the on-screen instructions. To check for later BIOS versions, see Downloading a BIOS update on page 47. 46 Chapter 9 Using Setup Utility (BIOS) Downloading a BIOS update CAUTION: To reduce the risk of damage to the computer or an unsuccessful installation, download and install a BIOS update only when the computer is connected to reliable external power using the AC adapter. Do not download or install a BIOS update while the computer is running on battery power, docked in an optional docking device, or connected to an optional power source. During the download and installation, follow these instructions:

Do not disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet. Do not insert, remove, connect, or disconnect any device, cable, or cord. Do not shut down the computer or initiate Sleep. NOTE:

software updates, especially system BIOS updates. If your computer is connected to a network, consult the network administrator before installing any 1. 2. 3. 4. Type support in the taskbar search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. or Click the question mark icon in the taskbar. Click Updates, and then click Check for updates and messages. Follow the on-screen instructions. At the download area, follow these steps:

a. Identify the most recent BIOS update and compare it to the BIOS version currently installed on your computer. If the update is more recent than your BIOS version, make a note of the date, name, or other identifier. You may need this information to locate the update later, after it has been downloaded to your hard drive. b. Follow the on-screen instructions to download your selection to the hard drive. Make a note of the path to the location on your hard drive where the BIOS update is downloaded. You will need to access this path when you are ready to install the update. BIOS installation procedures vary. Follow any instructions that appear on the screen after the download is complete. If no instructions appear, follow these steps:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Type file in the taskbar search box, and then select File Explorer. Click your hard drive designation. The hard drive designation is typically Local Disk (C:). Using the hard drive path you recorded earlier, open the folder that contains the update. Double-click the file that has an .exe extension (for example, filename.exe). The BIOS installation begins. Complete the installation by following the on-screen instructions. NOTE: After a message on the screen reports a successful installation, you can delete the downloaded file from your hard drive. Updating Setup Utility (BIOS) 47 10 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) HP PC Hardware Diagnostics is a Unified Extensible Firmware Interface (UEFI) that allows you to run diagnostic tests to determine whether the computer hardware is functioning properly. The tool runs outside the operating system so that it can isolate hardware failures from issues that are caused by the operating system or other software components. When HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) detects a failure that requires hardware replacement, a 24-digit Failure ID code is generated. This ID code can then be provided to support to help determine how to correct the problem. NOTE: To start diagnostics on a convertible computer, your computer must be in notebook mode and you must use the keyboard attached. To start HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI), follow these steps:

1. 2. Turn on or restart the computer, and quickly press esc. Press f2. The BIOS searches three places for the diagnostic tools, in the following order:

a. Connected USB drive NOTE: To download the HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) tool to a USB drive, see Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) to a USB device on page 48. b. c. Hard drive BIOS 3. When the diagnostic tool opens, select the type of diagnostic test you want to run, and then follow the on-screen instructions. NOTE:

If you need to stop a diagnostic test, press esc. Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) to a USB device NOTE: The HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) download instructions are provided in English only, and you must use a Windows computer to download and create the HP UEFI support environment because only .exe files are offered. There are two options to download HP PC Hardware Diagnostics to a USB device. Download the latest UEFI version 1. 2. Go to http://www.hp.com/go/techcenter/pcdiags. The HP PC Diagnostics home page is displayed. In the HP PC Hardware Diagnostics section, select the Download link, and then select Run. Download any version of UEFI for a specific product 1. 2. Go to http://www.hp.com/support. Select Get software and drivers. 48 Chapter 10 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) 3. Enter the product name or number. or 4. 5. Select Identify now to let HP automatically detect your product. Select your computer, and then select your operating system. In the Diagnostic section, follow the on-screen instructions to select and download the UEFI version you want. Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) to a USB device 49 11 Backing up, restoring, and recovering This chapter provides information about the following processes. The information in the chapter is standard procedure for most products. Creating recovery media and backups Restoring and recovering your system For additional information, refer to the HP support assistant app. Type support in the taskbar search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. or Click the question mark icon in the taskbar. IMPORTANT:

70% charged before you start the recovery process. If you will be performing recovery procedures on a tablet, the tablet battery must be at least IMPORTANT:

beginning any recovery process. For a tablet with a detachable keyboard, connect the keyboard to the keyboard dock before Creating recovery media and backups The following methods of creating recovery media and backups are available on select products only. Choose the available method according to your computer model. Use HP Recovery Manager to create HP Recovery media after you successfully set up the computer. This step creates a backup of the HP Recovery partition on the computer. The backup can be used to reinstall the original operating system in cases where the hard drive is corrupted or has been replaced. For information on creating recovery media, see Creating HP Recovery media (select products only) on page 50. For information on the recovery options that are available using the recovery media, see Using Windows tools on page 51. Use Windows tools to create system restore points and create backups of personal information. For more information, see Recovering using HP Recovery Manager on page 52. NOTE:

If storage is 32 GB or less, Microsoft System Restore is disabled by default. Creating HP Recovery media (select products only) If possible, check for the presence of the Recovery partition and the Windows partition. From the Start menu, select File Explorer, and then select This PC. If your computer does not list the Windows partition and the Recovery partition, you can obtain recovery media for your system from support. See the Worldwide Telephone Numbers booklet included with the computer. You can also find contact information on the HP website. Go to http://www.hp.com/

support, select your country or region, and follow the on-screen instructions. 50 Chapter 11 Backing up, restoring, and recovering You can use Windows tools to create system restore points and create backups of personal information, see Using Windows tools on page 51. If your computer does list the Recovery partition and the Windows partition, you can use HP Recovery Manager to create recovery media after you successfully set up the computer. HP Recovery media can be used to perform system recovery if the hard drive becomes corrupted. System recovery reinstalls the original operating system and software programs that were installed at the factory and then configures the settings for the programs. HP Recovery media can also be used to customize the system or restore the factory image if you replace the hard drive. Only one set of recovery media can be created. Handle these recovery tools carefully, and keep them in a safe place. HP Recovery Manager examines the computer and determines the required storage capacity for the media that will be required. To create recovery discs, your computer must have an optical drive with DVD writer capability, and you must use only high-quality blank DVD-R, DVD+R, DVD-R DL, or DVD+R DL discs. Do not use rewritable discs such as CDRW, DVDRW, double-layer DVDRW, or BD-RE (rewritable Blu-ray) discs; they are not compatible with HP Recovery Manager software. Or, instead, you can use a high-quality blank USB flash drive. If your computer does not include an integrated optical drive with DVD writer capability, but you would like to create DVD recovery media, you can use an external optical drive (purchased separately) to create recovery discs. If you use an external optical drive, it must be connected directly to a USB port on the computer; the drive cannot be connected to a USB port on an external device, such as a USB hub. If you cannot create DVD media yourself, you can obtain recovery discs for your computer from HP. See the Worldwide Telephone Numbers booklet included with the computer. You can also find contact information on the HP website. Go to http://www.hp.com/

support, select your country or region, and follow the on-screen instructions. Be sure that the computer is connected to AC power before you begin creating the recovery media. The creation process can take an hour or more. Do not interrupt the creation process. If necessary, you can exit the program before you have finished creating all of the recovery DVDs. HP Recovery Manager will finish burning the current DVD. The next time you start HP Recovery Manager, you will be prompted to continue. To create HP Recovery media:

IMPORTANT:

beginning these steps. For a tablet with a detachable keyboard, connect the keyboard to the keyboard dock before 1. 2. Type recovery in the taskbar search box, and then select HP Recovery Manager. Select Create recovery media, and then follow the on-screen instructions. If you ever need to recover the system, see Recovering using HP Recovery Manager on page 52. Using Windows tools You can create recovery media, system restore points, and backups of personal information using Windows tools. NOTE:

If storage is 32 GB or less, Microsoft System Restore is disabled by default. For more information and steps, see the Get started app. Select the Start button, and then select the Get started app. Using Windows tools 51 Restore and recovery There are several options for recovering your system. Choose the method that best matches your situation and level of expertise:

IMPORTANT: Not all methods are available on all products. Windows offers several options for restoring from backup, refreshing the computer, and resetting the computer to its original state. For more information see the Get started app. Select the Start button, and then select the Get started app. If you need to correct a problem with a preinstalled application or driver, use the Reinstall drivers and/or applications option (select products only) of HP Recovery Manager to reinstall the individual application or driver. Type recovery in the taskbar search box, select HP Recovery Manager, select Reinstall drivers and/or applications, and then follow the on-screen instructions. If you want to recover the Windows partition to original factory content, you can choose the System Recovery option from the HP Recovery partition (select products only) or use the HP Recovery media. For more information, see Recovering using HP Recovery Manager on page 52. If you have not already created recovery media, see Creating HP Recovery media (select products only) on page 50. On select products, if you want to recover the computer's original factory partition and content, or if you have replaced the hard drive, you can use the Factory Reset option of HP Recovery media. For more information, see Recovering using HP Recovery Manager on page 52. On select products, if you want to remove the recovery partition to reclaim hard drive space, HP Recovery Manager offers the Remove Recovery Partition option. For more information, see Removing the HP Recovery partition (select products only) on page 55. Recovering using HP Recovery Manager HP Recovery Manager software allows you to recover the computer to its original factory state by using the HP Recovery media that you either created or that you obtained from HP, or by using the HP Recovery partition (select products only). If you have not already created recovery media, see Creating HP Recovery media (select products only) on page 50. What you need to know before you get started HP Recovery Manager recovers only software that was installed at the factory. For software not provided with this computer, you must either download the software from the manufacturer's website or reinstall the software from the media provided by the manufacturer. IMPORTANT: Recovery through HP Recovery Manager should be used as a final attempt to correct computer issues. HP Recovery media must be used if the computer hard drive fails. If you have not already created recovery media, see Creating HP Recovery media (select products only) on page 50. To use the Factory Reset option (select products only), you must use HP Recovery media. If you have not already created recovery media, see Creating HP Recovery media (select products only) on page 50. If your computer does not allow the creation of HP Recovery media or if the HP Recovery media does not work, you can obtain recovery media for your system from support. See the Worldwide Telephone Numbers booklet included with the computer. You can also find contact information from the HP 52 Chapter 11 Backing up, restoring, and recovering website. Go to http://www.hp.com/support, select your country or region, and follow the on-screen instructions. IMPORTANT: HP Recovery Manager does not automatically provide backups of your personal data. Before beginning recovery, back up any personal data you want to retain. Using HP Recovery media, you can choose from one of the following recovery options:

NOTE: Only the options available for your computer display when you start the recovery process. System RecoveryReinstalls the original operating system, and then configures the settings for the programs that were installed at the factory. Factory ResetRestores the computer to its original factory state by deleting all information from the hard drive and re-creating the partitions. Then it reinstalls the operating system and the software that was installed at the factory. The HP Recovery partition (select products only) allows System Recovery only. Using the HP Recovery partition (select products only) The HP Recovery partition allows you to perform a system recovery without the need for recovery discs or a recovery USB flash drive. This type of recovery can be used only if the hard drive is still working. To start HP Recovery Manager from the HP Recovery partition:

IMPORTANT:

beginning these steps (select products only). For a tablet with a detachable keyboard, connect the keyboard to the keyboard dock before 1. Type recovery in the taskbar search box, select Recovery Manager, and then select HP Recovery Environment.

- or-

For computers or tablets with keyboards attached, press f11 while the computer boots, or press and hold f11 as you press the power button. For tablets without keyboards:

Turn on or restart the tablet, and then quickly hold down the volume down button; then select f11.

- or -

Turn on or restart the tablet, and then quickly hold down the Windows button; then select f11. 2. 3. Select Troubleshoot from the boot options menu. Select Recovery Manager, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Using HP Recovery media to recover You can use HP Recovery media to recover the original system. This method can be used if your system does not have an HP Recovery partition or if the hard drive is not working properly. 1. 2. If possible, back up all personal files. Insert the HP Recovery media, and then restart the computer. NOTE:

boot order. See Changing the computer boot order on page 54. If the computer does not automatically restart in HP Recovery Manager, change the computer 3. Follow the on-screen instructions. Restore and recovery 53 Changing the computer boot order If your computer does not restart in HP Recovery Manager, you can change the computer boot order, which is the order of devices listed in BIOS where the computer looks for startup information. You can change the selection to an optical drive or a USB flash drive. To change the boot order:

IMPORTANT:

beginning these steps. For a tablet with a detachable keyboard, connect the keyboard to the keyboard dock before 1. 2. 3. 4. Insert the HP Recovery media. Access BIOS:

For computers or tablets with keyboards attached:

Turn on or restart the computer or tablet, quickly press esc, and then press f9 for boot options. For tablets without keyboards:

Turn on or restart the tablet, and then quickly hold down the volume down button; then select f9.

- or -

Turn on or restart the tablet, and then quickly hold down the Windows button; then select f9. Select the optical drive or USB flash drive from which you want to boot. Follow the on-screen instructions. 54 Chapter 11 Backing up, restoring, and recovering Removing the HP Recovery partition (select products only) HP Recovery Manager software allows you to remove the HP Recovery partition to free up hard drive space. IMPORTANT: After you remove the HP Recovery partition, you will not be able to perform System Recovery or create HP recovery media from the HP Recovery partition. So before you remove the Recovery partition, create HP Recovery media; see Creating HP Recovery media (select products only) on page 50. NOTE: The Remove Recovery Partition option is only available on products that support this function. Follow these steps to remove the HP Recovery partition:

1. 2. Type recovery in the taskbar search box, and then select HP Recovery Manager. Select Remove Recovery Partition, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Restore and recovery 55 12 Specifications Input power The power information in this section may be helpful if you plan to travel internationally with the computer. The computer operates on DC power, which can be supplied by an AC or a DC power source. The AC power source must be rated at 100240 V, 5060 Hz. Although the computer can be powered from a standalone DC power source, it should be powered only with an AC adapter or a DC power source that is supplied and approved by HP for use with this computer. The computer can operate on DC power within the following specifications. Operating voltage and current varies by platform. The voltage and current for your computer is located on the regulatory label. Input power Rating Operating voltage and current 5 V dc @ 2 A / 12 V dc @ 3 A /15 V dc @ 3 A 45 W USB-C 5 V dc @ 3 A / 9 V dc @ 3 A / 10 V dc @ 3.75 A / 12 V dc @ 3.75 A / 15 V dc @ 3 A / 20 V dc @ 2.25 A 45 W USB-C 5 V dc @ 3 A / 9 V dc @ 3A / 10 V dc @ 5 A / 12 V dc @ 5 A / 15 V dc @ 4.33 A / 20 V dc @ 3.25 A 65 W USB-C 5 V dc @ 3 A / 9 V dc @ 3 A / 10 V dc @ 5 A / 12 V dc @ 5 A / 15 V dc @ 5 A / 20 V dc @ 4.5 A 90 W USB-C 19.5 V dc @ 2.31 A 45 W 19.5 V dc @ 3.33 A 65 W 19.5 V dc @ 4.62 A 90 W 19.5 V dc @ 6.15 A 120 W 19.5 V dc @ 7.70 A 150 W 19.5 V dc @ 10.3 A 200 W DC plug of external HP power supply (select products only) NOTE: This product is designed for IT power systems in Norway with phase-to-phase voltage not exceeding 240 V rms. Operating environment Factor Temperature Operating Metric U.S. 5C to 35C 41F to 95F 56 Chapter 12 Specifications Factor Nonoperating Relative humidity (noncondensing) Operating Nonoperating Maximum altitude (unpressurized) Metric

-20C to 60C 10% to 90%

5% to 95%

U.S.

-4F to 140F 10% to 90%

5% to 95%

Operating Nonoperating

-15 m to 3,048 m

-15 m to 12,192 m

-50 ft to 10,000 ft

-50 ft to 40,000 ft Operating environment 57 13 Electrostatic Discharge Electrostatic discharge is the release of static electricity when two objects come into contactfor example, the shock you receive when you walk across the carpet and touch a metal door knob. A discharge of static electricity from fingers or other electrostatic conductors may damage electronic components. To prevent damage to the computer, damage to a drive, or loss of information, observe these precautions:

If removal or installation instructions direct you to unplug the computer, first be sure that it is properly grounded. Keep components in their electrostatic-safe containers until you are ready to install them. Avoid touching pins, leads, and circuitry. Handle electronic components as little as possible. Use nonmagnetic tools. Before handling components, discharge static electricity by touching an unpainted metal surface. If you remove a component, place it in an electrostatic-safe container. 58 Chapter 13 Electrostatic Discharge 14 Accessibility HP designs, produces, and markets products and services that can be used by everyone, including people with disabilities, either on a stand-alone basis or with appropriate assistive devices. Supported assistive technologies HP products support a wide variety of operating system assistive technologies and can be configured to work with additional assistive technologies. Use the Search feature on your device to locate more information about assistive features. NOTE:

support for that product. For additional information about a particular assistive technology product, contact customer Contacting support We are constantly refining the accessibility of our products and services and welcome feedback from users. If you have an issue with a product or would like to tell us about accessibility features that have helped you, please contact us at +1 (888) 259-5707, Monday through Friday, 6 a.m. to 9 p.m. North American Mountain Time. If you are deaf or hard-of-hearing and use TRS/VRS/WebCapTel, contact us if you require technical support or have accessibility questions by calling +1 (877) 656-7058, Monday through Friday, 6 a.m. to 9 p.m. North American Mountain Time. NOTE: Support is in English only. Supported assistive technologies 59 Index A AC adapter and battery 5 AC adapter, testing 36 accessibility 59 action keys 16 action keys, identifying 15 airplane mode 19 airplane mode key 16, 19 antivirus software, using 44 audio 24 audio-out (headphone)/audio-in

(microphone) jack, identifying 5 B backing up software and information 45 backups 50 battery conserving power 34 discharging 34 factory-sealed 33 finding information 34 low battery levels 34 resolving low battery level 35 battery information, finding 34 battery power 33 best practices 1 BIOS determining version 46 downloading an update 47 starting the Setup Utility 46 updating 46 Bluetooth device 19, 21 Bluetooth label 18 boot order changing 54 bottom 18 buttons left TouchPad 13 power 7 right TouchPad 13 volume 8 Windows 5 60 Index C camera using 23 caps lock light, identifying 14 caring for your computer 39 cleaning your computer 39 components bottom 17 display 9 left side 7 right side 5 top 13 connecting to a WLAN 20 connector, power 6 corporate WLAN connection 20 critical battery level 34 D Disk Cleanup software 38 Disk Defragmenter software 38 drive light 8 E electrostatic discharge 58 esc key, identifying 15 external AC power, using 35 F fingerprints, registering 43 firewall software 44 fn key, identifying 15 four-finger tap TouchPad gesture 29 G GPS 21 H HDMI port connecting 25 identifying 5 HDMI, configuring audio 25 headsets, connecting 23 Hibernation exiting 32 initiated during critical battery level 34 initiating 32 high-definition devices, connecting 25, 26 HP 3D DriveGuard 38 HP Apps Store, visiting 1 HP Mobile Broadband activating 20 IMEI number 20 MEID number 20 HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) using 48 HP Recovery Manager correcting boot problems 54 starting 53 HP Recovery media creating 50 recovery 53 HP Recovery partition recovery 53 removing 55 HP resources 2 HP Touchpoint Manager 45 I IMEI number 20 initiating Sleep and Hibernation 31 input power 56 installing optional security cable 45 integrated numeric keypad, identifying 15, 30 internal microphones, identifying 9 Internet security software, using 43 J jacks audio-out (headphone)/audio-in

(microphone) 5 network 5 RJ-45 (network) 5 K keyboard and optional mouse using 30 keys airplane mode 16 esc 15 fn 15 Windows 15 L labels Bluetooth 18 regulatory 18 serial number 18 service 18 wireless certification 18 WLAN 18 lights AC adapter and battery light 5 caps lock 14 drive 8 mute 14 RJ-45 (network) status 5 locating information hardware 4 software 4 low battery level 34 M maintenance Disk Cleanup 38 Disk Defragmenter 38 HP 3D DriveGuard 38 updating programs and drivers 39 managing power 31 MEID number 20 memory card reader, identifying 7 memory card, identifying 7 minimized image recovery 53 minimized image, creating 52 Miracast 26 mobile broadband activating 20 IMEI number 20 MEID number 20 mute light, identifying 14 N network jack, identifying 5 num lock key, identifying 30 O one-finger slide touch screen gesture 29 operating environment 56 original system recovery 52 P passwords Setup Utility (BIOS) 43 Windows 42 ports HDMI 5, 25 Miracast 26 USB 2.0 7 USB 3.0 5 USB 3.0 (powered) charging 5 power AC 35 battery 33 power button, identifying 7 power connector, identifying 6 power meter, using 33 power settings, using 33 product name and number, computer 18 public WLAN connection 20 R recover options 52 recovery discs 51, 53 HP Recovery Manager 52 media 53 starting 53 supported discs 51 system 52 USB flash drive 53 using HP Recovery media 51 recovery media creating 50 creating using HP Recovery Manager 51 recovery partition removing 55 regulatory information regulatory label 18 wireless certification labels 18 RJ-45 (network) jack, identifying 5 RJ-45 (network) status lights, identifying 5 S security cable slot, identifying 7 security cable, installing 45 serial number 18 serial number, computer 18 service labels, locating 18 setting password protection on wakeup 32 Setup Utility (BIOS) passwords 43 shipping the computer 40 shutdown 36 Sleep exiting 32 initiating 32 Sleep and Hibernation initiating 31 slots memory card reader 7 security cable 7 software Disk Cleanup 38 Disk Defragmenter 38 HP 3D DriveGuard 38 software updates, installing 44 sound settings, using 24 speakers connecting 23 identifying 17 supported discs, recovery 51 system recovery 52 system restore point creating 51 system restore point, creating 50 T tap TouchPad and touch screen gesture 27 testing an AC adapter 36 three-finger swipe TouchPad gesture 29 touch screen gestures one-finger slide 29 TouchPad buttons 13 using 27 Index 61 Windows passwords 42 Windows tools using 51 wireless button 19 wireless certification label 18 wireless controls button 19 operating system 19 wireless light 19 wireless network (WLAN) connecting 20 corporate WLAN connection 20 functional range 20 public WLAN connection 20 wireless network, securing 45 WLAN antennas, identifying 9 WLAN device 18 WLAN label 18 WWAN device 20 TouchPad and touch screen gestures tap 27 two-finger pinch zoom 28 TouchPad gestures four-finger tap 29 three-finger swipe 29 two-finger scroll 28 two-finger tap 28 TouchPad zone, identifying 13 traveling with the computer 18, 40 turning off the computer 36 two-finger pinch zoom TouchPad and touch screen gesture 28 two-finger scroll TouchPad gesture 28 two-finger tap TouchPad gesture 28 U unresponsive system 36 updating programs and drivers 39 USB 2.0 port, identifying 7 USB 3.0 charging (powered) port, identifying 5 USB 3.0 port, identifying 5 using external AC power 35 using passwords 42 using power meter settings 33 using power settings 33 using sound settings 24 using the integrated numeric keypad 30 using the keyboard and optional mouse 30 using the TouchPad 27 V vents, identifying 7, 17 video 24 volume buttons, identifying 8 W webcam identifying 9 webcam light, identifying 9 Windows system restore point 50, 51 Windows button, identifying 5 Windows Hello using 43 Windows key, identifying 15 62 Index

User Guide Product notice Software terms This guide describes features that are common to most products. Some features may not be available on your computer. Not all features are available in all editions of Windows. This computer may require upgraded and/or separately purchased hardware, drivers and/or software to take full advantage of Windows functionality. Go to http://www.microsoft.com for details. To access the latest user guide, go to http://www.hp.com/support, and select your country. Select Drivers & Downloads, and then follow the on-screen instructions. By installing, copying, downloading, or otherwise using any software product preinstalled on this computer, you agree to be bound by the terms of the HP End User License Agreement (EULA). If you do not accept these license terms, your sole remedy is to return the entire unused product (hardware and software) within 14 days for a full refund subject to the refund policy of your seller. For any further information or to request a full refund of the price of the computer, please contact your seller. Copyright 2015 HP Development Company, L.P. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by HP Inc. under license. Intel, Celeron, Centrino, and Pentium are trademarks of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and other countries. Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. First Edition: December 2015 Document Part Number: 842330001 Safety warning notice WARNING! To reduce the possibility of heat-related injuries or of overheating the computer, do not place the computer directly on your lap or obstruct the computer air vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, to block airflow. Also, do not allow the AC adapter to come into contact with the skin or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, during operation. The computer and the AC adapter comply with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by the International Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment (IEC 60950-1). iii iv Safety warning notice Processor configuration setting (select products only) IMPORTANT: Select products are configured with an Intel Pentium N35xx/N37xx series or a Celeron N28xx/N29xx/N30xx/N31xx series processor and a Windows operating system. If your computer is configured as described, do not change the processor configuration setting in msconfig.exe from 4 or 2 processors to 1 processor. If you do so, your computer will not restart. You will have to perform a factory reset to restore the original settings. v vi Processor configuration setting (select products only) Table of contents 1 Starting right ................................................................................................................................................ 1 Visit the HP Apps Store .......................................................................................................................................... 1 Best practices ......................................................................................................................................................... 1 More HP resources ................................................................................................................................................. 2 2 Getting to know your computer ...................................................................................................................... 3 Locating hardware ................................................................................................................................................. 3 Locating software .................................................................................................................................................. 3 Right side ............................................................................................................................................................... 4 Left side ................................................................................................................................................................. 5 Display ................................................................................................................................................................... 6 Top edge ................................................................................................................................................................ 7 Bottom edge .......................................................................................................................................................... 7 Labels ..................................................................................................................................................................... 8 3 Using the keyboard base ................................................................................................................................ 9 Keyboard base components .................................................................................................................................. 9 Top ....................................................................................................................................................... 9 Lights ................................................................................................................................................. 10 TouchPad ........................................................................................................................................... 11 Using the action keys ........................................................................................................................................... 12 Connecting the tablet to the keyboard base ...................................................................................................... 13 4 Connecting to a network .............................................................................................................................. 14 Connecting to a wireless network ....................................................................................................................... 14 Using the wireless controls ............................................................................................................... 14 Airplane mode key .......................................................................................................... 14 Operating system controls ............................................................................................. 14 Connecting to a WLAN ....................................................................................................................... 15 Using HP Mobile Broadband (select products only) ......................................................................... 15 Using HP DataPass (select products only) ........................................................................................ 16 Using GPS (select products only) ...................................................................................................... 16 Using Bluetooth wireless devices (select products only) ................................................................ 16 Connecting Bluetooth devices ........................................................................................ 16 Connecting to a wired networkLAN (select products only) ............................................................................ 17 Sharing data and drives and accessing software ............................................................................................... 17 vii 5 Enjoying entertainment features .................................................................................................................. 18 Using a webcam (select products only) .............................................................................................................. 18 Using audio .......................................................................................................................................................... 18 Connecting speakers ......................................................................................................................... 18 Connecting headphones .................................................................................................................... 18 Connecting headsets ......................................................................................................................... 19 Using sound settings ......................................................................................................................... 19 Using video .......................................................................................................................................................... 19 Connecting video devices using an micro-HDMI cable ..................................................................... 20 Setting up HDMI audio .................................................................................................... 20 Discovering and connecting to Miracast-compatible wireless displays (select products only) ..... 21 Discovering and connecting to Intel WiDi certified displays (select Intel products only) ............... 21 6 Navigating the screen .................................................................................................................................. 22 Using the TouchPad and touch screen gestures ................................................................................................. 22 Tap ..................................................................................................................................................... 22 Two-finger pinch zoom ..................................................................................................................... 23 Two-finger scroll (TouchPad only) ................................................................................................... 23 Two-finger tap (TouchPad only) ....................................................................................................... 23 One-finger slide (touch screen only) ................................................................................................ 24 Using the keyboard and optional mouse ............................................................................................................ 24 Using the on-screen keyboard ............................................................................................................................ 24 Using a tablet pen (select products only) ........................................................................................................... 24 7 Managing power .......................................................................................................................................... 25 Initiating and exiting Sleep and Hibernation ...................................................................................................... 25 Manually initiating and exiting Sleep ................................................................................................ 26 Manually initiating and exiting Hibernation (select products only) ................................................. 26 Setting password protection on wakeup (exiting Sleep or Hibernation) ......................................... 26 Using the power meter and power settings ........................................................................................................ 27 Running on battery power ................................................................................................................................... 27 Factory-sealed battery ..................................................................................................................... 27 Finding battery information .............................................................................................................. 28 Conserving battery power ................................................................................................................. 28 Identifying low battery levels ........................................................................................................... 28 Resolving a low battery level ............................................................................................................ 29 Resolving a low battery level when external power is available .................................. 29 Resolving a low battery level when no power source is available ................................ 29 Resolving a low battery level when the computer cannot exit Hibernation ................. 29 Running on AC power ........................................................................................................................................... 29 viii Troubleshooting power problems .................................................................................................... 30 Shutting down (turning off) the computer ......................................................................................................... 30 8 Maintaining your computer .......................................................................................................................... 32 Improving performance ....................................................................................................................................... 32 Using Disk Defragmenter .................................................................................................................. 32 Using Disk Cleanup ............................................................................................................................ 32 Using HP 3D DriveGuard (select products only) ............................................................................... 32 Identifying HP 3D DriveGuard status .............................................................................. 33 Updating programs and drivers .......................................................................................................................... 33 Cleaning your computer ...................................................................................................................................... 33 Cleaning procedures ......................................................................................................................... 33 Cleaning the display ........................................................................................................ 34 Cleaning the sides or cover ............................................................................................. 34 Cleaning the TouchPad, keyboard, or mouse (select products only) ............................ 34 Traveling with or shipping your computer .......................................................................................................... 34 9 Securing your computer and information ...................................................................................................... 36 Using passwords .................................................................................................................................................. 36 Setting Windows passwords ............................................................................................................. 36 Setting Setup Utility (BIOS) passwords ............................................................................................ 37 Using the fingerprint reader (select products only) ........................................................................................... 37 Using Internet security software ......................................................................................................................... 38 Using antivirus software ................................................................................................................... 38 Using firewall software ..................................................................................................................... 38 Installing software updates ................................................................................................................................ 38 Using HP Touchpoint Manager (select products only) ........................................................................................ 39 Securing your wireless network .......................................................................................................................... 39 Backing up your software applications and information ................................................................................... 39 Using an optional security cable ......................................................................................................................... 39 10 Using Setup Utility (BIOS) ........................................................................................................................... 41 Starting Setup Utility (BIOS) ................................................................................................................................ 41 Updating Setup Utility (BIOS) .............................................................................................................................. 41 Determining the BIOS version ........................................................................................................... 41 Downloading a BIOS update .............................................................................................................. 42 11 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) ..................................................................................................... 43 Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) to a USB device .................................................................... 43 ix 12 Backing up, restoring, and recovering ......................................................................................................... 45 Creating recovery media and backups ................................................................................................................ 45 Creating HP Recovery media (select products only) ........................................................................ 45 Using Windows tools ........................................................................................................................................... 46 Restore and recovery .......................................................................................................................................... 47 Recovering using HP Recovery Manager .......................................................................................... 47 What you need to know before you get started ............................................................ 47 Using the HP Recovery partition (select products only) ................................................ 48 Using HP Recovery media to recover ............................................................................. 48 Changing the computer boot order ................................................................................ 49 Removing the HP Recovery partition (select products only) ......................................... 50 13 Specifications ........................................................................................................................................... 51 Input power .......................................................................................................................................................... 51 Operating environment ....................................................................................................................................... 51 14 Electrostatic Discharge .............................................................................................................................. 52 15 Accessibility .............................................................................................................................................. 53 Supported assistive technologies ....................................................................................................................... 53 Contacting support .............................................................................................................................................. 53 Index ............................................................................................................................................................. 54 x 1 Starting right This computer is a powerful tool designed to enhance your work and entertainment. Read this chapter to learn about best practices after you set up your computer, fun things to do with your computer, and where to find additional HP resources. Visit the HP Apps Store The HP Apps Store offers a wide choice of popular games, entertainment and music apps, productivity apps, and apps exclusive to HP that you can download to the desktop. The selection is updated regularly and includes regional content and country-specific offers. Be sure to check the HP Apps Store frequently for new and updated features. IMPORTANT: You must be connected to the Internet to access the HP Apps Store. To view and download an app:

1. Select the Start button, and then select the Store app. or Select the Store icon next to the taskbar search box. 2. Select HP picks to view all the available apps. NOTE: HP picks is available in select countries only. 3. Select the app you want to download, and then follow the on-screen instructions. When the download is complete, the app appears on the All apps screen. Best practices After you set up and register the computer, we recommend the following steps to get the most out of your smart investment:

Back up your hard drive by creating recovery media. See Backing up, restoring, and recovering on page 45. If you havent already done so, connect to a wired or wireless network. See details in Connecting to a network on page 14. Become familiar with the computer hardware and software. For more information, see Getting to know your computer on page 3 and Enjoying entertainment features on page 18. Update or purchase antivirus software. See Using antivirus software on page 38. Visit the HP Apps Store 1 More HP resources To locate resources that provide product details, how-to information, and more, use this table. Contents Overview of computer setup and features A broad range of how-to information and troubleshooting tips Online chat with an HP technician Support telephone numbers HP service center locations Proper workstation setup Guidelines for posture and work habits that increase your comfort and decrease your risk of injury Electrical and mechanical safety information Important regulatory notices, including information about proper battery disposal, if needed. Specific warranty information about this computer Resource Setup Instructions Get started app To access the Get started app:

Select the Start button, and then select the Get started app. HP support For U.S. support, go to http://www.hp.com/go/contactHP. For worldwide support, go to http://welcome.hp.com/

country/us/en/wwcontact_us.html. Safety & Comfort Guide To access this guide:

Select the Start button, select All apps, select HP Help and Support, and then select HP Documentation. or Go to http://www.hp.com/ergo. Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices To access this document:

Select the Start button, select All apps, select HP Help and Support, and then select HP Documentation. Limited Warranty*

To access this document:

Select the Start button, select All apps, select HP Help and Support, and then select HP Documentation. or Go to http://www.hp.com/go/orderdocuments.

*You can find your HP Limited Warranty located with the user guides on your product and/or on the CD or DVD provided in the box. In some countries or regions, HP may provide a printed warranty in the box. For countries or regions where the warranty is not provided in printed format, you can request a copy from http://www.hp.com/go/orderdocuments. For products purchased in Asia Pacific, you can write to HP at Hewlett Packard, POD, P.O. Box 200, Alexandra Post Office, Singapore 911507. Include your product name, and your name, phone number, and postal address. 2 Chapter 1 Starting right 2 Getting to know your computer Locating hardware To find out what hardware is installed on your computer:

Type device manager in the taskbar search box, and then select the Device Manager app. A list displays all the devices installed on your computer. For information about system hardware components and the system BIOS version number, press fn+esc

(select products only). Locating software To find out what software is installed on your computer:

Select the Start button, and then select All apps. or Right-click the Start button, and then select Programs and Features. Locating hardware 3 Right side Component Description

(1) Memory card reader Reads optional memory cards that enable you to store, manage, share, or access information. To insert a card:

1. 2. Hold the card label-side up, with connectors facing the computer. Insert the card into the memory card reader, and then press in on the card until it is firmly seated. To remove a card:

Press in on the card, and then remove it from the memory card reader. Connects an optional video or audio device, such as a high-

definition television, any compatible digital or audio component, or a high-speed High-Definition Multimedia Interface (HDMI) device. micro-HDMI port

(2)

(3) USB Type-C (charging) port Connects any USB device with a Type-C connector.

(4) AC adapter and battery light NOTE: USB Type-C ports charge other HP Type C products such as cell phones, laptops, tablets, and MP3 players when the computer is on. Also, some USB Type-C ports connect DisplayPort, VGA, HDMI, and other video devices to provide video output. NOTE: Adapters (purchased separately) may be required. White: The AC adapter is connected and the battery is fully charged. Blinking white: The AC adapter is disconnected and the battery has reached a low battery level. Amber: The AC adapter is connected and the battery is charging. Off: The battery is not charging. 4 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer Left side Component

(1)

(2) USB 2.0 port Connects an optional USB device, such as a keyboard, mouse, external drive, printer, scanner, or USB hub. Description Audio-out (headphone)/Audio-in (microphone) combo jack Connects optional powered stereo speakers, headphones, earbuds, a headset, or a television audio cable. Also connects an optional headset microphone. This jack does not support optional microphone-only devices. WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, adjust the volume before putting on headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, refer to the Regulatory, Safety, and Environmental Notices. To access this guide:

Select the Start button, select All apps, select HP Help and Support, and then select HP Documentation. NOTE: When a device is connected to the jack, the computer speakers are disabled.

(3) Volume buttons Control speaker volume on the tablet. 1. 2. To increase speaker volume, press the + edge of the button. To decrease speaker volume, press the edge of the button. Left side 5 Display Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) WLAN antennas (2)*

Webcam Webcam light Speakers (2) Send and receive wireless signals to communicate with wireless local area networks (WLANs). Records video and captures photographs. Some products allow you to video conference and chat online using streaming video. To use a webcam (integrated camera):

Type camera in the taskbar search box, and then select Camera. On: The webcam is in use. Produce sound.

*The antennas are not visible from the outside of the computer. For optimal transmission, keep the areas immediately around the antennas free from obstructions. For wireless regulatory notices, see the section of the Regulatory, Safety, and Environmental Notices that applies to your country or region. To access this guide:

Select the Start button, select All apps, select HP Help and Support, and then select HP Documentation. 6 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer Top edge Component

(1) Power button Description When the tablet is off, press the button to turn on the tablet. NOTE: After pressing power button, the Caps lock light flashes for one second to indicate the computer is on. When the tablet is on, press the button briefly to initiate Sleep. When the tablet is in the Sleep state, press the button briefly to exit Sleep. When the tablet is in Hibernation, press the button briefly to exit Hibernation. CAUTION: Pressing and holding down the power button will result in the loss of unsaved information. If the tablet has stopped responding and Windows shutdown procedures are ineffective, press and hold the power button down for at least 10 seconds to turn off the tablet. To learn more about your power settings, see your power options. Type power in the taskbar search box, select Power and sleep settings, and then select Power and sleep.

(2) Internal microphones (2) Record sound. Bottom edge Component

(1)

(2) Alignment posts (2) Docking port Description Allow the display to open and close. Connects the tablet to the keyboard base. Top edge 7 Labels The labels affixed to the computer provide information you may need when you troubleshoot system problems or travel internationally with the computer. IMPORTANT: All labels described in this section are located on the bottom edge of the tablet. Service labelProvides important information to identify your computer. When contacting support, you will probably be asked for the serial number, and possibly for the product number or the model number. Locate these numbers before you contact support. Your service label will resemble one of the examples shown below. Refer to the illustration that most closely matches the service label on your computer. Component

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) Serial number Product number Warranty period Model number (select products only) Component

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) Model name (select products only) Product number Serial number Warranty period Regulatory label(s)Provide(s) regulatory information about the computer. Wireless certification label(s)Provide(s) information about optional wireless devices and the approval markings for the countries or regions in which the devices have been approved for use. 8 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer 3 Using the keyboard base Keyboard base components Top Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) esc key fn key Displays system information when pressed in combination with the fn key. Displays system information when pressed in combination with the esc key. Windows key Opens the Start menu. Action keys Execute frequently used system functions. Keyboard base components 9 Lights Component Description

(1) Caps lock light On: Caps lock is on, which switches the keys to all capital letters.

(2) Mute light NOTE: After you press the power button, the Caps lock light flashes for one second to indicate the computer is on. Amber: Computer sound is off. Off: Computer sound is on. 10 Chapter 3 Using the keyboard base TouchPad Component

(1)

(2)

(3) Description TouchPad zone Reads your finger gestures to move the pointer or activate items on the screen. Left TouchPad button Functions like the left button on an external mouse. For more information on additional gestures, see Using NOTE:

the TouchPad and touch screen gestures on page 22. Right TouchPad button Functions like the right button on an external mouse. For more information on additional gestures, see Using NOTE:

the TouchPad and touch screen gestures on page 22. Keyboard base components 11 Using the action keys An action key performs an assigned function. The icon on each action key illustrates the function for that key. To use an action key, press and hold the key. Icon Description Decreases the screen brightness incrementally as long as you hold down the key. Increases the screen brightness incrementally as long as you hold down the key. Switches the screen image between display devices connected to the system. For example, if a monitor is connected to the computer, repeatedly pressing this key alternates the screen image from the computer display to the monitor display to a simultaneous display on both the computer and the monitor. Plays the previous track of an audio CD or the previous section of a DVD or a Blu-ray Disc (BD). Starts, pauses, or resumes playback of an audio CD, a DVD, or a BD. Plays the next track of an audio CD or the next section of a DVD or a BD. Decreases speaker volume incrementally while you hold down the key. Increases speaker volume incrementally while you hold down the key. Mutes or restores speaker sound. Turns the airplane mode and wireless feature on or off. NOTE: The airplane mode key is also referred to as the wireless button. NOTE: A wireless network must be set up before a wireless connection is possible. 12 Chapter 3 Using the keyboard base Connecting the tablet to the keyboard base To connect the tablet to the keyboard base, insert the tablet docking port into the keyboard base docking connector. To remove the tablet from the keyboard base:

Lift one corner of the tablet to release it. Connecting the tablet to the keyboard base 13 4 Connecting to a network Your computer can travel with you wherever you go. But even at home, you can explore the globe and access information from millions of websites using your computer and a wired or wireless network connection. This chapter will help you get connected to that world. Connecting to a wireless network Your computer may be equipped with one or more of the following wireless devices:

WLAN deviceConnects the computer to wireless local area networks (commonly referred to as Wi-Fi networks, wireless LANs, or WLANs) in corporate offices, your home, and public places such as airports, restaurants, coffee shops, hotels, and universities. In a WLAN, the mobile wireless device in your computer communicates with a wireless router or a wireless access point. HP Mobile Broadband ModuleGives you wireless connectivity over a wireless wide area network

(WWAN), a much larger area. Mobile network operators install base stations (similar to cell phone towers) throughout large geographic areas, effectively providing coverage across entire states, regions, or even countries. Bluetooth deviceCreates a personal area network (PAN) to connect to other Bluetooth-enabled devices such as computers, phones, printers, headsets, speakers, and cameras. In a PAN, each device communicates directly with other devices, and devices must be relatively close togethertypically within 10 meters (approximately 33 feet) of each other. For more information about wireless technology, the Internet, and networking, see the Get started app. Select the Start button, and then select the Get started app. Using the wireless controls You can control the wireless devices in your computer using one or more of these features:

Airplane mode key (also called wireless button or wireless key) (referred to in this chapter as airplane mode key) Operating system controls Airplane mode key The computer may have an airplane mode key, one or more wireless devices, and one or two wireless lights. All the wireless devices on your computer are enabled at the factory. The wireless light indicates the overall power state of your wireless devices, not the status of individual devices. Operating system controls The Network and Sharing Center allows you to set up a connection or network, connect to a network, and diagnose and repair network problems. 14 Chapter 4 Connecting to a network To use operating system controls:

1. 2. Type control panel in the taskbar search box, and then select Control Panel. Select Network and Internet, and then select Network and Sharing Center. For more information, see the information provided in the Get started app. Select the Start button, and then select the Get started app. Connecting to a WLAN NOTE: When you are setting up Internet access in your home, you must establish an account with an Internet service provider (ISP). To purchase Internet service and a modem, contact a local ISP. The ISP will help set up the modem, install a network cable to connect your wireless router to the modem, and test the Internet service. To connect to a WLAN, follow these steps:

1. 2. Be sure that the WLAN device is on. Select the network status icon in the taskbar, and then connect to one of the available networks. If the WLAN is a security-enabled WLAN, you are prompted to enter a security code. Enter the code, and then select Next to complete the connection. NOTE:

If no WLANs are listed, you may be out of range of a wireless router or access point. If you do not see the WLAN you want to connect to, right-click the network status icon in the NOTE:

taskbar, and then select Open Network and Sharing Center. Select Set up a new connection or network. A list of options is displayed, allowing you to manually search for and connect to a network or to create a new network connection. 3. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the connection. After the connection is made, select the network status icon at the far right of the taskbar, to verify the name and status of the connection. NOTE: The functional range (how far your wireless signals travel) depends on WLAN implementation, router manufacturer, and interference from other electronic devices or structural barriers such as walls and floors. Using HP Mobile Broadband (select products only) Your HP Mobile Broadband computer has built-in support for mobile broadband service. Your new computer, when used with a mobile operators network, gives you the freedom to connect to the Internet, send e-mail, or connect to your corporate network without the need for Wi-Fi hotspots. NOTE:

DataPass (select products only) on page 16. If your computer includes HP DataPass, the instructions in this section do not apply. See Using HP You might need the HP Mobile Broadband Module IMEI and/or MEID number to activate mobile broadband service. The number may be printed on a label located on the bottom of your computer, inside the battery bay, under the service door, or on the back of the display. Or Connecting to a wireless network 15 You can find the number following these steps:

1. 2. 3. From the taskbar, select the network status icon. Select View Connection Settings. Under the Mobile broadband section, select the network status icon. Some mobile network operators require the use of a subscriber identity module (SIM) card. A SIM card contains basic information about you, such as a personal identification number (PIN), as well as network information. Some computers include a SIM card that is preinstalled. If the SIM card is not preinstalled, it may be included with the HP Mobile Broadband documents provided with your computer, or the mobile network operator may provide it separately from the computer. For information about HP Mobile Broadband and how to activate service with a preferred mobile network operator, see the HP Mobile Broadband information included with your computer. Using HP DataPass (select products only) HP DataPass provides access to Mobile Broadband with no annual contracts, no credit card, and no overage fees. With HP DataPass, you simply turn on the device, register, and connect. HP DataPass includes a monthly data package with purchase of the device. For more information, go to http://www.hp.com/go/hpdatapass. Using GPS (select products only) Your computer may be equipped with a Global Positioning System (GPS) device. GPS satellites deliver location, speed, and direction information to GPS-equipped systems. For more information, see the HP GPS and Location software Help. Using Bluetooth wireless devices (select products only) A Bluetooth device provides short-range wireless communications that replace the physical cable connections that traditionally link electronic devices such as the following:

Computers (desktop, notebook) Phones (cellular, cordless, smartphone) Imaging devices (printer, camera) Audio devices (headset, speakers) Mouse External keyboard Bluetooth devices provide peer-to-peer capability that allows you to set up a PAN of Bluetooth devices. For information about configuring and using Bluetooth devices, see the Bluetooth software Help. Connecting Bluetooth devices Before you can use a Bluetooth device, you must establish a Bluetooth connection. 1. 2. 3. Type bluetooth in the taskbar search box, and then select Bluetooth settings. Turn on Bluetooth, if it is not already turned on. Select your device from the list, and then follow the on-screen instructions. 16 Chapter 4 Connecting to a network If the device requires verification, a pairing code is displayed. On the device you are adding, follow NOTE:

the on-screen instructions to verify that the code on your device matches the pairing code. For more information, refer to the documentation provided with the device. NOTE:

devices may have additional requirements; refer to the documentation provided with the device. If your device does not appear in the list, be sure that Bluetooth on that device is turned on. Some Connecting to a wired networkLAN (select products only) Use a LAN connection if you want to connect the computer directly to a router in your home (instead of working wirelessly), or if you want to connect to an existing network at your office. Connecting to a LAN requires an 8-pin, RJ-45 (network) cable and a network jack on the computer. To connect the network cable, follow these steps:

1. 2. Plug the network cable into the network jack (1) on the computer. Plug the other end of the network cable into a network wall jack (2) or router. If the network cable contains noise suppression circuitry (3), which prevents interference from NOTE:

TV and radio reception, orient the circuitry end of the cable toward the computer. Sharing data and drives and accessing software When your computer is part of a network, you are not limited to using only the information that is stored in your computer. Computers connected to the network can exchange software and data with each other. For more information about sharing files, folders, or drives, see the information provided in the Get started app. Select the Start button, and then select the Get started app. NOTE: When a disc like a DVD movie or game is copy-protected, it cannot be shared. Connecting to a wired networkLAN (select products only) 17 5 Enjoying entertainment features Use your HP computer as an entertainment hub to socialize via the webcam, enjoy and manage your music, and download and watch movies. Or, to make your computer an even more powerful entertainment center, connect external devices like a monitor, projector, TV, speakers, or headphones. Using a webcam (select products only) Your computer has a webcam (integrated camera) that records video and captures photographs. Some models allow you to video conference and chat online using streaming video. To access the camera, type camera in the taskbar search box, and then select Camera from the list of applications. Using audio On your computer, you can download and listen to music, stream audio content from the web (including radio), record audio, or mix audio and video to create multimedia. To enhance your listening enjoyment, attach external audio devices such as speakers or headphones. Connecting speakers You can attach wired speakers to your computer by connecting them to a USB port or to the audio-out

(headphone)/audio-in (microphone) combo jack on your computer or on a docking station. To connect wireless speakers to your computer, follow the device manufacturer's instructions. To connect high-definition speakers to the computer, see Setting up HDMI audio on page 20. Before connecting speakers, lower the volume setting. Connecting headphones WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, lower the volume setting before putting on headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, see the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices. To access this document:

Select the Start button, select All apps, select HP Help and Support, and then select HP Documentation. You can connect wired headphones to the audio-out (headphone)/audio-in (microphone) combo jack on your computer. To connect wireless headphones to your computer, follow the device manufacturer's instructions. 18 Chapter 5 Enjoying entertainment features Connecting headsets WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, lower the volume setting before putting on headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, see the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices. To access this document:

Select the Start button, select All apps, select HP Help and Support, and then select HP Documentation. Headphones combined with a microphone are called headsets. You can connect wired headsets to the audio-

out (headphone)/audio-in (microphone) combo jack on your computer. To connect wireless headsets to your computer, follow the device manufacturer's instructions. Using sound settings Use sound settings to adjust system volume, change system sounds, or manage audio devices. To view or change sound settings:

Type control panel in the taskbar search box, select Control Panel, select Hardware and Sound, and then select Sound. or Right-click the Start button, select Control Panel, select Hardware and Sound, and then select Sound. Your computer may include an enhanced sound system by Bang & Olufsen, B&O Play, DTS, or another provider. As a result, your computer may include advanced audio features that can be controlled through an audio control panel specific to your audio system. Use the audio control panel to view and control audio settings. Type control panel in the taskbar search box, select Control Panel, select Hardware and Sound, and then select the audio control panel specific to your system. or Right-click the Start button, select Control Panel, select Hardware and Sound, and then select the audio control panel specific to your system. Using video Your computer is a powerful video device that enables you to watch streaming video from your favorite websites and download video and movies to watch on your computer when you are not connected to a network. To enhance your viewing enjoyment, use one of the video ports on the computer to connect an external monitor, projector, or TV. IMPORTANT: Be sure that the external device is connected to the correct port on the computer, using the correct cable. Follow the device manufacturer's instructions. For information on using your video features, refer to HP Support Assistant. Using video 19 Connecting video devices using an micro-HDMI cable NOTE: To connect an HDMI device to your computer, you need a micro-HDMI cable or a micro-HDMI-to-

HDMI adapter, purchased separately. To see the computer screen image on a high-definition TV or monitor, connect the high-definition device according to the following instructions:

1. Connect one end of the micro-HDMI cable to the micro-HDMI port on the computer. 2. 3. Connect the other end of the cable to the high-definition TV or monitor. Press f4 to alternate the computer screen image between 4 display states:

PC screen only: View the screen image on the computer only. Duplicate: View the screen image simultaneously on both the computer and the external device. Extend: View the screen image extended across both the computer and the external device. Second screen only: View the screen image on the external device only. Each time you press f4, the display state changes. For best results, especially if you choose the "Extend" option, increase the screen resolution of NOTE:

the external device, as follows. Type control panel in the taskbar search box, and then select Control Panel. Select Appearance and Personalization. Under Display, select Adjust resolution. Setting up HDMI audio HDMI is the only video interface that supports high-definition video and audio. After you connect an HDMI TV to the computer, you can then turn on HDMI audio by following these steps:

1. 2. 3. Right-click the Speakers icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, and then select Playback devices. On the Playback tab, select the name of the digital output device. Click Set Default, and then click OK. 20 Chapter 5 Enjoying entertainment features To return the audio stream to the computer speakers:

1. 2. 3. Right-click the Speakers icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, and then click Playback devices. On the Playback tab, click Speakers. Click Set Default, and then click OK. Discovering and connecting to Miracast-compatible wireless displays (select products only) To discover and connect to Miracast-compatible wireless displays without leaving your current apps, follow the steps below. To open Miracast:

Type project in the taskbar search box, and then click Project to a second screen. Click Connect to a wireless display, and then follow the on-screen instructions. NOTE: To learn what type of display you have (Miracast-compatible or Intel WiDi), refer to the documentation that came with your TV or secondary display device. Discovering and connecting to Intel WiDi certified displays (select Intel products only) Use Intel WiDi to wirelessly project individual files such as photos, music, or videos, or to duplicate your entire computer screen to a TV or a secondary display device. Intel WiDi, a premium Miracast solution, makes it easy and seamless to pair your secondary display device;

provides for full-screen duplication; and improves speed, quality, and scaling. To connect to Intel WiDi certified displays:

Type project in the taskbar search box, and then click Project to a second screen. Click Connect to a wireless display, and then follow the on-screen instructions. To open Intel WiDi:

Type Intel WiDi in the taskbar search box, and then click Intel WiDi. Using video 21 6 Navigating the screen You can navigate the computer screen in the following ways:

Use touch gestures directly on the computer screen Use touch gestures on the TouchPad Use a tablet pen directly on the screen (select products only) Use keyboard and optional mouse (mouse purchased separately) Using the TouchPad and touch screen gestures The TouchPad helps you navigate the computer screen and control the pointer using simple touch gestures. You can also use the left and right TouchPad buttons as you would use the corresponding buttons on an external mouse. To navigate a touch screen, touch the screen directly using gestures described in this chapter. You can also customize gestures and view demonstrations of how they work. Type control panel in the taskbar search box, select Control Panel, and then select Hardware and Sound. Under Devices and Printers, select Mouse. NOTE: Unless noted, gestures can be used on the TouchPad or a touch screen. Tap Use the tap/double-tap gesture to select or open an item on the screen. Point to an item on the screen, and then tap one finger on the TouchPad zone or touch screen to select the item. Double-tap an item to open it. 22 Chapter 6 Navigating the screen Two-finger pinch zoom Use the two-finger pinch zoom to zoom out or in on images or text. Zoom out by placing two fingers apart on the TouchPad zone or touch screen and then moving your fingers together. Zoom in by placing two fingers together on the TouchPad zone or touch screen and then moving your fingers apart. Two-finger scroll (TouchPad only) Use the two-finger scroll to move up, down, or sideways on a page or image. Place two fingers slightly apart on the TouchPad zone and then drag them up, down, left, or right. Two-finger tap (TouchPad only) Use the two-finger tap to open the menu for an object on the screen. NOTE: The two-finger tap performs the same function as right-clicking with the mouse. Tap two fingers on the TouchPad zone to open the options menu for the selected object. Using the TouchPad and touch screen gestures 23 One-finger slide (touch screen only) Use the one-finger slide to pan or scroll through lists and pages, or to move an object. To scroll across the screen, lightly slide one finger across the screen in the direction you want to move. To move an object, press and hold your finger on an object, and then drag your finger to move the object. Using the keyboard and optional mouse The keyboard and mouse allow you to type, select items, scroll and to perform the same functions as you do using touch gestures. The keyboard also allows you to use action keys and key combinations to perform specific functions. NOTE: Depending on the country or region, your keyboard may have different keys and keyboard functions than those discussed in this section. Using the on-screen keyboard You may want to enter data into a data field. This may be required when you set up a wireless network configuration or a weather reporting location, or when you access user accounts on Internet sites. The tablet has an on-screen keyboard that is displayed when you need to enter such information. 1. To display the keyboard, tap in the first data field. Tap the small keyboard icon that is displayed. or Tap the keyboard icon on the right side of the notification area. 2. 3. To enlarge the size of the on-screen keyboard, tap the lower-right corner and drag it to the desired size. Tap each character, continuing until you have spelled out the name or word that you are entering into the data field. NOTE: Hot keys do not display or function on the on-screen keyboard. NOTE: Suggested words may be displayed at the top of the on-screen keyboard. If an appropriate word is displayed, tap it to select it. 4. Tap enter on the keyboard. Using a tablet pen (select products only) You can use the pen directly on the tablet. For details about using the pen, refer to the instructions included with the pen. 24 Chapter 6 Navigating the screen 7 Managing power Your computer can operate on either battery power or external power. When the computer is running on battery power only and an AC power source is not available to charge the battery, it is important to monitor and conserve the battery charge. Initiating and exiting Sleep and Hibernation CAUTION: Several well-known vulnerabilities exist when a computer is in the Sleep state. To prevent an unauthorized user from accessing data on your computer, even encrypted data, HP recommends that you always initiate Hibernation instead of Sleep anytime the computer will be out of your physical possession. This practice is particularly important when you travel with your computer. Windows has two power-saving states, Sleep and Hibernation. SleepThe Sleep state is automatically initiated after a period of inactivity. Your work is saved to memory, allowing you to resume your work very quickly. You can also initiate Sleep manually. For more information, see Manually initiating and exiting Sleep on page 26. HibernationThe Hibernation state is automatically initiated if the battery reaches a critical level. In the Hibernation state, your work is saved to a hibernation file and the computer powers down. You can also initiate Hibernation manually. For more information, see Manually initiating and exiting Hibernation

(select products only) on page 26. CAUTION: To reduce the risk of possible audio and video degradation, loss of audio or video playback functionality, or loss of information, do not initiate the Sleep state while reading from or writing to a disc or an external media card. Initiating and exiting Sleep and Hibernation 25 Manually initiating and exiting Sleep You can initiate Sleep in any of the following ways:

Close the display. Select the Start button, select the Power icon, and then select Sleep. You can exit Sleep in any of the following ways:

Briefly press the power button. If the computer is closed, raise the display. Press a key on the keyboard. Tap the TouchPad. When the computer exits Sleep, the power lights turn on and your work returns to the screen. NOTE:

before your work returns to the screen. If you have set a password to be required on exiting Sleep, you must enter your Windows password Manually initiating and exiting Hibernation (select products only) You can enable user-initiated Hibernation and change other power settings and timeouts using Power Options. 1. 2. 3. Type power options in the taskbar search box, and then select Power Options. or Right-click the Power meter icon

, and then select Power Options. In the left pane, select Choose what the power button does. Select Change Settings that are currently unavailable, and then, in the When I press the power button area, select Hibernate. or Under Shutdown settings, select the Hibernate box to show the Hibernate option in the Power menu. 4. Select Save changes. To exit Hibernation:

Briefly press the power button. When the computer exits Hibernation, the power lights turn on and your work returns to the screen. NOTE:

password before your work returns to the screen. If you have set a password to be required on exiting Hibernation, you must enter your Windows Setting password protection on wakeup (exiting Sleep or Hibernation) To set the computer to prompt for a password when the computer exits Sleep or Hibernation, follow these steps:

1. Type power options in the taskbar search box, and then select Power Options. or 26 Chapter 7 Managing power Right-click the Power meter icon

, and then select Power Options. 2. 3. 4. In the left pane, select Require a password on wakeup. Select Change Settings that are currently unavailable. Select Require a password (recommended). NOTE: To create a user account password or change your current user account password, select Create or change your user account password, and then follow the on-screen instructions. If you do not need to create or change a user account password, go to step 5. 5. Select Save changes. Using the power meter and power settings The power meter is located on the Windows taskbar. The power meter allows you to quickly access power settings and view the remaining battery charge. To view the percentage of remaining battery charge and the current power plan, place the mouse pointer over the power meter icon

. To use Power Options, rightclick the power meter icon can also type power options in the task bar search box, and then select Power Options.

, and then select an item from the list. You Different power meter icons indicate whether the computer is running on battery or external power. Placing the mouse pointer over the icon reveals a message if the battery has reached a low or critical battery level. Running on battery power When a charged battery is in the computer and the computer is not plugged into external power, the computer runs on battery power. When the computer is off and unplugged from external power, the battery in the computer slowly discharges. The computer displays a message when the battery reaches a low or critical battery level. Computer battery life varies, depending on power management settings, programs running on the computer, screen brightness, external devices connected to the computer, and other factors. Factory-sealed battery To monitor the status of the battery, or if the battery is no longer holding a charge, run HP Battery Check in the HP Support Assistant app. 1. 2. Type support in the taskbar search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. or Click the question mark icon in the taskbar. Select My PC, select the Diagnostics and tools tab, and then select HP Battery Check. If HP Battery Check indicates that your battery should be replaced, contact support. The battery[ies] in this product cannot be easily replaced by users themselves. Removing or replacing the battery could affect your warranty coverage. If a battery is no longer holding a charge, contact support. When Using the power meter and power settings 27 a battery has reached the end of its useful life, do not dispose of the battery in general household waste. Follow the local laws and regulations in your area for battery disposal. Finding battery information To access battery information:

1. 2. Type support in the taskbar search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. or Click the question mark icon in the taskbar. Select My PC, select the Diagnostics and tools tab, and then select HP Battery Check. If HP Battery Check indicates that your battery should be replaced, contact support. HP Support Assistant provides the following tools and information about the battery:

HP Battery Check Information about battery types, specifications, life cycles, and capacity Conserving battery power To conserve battery power and maximize battery life:

Lower the brightness of the display. Select the Power saver setting in Power Options. Turn off wireless devices when you are not using them. Disconnect unused external devices that are not plugged into an external power source, such as an external hard drive connected to a USB port. Stop, disable, or remove any external media cards that you are not using. Before you leave your work, initiate Sleep or shut down the computer. Identifying low battery levels When a battery that is the sole power source for the computer reaches a low or critical battery level, the following behavior occurs:

The battery light (select products only) indicates a low or critical battery level. or The power meter icon shows a low or critical battery notification. NOTE:

settings on page 27. For additional information about the power meter, see Using the power meter and power The computer takes the following actions for a critical battery level:

If Hibernation is disabled and the computer is on or in the Sleep state, the computer remains briefly in the Sleep state and then shuts down and loses any unsaved information. If Hibernation is enabled and the computer is on or in the Sleep state, the computer initiates Hibernation. 28 Chapter 7 Managing power Resolving a low battery level Resolving a low battery level when external power is available Connect one of the following to the computer and to external power:

AC adapter Optional docking or expansion device Optional power adapter purchased as an accessory from HP Resolving a low battery level when no power source is available Save your work and shut down the computer. Resolving a low battery level when the computer cannot exit Hibernation 1. 2. Connect the AC adapter to the computer and to external power. Exit Hibernation by pressing the power button. Running on AC power For information about connecting to AC power, refer to the Setup Instructions poster provided in the computer box. The computer does not use battery power when the computer is connected to AC power with an approved AC adapter or an optional docking/expansion device. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, use only the AC adapter provided with the computer, a replacement AC adapter provided by HP, or a compatible AC adapter purchased from HP. Connect the computer to AC power under any of the following conditions:

WARNING! Do not charge the computer battery while you are aboard aircraft. When charging or calibrating a battery When installing or modifying system software When writing information to a disc (select products only) When running Disk Defragmenter on computers with internal hard drives When performing a backup or recovery When you connect the computer to AC power:

The battery begins to charge. The screen brightness increases. The power meter icon changes appearance. When you disconnect AC power:

Running on AC power 29 The computer switches to battery power. The screen brightness automatically decreases to save battery life. The power meter icon changes appearance. Troubleshooting power problems Test the AC adapter if the computer exhibits any of the following symptoms when it is connected to AC power:

The computer does not turn on. The display does not turn on. The power lights do not turn on. To test the AC adapter:

1. 2. 3. Shut down the computer. Connect the AC adapter to the computer and to the power cord, and then plug the power cord into an AC outlet. Turn on the computer. If the power lights turn on, the AC adapter is working properly. If the power lights remain off, check the connection from the AC adapter to the computer and the connection from the power cord to the AC outlet to be sure that the connections are secure. If the connections are secure and the power lights remain off, the AC adapter is not functioning and should be replaced. Contact support for information about obtaining a replacement AC power adapter. Shutting down (turning off) the computer CAUTION: Unsaved information is lost when the computer shuts down. Be sure to save your work before shutting down the computer. The Shut down command closes all open programs, including the operating system, and then turns off the display and computer. Shut down the computer under any of the following conditions:

When you need to access components inside the computer When you are connecting an external hardware device that does not connect to a USB or video port When the computer will be unused and disconnected from external power for an extended period Although you can turn off the computer with the power button, the recommended procedure is to use the Windows Shut down command. NOTE:

pressing the power button. If the computer is in the Sleep state or in Hibernation, first exit Sleep or Hibernation by briefly 1. 2. Save your work and close all open programs. Select the Start button, select the Power icon, and then select Shut down. 30 Chapter 7 Managing power If the computer is unresponsive and you are unable to use the preceding shutdown procedures, try the following emergency procedures in the sequence provided:

Press ctrl+alt+delete, select the Power icon, and then select Shut down. Press and hold the power button for at least 5 seconds. Disconnect the computer from external power. Shutting down (turning off) the computer 31 8 Maintaining your computer It is important to perform regular maintenance to keep your computer in optimal condition. This chapter explains how to use tools like Disk Defragmenter and Disk Cleanup. It also provides instructions for updating programs and drivers, steps to clean the computer, and tips for traveling with (or shipping) the computer. Improving performance You can improve the performance of your computer by performing regular maintenance tasks with tools such as Disk Defragmenter and Disk Cleanup. Using Disk Defragmenter HP recommends using Disk Defragmenter to defragment your hard drive at least once a month. NOTE:

It is not necessary to run Disk Defragmenter on solid-state drives. To run Disk Defragmenter:

1. 2. 3. Connect the computer to AC power. Type defragment in the taskbar search box, and then select Defragment and optimize your drives. Follow the on-screen instructions. For additional information, access the Disk Defragmenter software Help. Using Disk Cleanup Use Disk Cleanup to search the hard drive for unnecessary files that you can safely delete to free up disk space and help the computer run more efficiently. To run Disk Cleanup:

1. 2. Type disk in the taskbar search box, and then select Free up disk space by deleting unnecessary files or Uninstall apps to free up disk space. Follow the on-screen instructions. Using HP 3D DriveGuard (select products only) HP 3D DriveGuard protects a hard drive by parking the drive and halting data requests under either of the following conditions:

You drop the computer. You move the computer with the display closed while the computer is running on battery power. A short time after the end of one of these events, HP 3D DriveGuard returns the hard drive to normal operation. NOTE: Only internal hard drives are protected by HP 3D DriveGuard. A hard drive installed in an optional docking device or connected to a USB port is not protected by HP 3D DriveGuard. 32 Chapter 8 Maintaining your computer NOTE: Because solid-state drives (SSDs) lack moving parts, HP 3D DriveGuard is unnecessary for these drives. For more information, see the HP 3D DriveGuard software Help. Identifying HP 3D DriveGuard status The hard drive light on the computer changes color to show that the drive in a primary hard drive bay and/or the drive in a secondary hard drive bay (select products only) is parked. To determine whether a drive is currently protected or whether it is parked, view the icon on the Windows desktop in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. Updating programs and drivers HP recommends that you update your programs and drivers on a regular basis. Updates can resolve issues and bring new features and options to your computer. For example, older graphics components might not work well with the most recent gaming software. Without the latest driver, you would not be getting the most out of your equipment. Go to http://www.hp.com/support to download the latest versions of HP programs and drivers. In addition, register to receive automatic notifications when updates become available. If you would like to update your programs and drivers, follow these instructions:

1. 2. 3. Type support in the taskbar search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app.

- or -

Click the question mark icon in the taskbar. Select My PC, select the Updates tab, and then select Check for updates and messages. Follow the on-screen instructions. Cleaning your computer Use the following products to safely clean your computer:

Dimethyl benzyl ammonium chloride 0.3 percent maximum concentration (for example, disposable wipes, which come in a variety of brands) Alcohol-free glass-cleaning fluid Solution of water and mild soap Dry microfiber cleaning cloth or a chamois (static-free cloth without oil) Static-free cloth wipes CAUTION: Avoid strong cleaning solvents that can permanently damage your computer. If you are not sure that a cleaning product is safe for your computer, check the product contents to make sure that ingredients such as alcohol, acetone, ammonium chloride, methylene chloride, and hydrocarbons are not included in the product. Fibrous materials, such as paper towels, can scratch the computer. Over time, dirt particles and cleaning agents can get trapped in the scratches. Cleaning procedures Follow the procedures in this section to safely clean your computer. Updating programs and drivers 33 WARNING! To prevent electric shock or damage to components, do not attempt to clean your computer while it is on. 1. 2. 3. Turn off the computer. Disconnect AC power. Disconnect all powered external devices. CAUTION: To prevent damage to internal components, do not spray cleaning agents or liquids directly on any computer surface. Liquids dripped on the surface can permanently damage internal components. Cleaning the display Gently wipe the display using a soft, lint-free cloth moistened with an alcohol-free glass cleaner. Be sure that a display is dry before you close the computer. Cleaning the sides or cover To clean the sides or cover, use a soft microfiber cloth or chamois moistened with one of the cleaning solutions listed previously, or use an acceptable disposable wipe. NOTE: When cleaning the cover of the computer, use a circular motion to aid in removing dirt and debris. Cleaning the TouchPad, keyboard, or mouse (select products only) WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to internal components, do not use a vacuum cleaner attachment to clean the keyboard. A vacuum cleaner can deposit household debris on the keyboard surface. CAUTION: To prevent damage to internal components, do not allow liquids to drip between the keys. To clean the TouchPad, keyboard, or mouse, use a soft microfiber cloth or a chamois moistened with one of the cleaning solutions listed previously or use an acceptable disposable wipe. To prevent keys from sticking and to remove dust, lint, and particles from the keyboard, use a can of compressed air with a straw extension. Traveling with or shipping your computer If you have to travel with or ship your computer, follow these tips to keep your equipment safe. Prepare the computer for traveling or shipping:

Back up your information to an external drive. Remove all discs and all external media cards, such as memory cards. Turn off and then disconnect all external devices. Shut down the computer. Take along a backup of your information. Keep the backup separate from the computer. When traveling by air, carry the computer as hand luggage; do not check it in with the rest of your luggage. CAUTION: Avoid exposing a drive to magnetic fields. Security devices with magnetic fields include airport walk-through devices and security wands. Airport conveyer belts and similar security devices that check carry-on baggage use X-rays instead of magnetism and do not damage drives. 34 Chapter 8 Maintaining your computer If you plan to use the computer during a flight, listen for the in-flight announcement that tells you when you are allowed to use your computer. In-flight computer use is at the discretion of the airline. If you are shipping the computer or a drive, use suitable protective packaging and label the package FRAGILE. The use of wireless devices may be restricted in some environments. Such restrictions may apply aboard aircraft, in hospitals, near explosives, and in hazardous locations. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of a wireless device in your computer, ask for authorization to use your computer before you turn it on. If you are traveling internationally, follow these suggestions:

Check the computer-related customs regulations for each country or region on your itinerary. Check the power cord and adapter requirements for each location in which you plan to use the computer. Voltage, frequency, and plug configurations vary. WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not attempt to power the computer with a voltage converter kit sold for appliances. Traveling with or shipping your computer 35 9 Securing your computer and information Computer security is essential for protecting the confidentiality, integrity, and availability of your information. Standard security solutions provided by the Windows operating system, HP applications, the Setup Utility (BIOS), and other third-party software can help protect your computer from a variety of risks, such as viruses, worms, and other types of malicious code. IMPORTANT: Some security features listed in this chapter may not be available on your computer. Using passwords A password is a group of characters that you choose to secure your computer information and to protect online transactions. Several types of passwords can be set. For example, when you set up your computer for the first time, you were asked to create a user password to secure your computer. Additional passwords can be set in Windows or in HP Setup Utility (BIOS), which is preinstalled on your computer. You may find it helpful to use the same password for a Setup Utility (BIOS) feature and for a Windows security feature. To create and save passwords, use the following tips:

To reduce the risk of being locked out of the computer, record each password and store it in a secure place away from the computer. Do not store passwords in a file on the computer. When creating passwords, follow requirements set by the program. Change your passwords at least every 3 months. An ideal password is long and has letters, punctuation, symbols, and numbers. Before you send your computer for service, back up your files, delete confidential files, and then remove all password settings. For additional information about Windows passwords, such as screen-saver passwords:

Type support in the taskbar search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. or Click the question mark icon in the taskbar. Setting Windows passwords Password User password Function Protects access to a Windows user account. Administrator password Protects administrator-level access to computer contents. NOTE: This password cannot be used to access Setup Utility

(BIOS) contents. 36 Chapter 9 Securing your computer and information Setting Setup Utility (BIOS) passwords Password Administrator password Power-on password Function Must be entered each time you access Setup Utility (BIOS). If you forget your administrator password, you cannot access Setup Utility (BIOS). Must be entered each time you turn on or restart the computer. If you forget your power-on password, you cannot turn on or restart the computer. To set, change, or delete an administrator or power-on password in Setup Utility (BIOS):

CAUTION: Use extreme care when making changes in Setup Utility (BIOS). Errors can prevent the computer from operating properly. NOTE: To start Setup Utility, your computer must be in notebook mode and you must use the keyboard attached to your notebook. The on-screen keyboard, which displays in tablet mode, cannot access Setup Utility. 1. Start Setup Utility (BIOS):

Computers or tablets with keyboards:

Turn on or restart the computer, quickly press esc, and then press f10. Tablets without keyboards:

1. Turn on or restart the tablet, and then quickly hold down the volume down button.

- or -

Turn on or restart the tablet, and then quickly hold down the Windows button. 2. Tap f10. 2. Select Security, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Your changes take effect when the computer restarts. Using the fingerprint reader (select products only) Integrated fingerprint readers are available on select products. To use the fingerprint reader, you must set up a user account and password on the computer and then register one or more fingerprints using HP SimplePass software. To register fingerprints with HP SimplePass:

1. Swipe a finger on the fingerprint sensor to launch HP SimplePass. 2. When the HP SimplePass welcome screen is displayed, select Get Started. 3. HP SimplePass prompts you to swipe your right index finger over the sensor. Using the fingerprint reader (select products only) 37 4. 5. Swipe your finger 3 times to finish the registration. If registration is successful, a green circle appears on the corresponding finger in the illustration. Repeat steps 1 through 4 to register an additional fingerprint. Using Internet security software When you use your computer to access email, a network, or the Internet, you potentially expose your computer to computer viruses, spyware, and other online threats. To help protect your computer, Internet security software that includes antivirus and firewall features may be preinstalled on your computer as a trial offer. To provide ongoing protection against newly discovered viruses and other security risks, security software must be kept up to date. It is strongly recommended that you upgrade the security software trial offer or purchase the software of your choice in order to fully protect your computer. Using antivirus software Computer viruses can disable programs, utilities, or the operating system, or cause them to function abnormally. Antivirus software can detect most viruses, destroy them, and in most cases, repair any damage they have caused. To provide ongoing protection against newly discovered viruses, antivirus software must be kept up to date. An antivirus program may be preinstalled on your computer. It is strongly recommended that you use the antivirus program of your choice in order to fully protect your computer. For more information about computer viruses, type support in the taskbar search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. or Click the question mark icon in the taskbar. Using firewall software Firewalls are designed to prevent unauthorized access to a system or network. A firewall can be software you install on your computer and/or network, or it can be a combination of both hardware and software. There are two types of firewalls to consider:

Host-based firewallsSoftware that protects only the computer it is installed on. Network-based firewallsInstalled between your DSL or cable modem and your home network to protect all the computers on the network. When a firewall is installed on a system, all data sent to and from the system is monitored and compared with a set of user-defined security criteria. Any data that does not meet those criteria is blocked. Installing software updates HP, Windows, and third-party software installed on your computer should be regularly updated to correct security problems and improve software performance. CAUTION: Microsoft sends out alerts regarding Windows updates, which may include security updates. To protect the computer from security breaches and computer viruses, install all updates from Microsoft as soon as you receive an alert. You can install these updates automatically. 38 Chapter 9 Securing your computer and information To view or change the settings:

1. 2. 3. Select the Start button, select Settings, and then select Update & Security. Select Windows Update, and then follow the on-screen instructions. To schedule a time for installing updates, select Advanced Options, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Using HP Touchpoint Manager (select products only) HP Touchpoint Manager is a cloud-based IT solution that enables businesses to effectively manage and secure their company assets. HP Touchpoint Manager helps protect devices against malware and other attacks, monitors device health, and enables you to reduce time spent solving end-user device and security issues. You can quickly download and install the software, which is highly cost effective relative to traditional in-house solutions. Securing your wireless network When you set up a WLAN or access an existing WLAN, always enable security features to protect your network from unauthorized access. WLANs in public areas (hotspots) like coffee shops and airports may not provide any security. Backing up your software applications and information Regularly back up your software applications and information to protect them from being permanently lost or damaged through a virus attack or a software or hardware failure. Using an optional security cable A security cable, which is purchased separately, is designed to act as a deterrent, but it may not prevent the computer from being mishandled or stolen. Security cables are only one of several methods that should be employed as part of a complete security solution to help maximize theft protection. The security cable slot on your computer may look slightly different from the illustration in this section. 1. 2. Loop the security cable around a secured object. Insert the key (1) into the security cable lock (2). Using HP Touchpoint Manager (select products only) 39 3. Insert the security cable lock into the security cable slot on the computer (3), and then lock the security cable lock with the key. 4. Remove the key and keep it in a safe place. 40 Chapter 9 Securing your computer and information 10 Using Setup Utility (BIOS) Setup Utility, or Basic Input/Output System (BIOS), controls communication between all the input and output devices on the system (such as disk drives, display, keyboard, mouse, and printer). Setup Utility (BIOS) includes settings for the types of devices installed, the startup sequence of the computer, and the amount of system and extended memory. NOTE: To start Setup Utility on convertible computers, your computer must be in notebook mode and you must use the keyboard attached to your notebook. Starting Setup Utility (BIOS) CAUTION: Use extreme care when making changes in Setup Utility (BIOS). Errors can prevent the computer from operating properly. Turn on or restart the computer, quickly press esc, and then press f10. Updating Setup Utility (BIOS) Updated versions of Setup Utility (BIOS) may be available on the HP website. Most BIOS updates on the HP website are packaged in compressed files called SoftPaqs. Some download packages contain a file named Readme.txt, which contains information regarding installing and troubleshooting the file. Determining the BIOS version To decide whether you need to update Setup Utility (BIOS), first determine the BIOS version on your computer. To reveal the BIOS version information (also known as ROM date and System BIOS), use one of these options. HP Support Assistant 1. Type support in the taskbar search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. or Click the question mark icon in the taskbar. 2. Select My PC, and then select Specifications. Setup Utility (BIOS) 1. 2. 3. Start Setup Utility (BIOS) (see Starting Setup Utility (BIOS) on page 41). Select Main, select System Information, and then make note of the BIOS version. Select Exit, select No, and then follow the on-screen instructions. To check for later BIOS versions, see Downloading a BIOS update on page 42. Starting Setup Utility (BIOS) 41 Downloading a BIOS update CAUTION: To reduce the risk of damage to the computer or an unsuccessful installation, download and install a BIOS update only when the computer is connected to reliable external power using the AC adapter. Do not download or install a BIOS update while the computer is running on battery power, docked in an optional docking device, or connected to an optional power source. During the download and installation, follow these instructions:

Do not disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet. Do not insert, remove, connect, or disconnect any device, cable, or cord. Do not shut down the computer or initiate Sleep. NOTE:

software updates, especially system BIOS updates. If your computer is connected to a network, consult the network administrator before installing any 1. 2. 3. 4. Type support in the taskbar search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. or Click the question mark icon in the taskbar. Click Updates, and then click Check for updates and messages. Follow the on-screen instructions. At the download area, follow these steps:

a. Identify the most recent BIOS update and compare it to the BIOS version currently installed on your computer. If the update is more recent than your BIOS version, make a note of the date, name, or other identifier. You may need this information to locate the update later, after it has been downloaded to your hard drive. b. Follow the on-screen instructions to download your selection to the hard drive. Make a note of the path to the location on your hard drive where the BIOS update is downloaded. You will need to access this path when you are ready to install the update. BIOS installation procedures vary. Follow any instructions that appear on the screen after the download is complete. If no instructions appear, follow these steps:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Type file in the taskbar search box, and then select File Explorer. Click your hard drive designation. The hard drive designation is typically Local Disk (C:). Using the hard drive path you recorded earlier, open the folder that contains the update. Double-click the file that has an .exe extension (for example, filename.exe). The BIOS installation begins. Complete the installation by following the on-screen instructions. NOTE: After a message on the screen reports a successful installation, you can delete the downloaded file from your hard drive. 42 Chapter 10 Using Setup Utility (BIOS) 11 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) HP PC Hardware Diagnostics is a Unified Extensible Firmware Interface (UEFI) that allows you to run diagnostic tests to determine whether the computer hardware is functioning properly. The tool runs outside the operating system so that it can isolate hardware failures from issues that are caused by the operating system or other software components. When HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) detects a failure that requires hardware replacement, a 24-digit Failure ID code is generated. This ID code can then be provided to support to help determine how to correct the problem. NOTE: To start diagnostics on a convertible computer, your computer must be in notebook mode and you must use the keyboard attached. To start HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI), follow these steps:

1. 2. Turn on or restart the computer, and quickly press esc. Press f2. The BIOS searches three places for the diagnostic tools, in the following order:

a. Connected USB drive NOTE: To download the HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) tool to a USB drive, see Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) to a USB device on page 43. b. c. Hard drive BIOS 3. When the diagnostic tool opens, select the type of diagnostic test you want to run, and then follow the on-screen instructions. NOTE:

If you need to stop a diagnostic test, press esc. Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) to a USB device NOTE: The HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) download instructions are provided in English only, and you must use a Windows computer to download and create the HP UEFI support environment because only .exe files are offered. There are two options to download HP PC Hardware Diagnostics to a USB device. Download the latest UEFI version 1. 2. Go to http://www.hp.com/go/techcenter/pcdiags. The HP PC Diagnostics home page is displayed. In the HP PC Hardware Diagnostics section, click the Download link, and then select Run. Download any version of UEFI for a specific product 1. 2. Go to http://www.hp.com/support, and then select your country. The HP Support page is displayed. Click Drivers & Downloads. Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) to a USB device 43 3. Use the categories listed to find your product. or 4. 5. Click Find Now to let HP automatically detect your product. Select your computer, and then select your operating system. In the Diagnostic section, follow the on-screen instructions to select and download the UEFI version you want. 44 Chapter 11 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) 12 Backing up, restoring, and recovering This chapter provides information about the following processes. The information in the chapter is standard procedure for most products. Creating recovery media and backups Restoring and recovering your system For additional information, refer to the HP support assistant app. Type support in the taskbar search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. or Click the question mark icon in the taskbar. IMPORTANT:

70% charged before you start the recovery process. If you will be performing recovery procedures on a tablet, the tablet battery must be at least IMPORTANT:

beginning any recovery process. For a tablet with a detachable keyboard, connect the keyboard to the keyboard dock before Creating recovery media and backups The following methods of creating recovery media and backups are available on select products only. Choose the available method according to your computer model. Use HP Recovery Manager to create HP Recovery media after you successfully set up the computer. This step creates a backup of the HP Recovery partition on the computer. The backup can be used to reinstall the original operating system in cases where the hard drive is corrupted or has been replaced. For information on creating recovery media, see Creating HP Recovery media (select products only) on page 45. For information on the recovery options that are available using the recovery media, see Using Windows tools on page 46. Use Windows tools to create system restore points and create backups of personal information. For more information, see Recovering using HP Recovery Manager on page 47. NOTE:

If storage is 32 GB or less, Microsoft System Restore is disabled by default. Creating HP Recovery media (select products only) If possible, check for the presence of the Recovery partition and the Windows partition. From the Start menu, select File Explorer, and then select This PC. If your computer does not list the Windows partition and the Recovery partition, you can obtain recovery media for your system from support. See the Worldwide Telephone Numbers booklet included with the computer. You can also find contact information on the HP website. Go to http://www.hp.com/

support, select your country or region, and follow the on-screen instructions. Creating recovery media and backups 45 You can use Windows tools to create system restore points and create backups of personal information, see Using Windows tools on page 46. If your computer does list the Recovery partition and the Windows partition, you can use HP Recovery Manager to create recovery media after you successfully set up the computer. HP Recovery media can be used to perform system recovery if the hard drive becomes corrupted. System recovery reinstalls the original operating system and software programs that were installed at the factory and then configures the settings for the programs. HP Recovery media can also be used to customize the system or restore the factory image if you replace the hard drive. Only one set of recovery media can be created. Handle these recovery tools carefully, and keep them in a safe place. HP Recovery Manager examines the computer and determines the required storage capacity for the media that will be required. To create recovery discs, your computer must have an optical drive with DVD writer capability, and you must use only high-quality blank DVD-R, DVD+R, DVD-R DL, or DVD+R DL discs. Do not use rewritable discs such as CDRW, DVDRW, double-layer DVDRW, or BD-RE (rewritable Blu-ray) discs; they are not compatible with HP Recovery Manager software. Or, instead, you can use a high-quality blank USB flash drive. If your computer does not include an integrated optical drive with DVD writer capability, but you would like to create DVD recovery media, you can use an external optical drive (purchased separately) to create recovery discs. If you use an external optical drive, it must be connected directly to a USB port on the computer; the drive cannot be connected to a USB port on an external device, such as a USB hub. If you cannot create DVD media yourself, you can obtain recovery discs for your computer from HP. See the Worldwide Telephone Numbers booklet included with the computer. You can also find contact information on the HP website. Go to http://www.hp.com/

support, select your country or region, and follow the on-screen instructions. Be sure that the computer is connected to AC power before you begin creating the recovery media. The creation process can take an hour or more. Do not interrupt the creation process. If necessary, you can exit the program before you have finished creating all of the recovery DVDs. HP Recovery Manager will finish burning the current DVD. The next time you start HP Recovery Manager, you will be prompted to continue. To create HP Recovery media:

IMPORTANT:

beginning these steps. For a tablet with a detachable keyboard, connect the keyboard to the keyboard dock before 1. 2. Type recovery in the taskbar search box, and then select HP Recovery Manager. Select Create recovery media, and then follow the on-screen instructions. If you ever need to recover the system, see Recovering using HP Recovery Manager on page 47. Using Windows tools You can create recovery media, system restore points, and backups of personal information using Windows tools. NOTE:

If storage is 32 GB or less, Microsoft System Restore is disabled by default. For more information and steps, see the Get started app. Select the Start button, and then select the Get started app. 46 Chapter 12 Backing up, restoring, and recovering Restore and recovery There are several options for recovering your system. Choose the method that best matches your situation and level of expertise:

IMPORTANT: Not all methods are available on all products. Windows offers several options for restoring from backup, refreshing the computer, and resetting the computer to its original state. For more information see the Get started app. Select the Start button, and then select the Get started app. If you need to correct a problem with a preinstalled application or driver, use the Reinstall drivers and/or applications option (select products only) of HP Recovery Manager to reinstall the individual application or driver. Type recovery in the taskbar search box, select HP Recovery Manager, select Reinstall drivers and/or applications, and then follow the on-screen instructions. If you want to recover the Windows partition to original factory content, you can choose the System Recovery option from the HP Recovery partition (select products only) or use the HP Recovery media. For more information, see Recovering using HP Recovery Manager on page 47. If you have not already created recovery media, see Creating HP Recovery media (select products only) on page 45. On select products, if you want to recover the computer's original factory partition and content, or if you have replaced the hard drive, you can use the Factory Reset option of HP Recovery media. For more information, see Recovering using HP Recovery Manager on page 47. On select products, if you want to remove the recovery partition to reclaim hard drive space, HP Recovery Manager offers the Remove Recovery Partition option. For more information, see Removing the HP Recovery partition (select products only) on page 50. Recovering using HP Recovery Manager HP Recovery Manager software allows you to recover the computer to its original factory state by using the HP Recovery media that you either created or that you obtained from HP, or by using the HP Recovery partition (select products only). If you have not already created recovery media, see Creating HP Recovery media (select products only) on page 45. What you need to know before you get started HP Recovery Manager recovers only software that was installed at the factory. For software not provided with this computer, you must either download the software from the manufacturer's website or reinstall the software from the media provided by the manufacturer. IMPORTANT: Recovery through HP Recovery Manager should be used as a final attempt to correct computer issues. HP Recovery media must be used if the computer hard drive fails. If you have not already created recovery media, see Creating HP Recovery media (select products only) on page 45. To use the Factory Reset option (select products only), you must use HP Recovery media. If you have not already created recovery media, see Creating HP Recovery media (select products only) on page 45. If your computer does not allow the creation of HP Recovery media or if the HP Recovery media does not work, you can obtain recovery media for your system from support. See the Worldwide Telephone Numbers booklet included with the computer. You can also find contact information from the HP Restore and recovery 47 website. Go to http://www.hp.com/support, select your country or region, and follow the on-screen instructions. IMPORTANT: HP Recovery Manager does not automatically provide backups of your personal data. Before beginning recovery, back up any personal data you want to retain. Using HP Recovery media, you can choose from one of the following recovery options:

NOTE: Only the options available for your computer display when you start the recovery process. System RecoveryReinstalls the original operating system, and then configures the settings for the programs that were installed at the factory. Factory ResetRestores the computer to its original factory state by deleting all information from the hard drive and re-creating the partitions. Then it reinstalls the operating system and the software that was installed at the factory. The HP Recovery partition (select products only) allows System Recovery only. Using the HP Recovery partition (select products only) The HP Recovery partition allows you to perform a system recovery without the need for recovery discs or a recovery USB flash drive. This type of recovery can be used only if the hard drive is still working. To start HP Recovery Manager from the HP Recovery partition:

IMPORTANT:

beginning these steps (select products only). For a tablet with a detachable keyboard, connect the keyboard to the keyboard dock before 1. Type recovery in the taskbar search box, select Recovery Manager, and then select HP Recovery Environment.

- or-

For computers or tablets with keyboards attached, press f11 while the computer boots, or press and hold f11 as you press the power button. For tablets without keyboards:

Turn on or restart the tablet, and then quickly hold down the volume down button; then select f11.

- or -

Turn on or restart the tablet, and then quickly hold down the Windows button; then select f11. 2. 3. Select Troubleshoot from the boot options menu. Select Recovery Manager, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Using HP Recovery media to recover You can use HP Recovery media to recover the original system. This method can be used if your system does not have an HP Recovery partition or if the hard drive is not working properly. 1. 2. If possible, back up all personal files. Insert the HP Recovery media, and then restart the computer. NOTE:

boot order. See Changing the computer boot order on page 49. If the computer does not automatically restart in HP Recovery Manager, change the computer 3. Follow the on-screen instructions. 48 Chapter 12 Backing up, restoring, and recovering Changing the computer boot order If your computer does not restart in HP Recovery Manager, you can change the computer boot order, which is the order of devices listed in BIOS where the computer looks for startup information. You can change the selection to an optical drive or a USB flash drive. To change the boot order:

IMPORTANT:

beginning these steps. For a tablet with a detachable keyboard, connect the keyboard to the keyboard dock before 1. 2. 3. 4. Insert the HP Recovery media. Access BIOS:

For computers or tablets with keyboards attached:

Turn on or restart the computer or tablet, quickly press esc, and then press f9 for boot options. For tablets without keyboards:

Turn on or restart the tablet, and then quickly hold down the volume down button; then select f9.

- or -

Turn on or restart the tablet, and then quickly hold down the Windows button; then select f9. Select the optical drive or USB flash drive from which you want to boot. Follow the on-screen instructions. Restore and recovery 49 Removing the HP Recovery partition (select products only) HP Recovery Manager software allows you to remove the HP Recovery partition to free up hard drive space. IMPORTANT: After you remove the HP Recovery partition, you will not be able to perform System Recovery or create HP recovery media from the HP Recovery partition. So before you remove the Recovery partition, create HP Recovery media; see Creating HP Recovery media (select products only) on page 45. NOTE: The Remove Recovery Partition option is only available on products that support this function. Follow these steps to remove the HP Recovery partition:

1. 2. Type recovery in the taskbar search box, and then select HP Recovery Manager. Select Remove Recovery Partition, and then follow the on-screen instructions. 50 Chapter 12 Backing up, restoring, and recovering 13 Specifications Input power The power information in this section may be helpful if you plan to travel internationally with the computer. The computer operates on DC power, which can be supplied by an AC or a DC power source. The AC power source must be rated at 100240 V, 5060 Hz. Although the computer can be powered from a standalone DC power source, it should be powered only with an AC adapter or a DC power source that is supplied and approved by HP for use with this computer. The computer can operate on DC power within the following specifications. Operating voltage and current varies by platform. The voltage and current for your computer is located on the regulatory label. Input power Rating Operating voltage and current 19.5 V dc @ 2.31 A 45 W 19.5 V dc @ 3.33 A 65 W 19.5 V dc @ 4.62 A 90 W 19.5 V dc @ 6.15 A 120 W 19.5 V dc @ 7.69 A 150 W DC plug of external HP power supply NOTE: This product is designed for IT power systems in Norway with phase-to-phase voltage not exceeding 240 V rms. Operating environment Factor Temperature Operating Nonoperating Relative humidity (noncondensing) Operating Nonoperating Maximum altitude (unpressurized) Metric U.S. 5C to 35C

-20C to 60C 10% to 90%

5% to 95%

41F to 95F

-4F to 140F 10% to 90%

5% to 95%

Operating Nonoperating

-15 m to 3,048 m

-15 m to 12,192 m

-50 ft to 10,000 ft

-50 ft to 40,000 ft Input power 51 14 Electrostatic Discharge Electrostatic discharge is the release of static electricity when two objects come into contactfor example, the shock you receive when you walk across the carpet and touch a metal door knob. A discharge of static electricity from fingers or other electrostatic conductors may damage electronic components. To prevent damage to the computer, damage to a drive, or loss of information, observe these precautions:

If removal or installation instructions direct you to unplug the computer, first be sure that it is properly grounded. Keep components in their electrostatic-safe containers until you are ready to install them. Avoid touching pins, leads, and circuitry. Handle electronic components as little as possible. Use nonmagnetic tools. Before handling components, discharge static electricity by touching an unpainted metal surface. If you remove a component, place it in an electrostatic-safe container. 52 Chapter 14 Electrostatic Discharge 15 Accessibility HP designs, produces, and markets products and services that can be used by everyone, including people with disabilities, either on a stand-alone basis or with appropriate assistive devices. Supported assistive technologies HP products support a wide variety of operating system assistive technologies and can be configured to work with additional assistive technologies. Use the Search feature on your device to locate more information about assistive features. NOTE:

support for that product. For additional information about a particular assistive technology product, contact customer Contacting support We are constantly refining the accessibility of our products and services and welcome feedback from users. If you have an issue with a product or would like to tell us about accessibility features that have helped you, please contact us at +1 (888) 259-5707, Monday through Friday, 6 a.m. to 9 p.m. North American Mountain Time. If you are deaf or hard-of-hearing and use TRS/VRS/WebCapTel, contact us if you require technical support or have accessibility questions by calling +1 (877) 656-7058, Monday through Friday, 6 a.m. to 9 p.m. North American Mountain Time. NOTE: Support is in English only. Supported assistive technologies 53 Index A AC adapter and battery 4 AC adapter, testing 30 accessibility 53 action keys 12 identifying 9 airplane mode 14 airplane mode key 12, 14 antivirus software, using 38 audio 19 audio-out (headphone)/audio-in

(microphone) jack, identifying 5 B backing up software and information 39 backups 45 battery conserving power 28 discharging 28 factory-sealed 27 finding information 28 low battery levels 28 resolving low battery level 29 battery information, finding 28 battery power 27 best practices 1 BIOS determining version 41 downloading an update 42 starting the Setup Utility 41 updating 41 Bluetooth device 14, 16 Bluetooth label 8 boot order changing 49 bottom 8 buttons power 7 volume 5 C caps lock light, identifying 10 caring for your computer 33 cleaning your computer 33 54 Index components bottom edge 7 display 6 keyboard base 9 left side 5 right side 4 top edge 7 connecting to a WLAN 15 corporate WLAN connection 15 critical battery level 28 D Disk Cleanup software 32 Disk Defragmenter software 32 docking port, identifying 7 E electrostatic discharge 52 esc key, identifying 9 external AC power, using 29 F fingerprint reader using 37 fingerprints, registering 37 firewall software 38 fn key, identifying 9 G GPS 16 H HDMI, configuring audio 20 headphones, connecting 18 headsets, connecting 19 Hibernation exiting 26 initiated during critical battery level 28 initiating 26 high-definition devices, connecting 20, 21 HP 3D DriveGuard 32 HP Apps Store, visiting 1 HP DataPass 16 HP Mobile Broadband activating 15 IMEI number 15 MEID number 15 HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) using 43 HP Recovery Manager correcting boot problems 49 starting 48 HP Recovery media creating 45 recovery 48 HP Recovery partition recovery 48 removing 50 HP resources 2 HP Touchpoint Manager 39 I IMEI number 15 initiating Sleep and Hibernation 25 input power 51 installing optional security cable 39 internal microphones, identifying 7 Internet security software, using 38 J jacks audio-out (headphone)/audio-in

(microphone) 5 K keyboard and optional mouse using 24 keyboard base components 9 connecting 13 removing 13 keys action 9 airplane mode 12 esc 9 fn 9 Windows 9 L labels Bluetooth 8 regulatory 8 serial number 8 service 8 wireless certification 8 WLAN 8 left touchPad button, identifying 11 lights P passwords Setup Utility (BIOS) 37 Windows 36 ports HDMI 20 micro-HDMI 4 Miracast 21 USB 2.0 5 USB Type-C (charging) 4 AC adapter and battery light 4 caps lock 10 mute 10 power AC 29 battery 27 locating information hardware 3 software 3 low battery level 28 M magnetic latches, identifying 7 maintenance Disk Cleanup 32 Disk Defragmenter 32 HP 3D DriveGuard 32 updating programs and drivers 33 managing power 25 MEID number 15 memory card reader, identifying 4 memory card, identifying 4 micro-HDMI port connecting 20 identifying 4 minimized image recovery 48 minimized image, creating 47 Miracast 21 mobile broadband activating 15 IMEI number 15 MEID number 15 Mute light 10 O one-finger slide touch screen gesture 24 operating environment 51 original system recovery 47 power button, identifying 7 power meter, using 27 power settings, using 27 product name and number, computer 8 public WLAN connection 15 R recover options 47 recovery discs 46, 48 HP Recovery Manager 47 media 48 starting 48 supported discs 46 system 47 USB flash drive 48 using HP Recovery media 46 recovery media creating 45 creating using HP Recovery Manager 46 recovery partition removing 50 regulatory information regulatory label 8 wireless certification labels 8 right TouchPad button, identifying 11 S security cable, installing 39 serial number 8 serial number, computer 8 service labels, locating 8 setting password protection on wakeup 26 Setup Utility (BIOS) passwords 37 shipping the computer 34 shutdown 30 Sleep exiting 26 initiating 26 Sleep and Hibernation initiating 25 slots memory card reader 4 software Disk Cleanup 32 Disk Defragmenter 32 HP 3D DriveGuard 32 software updates, installing 38 sound settings, using 19 speakers connecting 18 speakers, identifying 6 supported discs, recovery 46 system recovery 47 system restore point creating 46 system restore point, creating 45 T tap TouchPad and touch screen gesture 22 testing an AC adapter 30 touch screen gestures one-finger slide 24 TouchPad using 22 TouchPad and touch screen gestures tap 22 two-finger pinch zoom 23 TouchPad gestures two-finger scroll 23 two-finger tap 23 TouchPad zone, identifying 11 traveling with the computer 8, 34 turning off the computer 30 two-finger pinch zoom TouchPad and touch screen gesture 23 two-finger scroll TouchPad gesture 23 two-finger tap TouchPad gesture 23 Index 55 U unresponsive system 30 updating programs and drivers 33 USB 2.0 port, identifying 5 USB Type-C (charging) port, identifying 4 using external AC power 29 using passwords 36 using power meter settings 27 using power settings 27 using sound settings 19 using the keyboard and optional mouse 24 using the TouchPad 22 V video 19 volume buttons, identifying 5 W webcam identifying 6 using 18 webcam light, identifying 6 Windows system restore point 45, 46 Windows key, identifying 9 Windows passwords 36 Windows tools using 46 wireless button 14 wireless certification label 8 wireless controls button 14 operating system 14 wireless light 14 wireless network (WLAN) connecting 15 corporate WLAN connection 15 functional range 15 public WLAN connection 15 wireless network, securing 39 WLAN antennas, identifying 6 WLAN device 8 WLAN label 8 WWAN device 15 56 Index

Regulatory, Safety, and Environmental Notices User Guide Copyright 2015, 2016 HP Development Company, L.P. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by HP Inc. under license. ENERGY STAR and the ENERGY STAR mark are registered U.S. marks. Java is a registered trademark of Oracle and/or its affiliates. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. Third Edition: February 2016 First Edition: August 2015 Document Part Number: 836854-003 About This Guide This guide provides regulatory, safety and environmental information that is compliant with U.S., Canadian, and international regulations for notebook computers, desktops, thin clients and personal workstations. WARNING! Text set off in this manner indicates that failure to follow directions could result in bodily harm or loss of life. CAUTION: Text set off in this manner indicates that failure to follow directions could result in damage to equipment or loss of information. NOTE: Text set off in this manner provides important supplemental information. iii iv About This Guide Table of contents 1 Regulatory notices for notebook computers .................................................................................................... 1 Accessing regulatory labels ................................................................................................................................... 1 Federal Communications Commission notice ....................................................................................................... 1 Modifications ....................................................................................................................................... 2 Cables .................................................................................................................................................. 2 Products with wireless LAN devices or HP Mobile Broadband Modules ............................................. 2 Brazil notice ........................................................................................................................................................... 3 Canada notices ....................................................................................................................................................... 3 European Union regulatory notices ....................................................................................................................... 3 Declaration of Conformity ................................................................................................................... 3 Products with radio functionality (EMF) ........................................................................... 4 Restrictions for products with radio functionality ........................................................... 4 European telephone network declaration (Modem/Fax) ................................................. 4 Ergonomics notice ............................................................................................................. 4 Germany (English text) ................................................................................... 4 Germany (Deutscher text) .............................................................................. 4 Australia and New Zealand notice ......................................................................................................................... 5 China WWAN notice ................................................................................................................................................ 5 Japan notice ........................................................................................................................................................... 5 Wireless LAN, Wireless WAN, and Bluetooth certification markings ................................................ 5 Mexico notice ......................................................................................................................................................... 5 Russia regulatory notices ...................................................................................................................................... 6

................................................................................................. 6

........................................................................................ 6

: ................................................................................................. 6

: ..................................................................................................... 6 Singapore wireless notice ...................................................................................................................................... 7 South Korea notices ............................................................................................................................................... 7 Thailand WWAN wireless notice ............................................................................................................................ 7 Taiwan NCC notices ................................................................................................................................................ 7 Wireless LAN 802.11a devices ............................................................................................................ 7 Wireless LAN 802.11 devices/Bluetooth devices/Short range devices .............................................. 8 Airline travel notice ................................................................................................................................................ 8 User-replaceable battery notices .......................................................................................................................... 8 Factory-sealed battery notices ............................................................................................................................. 8 Laser compliance ................................................................................................................................................... 8 v Modem notices ....................................................................................................................................................... 9 Telecommunications device approvals ............................................................................................... 9 U.S. modem statements ...................................................................................................................... 9 U.S. modem declarations .................................................................................................................. 10 Canada modem statements .............................................................................................................. 12 Japan modem statements ................................................................................................................ 12 New Zealand modem statements ..................................................................................................... 12 Voice support .................................................................................................................. 13 Power cord notice ................................................................................................................................................ 13 Japan power cord notice ................................................................................................................... 13 DC plug of external HP power supply ................................................................................................ 13 Macrovision Corporation notice ........................................................................................................................... 13 2 Regulatory notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations ......................................................... 14 Modem notices ..................................................................................................................................................... 14 Telecommunications device approvals ............................................................................................. 14 U.S. modem statements .................................................................................................................... 14 Canadian modem statements ........................................................................................................... 15 Japanese modem statements ........................................................................................................... 15 New Zealand modem statements ..................................................................................................... 16 Voice support .................................................................................................................. 16 Electromagnetic compatibility notices ................................................................................................................ 16 Federal Communications Commission notice ................................................................................... 17 Modifications ................................................................................................................... 17 Cables .............................................................................................................................. 17 Products with wireless LAN devices ............................................................................... 17 Australia telecom statement ............................................................................................................ 18 Brazil notice ....................................................................................................................................... 19 Canadian notice ................................................................................................................................. 19 European Union regulatory notices .................................................................................................. 19 Declaration of Conformity .............................................................................................. 19 Products with radio functionality (EMF) ...................................................... 19 Restrictions for products with radio functionality ....................................... 20 European telephone network declaration (Modem/Fax) ............................ 20 Ergonomics notice ........................................................................................ 20 Japan notice ....................................................................................................................................... 20 Wireless LAN and Bluetooth certification markings ....................................................... 20 Mexico notice ..................................................................................................................................... 20 Russia regulatory notices .................................................................................................................. 21

............................................................................ 21

................................................................... 21 vi

: ............................................................................ 21

: ................................................................................ 21 South Korea notices .......................................................................................................................... 22 Taiwan NCC notices ............................................................................................................................ 22 Wireless LAN 802.11a devices ........................................................................................ 22 Wireless LAN 802.11 devices/Bluetooth devices/Short range devices ......................... 22 3 Safety notices for notebook computers ......................................................................................................... 23 Heat-related safety warning notice .................................................................................................................... 23 Potential safety conditions notice ....................................................................................................................... 23 User-replaceable battery notices ........................................................................................................................ 23 Headset and earphone volume level notice ........................................................................................................ 23 Power cord notices .............................................................................................................................................. 24 Brazil notice ....................................................................................................................................... 24 Cleaning the keyboard ......................................................................................................................................... 24 Travel notice ........................................................................................................................................................ 24 China safety notices ............................................................................................................................................. 24 China: Altitude notice ........................................................................................................................ 24 China: Tropical warning notice .......................................................................................................... 24 Norway and Sweden: Cable grounding notice for products with a TV tuner ...................................................... 25 Taiwan BSMI notice .............................................................................................................................................. 25 4 Safety notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations ............................................................... 26 Important safety information ............................................................................................................................. 26 Installation conditions ......................................................................................................................................... 26 Battery replacement notice ................................................................................................................................. 27 Headset and earphone volume level notice ........................................................................................................ 27 Laser safety ......................................................................................................................................................... 27 Power supply and power cord set requirements ................................................................................................ 28 Power supply class I grounding requirements .................................................................................. 28 Brazil notice .................................................................................................................... 28 Denmark .......................................................................................................................... 28 Finland ............................................................................................................................. 28 Norway ............................................................................................................................ 28 Sweden ............................................................................................................................ 28 Power supply requirements .............................................................................................................. 28 For use in Norway ........................................................................................................... 28 Power cord set requirements ............................................................................................................ 29 Japan power cord requirements ....................................................................................................... 29 Pinch hazard ........................................................................................................................................................ 29 TV antenna connectors protection ...................................................................................................................... 29 vii External television antenna grounding ............................................................................................. 29 Lightning protection .......................................................................................................................... 30 Note to CATV system installer ........................................................................................................... 30 China safety notices ............................................................................................................................................. 31 China: Altitude notice ........................................................................................................................ 31 China: Tropical warning notice .......................................................................................................... 31 Germany acoustics notice .................................................................................................................................... 32 Taiwan BSMI notice .............................................................................................................................................. 32 5 Environmental notices for notebook computers ............................................................................................. 33 Electronic hardware, packaging and battery recycling ....................................................................................... 33 Disposal of waste equipment by users ............................................................................................................... 33 Brazil alkaline battery disposal ........................................................................................................................... 33 Brazil hardware recycling information ................................................................................................................ 33 ENERGY STAR Certification (select models only) ............................................................................................... 34 Chemical substances ........................................................................................................................................... 35 China environmental notices ............................................................................................................................... 35 China PC energy label .......................................................................................................................................... 35 China restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) ............................................................................................. 38 The Table of Hazardous Substances/Elements and their Content ................................................... 38 India restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) .............................................................................................. 40 Information for European Union Commission Regulation 1275/2008 .............................................................. 40 IT ECO declarations .............................................................................................................................................. 41 Japan restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) ............................................................................................ 41 Mexico Sustainable Energy Use Law ................................................................................................................... 41 Turkey EEE regulation .......................................................................................................................................... 41 Ukraine restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) ......................................................................................... 41 Perchlorate materialspecial handling may apply ........................................................................................... 41 6 Environmental notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations ................................................... 42 Electronic hardware, packaging and battery recycling ....................................................................................... 42 Disposal of waste equipment by users ............................................................................................................... 42 Brazil alkaline battery disposal ........................................................................................................................... 42 Brazil hardware recycling information ................................................................................................................ 42 ENERGY STAR Certification (select models only) ............................................................................................... 43 Chemical substances ........................................................................................................................................... 44 Mercury statement .............................................................................................................................................. 44 Perchlorate materialspecial handling may apply ............................................................................................. 44 China environmental notices ............................................................................................................................... 44 China PC energy label .......................................................................................................................................... 45 China restriction of hazard substances (ROHS) ................................................................................................... 48 viii The Table of Hazardous Substances/Elements and their Content ................................................... 48 India restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) .............................................................................................. 51 Information for European Union Commission Regulation 1275/2008 .............................................................. 51 IT ECO declarations .............................................................................................................................................. 51 Japan restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) ............................................................................................ 51 Mehiki zakon o uporabi trajnostne energije ...................................................................................................... 51 Turkey EEE regulation .......................................................................................................................................... 52 Omejevanje uporabe nekaterih nevarnih snovi (RoHS) za Ukrajino ................................................................... 52 TCO Certified Edge Certification ........................................................................................................................... 52 Index ............................................................................................................................................................. 54 ix x 1 Regulatory notices for notebook computers This chapter provides country- and region-specific non-wireless and wireless regulatory notices and compliance information for the computer product. Some of these notices may not apply to your product. One or more integrated wireless devices may be installed. In some environments, the use of wireless devices may be restricted. Such restrictions may apply onboard airplanes, in hospitals, near explosives, in hazardous locations, and so on. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of this product, ask for authorization to use it before you turn it on. Accessing regulatory labels Regulatory labels, which provide country or regional regulatory information (for example, FCC ID), may be physically located on the bottom of the computer, inside the battery bay (select models only), under the removable service door (select models only), on the back of the display, or on the wireless or modem module. Some products may also provide electronic regulatory labels (e-labels) for radio modules in your computer. Electronic labels can be accessed through the system BIOS. NOTE: Electronic labels are not available on all products. NOTE: Devices not for sale or use in the United States may not contain a FCC ID. To view electronic regulatory labels:

1. 2. 3. 4. Turn on or restart the computer, and then press esc while the Press the ESC key for Startup Menu message is displayed at the bottom of the screen. Press f10 to enter Computer Setup. Use a pointing device or the arrow keys to select Advanced, select Electronic Labels, and then press enter. To view an electronic label, use a pointing device or the arrow keys to select one of the listed items, and then press OK. NOTE: The list of available electronic label items varies depending on the computer model and installed devices. 5. To exit Computer Setup menus without saving your changes:

Select the Exit icon in the lower-right corner of the screen, and then follow the on-screen instructions. or Use the arrow keys to select Main, select Ignore Changes and Exit, and then press enter. Federal Communications Commission notice This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. Accessing regulatory labels 1 Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or television technician for help. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. 2. This device may not cause harmful interference, and This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. For questions regarding this product, write to:

HP Inc. 1501 Page Mill Road Palo Alto, CA 94304 or call HP at 650-857-1501. To identify this product, refer to the part, series, or model number found on the product. Modifications The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by HP may void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Cables To maintain compliance with FCC Rules and Regulations, connections to this device must be made with shielded cables having metallic RFI/EMI connector hoods. Products with wireless LAN devices or HP Mobile Broadband Modules This device must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. WARNING! Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation The radiated output power of this device is below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact is minimized during normal operation of tablet PCs and notebook computers. During normal operation of tablet PCs and notebook computers with displays equal to or less than 30.5 cm

(12 inches): To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennas should not be less than 2.5 cm (1 inch). To identify the location of the wireless antennas, refer to the computer user guides included with your computer. During normal operation of notebook computers with displays greater than 30.5 cm (12 inches): To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennas should not be less than 20 cm (8 inches), including when the computer display is closed. To identify the location of the wireless antennas, refer to the computer user guides included with your computer. 2 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices for notebook computers Brazil notice Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio. Este equipamento atende aos limites de Taxa de Absoro Especfica referente exposio a campos eltricos, magnticos e eletromagnticos de radiofreqncias adotados pela ANATEL. Ao operar o dispositivo a uma distncia muito prxima do seu corpo, utilize um acessrio de armazenamento no metlico para posicionar o dispositivo a uma distncia mnima de 1,5 cm do corpo. Canada notices This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations, CAN ICES-3(B)/NMB-3(B). If this device has WLAN or Bluetooth capability, the device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. WARNING! Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation: The radiated output power of this device is below the Industry Canada radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact is minimized during normal operation. During normal operation of tablet PCs and notebook computers with displays equal to or less than 30.5 cm

(12 inches): To avoid the possibility of exceeding the Industry Canada radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennas should not be less than 2.5 cm (1 inch). To identify the location of the wireless antennas, refer to the computer user guides included with your computer. During normal operation of notebook computers with displays greater than 30.5 cm (12 inches): To avoid the possibility of exceeding the Industry Canada radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennas should not be less than 20 cm (8 inches), including when the computer display is closed. To identify the location of the wireless antennas, refer to the computer user guides included with your computer. CAUTION: When using IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use, due to its operation in the 5.15- to 5.25-GHz frequency range. Industry Canada requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-

channel mobile satellite systems. High-power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-GHz and 5.65- to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. The antennas for this device are not replaceable. Any attempt at user access will damage your computer. European Union regulatory notices Declaration of Conformity Products bearing the CE marking comply with one or more of the following EU Directives as may be applicable:

R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC (replaced in 2017 by RED 2014/53/EU) ; Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC

(replaced in April 2016 by 2014/35/EU); EMC Directive 2004/108/EC (replaced in April 2016 by 2014/30/EU);

Ecodesign Directive 2009/125/EC; RoHS Directive 2011/65/EU Compliance with these directives is assessed using applicable European Harmonised Standards. Brazil notice 3 The full Declaration of Conformity can be found at the following web site: http://www.hp.eu/certificates

(Search with the product model name or its Regulatory Model Number (RMN), which may be found on the regulatory label.) The point of contact for regulatory matters is HP Deutschland GmbH, HQ-TRE, 71025, Boeblingen, Germany. Products with radio functionality (EMF) This product incorporates a radio transmitting and receiving device. For notebook computers in normal use, a separation distance of 20 cm ensures that radio frequency exposure levels comply with EU requirements. Products designed to be operated at closer proximities, such as tablet computers, comply with applicable EU requirements in typical operating positions. Products can be operated without maintaining a separation distance unless otherwise indicated in instructions specific to the product. Restrictions for products with radio functionality When operating in the frequency band 5150 to 5350 MHz, this product is restricted to indoor use only. European telephone network declaration (Modem/Fax) The product herewith complies with the requirements of the applicable Directive 1999/5/EC (Annex II) and carries the CE marking accordingly. However, due to differences between the individual PSTNs provided in different countries/regions, the approval does not, of itself, give an unconditional assurance of successful operation on every PSTN network termination point. In the event of problems, you should contact your equipment supplier in the first instance. Ergonomics notice Germany (English text) When a mobile computer is used at the office workstation for display work tasks where the Visual Display Unit

(VDU) Directive 90/270/EEC is applicable, an adequate external keyboard is required. Depending on the application and task, an adequate external monitor may also be necessary to attain working conditions comparable to a workstation setup. Ref: EK1-ITB 2000 (voluntary GS certification) Mobile computers bearing the "GS" approval mark meet the applicable ergonomic requirements. Without external keyboards, they are suitable only for short-time use of VDU tasks. During mobile use with disadvantageous illumination conditions (e.g. direct sun light) reflections may occur, which result in reduced readability. Germany (Deutscher text) Wird ein mobiler Computer fr Bildschirmarbeitsaufgaben verwendet, wo die Richtlinie 90/270/EEG

(Bildschirmarbeitsrichtlinie) anzuwenden ist, wird eine geeignete externe Tastatur notwendig. Abhngig von der Anwendung und der Aufgabe kann ein geeigneter externer Monitor erforderlich sein, um vergleichbare Arbeitsbedingungen zu einem stationren Arbeitsplatz zu erreichen. Ref: EK1-ITB 2000 (freiwillige GS Zertifizierung) Mobile Computer, welche das "GS" Zeichen tragen, entsprechen den ergonomischen Anforderungen und sind nur fr kurzzeitige Benutzung von Bildschirmarbeitsaufgaben geeignet. Bei mobiler Nutzung mit ungnstigen Lichtverhltnissen (z.B. direkte Sonneneinstrahlung) kann es zu Reflexionen und damit zu Einschrnkungen der Lesbarkeit der dargestellten Zeichen kommen. 4 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices for notebook computers Australia and New Zealand notice This equipment incorporates a radio transmitting and receiving device. In normal use, a separation distance of 20 cm ensures that radio frequency exposure levels comply with the Australian and New Zealand Standards. China WWAN notice Japan notice Wireless LAN, Wireless WAN, and Bluetooth certification markings This product contains certified radio equipment. Mexico notice Declaracin para Mxico La operacin de este equipo est sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2) este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operacin no deseada. The regulatory model number for this product is on the regulatory label. If your product is provided with wireless accessories such as a keyboard or mouse and you need to identify the model of the accessory, refer to the label included on that accessory. The regulatory model number for this product is on the regulatory label. Australia and New Zealand notice 5 Russia regulatory notices HP Inc.

: 1501 Page Mill Road, Palo Alto, California 94304, U.S. 10- ,

. 4-, 5- 6- . 4- , 3

, 2013 . 5-

6- , 12 12- . HP Inc.

: 1501 Page Mill Road, Palo Alto, California 94304, U.S. 10

. 4-, 5- 6-

. 4- , 3 2013

. 5- 6-

, , 12 12- .

:

: "- ..", , 125171, . , , 16, .3, /: +7 495 797 35 00

: " ..", , 050040, .

, , -, 77/7,

/:

+ 7 727 355 35 52

:

: - A.O., , 125171, ,

, 16A 3, /: +7 495 797 35 00

: " .." ,

, 050040, ., , -

, 77/7, /: +7 727 355 35 52 6 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices for notebook computers Singapore wireless notice Turn off any WWAN devices while you are onboard aircraft. The use of these devices onboard aircraft is illegal, may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, and may disrupt the cellular network. Failure to observe this instruction may lead to suspension or denial of cellular services to the offender, or legal action, or both. Users are reminded to restrict the use of radio equipment in fuel depots, chemical plants, and where blasting operations are in progress. As with other mobile radio transmitting equipment, users are advised that for satisfactory operation of the equipment and for the safety of personnel, no part of the human body should be allowed to come too close to the antennas during operation of the equipment. This device has been designed to comply with applicable requirements for exposure to radio waves, based on scientific guidelines that include margins intended to assure the safety of all people, regardless of health and age. These radio wave exposure guidelines employ a unit of measurement known as the specific absorption rate (SAR). Tests for SAR are conducted using standardized methods, with the phone transmitting at its highest certified power level in all used frequency bands. The SAR data information is based on CENELEC's standards EN50360 and EN50361, which use the limit of 2 watts per kilogram, averaged over 10 grams of tissue. South Korea notices Thailand WWAN wireless notice This telecom equipment has complied with NTC regulations. Taiwan NCC notices Wireless LAN 802.11a devices Singapore wireless notice 7 Wireless LAN 802.11 devices/Bluetooth devices/Short range devices Airline travel notice Use of electronic equipment onboard commercial aircraft is at the discretion of the airline. User-replaceable battery notices When a battery has reached the end of its useful life, do not dispose of the battery in general household waste. Follow the local laws and regulations in your area for computer battery disposal. HP encourages customers to recycle used electronic hardware, HP original print cartridges, and rechargeable batteries. For more information about recycling programs, refer to the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/

recycle. For information about removing a user-replaceable battery, refer to the user guide included with the product. Factory-sealed battery notices The battery[ies] in this product cannot be easily replaced by users themselves. Removing or replacing the battery could affect your warranty coverage. If a battery is no longer holding a charge, contact support. When a battery has reached the end of its useful life, do not dispose of the battery in general household waste. Follow the local laws and regulations in your area for battery disposal. Laser compliance WARNING! Use of controls or adjustments, or performance of procedures other than those specified in the laser product installation guide, may result in hazardous radiation exposure. To reduce the risk of exposure to hazardous radiation:

Do not operate controls, make adjustments, or perform procedures to the laser device other than those specified in the laser product installation guide. Do not try to open the module enclosure. There are no user-serviceable components inside. Allow only authorized service providers to repair the unit. 8 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices for notebook computers This product may be provided with an optical storage device (for example, a CD or DVD drive) and/or a fiber optic transceiver. Each of these devices that contain a laser is classified as a Class 1 Laser Product in accordance with IEC/EN 60825-1 and meets the requirements for safety of that standard. Each laser product complies with US FDA regulations of 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 or complies with those regulations except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50 dated June 24, 2007. Modem notices WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons when using this device, always follow basic safety precautions, including the following:

Do not use this product near waterfor example, near a bathtub, wash bowl, kitchen sink or laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool. Avoid using this product during an electrical storm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. Do not use this product to report a gas leak while in the vicinity of the leak. Always disconnect the modem cable before opening the equipment enclosure or touching an uninsulated modem cable, jack, or internal component. If this product was not provided with a telephone line cord, use only No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cord. Do not plug a modem or telephone cable into the RJ-45 (network) jack. SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS. Telecommunications device approvals The telecommunications device in the computer is approved for connection to the telephone network in the countries and regions whose approval markings are indicated on the product label located on the bottom of the computer or on the modem. Refer to the user guide included with the product to ensure that the product is configured for the country or region in which the product is located. Selecting a country or region other than the one in which it is located may cause the modem to be configured in a way that violates the telecommunication regulations/laws of that country or region. In addition, the modem may not function properly if the correct country or region selection is not made. If, when you select a country or region, a message appears that states that the country or region is not supported, this means that the modem has not been approved for use in this country or region and thus should not be used. U.S. modem statements This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC Rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the bottom of the computer or on the modem is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. Provide this information to the telephone company if you are requested to do so. Modem notices 9 Applicable certification jack USOC = RJ11C. A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See installation instructions for details. The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most but not all locations, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the local telephone company. For products approved after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (e.g., 03 is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products, the REN is separately shown on the label. If this HP equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But, if advance notice isn't practical, the telephone company will notify you as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary. The telephone company may make changes to its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted telephone service. If trouble is experienced with this equipment, call technical support. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved. You should perform repairs only to the equipment specifically discussed in the Troubleshooting section of the user guide, if one is provided. Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public service commission, or corporation commission for information. If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure that the installation of this HP equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment, consult your telephone company or a qualified installer. The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device, including a fax machine, to send any message unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page, or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business, other entity, or other individual sending the message, and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long-

distance transmission charges). In order to program this information into your fax machine, you should complete the steps outlined in the faxing software instructions. U.S. modem declarations Refer to the following modem vendor declarations for the modem device installed in your computer:

10 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices for notebook computers Modem notices 11 Canada modem statements This equipment meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. The Ringer Equivalence Number, REN, is an indication of the maximum number of devices allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices, subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all devices does not exceed 5. The REN for this terminal equipment is 1.0. Japan modem statements If the computer does not have the Japanese certification mark on the bottom of the computer, refer to the appropriate certification marking below. The Japanese certification mark for the V.92 56K Data/Fax Modem is below:

New Zealand modem statements The grant of a Telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of Telepermitted equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom's network services. This equipment is not capable, under all operating conditions, of correct operation at the higher speeds for which it is designed. Telecom will accept no responsibility should difficulties arise in such circumstances. If this device is equipped with pulse dialing, note that there is no guarantee that Telecom lines will always continue to support pulse dialing. Use of pulse dialing, when this equipment is connected to the same line as other equipment, may give rise to bell tinkle or noise and may also cause a false answer condition. Should such problems occur, the user should not contact the Telecom Faults Service. Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom's Telepermit requirements are dependent on the equipment (PC) associated with this device. The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following limits for compliance with Telecom's Specifications:

a. b. There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30-minute period for any single manual call initiation. The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. c. Where automatic calls are made to different numbers, the equipment shall be set to go on-hook for a period of not less than 5 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. d. The equipment shall be set to ensure that calls are answered between 3 and 30 seconds of receipt of ringing (So set between 2 and 10). 12 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices for notebook computers Voice support All persons using this device for recording telephone conversations shall comply with New Zealand law. This requires that at least one party to the conversation is aware that it is being recorded. In addition, the Principles enumerated in the Privacy Act 1993 shall be complied with in respect to the nature of the personal information collected, the purpose for its collection, how it is to be used, and what is disclosed to any other party. This equipment shall not be set to make automatic calls to the Telecom 111' Emergency Service. Power cord notice If you were not provided with a power cord for the computer or for an external power accessory intended for use with the computer, you should purchase a power cord that is approved for use in your country or region. The power cord must be rated for the product and for the voltage and current marked on the product's electrical ratings label. The voltage and current rating of the cord should be greater than the voltage and current rating marked on the product. In addition, the diameter of the wire must be a minimum of 0.75 mm/

18AWG, and the length of the cord must be between 1.0 m (3.2 ft) and 2 m (6.56 ft). If you have questions about the type of power cord to use, contact your authorized service provider. A power cord should be routed so that it is not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon it or against it. Particular attention should be paid to the plug, electrical outlet, and the point where the cord exits from the product. Japan power cord notice DC plug of external HP power supply Macrovision Corporation notice This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only, unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. Power cord notice 13 2 Regulatory notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations Modem notices WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons when using this device, always follow basic safety precautions, including the following:

Do not use this product near waterfor example, near a bathtub, wash bowl, kitchen sink or laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool. Avoid using this product during an electrical storm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. Do not use this product to report a gas leak while in the vicinity of the leak. Always disconnect the modem cable before opening the equipment enclosure or touching an uninsulated modem cable, jack, or internal component. If this product was not provided with a telephone line cord, use only No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cord. Do not plug a modem or telephone cable into the RJ-45 (Ethernet network) jack. SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS. Telecommunications device approvals The telecommunications device in the computer is approved for connection to the telephone network in the countries and regions whose approval markings are indicated on the product label located on the bottom of the computer or on the modem. Refer to the user guide included with the product to ensure that the product is configured for the country or region in which the product is located. Selecting a country or region other than the one in which it is located may cause the modem to be configured in a way that violates the telecommunication regulations/laws of that country or region. In addition, the modem may not function properly if the correct country or region selection is not made. If, when you select a country or region, a message appears that states that the country or region is not supported, this means that the modem has not been approved for use in this country or region and thus should not be used. U.S. modem statements This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC Rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the bottom of the computer or on the modem is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. Provide this information to the telephone company if you are requested to do so. Applicable certification jack USOC = RJ11C. A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See installation instructions for details. 14 Chapter 2 Regulatory notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most but not all locations, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the local telephone company. For products approved after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (e.g., 03 is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products, the REN is separately shown on the label. If this HP equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But, if advance notice isn't practical, the telephone company will notify you as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary. The telephone company may make changes to its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted telephone service. If trouble is experienced with this equipment, call technical support. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved. You should perform repairs only to the equipment specifically discussed in the Troubleshooting section of the user guide, if one is provided. Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public service commission, or corporation commission for information. If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure that the installation of this HP equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment, consult your telephone company or a qualified installer. The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device, including a fax machine, to send any message unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page, or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business, other entity, or other individual sending the message, and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long-

distance transmission charges). In order to program this information into your fax machine, you should complete the steps outlined in the faxing software instructions. Canadian modem statements This equipment meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. The Ringer Equivalence Number, REN, is an indication of the maximum number of devices allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices, subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all devices does not exceed 5. The REN for this terminal equipment is 1.0. Japanese modem statements If the computer does not have the Japanese certification mark on the bottom of the computer, refer to the appropriate certification marking below. The Japanese certification mark for the LSI Corporation PCI-SV92EX Soft modem is below:

Modem notices 15 New Zealand modem statements The grant of a Telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of Telepermitted equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom's network services. This equipment is not capable, under all operating conditions, of correct operation at the higher speeds for which it is designed. Telecom will accept no responsibility should difficulties arise in such circumstances. If this device is equipped with pulse dialing, note that there is no guarantee that Telecom lines will always continue to support pulse dialing. Use of pulse dialing, when this equipment is connected to the same line as other equipment, may give rise to bell tinkle or noise and may also cause a false answer condition. Should such problems occur, the user should not contact the Telecom Faults Service. Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom's Telepermit requirements are dependent on the equipment (PC) associated with this device. The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following limits for compliance with Telecom's Specifications:

a. b. There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30-minute period for any single manual call initiation. The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. c. Where automatic calls are made to different numbers, the equipment shall be set to go on-hook for a period of not less than 5 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. d. The equipment shall be set to ensure that calls are answered between 3 and 30 seconds of receipt of ringing (So set between 2 and 10). Voice support All persons using this device for recording telephone conversations shall comply with New Zealand law. This requires that at least one party to the conversation is aware that it is being recorded. In addition, the Principles enumerated in the Privacy Act 1993 shall be complied with in respect to the nature of the personal information collected, the purpose for its collection, how it is to be used, and what is disclosed to any other party. This equipment shall not be set to make automatic calls to the Telecom 111' Emergency Service. Electromagnetic compatibility notices This guide provides country- and region-specific nonwireless and wireless regulatory notices and compliance information for the computer product. Some of these notices may not apply to your product. One or more integrated wireless devices may be installed. In some environments, the use of wireless devices may be restricted. Such restrictions may apply onboard airplanes, in hospitals, near explosives, in hazardous 16 Chapter 2 Regulatory notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations locations, and so on. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of this product, ask for authorization to use it before you turn it on. Federal Communications Commission notice This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or television technician for help. Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver. Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. 2. This device may not cause harmful interference, and This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. For questions regarding this product, write to:

HP Inc. 1501 Page Mill Road Palo Alto, CA 94304 or call HP at 650-857-1501. To identify this product, refer to the part, series, or model number found on the product. Modifications The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by Hewlett-Packard Company may void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Cables Connections to this device must be made with shielded cables with metallic RFI/EMI connector hoods in order to maintain compliance with FCC Rules and Regulations. Products with wireless LAN devices This product may be equipped with a wireless LAN device. This device must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. Electromagnetic compatibility notices 17 WARNING! Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation The radiated output power of this device is below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact is minimized during normal operation. During normal operation: To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennae should not be less than 20 cm (8 inches). To identify the location of the wireless antennae, refer to the documentation included with the computer. Australia telecom statement The computer must be connected to the Telecommunication Network through a line cord that meets the requirements of AS/CA S008. WARNING! Modems without integral RJ11 connector that are shipped with this computer should not be installed in any other device. This equipment incorporates a radio transmitting and receiving device. In normal use, a separation distance of 20 cm ensures that radio frequency exposure levels comply with the Australian and New Zealand Standards. 18 Chapter 2 Regulatory notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations Brazil notice Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio. CAUTION: A alimentao de energia predefinida para 220/230Vv. Se voc possuir tomada eltrica de 110/115Vv, por favor, altere a chave na parte traseira do seu computador para a tenso correta. Canadian notice This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations, CAN ICES-3(B)/NMB-3(B). If this device has WLAN or Bluetooth capability, this device complies with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. WARNING! Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation The radiated output power of this device is below the Industry Canada radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact is minimized during normal operation. During normal operation: To avoid the possibility of exceeding the Industry Canada radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennae should not be less than 20 cm (8 inches). To identify the location of the wireless antennae, refer to the documentation included with the computer. CAUTION: When using IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use, due to its operation in the 5.15- to 5.25-GHz frequency range. Industry Canada requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-

channel mobile satellite systems. High-power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-GHz and 5.65- to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. The antenna for this device is not replaceable. Any attempt at user modification may damage your computer. European Union regulatory notices Declaration of Conformity Products bearing the CE marking comply with one or more of the following EU Directives as may be applicable:

R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC (replaced in 2017 by RED 2014/53/EU) ; Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC

(replaced in April 2016 by 2014/35/EU); EMC Directive 2004/108/EC (replaced in April 2016 by 2014/30/EU);

Ecodesign Directive 2009/125/EC; RoHS Directive 2011/65/EU Compliance with these directives is assessed using applicable European Harmonised Standards. The full Declaration of Conformity can be found at the following web site: http://www.hp.eu/certificates

(Search with the product model name or its Regulatory Model Number (RMN), which may be found on the regulatory label.) The point of contact for regulatory matters is HP Deutschland GmbH, HQ-TRE, 71025, Boeblingen, Germany. Products with radio functionality (EMF) This product may incorporate a radio transmitting and receiving device. For desktop computers in normal use, a separation distance of 20 cm ensures that radio frequency exposure levels comply with EU requirements. Electromagnetic compatibility notices 19 Restrictions for products with radio functionality When operating in the frequency band 5150 to 5350 MHz, this product is restricted to indoor use only. European telephone network declaration (Modem/Fax) The product herewith complies with the requirements of the applicable Directive 1999/5/EC (Annex II) and carries the CE marking accordingly. However, due to differences between the individual PSTNs provided in different countries/regions, the approval does not, of itself, give an unconditional assurance of successful operation on every PSTN network termination point. In the event of problems, you should contact your equipment supplier in the first instance. This equipment has been designed to work with analogue DTMF Networks. This equipment may have internetworking difficulties in PSTN networks that only support Pulse Dialing. Please consult with your network operator for further assistance. Ergonomics notice Germany (English text) A computer system comprising HP brand products meets the applicable ergonomic requirements if all affected constituent products bear the "GS" approval mark, for example Business Desktop PC, keyboard, PC-

mouse and monitor. Germany (Deutscher text) Ein aus HP Produkten bestehendes Computersystem erfllt die anwendbaren ergonomischen Anforderungen, wenn alle verwendeten Komponenten das GS Zeichen tragen, wie z. B. Business Desktop PC, Tastatur, PC-

Maus und Bildschirm. Japan notice Wireless LAN and Bluetooth certification markings If this device contains radio equipment, it is certified radio equipment. Mexico notice Declaracin para Mxico 20 Chapter 2 Regulatory notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations La operacin de este equipo est sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2) este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operacin no deseada. If your product is provided with wireless accessories such as a keyboard or mouse and you need to identify the model of the accessory, refer to the label included on that accessory. Russia regulatory notices HP Inc.

: 1501 Page Mill Road, Palo Alto, California 94304, U.S. 10- ,

. 4-, 5- 6- . 4- , 3

, 2013 . 5-

6- , 12 12- . HP Inc.

: 1501 Page Mill Road, Palo Alto, California 94304, U.S. 10

. 4-, 5- 6-

. 4- , 3 2013

. 5- 6-

, , 12 12- .

:

: "- ..", , 125171, . , , 16, .3, /: +7 495 797 35 00

: " ..", , 050040, .

, , -, 77/7,

/:

+ 7 727 355 35 52

:

: - A.O., , 125171, ,

, 16A 3, /: +7 495 797 35 00

: " .." ,

, 050040, ., , -

, Electromagnetic compatibility notices 21 77/7, /: +7 727 355 35 52 South Korea notices Taiwan NCC notices Wireless LAN 802.11a devices Wireless LAN 802.11 devices/Bluetooth devices/Short range devices 22 Chapter 2 Regulatory notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations 3 Safety notices for notebook computers WARNING! To reduce the risk of serious injury, read the Safety & Comfort Guide. It describes proper workstation setup, posture, and health and work habits for computer users, and provides important electrical and mechanical safety information. This guide is located on the Web at http://www.hp.com/ergo and on the Documentation CD that is included with the product. Heat-related safety warning notice WARNING! To reduce the possibility of heat-related injuries or of overheating the computer, do not place the computer directly on your lap or obstruct the computer air vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, to block airflow. Also, do not allow the AC adapter to contact the skin or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, during operation. The computer and the AC adapter comply with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by the International Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment (IEC/EN 60950). Potential safety conditions notice If you notice any of the following conditions (or if you have other safety concerns), do not use the computer:

crackling, hissing, or popping sound, or a strong odor or smoke coming from the computer. It is normal for these conditions to appear when an internal electronic component fails in a safe and controlled manner. However, these conditions may also indicate a potential safety issue. Do not assume it is a safe failure. Turn off the computer, disconnect it from its power source, and contact technical support for assistance. User-replaceable battery notices WARNING! Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions. WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire or burns, do not disassemble, crush, or puncture; do not short external contacts; do not dispose of in fire or water. WARNING! Keep the battery away from children. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, only the battery provided with the computer, a replacement battery provided by HP, or a compatible battery purchased as an accessory from HP should be used with the computer. Headset and earphone volume level notice WARNING!

To prevent possible hearing damage, do not listen at high volume levels for long periods. Heat-related safety warning notice 23 Power cord notices Plug the power cord into an AC outlet that is easily accessible at all times. WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to the equipment:

Disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet. If provided with a 3-pin attachment plug on the power cord, plug the cord into a grounded (earthed) 3-

pin outlet. Do not disable the power cord grounding pin, for example, by attaching a 2-pin adapter. The grounding pin is an important safety feature. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, only the AC adapter provided with the computer, a replacement AC adapter provided by HP, or an AC adapter purchased as an accessory from HP should be used with the computer. Brazil notice Este equipamento deve ser conectado obrigatoriamente em tomada de rede de energia eltrica que possua aterramento (trs pinos), conforme a norma nbr abnt 5410,visando a segurana dos usurios contra choques eltricos. Cleaning the keyboard WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to internal components, do not use a vacuum cleaner attachment to clean the keyboard. A vacuum cleaner can deposit household debris on the keyboard surface. Clean the keyboard regularly to prevent keys from sticking and to remove dust, lint, and particles that can become trapped beneath the keys. A can of compressed air with a straw extension can be used to blow air around and under the keys to loosen and remove debris. Travel notice WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not attempt to power the computer with a voltage converter kit sold for appliances. China safety notices China: Altitude notice Altitude warning for products not certified for use in >5000 m Icon Description China: Tropical warning notice Tropical warning for products not certified for use in tropical regions. 24 Chapter 3 Safety notices for notebook computers Icon Description Norway and Sweden: Cable grounding notice for products with a TV tuner CAUTION: To reduce potential safety issues, use a galvanic isolator when connecting to a cable distribution system. Taiwan BSMI notice Norway and Sweden: Cable grounding notice for products with a TV tuner 25 4 Safety notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations Important safety information WARNING! To reduce the risk of serious injury, read the Safety & Comfort Guide. It describes proper workstation setup, posture, and health and work habits for computer users, and provides important electrical and mechanical safety information. This guide is located on the Web at http://www.hp.com/ergo and on the Documentation CD that is included with the product. Plug the power cord into an AC outlet that is easily accessible at all times. To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to the equipment:

Disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet. If provided with a 3-pin attachment plug on the power cord, plug the cord into a grounded (earthed) 3-

pin outlet. Do not disable the power cord grounding pin, for example, by attaching a 2-pin adapter. The grounding pin is an important safety feature. The computer may be heavy; be sure to use ergonomically correct lifting procedures when moving it. Install the computer near an AC outlet. The AC power cord is your computers main AC disconnecting device and must be easily accessible at all times. For your safety, the power cord provided with your computer has a grounded plug. Always use the power cord with a properly grounded wall outlet, to avoid the risk of electrical shock. To reduce the possibility of an electric shock from the telephone network, plug your computer into the AC outlet before connecting it to the telephone line. Also, disconnect the telephone line before unplugging your computer from the AC power outlet. Always disconnect the modem cord from the telephone system before installing or removing your computer cover. Do not operate the computer with the cover removed. For your safety, always unplug the computer from its power source and from any telecommunications systems (such as telephone lines), networks, or modems before performing any service procedures. Failure to do so may result in personal injury or equipment damage. Hazardous voltage levels are inside the power supply and modem of this product. If your computer is provided with a voltage select switch for use in a 115 or 230 V power system, CAUTION:

the voltage select switch has been pre-set to the correct voltage setting for use in the particular country/

region where it was initially sold. Changing the voltage select switch to the incorrect position can damage your computer and void any implied warranty. This product has not been evaluated for connection to an IT power system (an AC distribution system with no direct connection to earth, according to IEC/EN 60950). Installation conditions See installation instructions before connecting this equipment to the input supply. 26 Chapter 4 Safety notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations WARNING! The equipment must be provided with a proper AC protective earth (PE) ground connection. Energized and moving parts may be inside the computer. Disconnect power to the equipment before removing the enclosure. Replace and secure the enclosure before re-energizing the equipment. Battery replacement notice Do not attempt to recharge the battery. WARNING! The product may contain an internal lithium manganese dioxide, vanadium pentoxide, or alkaline battery or battery pack. There is risk of fire and burns if the battery pack is not handled properly. To reduce the risk of personal injury:

Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions. Do not disassemble, crush, puncture, short external contacts, or dispose of in fire or water. Do not expose to temperatures higher than 60 C (140 F). Replace only with the HP spare designated for this product. For information about removing a battery, refer to your computer documentation. Icon Description Batteries, battery packs, and accumulators should not be disposed of together with the general household waste. In order to forward them to recycling or proper disposal, please use the public collection system or return them to HP, an authorized HP partner, or their agents. Icon Description The Taiwan EPA requires dry battery manufacturing or importing firms, in accordance with Article 15 of the Waste Disposal Act, to indicate the recovery marks on the batteries used in sales, giveaways, or promotions. Contact a qualified Taiwanese recycler for proper battery disposal. Headset and earphone volume level notice WARNING!

To prevent possible hearing damage, do not listen at high volume levels for long periods. Laser safety For products equipped with optical drives or fiber optic transceivers. This product may be provided with an optical storage device (i.e., CD or DVD drive) and/or fiber optic transceiver. These contain lasers and are classified as Class 1 Laser Products in accordance with the standard IEC/EN 60825-1 and comply with its requirements. Each laser product complies with US FDA Regulations of 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 or complies with those regulations except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50, dated June 24, 2007. Battery replacement notice 27 WARNING! Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein or in the laser products installation guide may result in hazardous radiation exposure. To reduce the risk of exposure to hazardous radiation:

Do not try to open the module enclosure. There are no user-serviceable components inside. Do not operate controls, make adjustments, or perform procedures to the laser device other than those specified herein. Allow only HP Authorized Service technicians to repair the unit. Power supply and power cord set requirements Power supply class I grounding requirements For protection from fault currents, the equipment shall be connected to a grounding terminal. Plug the system power cord into an AC outlet that provides a ground connection. Substitute cords may not provide adequate fault protection. Only use the power cord supplied with this product or a Hewlett-Packard authorized replacement. Brazil notice Este equipamento deve ser conectado obrigatoriamente em tomada de rede de energia eltrica que possua aterramento (trs pinos), conforme a norma nbr abnt 5410,visando a segurana dos usurios contra choques eltricos. Denmark Apparatets stikprop skal tilsluttes en stikkontakt med jord, som giver forbindelse til stikproppens jord. Finland Norway Sweden Laite on liitettv suojakoskettimilla varustettuun pistorasiaan. Apparatet m tilkoples jordet stikkontakt. Apparaten skall anslutas till jordat uttag. Power supply requirements The power supplies on some products have external power switches. The voltage select switch feature on the product permits it to operate from any line voltage between 100-127 or 200-240 volts AC. Power supplies on those products that do not have external power switches are equipped with internal circuits that sense the incoming voltage and automatically switch to the proper voltage. For safety reasons, use only the AC adapter provided with the unit or an authorized replacement adapter from Hewlett-Packard. Replacement part numbers may be found at http://www.hp.com/cgi-bin/hpsupport/

index.pl. For use in Norway This product is also designed for an IT power system with phase-to-phase voltage 230V. 28 Chapter 4 Safety notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations Power cord set requirements The power cord set received with the product meets the requirements for use in the country where the equipment was originally purchased. Use only the power cord provided with the unit or an authorized replacement power cord from Hewlett-Packard or an approved HP source. Replacement part numbers may be found at http://www.hp.com/cgi-bin/hpsupport/index.pl. Power cord sets for use in other countries must meet the requirements of the country where you use the product. For more information on power cord set requirements, contact your authorized HP dealer, reseller, or service provider. WARNING! Do not use power cords from other products. Mismatched power cords may result in a shock and fire hazard. The requirements listed below are applicable to all countries:

1. 2. The power cord must be approved by an acceptable accredited agency responsible for evaluation in the country where the power cord set will be installed. The length of the power cord must be between 1.8 m (6 feet) and 3.6 m (12 feet). For a power cord 2.0 m

(6.56 feet) or less, the diameter of the wire must be a minimum of 0.75 mm2 or 18AWG. If the power cord is longer than 2.0 m (6.56 feet), the diameter of the wire must be a minimum of 1.0 mm2 or 16AWG. The power cord should be routed so that it is not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon it or against it. Particular attention should be paid to the plug, electrical outlet, and the point where the cord exits from the product. WARNING! Do not operate this product with a damaged power cord set. If the power cord set is damaged in any manner, replace it immediately. Damaged cords may result in user exposure to hazards. Japan power cord requirements For use in Japan, use only the power cord received with this product. CAUTION: Do not use the power cord received with this product on any other products. Pinch hazard WARNING! Observe pinch hazard areas. Keep fingers away from closing parts. TV antenna connectors protection External television antenna grounding If an outside antenna or cable system is connected to the product, be sure the antenna or cable system is electrically grounded so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges. Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, provides information with regard to proper electrical grounding of the mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna-

discharge unit, size of grounding conductors, location of antenna-discharge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode. Pinch hazard 29 Lightning protection For added protection of any product during a lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for long periods of time, unplug the product from the wall outlet and disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent damage to the product from lightning and power line surges. Table 4-1 Antenna Grounding Reference Grounding Component 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Electric Service Equipment Power Service Grounding Electrode System (NEC Art 250, Part III) Ground Clamps Grounding Conductors (NEC Section 810.21) Antenna Discharge Unit (NEC Section 810.20) Ground Clamp Antenna Lead-in Wire Note to CATV system installer This reminder is provided to call the CATV systems installers attention to section 820.93 of the National Electric Code, which provides guidelines for proper grounding and in particular, specify that the Coaxial cable shield shall be connected to grounding system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as practical. 30 Chapter 4 Safety notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations China safety notices China: Altitude notice Altitude warning for products not certified for use in >5000 m Icon Description China: Tropical warning notice Tropical warning for products not certified for use in tropical regions. Icon Description China safety notices 31 Germany acoustics notice Sound pressure level (LpA) is far below 70dB(A) (operator position, normal operation, according to ISO 7779) Product noise emission data can be found in the product related IT ECO Declarations at Internet address:

http://www.hp.com/go/ted Schalldruckpegel (LpA) ist weit unterhalb 70 dB(A) (Benutzerposition, normaler Betrieb, nach ISO 7779) Die Schallemissionswerte der Produkte knnen in den produktbezogenen IT ECO Declarations auf folgender Internet Adresse gefunden werden: http://www.hp.com/go/ted Taiwan BSMI notice 32 Chapter 4 Safety notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations 5 Environmental notices for notebook computers This chapter provides country- and region-specific environmental notices and compliance information. Some of these notices may not apply to your product. Electronic hardware, packaging and battery recycling HP encourages customers to recycle used electronic hardware, HP original print cartridges packaging, and rechargeable batteries. For more information about recycling programs, go to http://www.hp.com/recycle. For information about recycling the product in Japan, refer to http://www.hp.com/jp/hardwarerecycle/. Disposal of waste equipment by users This symbol means do not dispose of your product with your other household waste. Instead, you should protect human health and the environment by handing over your waste equipment to a designated collection point for the recycling of waste electrical and electronic equipment. For more information, please contact your household waste disposal service or go to http://www.hp.com/recycle. Brazil alkaline battery disposal Icon Description Este produto eletroeletrnico e seus componentes no devem ser descartados no lixo comum, pois embora estejam em conformidade com padres mundiais de restrio a substncias nocivas, podem conter, ainda que em quantidades mnimas, substncias impactantes ao meio ambiente. Ao final da vida til deste produto, o usurio dever entreg-lo HP. A no observncia dessa orientao sujeitar o infrator s sanes previstas em lei. Aps o uso, as pilhas e/ou baterias dos produtos HP devero ser entregues ao estabelecimento comercial ou rede de assistncia tcnica autorizada pela HP. Para maiores informaes , inclusive sobre os pontos de recebimento, acesse: http://www.hp.com.br/reciclar No descarte o produto eletrnico em lixo comum Brazil hardware recycling information Icon Description Este produto eletroeletrnico e seus componentes no devem ser descartados no lixo comum, pois embora estejam em conformidade com padres mundiais de restrio a substncias nocivas, podem conter, ainda que em quantidades mnimas, substncias impactantes ao meio ambiente. Ao final da vida til deste produto, o usurio dever entreg-lo HP. A no observncia dessa orientao sujeitar o infrator s sanes previstas em lei. Aps o uso, as pilhas e/ou baterias dos produtos HP devero ser entregues ao estabelecimento comercial ou rede de assistncia tcnica autorizada pela HP. Electronic hardware, packaging and battery recycling 33 Icon Description No descarte o produto eletrnico em lixo comum Para maiores informaes , inclusive sobre os pontos de recebimento, acesse: http://www.hp.com.br/reciclar ENERGY STAR Certification (select models only) ENERGY STAR is a U.S. Environmental Protection Agency voluntary program that helps businesses and individuals save money and protect our climate through superior energy efficiency. Products that earn the ENERGY STAR prevent greenhouse gas emissions by meeting strict energy efficiency criteria or requirements set by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. As an ENERGY STAR Partner, Hewlett-Packard Company has followed the U.S. EPAs enhanced product certification process to ensure that products marked with the ENERGY STAR logo are ENERGY STAR certified per the applicable ENERGY STAR guidelines. The following logo appears on all ENERGY STAR-certified computers:

A key ENERGY STAR requirement for computer products is power management features that significantly reduce energy consumption when the product is not in use. Power management allows a computer to automatically enter a low power sleep mode, or other low power mode, after a defined period of inactivity. The power management features have been preset as follows when the computer is operating on AC power:

Computer type Time to activate display sleep mode Time to activate computer sleep mode (minutes) Resuming from sleep mode Notebooks, Mobile Workstations Less than or equal to 15 minutes (varies by model) Less than or equal to 30 minutes (varies by model) Product will exit sleep mode when the power/sleep button is pressed. If Wake-on-Lan (WOL) is enabled, the system can resume from sleep in response to a network signal. Tablets/Slates Less than or equal to 1 minute Not applicable Not applicable For computers that support an always-on, always-connected use profile where internet access is available

(such as tablets and slates), alternative low power modes - such as Short or Long Idle modes (as defined in the ENERGY STAR Computer Program Requirements) are provided that consume very little power (</= 10 Watts) and when applicable, maximize product battery life. These alternative low power modes are dynamic, with the display sleep mode activated within 1 minute of user inactivity. The computer exits Sleep when the power/Sleep button is pressed. When the Wake On LAN (WOL) feature is enabled, the computer can also exit Sleep in response to a network signal. Additional information on the potential energy and financial savings of the power management feature can be found on the EPA ENERGY STAR Power Management Web site at http://www.energystar.gov/

powermanagement. Additional information on the ENERGY STAR program and its environmental benefits are available on the EPA ENERGY STAR Web site at http://www.energystar.gov. 34 Chapter 5 Environmental notices for notebook computers ENERGY STAR and the ENERGY STAR mark are registered trademarks owned by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Chemical substances HP is committed to providing our customers with information about the chemical substances in our products as needed to comply with legal requirements such as REACH (Regulation EC No 1907/2006 of the European Parliament and the Council). A chemical information report for this product can be found at http://www.hp.com/go/reach. China environmental notices China PC energy label In accordance with The Regulation of the Implementation on China Energy Label for Microcomputers

(CEL-30), this microcomputer has an Energy Efficiency Label. The energy efficiency grade, TEC (Typical Energy Consumption), and product category presented on the label are determined and calculated according to the standard GB28380-2012. 1. Energy Efficiency Grades The grade is determined by the standard with the calculation of base consumption level with the sum of all the allowances for additional components such as main memory and graphics card. For products of any grade, the TEC should not exceed the value specified in the following table:

Product Type Grade 1 Grade 2 Grade 3 TEC (kilowatt hour) Desktop microcomputer, AIO Category A 98.0+Efa 148.0+Efa 198.0+Efa Category B Category C Category D 125.0+Efa 159.0+Efa 184.0+Efa 175.0+Efa 225.0+Efa 209.0+Efa 259.0+Efa 234.0+Efa 284.0+Efa Chemical substances 35 Product Type Portable Computer TEC (kilowatt hour) Category A Category B Category C 20.0+Efa 26.0+Efa 54.5+Efa 35.0+Efa 45.0+Efa 75.0+Efa 45.0+Efa 65.0+Efa 123.5+Efa NOTE: Efa is the sum of power factor of product additional functions. 2. Typical Energy Consumption The energy consumption figure presented on the label is the data measured with the representative configuration that covers all the configurations in the registration unit which is selected according to CEL-30. Thus, actual energy consumption of this specific microcomputer may not be the same as the TEC data presented in the label. 3. Product Category The product category is determined by the standard according to the microcomputers configuration. The categorization of products complies with the regulations in the following table:

Product Type Category A Category B Category C Configuration Description Desktop microcomputer, AIO Portable Computer The desktop microcomputer and AIO whose configuration is out of the scope of Category B, C, and D The portable computer whose configuration is out of the scope of Category B and C CPU physical core number of 2, and system memory of not less than 2GB A Discrete GPU CPU physical core number of over 2, with at least one of the following features:

1. 2. System memory of not less than 2 GB A Discrete GPU The product that has a CPU physical core number of not less than 2, system memory of not less than 2GB, A Discrete GPU with Frame Buffer Width not less than 128-bit. Category D CPU physical core number of not less than 4, with at least one of the following features:

1. 2. System memory of not less than 4 GB A Discrete GPU with Frame Buffer Width not less than 128-bit For more details on the specification, please refer to the standard GB28380-2012. 36 Chapter 5 Environmental notices for notebook computers China PC energy label 37 China restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) The Table of Hazardous Substances/Elements and their Content As required by China's Management Methods for Controlling Pollution by Electronic Information Products Hazardous Substances Part Name Lead (Pb) Mercury

(Hg) Cadmium

(Cd) Hexavalent Chromium

(Cr(VI)) Polybrominated biphenyls (PBB) Polybrominated diphenyl ethers

(PBDE) Battery Cables Camera Chassis/Other Flash memory card reader Floppy disk drive Hard disk drive Headphones I/O PCAs Keyboard Liquid crystal display

(LCD) panel Media (CD/DVD/floppy) Memory Motherboard, processor, heat sinks Mouse Optical disk drive Optional docking device Power adapter Power supply Remote control Smart card/Java card reader Speakers, external TV tuner USB flash memory drive USB hub X X X X X X X X X X X O X X X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O 38 Chapter 5 Environmental notices for notebook computers Hazardous Substances Part Name Web camera Wireless receiver Wireless cards Lead (Pb) Mercury

(Hg) Cadmium

(Cd) Hexavalent Chromium

(Cr(VI)) Polybrominated biphenyls (PBB) Polybrominated diphenyl ethers

(PBDE) X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O This form has been prepared in compliance with the provisions of SJ/T 11364. O: Indicates that the content of said hazardous substance in all of the homogenous materials in the component is within the limits required by GB/T 26572. X: Indicates that the content of said hazardous substance exceeds the limits required by GB/T 26572 in at least one homogenous material in the component. All parts named in this table with an X are in compliance with the European Unions RoHS Legislation. NOTE: The referenced Environmental Protection Use Period Marking was determined according to normal operating use conditions of the product such as temperature and humidity.

/

I/O PCA

(LCD) CD/DVD/

(Pb)

(Hg)

(Cd)

(Cr(VI))

(PBB)

(PBDE) X X X X X X X X X X X O X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O China restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) 39

/Java USB USB

(Pb)

(Hg)

(Cd)

(Cr(VI))

(PBB)

(PBDE) X X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O SJ/T 11364 O GB/T 26572 X GB/T 26572 X RoHS India restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) This product complies with the India E-waste (Management and Handling) Rule 2011 and prohibits use of lead, mercury, hexavalent chromium, polybrominated biphenyls or polybrominated diphenyl ethers in concentrations exceeding 0.1 weight % and 0.01 weight % for cadmium, except for the exemptions set in Schedule 2 of the Rule. Information for European Union Commission Regulation 1275/2008 To locate product power consumption data, including when the product is in networked standby with all wired network ports connected and wireless devices connected, refer to section P14 Additional information of the product IT ECO Declaration at http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/

itecodesktop-pc.html. Where applicable, activate and deactivate a wireless network using the instructions included in the product user guide or the operating system. Information is also available at http://www.hp.com/support. 40 Chapter 5 Environmental notices for notebook computers IT ECO declarations For notebook PCs, go to http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/

iteconotebook-o.html. Japan restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) A Japanese regulatory requirement, defined by specification JIS C 0950, 2008, mandates that manufacturers provide Material Content Declarations for certain categories of electronic products offered for sale after July 1, 2006. To view the JIS C 0950 material declaration for this product, visit http://www.hp.com/go/jisc0950. Mexico Sustainable Energy Use Law This product has been labeled in compliance with the Mexico Sustainable Energy Use Law requiring disclosure of power consumption in the normal use (idle mode) and standby modes. Your product is one of many configurations in this model family; the idle mode power consumption of your specific configuration may vary from the information on the label. Actual power consumption of your product may be higher or lower than the value reported on the Mexico product energy label due to factors such as configuration (components and modules chosen) and usage (tasks being performed, software installed and running, etc.). Turkey EEE regulation Ukraine restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) The equipment complies with requirements of the Technical Regulation, approved by the Resolution of Cabinet of Ministry of Ukraine as of December 3, 2008 1057, in terms of restrictions for the use of certain dangerous substances in electrical and electronic equipment. Perchlorate materialspecial handling may apply See http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate. This products real-time clock battery or coin cell battery may contain perchlorate and may require special handling when recycled or disposed of in California. IT ECO declarations 41 6 Environmental notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations This chapter provides country- and region-specific environmental notices and compliance information. Some of these notices may not apply to your product. Electronic hardware, packaging and battery recycling HP encourages customers to recycle used electronic hardware, HP original print cartridges packaging, and rechargeable batteries. For more information about recycling programs, go to http://www.hp.com/recycle. For information about recycling the product in Japan, refer to http://www.hp.com/jp/hardwarerecycle/. Disposal of waste equipment by users Icon Description This symbol means do not dispose of your product with your other household waste. Instead, you should protect human health and the environment by handing over your waste equipment to a designated collection point for the recycling of waste electrical and electronic equipment. For more information, please contact your household waste disposal service or go to http://www.hp.com/recycle. Brazil alkaline battery disposal Icon Description Este produto eletroeletrnico e seus componentes no devem ser descartados no lixo comum, pois embora estejam em conformidade com padres mundiais de restrio a substncias nocivas, podem conter, ainda que em quantidades mnimas, substncias impactantes ao meio ambiente. Ao final da vida til deste produto, o usurio dever entreg-lo HP. A no observncia dessa orientao sujeitar o infrator s sanes previstas em lei. Aps o uso, as pilhas e/ou baterias dos produtos HP devero ser entregues ao estabelecimento comercial ou rede de assistncia tcnica autorizada pela HP. Para maiores informaes , inclusive sobre os pontos de recebimento, acesse: http://www.hp.com.br/reciclar No descarte o produto eletrnico em lixo comum Brazil hardware recycling information Icon Description Este produto eletroeletrnico e seus componentes no devem ser descartados no lixo comum, pois embora estejam em conformidade com padres mundiais de restrio a substncias nocivas, podem conter, ainda que em quantidades mnimas, substncias impactantes ao meio ambiente. Ao final da vida til deste produto, o usurio dever entreg-lo HP. A no observncia dessa orientao sujeitar o infrator s sanes previstas em lei. Aps o uso, as pilhas e/ou baterias dos produtos HP devero ser entregues ao estabelecimento comercial ou rede de assistncia tcnica autorizada pela HP. Para maiores informaes , inclusive sobre os pontos de recebimento, acesse: http://www.hp.com.br/reciclar 42 Chapter 6 Environmental notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations Icon Description No descarte o produto eletrnico em lixo comum ENERGY STAR Certification (select models only) ENERGY STAR is a U.S. Environmental Protection Agency voluntary program that helps businesses and individuals save money and protect our climate through superior energy efficiency. Products that earn the ENERGY STAR prevent greenhouse gas emissions by meeting strict energy efficiency criteria or requirements set by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. As an ENERGY STAR Partner, Hewlett-Packard Company has followed the U.S. EPAs enhanced product certification process to ensure that products marked with the ENERGY STAR logo are ENERGY STAR certified per the applicable ENERGY STAR guidelines. The following logo appears on all ENERGY STAR-certified computers:

A key ENERGY STAR requirement for computer products is power management features that significantly reduce energy consumption when the product is not in use. Power management allows a computer to automatically enter a low power sleep mode, or other low power mode, after a defined period of inactivity. The power management features have been preset as follows when the computer is operating on AC power:

Computer type Time to activate display sleep mode Time to activate computer sleep mode (minutes) Resuming from sleep mode Desktops, Integrated Desktops, Workstations Less than or equal to 15 minutes (varies by model) Less than or equal to 30 minutes (varies by model) Thin clients Less than or equal to 15 minutes (varies by model) Less than or equal to 30 minutes when sleep mode is supported by the operating system (varies by model) Product will exit sleep mode when user interacts with any input device, including the mouse or keyboard. If Wake-on-Lan (WOL) is enabled, the system can resume from sleep in response to a network signal. When sleep mode is supported by operating system product will exit sleep mode when user interacts with any input device, including the mouse or keyboard. If Wake-on-Lan (WOL) is enabled, the system can resume from sleep in response to a network signal. The computer exits Sleep when the power/Sleep button is pressed. When the Wake On LAN (WOL) feature is enabled, the computer can also exit Sleep in response to a network signal. Additional information on the potential energy and financial savings of the power management feature can be found on the EPA ENERGY STAR Power Management Web site at http://www.energystar.gov/

powermanagement. ENERGY STAR Certification (select models only) 43 Additional information on the ENERGY STAR program and its environmental benefits are available on the EPA ENERGY STAR Web site at http://www.energystar.gov. ENERGY STAR and the ENERGY STAR mark are registered trademarks owned by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Chemical substances HP is committed to providing our customers with information about the chemical substances in our products as needed to comply with legal requirements such as REACH (Regulation EC No. 1907/2006 of the European Parliament and the Council). A chemical information report for this product can be found at http://www.hp.com/go/reach. Mercury statement This statement applies to All-in-One computers with built-in display panels that do not use LED backlighting. This HP product may contain the following material that might require special handling at end-of-life:

Mercury in the fluorescent lamp in the display LCD Disposal of mercury can be regulated because of environmental considerations. For disposal or recycling information, please contact your local authorities or the Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA)

(http://www.eiae.org). Perchlorate materialspecial handling may apply The computers real-time clock battery may contain perchlorate and may require special handling when recycled or disposed of in California. See http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/. China environmental notices 44 Chapter 6 Environmental notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations China PC energy label In accordance with The Regulation of the Implementation on China Energy Label for Microcomputers

(CEL-30), this microcomputer has an Energy Efficiency Label. The energy efficiency grade, TEC (Typical Energy Consumption), and product category presented on the label are determined and calculated according to the standard GB28380-2012. 1. Energy Efficiency Grades The grade is determined by the standard with the calculation of base consumption level with the sum of all the allowances for additional components such as main memory and graphics card. For products of any grade, the TEC should not exceed the value specified in the following table:

Product Type Grade 1 Grade 2 Grade 3 TEC (kilowatt hour) Desktop microcomputer, AIO Category A 98.0+Efa 148.0+Efa 198.0+Efa Portable Computer Category B Category C Category D Category A Category B Category C 125.0+Efa 159.0+Efa 184.0+Efa 20.0+Efa 26.0+Efa 54.5+Efa 175.0+Efa 225.0+Efa 209.0+Efa 259.0+Efa 234.0+Efa 284.0+Efa 35.0+Efa 45.0+Efa 75.0+Efa 45.0+Efa 65.0+Efa 123.5+Efa NOTE: Efa is the sum of power factor of product additional functions. 2. Typical Energy Consumption The energy consumption figure presented on the label is the data measured with the representative configuration that covers all the configurations in the registration unit which is selected according to CEL-30. Thus, actual energy consumption of this specific microcomputer may not be the same as the TEC data presented in the label. 3. Product Category The product category is determined by the standard according to the microcomputers configuration. The categorization of products complies with the regulations in the following table:

Product Type Category A Category B Category C Configuration Description Desktop microcomputer, AIO Portable Computer The desktop microcomputer and AIO whose configuration is out of the scope of Category B, C, and D The portable computer whose configuration is out of the scope of Category B and C CPU physical core number of 2, and system memory of not less than 2GB A Discrete GPU CPU physical core number of over 2, with at least one of the following features:

1. System memory of not less than 2 GB The product that has a CPU physical core number of not less than 2, system memory of not less than 2GB, A Discrete GPU with Frame Buffer Width not less than 128-bit. China PC energy label 45 Product Type Category D Configuration Description 2. A Discrete GPU CPU physical core number of not less than 4, with at least one of the following features:

1. 2. System memory of not less than 4 GB A Discrete GPU with Frame Buffer Width not less than 128-bit For more details on the specification, please refer to the standard GB28380-2012. 46 Chapter 6 Environmental notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations China PC energy label 47 China restriction of hazard substances (ROHS) The Table of Hazardous Substances/Elements and their Content As required by China's Management Methods for Controlling Pollution by Electronic Information Products Hazardous Substances Part Name Lead (Pb) Mercury

(Hg) Cadmium

(Cd) Hexavalent Chromium

(Cr(VI)) Polybrominated biphenyls (PBB) Polybrominated diphenyl ethers

(PBDE) Battery Cables Camera Chassis/Other Flash memory card reader Floppy disk drive Hard disk drive Headphones I/O PCAs Keyboard Liquid crystal display

(LCD) panel Media (CD/DVD/floppy) Memory Motherboard, processor, heat sinks Mouse Optical disk drive Optional docking device Power adapter Power supply Projector Remote control Smart card/Java card reader Speakers, external Stylus Touch mat X X X X X X X X X X X O X X X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O 48 Chapter 6 Environmental notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations Part Name TV tuner USB flash memory drive USB hub Web camera Wireless receiver Wireless cards 3D Capture Stage/

Turntable Hazardous Substances Lead (Pb) Mercury

(Hg) Cadmium

(Cd) Hexavalent Chromium

(Cr(VI)) Polybrominated biphenyls (PBB) Polybrominated diphenyl ethers

(PBDE) X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O This form has been prepared in compliance with the provisions of SJ/T 11364. O: Indicates that the content of said hazardous substance in all of the homogenous materials in the component is within the limits required by GB/T 26572. X: Indicates that the content of said hazardous substance exceeds the limits required by GB/T 26572 in at least one homogenous material in the component. All parts named in this table with an X are in compliance with the European Unions RoHS Legislation. NOTE: The referenced Environmental Protection Use Period Marking was determined according to normal operating use conditions of the product such as temperature and humidity.

/

I/O PCA

(LCD)

(Pb)

(Hg)

(Cd)

(Cr(VI))

(PBB)

(PBDE) X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O China restriction of hazard substances (ROHS) 49

(Pb)

(Hg)

(Cd)

(Cr(VI))

(PBB)

(PBDE) CD/DVD/

Projector

/Java Stylus Touch mat USB USB 3D Capture Stage/

Turntable O X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X O X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O SJ/T 11364 O GB/T 26572 X GB/T 26572 X RoHS O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O 50 Chapter 6 Environmental notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations India restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) This product complies with the India E-waste (Management and Handling) Rule 2011 and prohibits use of lead, mercury, hexavalent chromium, polybrominated biphenyls or polybrominated diphenyl ethers in concentrations exceeding 0.1 weight % and 0.01 weight % for cadmium, except for the exemptions set in Schedule 2 of the Rule. Information for European Union Commission Regulation 1275/2008 To locate product power consumption data, including when the product is in networked standby with all wired network ports connected and wireless devices connected, refer to section P14 Additional information of the product IT ECO Declaration at http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/

itecodesktop-pc.html. Where applicable, activate and deactivate a wireless network using the instructions included in the product user guide or the operating system. Information is also available at http://www.hp.com/support. IT ECO declarations Desktop PCs and Thin Clients http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/itecodesktop-pc.html?

jumpid=reg_R1002_USEN Workstations http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/itecoworkstatio.html Japan restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) A Japanese regulatory requirement, defined by specification JIS C 0950, 2008, mandates that manufacturers provide Material Content Declarations for certain categories of electronic products offered for sale after July 1, 2006. To view the JIS C 0950 material declaration for this product, visit http://www.hp.com/go/jisc0950. Mehiki zakon o uporabi trajnostne energije Ley para el Aprovechamiento Sustentable de la Energa de Mxico Se ha etiquetado este producto en conformidad con la Ley para el Aprovechamiento Sustentable de la Energa de Mxico, que requiere la divulgacin del consumo de energa del modo de uso normal (modo inactivo) y del modo de espera. Su producto es una de las muchas configuraciones de esta familia de modelos; el consumo de energa del modo inactivo de su configuracin especfica puede diferir de la informacin de la etiqueta. El consumo real de energa de su producto puede ser mayor o menor que el valor informado en la etiqueta de India restriction of hazardous substances (RoHS) 51 energa de producto para Mxico a causa de factores como la configuracin (componentes y mdulos seleccionados) y el uso (tareas que se estn efectuando, software instalado y en ejecucin, etc.). NOTE: Esta ley no es aplicable a los workstations. This product has been labeled in compliance with the Mexico Sustainable Energy Use Law requiring disclosure of power consumption in the normal use (idle mode) and standby modes. Your product is one of many configurations in this model family; the idle mode power consumption of your specific configuration may vary from the information on the label. Actual power consumption of your product may be higher or lower than the value reported on the Mexico product energy label due to factors such as configuration (components and modules chosen) and usage (tasks being performed, software installed and running, etc.). NOTE: Workstations are not labeled because the law is not applicable to the workstation product category. Turkey EEE regulation Omejevanje uporabe nekaterih nevarnih snovi (RoHS) za Ukrajino The equipment complies with requirements of the Technical Regulation, approved by the Resolution of Cabinet of Ministry of Ukraine as of December 3, 2008 1057, in terms of restrictions for the use of certain dangerous substances in electrical and electronic equipment. TCO Certified Edge Certification This section applies only to products bearing the TCO Certified Edge logo. 52 Chapter 6 Environmental notices for desktops, thin clients and personal workstations TCO Certified Edge Certification 53 Index A airline travel notice 8 altitude notice 24, 31 B battery user replacement 23 battery notice 8, 41, 42 battery recycling 33, 42 Brazil notice 3, 19, 24, 28 C cable grounding notice 25 Canada modem statement 12, 15 Canada notices 3, 19 China environmental notices 35, 44 China PC energy label 35, 45 China restriction of hazardous substances notice 38, 48 D disposal notices battery 41, 42 battery, user replacement 8 equipment 33, 42 factory sealed battery 8 E electronic hardware and battery recycling 33, 42 ENERGY STAR certification 34, 43 environmental notices 33, 42 equipment disposal notice 33, 42 ergonomics notice 4, 20 European Union Commission Regulation 1275/2008 40, 51 European Union notices 3, 19 F Federal Communications Commission desktops, thin clients and workstations notice 17 desktops, thin clients, workstations cables 17 54 Index desktops, thin clients, modifications, desktops, thin clients, workstations modifications 17 workstations notebook computers cables 2 notebook computers Federal Communications Commission 17 modifications 2 modifications, notebook computers notebook computers notice 1 Federal Communications G GS Notice 4, 20 Commission 2 N New Zealand modem statement 12, H headset and earphone volume level 16 notices notice 23, 27 I India restriction of hazardous substances notice 40, 51 J Japan modem statement 12 Japan notice 5, 20 Japan power cord notice 13, 29 Japan restriction of hazardous substances notice 41, 51 K keyboard notice 24 L labels, regulatory 1 laser safety notice 9, 27 M Macrovision Corporation notice 13 Mexico Sustainable Energy Use Law 41 Mexico wireless notice 5, 20 modem notices 9, 14 modem statements Canada 12, 15 Japan 12 New Zealand 12, 16 U.S. 9, 10, 14 airline travel 8 battery 8, 41, 42 battery, user replacement 23 Brazil 3, 19, 24, 28 Canada 3, 19 China restriction of hazardous substances 38, 48 environmental 33, 42 equipment disposal 33, 42 ergonomics 4, 20 European Union 3, 19 headset and earphone volume level 23, 27 India restriction of hazardous substances 40, 51 Japan 5, 20 Japan power cord 13, 29 Japan restriction of hazardous substances 41, 51 keyboard 24 laser safety 9, 27 Macrovision Corporation 13 Mexico 5, 20 modem 9, 14 perchlorate material 41, 44 power cords 13, 24 Singapore 7 South Korea 7, 22 Taiwan 7, 22 Thailand WWAN wireless notice 7 travel 24 Ukraine restriction of hazardous substances 41 notices, desktops, thin clients and workstations Federal Communications Commission 17 notices, notebook computers Federal Communications Commission 1 O obvestila omejevanje uporabe nekaterih nevarnih snovi za Ukrajino 52 obvestilo o omejevanju uporabe nekaterih nevarnih snovi za Ukrajino 52 P power cord notice 13, 24 R recycling, electronic hardware and battery 33, 42 S Singapore wireless notice 7 South Korea notice 7, 22 T Taiwan notice 7, 22 TCO Certified Edge Certification 52 Thailand WWAN wireless notice 7 travel notice 24 tropical warning notice 24, 31 TV tuner, cable grounding notice 25 U U.S. modem statement 9, 10, 14 Ukraine restriction of hazardous substances notice 41 V voice support 13, 16 volume level notice, headset and earphone 23, 27 W wireless LAN devices 2, 18, 19 Index 55 Informations sur les rglementations, la scurit et les conditions d'utilisation Manuel de l'utilisateur Copyright 2015-2016 HP Development Company, L.P. Bluetooth est une marque dtenue par son propritaire et utilise sous licence par HP Inc. ENERGY STAR et la marque de ENERGY STAR sont des marques dposes aux tats-Unis. Java est une marque dpose d'Oracle et/ou de ses filiales. Les informations contenues dans ce document peuvent tre modifies sans pravis. Les garanties relatives aux produits et aux services HP sont dcrites dans les dclarations de garantie limite expresse qui les accompagnent. Aucun lment du prsent document ne peut tre interprt comme constituant une garantie supplmentaire. HP ne saurait tre tenu pour responsable des erreurs ou omissions de nature technique ou rdactionnelle qui pourraient subsister dans le prsent document. Troisime dition : fvrier 2016 Premire dition : aot 2015 Rfrence du document : 836854-053 propos de ce manuel Ce manuel fournit des informations sur les rglementations, la scurit et les conditions d'utilisation en conformit avec les rglementations amricaines, canadiennes et internationales en matire d'ordinateurs portables, d'ordinateurs de bureau, de clients lgers et de stations de travail personnelles. Le non-respect des instructions expose l'utilisateur des risques potentiellement trs AVERTISSEMENT !

graves. ATTENTION :

informations qu'il contient. REMARQUE :

Le non-respect des instructions prsente des risques, tant pour le matriel que pour les Le texte ainsi dfini fournit des informations importantes supplmentaires. iii iv propos de ce manuel Sommaire 1 Avis de rglementation pour les ordinateurs portables .................................................................................... 1 Accs aux tiquettes de conformit ...................................................................................................................... 1 Avis de la FCC .......................................................................................................................................................... 2 Modifications ....................................................................................................................................... 2 Cbles .................................................................................................................................................. 2 Produits avec appareils sans fil LAN ou modules mobiles large bande HP ..................................... 3 Avis pour le Brsil ................................................................................................................................................... 3 Avis pour le Canada ................................................................................................................................................ 3 Avis pour l'Union europenne ................................................................................................................................ 4 Dclaration de conformit .................................................................................................................. 4 Produits quips de fonctionnalit radio ......................................................................... 5 Restrictions pour les produits quips de fonctionnalit radio ....................................... 5 Dclaration relative au rseau tlphonique europen (modem/fax) ............................ 5 Avis sur l'ergonomie .......................................................................................................... 6 Allemagne (texte en franais) ........................................................................ 6 Allemagne (texte en allemand) ...................................................................... 6 Avis pour l'Australie et la Nouvelle-Zlande .......................................................................................................... 6 Avis WWAN pour la Chine ....................................................................................................................................... 6 Avis pour le Japon .................................................................................................................................................. 7 Marques de certification des priphriques WLAN, WWAN et Bluetooth ......................................... 7 Avis pour le Mexique .............................................................................................................................................. 7 Avis de rglementation pour la Russie .................................................................................................................. 7

....................................................................................... 7

................................................................................... 8

: ........................................................................................... 8

: ................................................................................................ 8 Avis sur les appareils sans fil pour Singapour ....................................................................................................... 8 Avis pour la Core du Sud ...................................................................................................................................... 9 Avis sur les appareils sans fil WWAN pour la Thalande ........................................................................................ 9 Avis de la NCC pour Tawan .................................................................................................................................... 9 Priphriques WLAN 802.11a ............................................................................................................. 9 Priphriques sans fil LAN 802.11/Priphriques Bluetooth/Priphriques courte porte ........ 10 Avis sur les utilisations en vol ............................................................................................................................. 10 Avis sur les batteries remplaables par l'utilisateur ........................................................................................... 10 Avis sur les batteries scelles en usine ............................................................................................................... 10 Conformit du laser ............................................................................................................................................. 11 v Avis sur les modems ............................................................................................................................................ 11 Homologations du priphrique de tlcommunication .................................................................. 12 Avis sur les modems pour les tats-Unis .......................................................................................... 13 Dclarations sur les modems pour les tats-Unis ............................................................................ 14 Avis sur les modems pour le Canada ................................................................................................ 15 Avis sur les modems pour le Japon ................................................................................................... 15 Dclarations sur les modems pour la Nouvelle-Zlande ................................................................. 16 Prise en charge vocale .................................................................................................... 16 Avis sur les cordons d'alimentation ..................................................................................................................... 17 Avis sur les cordons d'alimentation pour le Japon ........................................................................... 17 Prise CC de la source d'alimentation externe HP .............................................................................. 17 Avis de Macrovision Corporation ......................................................................................................................... 17 2 Avis de rglementation pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail personnelles .......... 18 Avis sur les modems ............................................................................................................................................ 18 Homologations des priphriques de tlcommunications ............................................................ 18 Avis sur les modems pour les tats-Unis .......................................................................................... 19 Avis sur les modems pour le Canada ................................................................................................ 20 Avis sur les modems pour le Japon ................................................................................................... 20 Dclarations sur les modems pour la Nouvelle-Zlande ................................................................. 20 Prise en charge vocale .................................................................................................... 21 Avis de compatibilit lectromagntique ........................................................................................................... 21 Avis de la FCC ..................................................................................................................................... 21 Modifications ................................................................................................................... 22 Cbles .............................................................................................................................. 22 Produits quips de priphriques LAN sans fil ............................................................. 22 Dclaration sur les tlcommunications pour l'Australie ................................................................. 22 Avis pour le Brsil .............................................................................................................................. 22 avis pour le Canada ........................................................................................................................... 22 Avis pour l'Union europenne ........................................................................................................... 24 Dclaration de conformit .............................................................................................. 25 Produits quips de fonctionnalit radio ..................................................... 25 Restrictions pour les produits quips de fonctionnalit radio .................. 25 Dclaration relative au rseau tlphonique europen (modem/fax) ........ 25 Avis sur l'ergonomie ..................................................................................... 25 Avis pour le Japon .............................................................................................................................. 26 Marques de certification des priphriques WLAN et Bluetooth ................................... 26 Avis pour le Mexique ......................................................................................................................... 27 Avis de rglementation pour la Russie ............................................................................................. 27

.................................................................. 27

.............................................................. 27 vi

: ...................................................................... 27

: ........................................................................... 27 Avis pour la Core du Sud .................................................................................................................. 28 Avis de la NCC pour Tawan ................................................................................................................ 28 Priphriques WLAN 802.11a ......................................................................................... 28 Priphriques sans fil LAN 802.11/Priphriques Bluetooth/Priphriques courte porte .................................................................................................................. 28 3 Avis de scurit pour les ordinateurs portables .............................................................................................. 29 Avis d'avertissement relatif la chaleur ............................................................................................................. 29 Avis sur les risques lis la scurit ................................................................................................................... 29 Avis sur les batteries remplaables par l'utilisateur ........................................................................................... 29 Avis sur le niveau du volume du casque et des couteurs .................................................................................. 30 Avis sur les cordons d'alimentation ..................................................................................................................... 30 Avis pour le Brsil .............................................................................................................................. 30 Nettoyage du clavier ............................................................................................................................................ 30 Avis sur les dplacements ................................................................................................................................... 30 Avis de scurit pour la Chine .............................................................................................................................. 30 Chine : avis sur l'altitude .................................................................................................................... 30 Chine : avis sur une utilisation dans des conditions tropicales ........................................................ 31 Norvge et Sude : avis de mise la terre des cbles pour les produits quips d'un tuner TV ....................... 31 Avis de la BSMI pour Tawan ................................................................................................................................ 31 4 Avis de scurit pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail personnelles ..................... 32 Informations importantes relatives la scurit ............................................................................................... 32 Conditions d'installation ...................................................................................................................................... 33 Avis sur le remplacement de la batterie .............................................................................................................. 33 Avis sur le niveau du volume du casque et des couteurs .................................................................................. 33 Scurit des lasers ............................................................................................................................................... 34 Exigences relatives au bloc d'alimentation et au cordon d'alimentation ........................................................... 34 Exigences relatives la mise la terre des alimentations de classe 1 ............................................ 34 Avis pour le Brsil ............................................................................................................ 34 Danemark ........................................................................................................................ 34 Finlande ........................................................................................................................... 34 Norvge ........................................................................................................................... 34 Sude .............................................................................................................................. 34 Exigences relatives au bloc d'alimentation ...................................................................................... 35 Pour une utilisation en Norvge ..................................................................................... 35 Exigences relatives au cordon d'alimentation .................................................................................. 35 Spcifications du cordon d'alimentation pour le Japon .................................................................... 35 Risque de pincement ........................................................................................................................................... 36 vii Protection des connecteurs de l'antenne TV ....................................................................................................... 36 Mise la terre d'une antenne de tlvision externe ......................................................................... 36 Protection contre la foudre ............................................................................................................... 36 Remarque destine aux installateurs de systmes de tlvision par cble .................................... 37 Avis de scurit pour la Chine .............................................................................................................................. 37 Chine : avis sur l'altitude .................................................................................................................... 37 Chine : avis sur une utilisation dans des conditions tropicales ........................................................ 38 Avis d'acoustique pour l'Allemagne ..................................................................................................................... 38 Avis de la BSMI pour Tawan ................................................................................................................................ 38 5 Avis sur les conditions d'utilisation pour les ordinateurs portables ................................................................. 39 Recyclage du matriel lectronique, de l'emballage et de la batterie ................................................................ 39 Mise au rebut des quipements par les utilisateurs ........................................................................................... 39 Mise au rebut des batteries alcalines au Brsil ................................................................................................... 39 Informations sur le recyclage du matriel au Brsil ........................................................................................... 40 Certification ENERGY STAR (certains modles) ................................................................................................. 40 Substances chimiques ......................................................................................................................................... 41 Avis sur l'environnement pour la Chine ............................................................................................................... 41 tiquette de consommation nergtique des ordinateurs pour la Chine .......................................................... 42 Avis sur la restriction des substances dangereuses pour la Chine (RoHS) ......................................................... 45 Tableau des substances/composants dangereux et leur contenu ................................................... 45 Avis sur la restriction des substances dangereuses pour l'Inde (RoHS) ............................................................. 47 Informations sur le rglement 1275/2008 de la Commission europenne ....................................................... 47 Dclarations IT ECO .............................................................................................................................................. 48 Avis sur la restriction des substances dangereuses pour le Japon (RoHS) ........................................................ 48

.............................................................................................................................................................................. 48 Rglementation EEE de la Turquie ...................................................................................................................... 48 Avis sur la restriction des substances dangereuses pour l'Ukraine (RoHS) ........................................................ 48 Matriau compos de perchlorate : une manipulation particulire peut tre ncessaire ................................. 49 6 Avis sur les conditions d'utilisation pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail personnelles .................................................................................................................................................. 50 Recyclage du matriel lectronique, de l'emballage et de la batterie ................................................................ 50 Mise au rebut des quipements par les utilisateurs ........................................................................................... 50 Mise au rebut des batteries alcalines au Brsil ................................................................................................... 50 Informations sur le recyclage du matriel au Brsil ........................................................................................... 51 Certification ENERGY STAR (certains modles) ................................................................................................. 51 Substances chimiques ......................................................................................................................................... 52 Avis sur le mercure .............................................................................................................................................. 52 Matriau compos de perchlorate : une manipulation particulire peut tre ncessaire ................................. 52 Avis sur l'environnement pour la Chine ............................................................................................................... 53 viii tiquette de consommation nergtique des ordinateurs pour la Chine .......................................................... 53 Restriction d'utilisation de substances dangereuses pour la Chine (ROHS) ....................................................... 56 Tableau des substances/composants dangereux et leur contenu ................................................... 56 Avis sur la restriction des substances dangereuses pour l'Inde (RoHS) ............................................................. 59 Informations sur le rglement 1275/2008 de la Commission europenne ....................................................... 59 Dclarations IT ECO .............................................................................................................................................. 59 Avis sur la restriction des substances dangereuses pour le Japon (RoHS) ........................................................ 59 Mehiki zakon o uporabi trajnostne energije ...................................................................................................... 59 Rglementation EEE de la Turquie ...................................................................................................................... 60 Omejevanje uporabe nekaterih nevarnih snovi (RoHS) za Ukrajino ................................................................... 60 Certification TCO Certified Edge ........................................................................................................................... 61 Index ............................................................................................................................................................. 62 ix x 1 Avis de rglementation pour les ordinateurs portables Ce chapitre fournit des avis de rglementation spcifiques des pays et des rgions concernant les produits filaires et sans fil, ainsi que des informations de conformit concernant l'ordinateur. Certains de ces avis peuvent ne pas s'appliquer votre produit. Un ou plusieurs appareils sans fil intgrs peuvent tre installs. Dans certains environnements, l'utilisation d'appareils sans fil peut tre limite. Ces restrictions peuvent s'appliquer bord des avions, dans les hpitaux, dans les lieux proximit d'explosifs et dans les environnements dangereux, etc. Si vous ne connaissez pas la politique relative l'utilisation de ce produit, demandez l'autorisation de l'utiliser avant de le mettre sous tension. Accs aux tiquettes de conformit Les tiquettes de conformit, qui fournissent des informations sur les rglementations de votre pays ou rgion (par exemple, l'ID FCC), peuvent tre situes physiquement sous l'ordinateur, l'intrieur du compartiment de la batterie (certains modles), sous le cache de service amovible (certains modles), l'arrire de l'cran ou sur le module du modem ou de l'appareil sans fil. Certains produits peuvent galement fournir des tiquettes de conformit lectroniques (tiquettes lectroniques) pour les modules radio de votre ordinateur. Les tiquettes lectroniques sont accessibles via le BIOS systme. REMARQUE :

REMARQUE :

possdent peut-tre pas d'ID FCC. Les tiquettes lectroniques ne sont pas disponibles sur tous les produits. Les appareils qui ne sont pas destins la vente ou une utilisation aux tats-Unis ne 2. 3. 4. 5. Pour afficher les tiquettes de conformit lectroniques :

1. Mettez l'ordinateur sous tension ou redmarrez-le, puis appuyez sur la touche echap lorsque le message Press the ESC key for Startup Menu (Pour accder au menu de dmarrage, appuyez sur la touche echap) apparat en bas de l'cran. Appuyez sur f10 pour accder Computer Setup. l'aide d'un priphrique de pointage ou des touches de direction, slectionnez Advanced (Avanc), Electronic Labels (tiquettes de conformit), puis appuyez sur la touche entre. Pour afficher une tiquette lectronique, utilisez un priphrique de pointage ou les touches de direction pour slectionner un des lments de la liste, puis appuyez sur OK. REMARQUE :

d'ordinateur et des priphriques installs. La liste des lments d'tiquette lectronique disponibles varie en fonction du modle Pour quitter les menus de Computer Setup sans enregistrer vos modifications :

Slectionnez l'icne Exit (Quitter) dans le coin infrieur droit de l'cran, puis suivez les instructions l'cran. ou Accs aux tiquettes de conformit 1 Utilisez les touches de direction pour slectionner Main (Principal), Ignore Changes and Exit (Ignorer les modifications et quitter), puis appuyez sur la touche entre. Avis de la FCC Le prsent quipement a t test et dclar conforme aux limites d'un appareil numrique de Classe B, telles que dfinies dans l'article 15 des rglementations FCC. Ces limites sont conues pour fournir une protection raisonnable contre les interfrences prjudiciables dans un environnement rsidentiel. Le prsent quipement gnre, utilise et peut mettre une nergie de radiofrquence et, s'il n'est pas install et utilis conformment aux instructions, peut entraner des interfrences prjudiciables pour les radiocommunications. Cependant, tout risque d'interfrences ne peut tre totalement exclu dans certains environnements spcifiques. Si cet quipement entrane des interfrences en matire de rception radio ou tlvision, ce qui peut tre vrifi en teignant et en rallumant l'quipement, il est recommand l'utilisateur d'essayer de corriger les interfrences en suivant une ou plusieurs des mesures suivantes :

Rorienter ou dplacer l'antenne de rception. Augmenter la distance entre l'quipement et le rcepteur. Brancher le matriel informatique sur la prise d'un circuit autre que celui sur lequel est branch le rcepteur. Demander conseil votre revendeur ou un technicien radio ou tlvision expriment. Cet appareil est conforme l'article 15 des rglementations FCC. Son fonctionnement est soumis deux conditions :

1. 2. Cet appareil ne doit pas provoquer des interfrences nuisibles, et Cet appareil doit accepter toute interfrence reue, notamment des interfrences pouvant provoquer un fonctionnement non voulu. Pour toute question concernant ce produit, contactez :

HP Inc. 1501 Page Mill Road Palo Alto, CA 94304 ou appelez HP au 650-857-1501. Pour identifier ce produit, reportez-vous la rfrence de pice, de gamme ou de modle indique sur le produit. Modifications La FCC stipule que l'utilisateur doit tre inform que toute modification opre sur l'appareil, n'ayant pas t expressment approuve par HP, peut entraner l'annulation des droits d'exploitation du produit dont bnficie l'utilisateur. Cbles Pour tre conformes la rglementation de la FCC, les connexions d'entre de l'appareil doivent tre tablies avec des cbles blinds munis d'embouts de connecteurs RFI/EMI mtalliques. 2 Chapitre 1 Avis de rglementation pour les ordinateurs portables Produits avec appareils sans fil LAN ou modules mobiles large bande HP Cet appareil ne doit pas tre plac ct ou fonctionner avec une autre antenne ou un autre metteur. AVERTISSEMENT ! Exposition aux radiations de frquence radio La puissance de rayonnement de cet appareil est infrieure aux limites d'exposition aux radiations mises par les frquences radio FCC. Toutefois, l'appareil doit tre utilis de sorte que les possibilits de contact humain soient rduites au maximum pendant le fonctionnement normal de tablettes et d'ordinateurs portables. Pendant le fonctionnement normal de tablettes et d'ordinateurs portables dont les crans sont infrieurs ou gaux 30,5 cm (12 pouces) : pour viter de dpasser les limites d'expositions aux frquences radio dictes dans la rglementation FCC, il est prfrable de ne pas s'approcher plus de 2,5 cm (1 pouce) de l'antenne. Pour identifier l'emplacement des antennes sans fil, reportez-vous aux manuels de l'utilisateur qui accompagnent votre ordinateur. Pendant le fonctionnement normal d'ordinateurs portables dont les crans sont suprieurs 30,5 cm

(12 pouces) : pour viter tout risque de dpassement des limites d'exposition aux frquences radio dictes par la FCC, les antennes ne doivent pas se trouver moins de 20 cm (8 pouces) de l'utilisateur, y compris lorsque l'cran de l'ordinateur est ferm. Pour identifier l'emplacement des antennes sans fil, reportez-vous aux manuels de l'utilisateur qui accompagnent votre ordinateur. Avis pour le Brsil Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio. Este equipamento atende aos limites de Taxa de Absoro Especfica referente exposio a campos eltricos, magnticos e eletromagnticos de radiofreqncias adotados pela ANATEL. Ao operar o dispositivo a uma distncia muito prxima do seu corpo, utilize um acessrio de armazenamento no metlico para posicionar o dispositivo a uma distncia mnima de 1,5 cm do corpo. Avis pour le Canada Cet appareil numrique de Classe B respecte toutes les exigences des rglementations canadiennes sur les quipements pouvant causer des interfrences, CAN ICES-3(B)/NMB-3(B). Si cet appareil est quip de fonctions WLAN ou Bluetooth, il est conforme aux normes RSS exemptes de licence dictes par Industrie Canada. Son fonctionnement est soumis deux conditions : (1) cet appareil ne doit pas gnrer d'interfrence et (2) cet appareil doit supporter toutes les interfrences reues, y compris les interfrences qui pourraient entraner un dysfonctionnement de l'appareil. Avis pour le Brsil 3 AVERTISSEMENT ! Exposition aux radiations de frquence radio : la puissance de rayonnement de cet appareil est infrieure aux limites d'exposition aux radiations mises par les frquences radio dictes par Industrie Canada. Toutefois, l'appareil doit tre utilis de sorte que les possibilits de contact humain soient rduites au maximum pendant son fonctionnement normal. Pendant le fonctionnement normal de tablettes et d'ordinateurs portables dont les crans sont infrieurs ou gaux 30,5 cm (12 pouces) : pour viter de dpasser les limites d'exposition aux frquences radio dictes par Industrie Canada, il est prfrable de ne pas s'approcher plus de 2,5 cm (1 pouce) de l'antenne. Pour identifier l'emplacement des antennes sans fil, reportez-vous aux manuels de l'utilisateur qui accompagnent votre ordinateur. Pendant le fonctionnement normal d'ordinateurs portables dont les crans sont suprieurs 30,5 cm

(12 pouces) : pour viter tout risque de dpassement des limites d'exposition aux frquences radio dictes par Industrie Canada, les antennes ne doivent pas se trouver moins de 20 cm (8 pouces) de l'utilisateur, y compris lorsque l'cran de l'ordinateur est ferm. Pour identifier l'emplacement des antennes sans fil, reportez-vous aux manuels de l'utilisateur qui accompagnent votre ordinateur. ATTENTION :

matriel l'extrieur. En effet, il fonctionne dans la plage de frquences allant de 5,15 5,25 GHz. Industrie Canada exige que ce matriel soit utilis l'intrieur pour la plage de frquences comprise entre 5,15 et 5,25 GHz, afin de rduire les risques d'interfrence avec les systmes de satellites du service mobile du canal commun. Un radar puissance leve est allou comme premier utilisateur des bandes de frquence allant de 5,25 5,35 GHz et de 5,65 5,85 GHz. Ces stations radar peuvent entraner des interfrences avec cet appareil et/ou l'endommager. Les antennes de ce priphrique ne sont pas remplaables. Toute tentative d'accs par l'utilisateur endommagera l'ordinateur. Lorsque vous utilisez un rseau local sans fil IEEE 802.11a, abstenez-vous d'utiliser ce Avis pour l'Union europenne Dclaration de conformit Les produits portant la marque CE sont conformes une ou plusieurs directives de l'UE suivantes, le cas chant :

Directive sur les quipements hertziens et quipements terminaux de tlcommunications 1999/5/CE

(remplace en 2017 par RED 2014/53/EU) ; Directive "Basse tension" 2006/95/CE (remplace en avril 2016 par 2014/35/EU) ; Directive CEM 2004/108/CE (remplace en avril 2016 par 2014/30/EU) ; directive Ecodesign 2009/125/CE ; directive RoHS 2011/65/CE. La conformit ces directives est value l'aide des normes harmonises europennes applicables. L'intgralit de la dclaration de conformit est disponible sur le site Web suivant : http://www.hp.eu/

certificates (effectuez une recherche partir du nom de modle du produit ou de son numro de produit, accessible sur l'tiquette de conformit). Pour toute question portant sur les rglementations, envoyez un courrier : HP Deutschland GmbH, HQ-TRE, 71025, Boeblingen, Allemagne. 4 Chapitre 1 Avis de rglementation pour les ordinateurs portables Produits quips de fonctionnalit radio Ce produit intgre un appareil de transmission et rception radiolectrique. Lors d'une utilisation standard d'un ordinateur portable, l'observation d'une distance de sparation de 20 cm permet aux niveaux d'exposition des frquences radio de respecter la conformit des normes de l'UE. Les produits conus pour une utilisation en de de cette distance, tels que les tablettes, respectent la conformit aux normes de l'UE applicables dans les positions de fonctionnement standard. Les produits peuvent tre utiliss sans garder une distance de sparation, sauf indication contraire dans les instructions spcifiques au produit. Restrictions pour les produits quips de fonctionnalit radio En cas de fonctionnement sur une bande de frquence comprise entre 5 150 et 5 350 MHz, ce produit est limit une utilisation en intrieur uniquement. Dclaration relative au rseau tlphonique europen (modem/fax) Le produit ci-joint est conforme aux spcifications de la directive 1999/5/CE applicable (annexe II) et porte en consquence la marque CE. Cependant, des diffrences existant entre les rseaux tlphoniques publics commuts (RTPC) nationaux prsents dans les diffrents pays/rgions, cette homologation en elle-mme ne garantit pas la russite de toutes les oprations sur tous les points de terminaison du RTPC. En cas de problme, prenez contact avec le fournisseur auprs duquel vous vous tes procur votre quipement. Avis pour l'Union europenne 5 Avis sur l'ergonomie Allemagne (texte en franais) Lorsqu'un ordinateur portable est utilis sur une station de travail professionnelle dans le cadre d'un travail sur cran de visualisation o la directive 90/270/CEE relative aux crans de visualisation est applicable, un clavier externe adapt est recommand. Selon l'application et le travail ralis, un moniteur externe adapt peut galement tre ncessaire pour obtenir des conditions de travail comparables celles d'une station de travail. Rf : EK1-ITB 2000 (certification GS volontaire) Les ordinateurs portables portant la marque d'homologation GS sont conformes aux exigences en matire d'ergonomie. Sans clavier externe, ils sont uniquement adapts aux tches ponctuelles sur cran de visualisation. Une utilisation mobile dans de mauvaises conditions de luminosit (par exemple, lumire directe du soleil) peut occasionner des reflets et donc rduire la lisibilit. Allemagne (texte en allemand) Wird ein mobiler Computer fr Bildschirmarbeitsaufgaben verwendet, wo die Richtlinie 90/270/EEG

(Bildschirmarbeitsrichtlinie) anzuwenden ist, wird eine geeignete externe Tastatur notwendig. Abhngig von der Anwendung und der Aufgabe kann ein geeigneter externer Monitor erforderlich sein, um vergleichbare Arbeitsbedingungen zu einem stationren Arbeitsplatz zu erreichen. Rf : EK1-ITB 2000 (freiwillige GS Zertifizierung) Mobile Computer, welche das "GS" Zeichen tragen, entsprechen den ergonomischen Anforderungen und sind nur fr kurzzeitige Benutzung von Bildschirmarbeitsaufgaben geeignet. Bei mobiler Nutzung mit ungnstigen Lichtverhltnissen (z.B. direkte Sonneneinstrahlung) kann es zu Reflexionen und damit zu Einschrnkungen der Lesbarkeit der dargestellten Zeichen kommen. Avis pour l'Australie et la Nouvelle-Zlande Cet quipement intgre un appareil de transmission et rception radiolectrique. Lors d'une utilisation standard, l'observation d'une distance de sparation de 20 cm permet aux niveaux d'exposition des frquences radio de respecter la conformit des normes australiennes et no-zlandaises. Avis WWAN pour la Chine 6 Chapitre 1 Avis de rglementation pour les ordinateurs portables Avis pour le Japon Marques de certification des priphriques WLAN, WWAN et Bluetooth This product contains certified radio equipment. Avis pour le Mexique Declaracin para Mxico La operacin de este equipo est sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2) este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operacin no deseada. El nmero de modelo reglamentario de este producto est en la etiqueta normativa. Si votre produit est fourni avec des accessoires sans fil, tels qu'un clavier ou une souris, et si vous devez identifier le modle de l'accessoire, reportez-vous l'tiquette appose sur cet accessoire. Le numro de modle rglementaire de ce produit se trouve sur l'tiquette rglementaire. Avis de rglementation pour la Russie HP Inc.

: 1501 Page Mill Road, Palo Alto, Californie 94304, tats-Unis Avis pour le Japon 7 10 ,

. 4-, 5- 6 . 4- , 3 , 2013 . 5 6 , 12-

12 . HP Inc.

: 1501 Page Mill Road, Palo Alto, Californie 94304, tats-Unis 10

. 4-, 5- 6

. 4- , 3 2013 . 5 6

, , 12 12-

.

:

: .. , , 125171, . ,

, 16, .3, / : +7 495 797 35 00

: .. , , 050040, . , , -, 77/7,

/ :

+ 7 727 355 35 52

:

: A.O. , , 125171, ,

, 16A 3, / : +7 495 797 35 00

: .. ,

, 050040, ., , -

, 77/7, / : +7 727 355 35 52 Avis sur les appareils sans fil pour Singapour Mettez hors tension les priphriques WWAN lorsque vous tes bord d'avions. L'utilisation de ces appareils bord d'avions est illgale, peut tre dangereuse pour le fonctionnement de l'avion et risque de perturber le rseau de tlphonie mobile. Le non-respect de cette instruction peut entraner la suspension ou le refus de services cellulaires au contrevenant, ou des actions juridiques, ou les deux. Les utilisateurs doivent limiter l'emploi d'quipement radio dans des dpts de carburant, usines chimiques et l o des explosions sont en cours. Comme pour les autres quipements mobiles de transmission par frquences radiolectriques, il est recommand aux utilisateurs, pour le bon fonctionnement de leur quipement et pour la scurit du 8 Chapitre 1 Avis de rglementation pour les ordinateurs portables personnel, de ne pas trop approcher les antennes du corps humain au cours du fonctionnement de l'quipement. Ce priphrique a t conu pour tre conforme aux exigences applicables pour l'exposition aux ondes radio, en fonction de normes scientifiques qui comprennent des plages destines assurer la scurit de tout le monde, quel que soit l'ge et l'tat de sant. Ces rgles d'exposition aux ondes radio utilisent une unit de mesure appele taux d'absorption spcifique (SAR - Specific Absorption Rate). Les tests relatifs aux taux d'absorption sont mens l'aide de mthodes standardises, le tlphone transmettant son niveau certifi le plus lev dans toutes les bandes de frquences utilises. Les informations de donnes SAR se basent sur les normes EN50360 et EN50361 de CENELEC, qui utilisent la limite de 2 watts par kilogramme, sur une moyenne de 10 grammes de tissu. Avis pour la Core du Sud Avis sur les appareils sans fil WWAN pour la Thalande Cet quipement de tlcommunications est conforme aux rglementations de la NTC. Avis de la NCC pour Tawan Priphriques WLAN 802.11a Avis pour la Core du Sud 9 Priphriques sans fil LAN 802.11/Priphriques Bluetooth/Priphriques courte porte Avis sur les utilisations en vol L'utilisation d'quipement lectronique bord d'un avion commercial est laisse la discrtion de la compagnie arienne. Avis sur les batteries remplaables par l'utilisateur Ne jetez pas les batteries ayant atteint leur dure de vie utile avec les ordures mnagres. Appliquez les lois et rglementations locales en matire de mise au rebut des batteries d'ordinateur. HP encourage ses clients recycler les quipements lectroniques usags, les cartouches d'impression HP d'origine et les batteries rechargeables. Pour plus d'informations sur les programmes de recyclage, consultez le site Web HP l'adresse http://www.hp.com/recycle. Pour des informations sur le retrait d'une batterie remplaable par l'utilisateur, reportez-vous au manuel de l'utilisateur livr avec le produit. Avis sur les batteries scelles en usine La ou les batteries de ce produit ne peuvent pas tre facilement remplaces par les utilisateurs. Le retrait ou le remplacement de la batterie pourrait affecter votre droit la garantie. Si une batterie ne tient plus la charge, contactez le support. Ne jetez pas les batteries ayant atteint leur dure de vie utile avec les ordures mnagres. Appliquez les lois et rglementations locales en matire de mise au rebut des batteries. 10 Chapitre 1 Avis de rglementation pour les ordinateurs portables Conformit du laser L'utilisation de mthodes de contrle ou de rglage ou de procdures, autres que celles AVERTISSEMENT !

indiques dans ce document ou dans le manuel d'installation d'appareils rayon laser, peut exposer l'utilisateur des radiations dangereuses. Pour rduire le risque d'exposition un rayonnement dangereux :

N'essayez pas d'ouvrir le botier du module. Il ne contient pas de composant rparable par l'utilisateur. N'effectuez pas de commandes, de rglages ou d'oprations sur l'appareil laser, en dehors de ce qui est indiqu dans le manuel d'installation du produit laser. Seuls les mainteneurs agrs HP sont autoriss rparer l'unit. Ce produit peut tre fourni avec un priphrique de stockage optique (par exemple, un lecteur de CD ou DVD) et/ou un metteur-rcepteur fibre optique. Chacun de ces appareils qui contient un laser est class comme produit laser de classe 1 conformment la norme CEI/EN 60825-1 et rpond aux critres de scurit de cette norme. Chaque produit laser est conforme aux paragraphes 21 CFR 1040.10 et 1040.11 des rglementations FDA des tats-Unis ou est conforme ces rglementations l'exception des dviations relatives l'avis sur le laser No. 50, en date du 24 juin 2007. Avis sur les modems AVERTISSEMENT ! Pour rduire le risque d'incendie, de choc lectrique et de blessure lors de l'utilisation de ce priphrique, suivez systmatiquement les consignes de scurit de base, notamment :

N'utilisez pas l'appareil proximit d'eau, par exemple prs d'une baignoire, d'un lavabo, d'un vier ou d'une piscine, ou encore dans une cave humide. vitez d'utiliser l'appareil pendant un orage. Il existe un risque d'lectrocution d la foudre. N'utilisez jamais cet appareil pour signaler une fuite de gaz si vous vous trouvez proximit de la fuite. Dbranchez systmatiquement le cble du modem avant d'ouvrir l'enceinte de l'appareil ou de toucher un cble modem non isol, une prise jack ou un composant interne. Si le produit n'est pas fourni avec un cble tlphonique, utilisez exclusivement un cble de tlcommunication 26 AWG ou suprieur. Ne branchez pas un cble de modem ou de tlphone sur la prise rseau (RJ-45). CONSERVEZ CES INSTRUCTIONS. Conformit du laser 11 Homologations du priphrique de tlcommunication Le priphrique de tlcommunication de cet ordinateur est homologu pour une connexion au rseau tlphonique des pays et rgions dont les marques d'homologation apparaissent sur l'tiquette de produit situe sur la partie infrieure de l'ordinateur ou sur le modem. Reportez-vous au manuel de l'utilisateur livr avec le produit pour vous assurer que celui-ci est configur pour le pays ou rgion dans lequel ou laquelle il se trouve. La slection d'un pays ou d'une rgion autre que celui ou celle o se trouve le produit peut entraner une configuration du modem en violation des lois sur les tlcommunications de ce pays ou de cette rgion. De plus, il est possible que le modem ne fonctionne pas correctement si vous n'avez pas slectionn correctement le pays/la rgion. Si, lorsque vous slectionnez un pays ou une rgion, un message indique que votre pays ou rgion n'est pas pris en charge, cela signifie que le modem n'a pas t homologu dans ce pays ou cette rgion et qu'il ne doit donc pas tre utilis. 12 Chapitre 1 Avis de rglementation pour les ordinateurs portables Avis sur les modems pour les tats-Unis Ce matriel est conforme l'article 68 des rglementations de la FCC et aux conditions adoptes par l'ACTA. Une tiquette est appose sur la partie infrieure de l'ordinateur ou sur le modem. Elle inclut, entre autres informations, un identificateur de produit au format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. Fournissez ces informations la compagnie tlphonique si elle vous y invite. Certification applicable de la prise USOC = RJ11C. La fiche et la prise utilises pour connecter ce matriel au cblage des locaux et au rseau tlphonique doivent tre conformes l'article 68 des rglementations de la FCC et aux conditions adoptes par l'ACTA. Un cordon tlphonique et une fiche modulaire conformes sont fournis avec ce produit. Ils sont conus pour tre connects une prise modulable galement conforme. Reportez-vous aux instructions d'installation pour plus d'informations. Le REN est utilis pour dterminer le nombre de priphriques qui peuvent tre connects une ligne tlphonique. Si la ligne tlphonique regroupe un nombre trop important de REN, les priphriques peuvent ne pas sonner lors d'un appel entrant. Dans la plupart des emplacements, la somme des REN ne doit pas dpasser cinq (5). Pour connatre avec certitude le nombre de priphriques qui peuvent tre connects une ligne, et donc le nombre total de REN, contactez votre compagnie tlphonique. Pour les produits homologus aprs le 23 juillet 2001, le REN fait partie de l'identificateur de produit dont le format est US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. Les chiffres reprsents par le signe ## constituent le REN sans virgule (par exemple, 03 reprsente un REN de 0,3). Pour les produits antrieurs, le REN est indiqu sparment sur l'tiquette. Si ce matriel HP dgrade le rseau tlphonique, la compagnie tlphonique vous avertira l'avance qu'une interruption du service peut tre requise. S'il n'est pas possible de vous informer de cette interruption l'avance, la compagnie vous avertira au plus vite. En outre, vous serez inform de votre droit dposer une rclamation auprs de la FCC si vous pensez que cela n'est ncessaire. La compagnie tlphonique peut apporter des modifications ses installations, quipements, oprations ou procdures pouvant affecter le bon fonctionnement du matriel. Dans ce cas, il vous en informera l'avance afin que vous puissiez prendre les mesures ncessaires pour assurer un service tlphonique ininterrompu. Si vous rencontrez des problmes avec cet quipement, contactez le support technique. S'il dtriore le rseau tlphonique, la compagnie tlphonique peut vous demander de le dconnecter jusqu' ce que le problme soit rsolu. Les seules rparations que vous pouvez effectuer sont celles qui sont prsentes dans la section Rsolution des problmes du manuel de l'utilisateur, si ce dernier est fourni. La connexion des lignes partages est soumise des taxes dpendant de chaque tat. Pour plus d'informations, contactez la commission des services publics ou la commission des entreprises. Si votre domicile est quip d'un dispositif d'alarme spcial connect la ligne tlphonique, vrifiez que l'installation de ce matriel HP ne le dsactive pas. Pour toute question concernant les quipements susceptibles de dsactiver votre alarme, consultez votre compagnie tlphonique ou un installateur qualifi. Le Telephone Consumer Protection Act de 1991 rend illgal le fait d'utiliser un ordinateur ou tout autre dispositif lectronique, y compris un tlcopieur, pour envoyer des messages ne contenant pas clairement, dans une marge situe dans la partie suprieure ou infrieure de chaque page transmise ou sur la premire page de chaque transmission, la date et l'heure de l'envoi, ainsi que des lments identifiant l'entreprise, l'entit ou la personne l'origine du message, ainsi que le numro de tlphone de la machine expditrice, de l'entreprise, de l'entit ou de la personne. (Le numro de tlphone fourni ne peut pas tre un numro en 900 ou tout autre numro dont le cot dpasse celui d'un appel local ou longue distance.) Pour programmer ces informations dans votre tlcopieur, vous devez suivre la procdure dcrite dans les instructions du logiciel de tlcopie. Avis sur les modems 13 Dclarations sur les modems pour les tats-Unis Reportez-vous la dclaration suivante du fournisseur du modem concernant le priphrique de modem install dans votre ordinateur :

14 Chapitre 1 Avis de rglementation pour les ordinateurs portables Avis sur les modems pour le Canada Cet quipement est conforme aux spcifications techniques d'Industrie Canada applicables. Le REN indique le nombre maximal d'appareils pouvant tre connects une interface tlphonique. La terminaison d'une interface peut consister en une combinaison d'appareils quelconque condition que la somme des REN de ces dispositifs ne dpasse pas 5. Le REN de ce terminal de communication est 1. Avis sur les modems pour le Japon Si l'ordinateur ne possde pas la marque de certification des priphriques japonais sur sa partie infrieure, reportez-vous la marque de certification approprie ci-dessous. La marque de certification des priphriques japonais pour le modem tlcopie/donnes V.92 56K est illustre ci-dessous :

Avis sur les modems 15 Dclarations sur les modems pour la Nouvelle-Zlande L'octroi d'un Telepermit pour n'importe quel terminal de tlcommunication indique uniquement que Telecom certifie que l'quipement est bien conforme aux exigences minimales de connexion son rseau. Il ne constitue aucunement une prise de responsabilit quant au produit par Telecom, et n'apporte aucune sorte de garantie. Plus particulirement, il n'apporte aucune garantie que l'quipement fonctionnera correctement et en tous points avec un autre quipement Telepermit d'une marque ou d'un modle diffrent, et n'implique pas qu'un produit est compatible avec l'ensemble des services du rseau Telecom. Quelles que soient les conditions d'utilisation, ce matriel ne peut fonctionner correctement aux vitesses suprieures celles pour lesquelles il a t conu. Telecom dcline toute responsabilit si des difficults devaient apparatre dans de telles circonstances. Si cet quipement est dot de la composition impulsions, Telecom ne garantit pas la prise en charge de celle-ci par la ligne. L'utilisation de la composition impulsions, sur une ligne partage par plusieurs dispositifs, peut provoquer un dclenchement de la sonnerie ou des parasites et galement une rponse errone. Si ce type de problme se produit, l'utilisateur ne doit pas contacter les services techniques de Telecom Nouvelle-Zlande. Certains paramtres ncessaires pour une conformit avec les exigences Telepermit de Telecom dpendent du matriel (PC) associ cet appareil. Le matriel associ doit tre configur de manire fonctionner dans les limites prescrites pour tre conforme aux spcifications Telecom :

a. Chaque appel manuel ne dpassera pas 10 tentatives d'appel au mme numro dans un intervalle de 30 minutes. Le matriel doit rester l'tat raccroch pendant une priode d'au moins 30 secondes entre la fin d'une tentative d'appel et le dbut de la tentative suivante. Lorsque des appels automatiques sont passs divers numros, le matriel doit tre configur pour passer l'tat raccroch pendant une priode d'au moins 5 secondes entre la fin d'une tentative d'appel et le dbut de la tentative suivante. Le matriel doit tre configur de telle manire que les appels soient traits dans un dlai de 3 30 secondes partir de la rception de la sonnerie (il doit donc tre configur entre 2 et 10 secondes). b. c. d. Prise en charge vocale Toutes les personnes qui utilisent cet appareil pour enregistrer des conversations tlphoniques doivent se soumettre la lgislation de la Nouvelle-Zlande. Celle-ci exige qu'au moins une des deux parties participant la conversation soit au courant de l'enregistrement. En outre, les principes relatifs la nature des informations personnelles recueillies, aux objectifs de leur collecte, leur utilisation et la divulgation de ces informations des tiers, principes rpertoris dans la loi sur la protection de la vie prive de 1993, doivent tre respects. Ce matriel ne doit pas tre configur de manire passer des appels automatiques au numro d'urgence

(111) mis en place par Telecom. 16 Chapitre 1 Avis de rglementation pour les ordinateurs portables Avis sur les cordons d'alimentation Si votre ordinateur ne vous a pas t livr avec un cordon d'alimentation ou un accessoire d'alimentation secteur compatible avec votre ordinateur, vous devrez acheter un cordon d'alimentation homologu pour votre pays ou votre rgion. Le cordon d'alimentation doit tre test et garanti pour le produit, pour la tension et le type d'intensit figurant sur l'tiquette des valeurs nominales lectriques du produit. Les valeurs nominales de tension et d'intensit du cordon doivent tre suprieures celles indiques sur l'ordinateur. En outre, le diamtre du cordon doit tre au minimum de 0,75 mm/18 AWG et sa longueur doit tre comprise entre 1,0 m (3,2 pieds) et 2 m (6,56 pieds). Si vous avez des questions sur le type de cordon d'alimentation utiliser, contactez votre fournisseur de service agr. Branchez le cordon d'alimentation de sorte qu'il ne puisse pas tre pitin ou coinc par des objets. Accordez une attention particulire la fiche, la prise secteur et l'endroit o le cordon sort du botier du portable. Avis sur les cordons d'alimentation pour le Japon Prise CC de la source d'alimentation externe HP Avis de Macrovision Corporation Ce produit intgre une technologie de protection des droits d'auteur qui est protge par des revendications de procd de certains brevets amricains et d'autres droits sur la proprit intellectuelle de Macrovision Corporation et d'autres bnficiaires de droits. L'utilisation de cette technologie de protection des droits d'auteur doit tre autorise par Macrovision Corporation et a pour but de permettre un visionnage domestique et d'autres utilisations limites uniquement, sauf autorisation de Macrovision Corporation. L'ingnierie inverse et le dsassemblage sont interdits. Avis sur les cordons d'alimentation 17 2 Avis de rglementation pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail personnelles Avis sur les modems AVERTISSEMENT ! Pour rduire le risque d'incendie, d'lectrocution et de blessures pendant l'utilisation de cet appareil, suivez systmatiquement les rgles de scurit de base suivantes :

N'utilisez pas l'appareil proximit d'eau, par exemple prs d'une baignoire, d'un lavabo, d'un vier ou d'une piscine, ou encore dans une cave humide. vitez d'utiliser l'appareil pendant un orage. Il existe un risque d'lectrocution d la foudre. N'utilisez jamais cet appareil pour signaler une fuite de gaz si vous vous trouvez proximit de la fuite. Dbranchez systmatiquement le cble du modem avant d'ouvrir l'enceinte de l'appareil ou de toucher un cble modem non isol, une prise jack ou un composant interne. Si le produit n'est pas fourni avec un cble tlphonique, utilisez exclusivement un cble de tlcommunication 26 AWG ou suprieur. Ne branchez pas un cble de modem ou de tlphone sur la prise rseau RJ-45 (rseau Ethernet). CONSERVEZ CES INSTRUCTIONS. Homologations des priphriques de tlcommunications Le priphrique de tlcommunications de votre ordinateur est homologu pour une connexion au rseau tlphonique des pays et rgions dont le certificat d'homologation apparat sur l'tiquette du produit appose sur la base de l'ordinateur ou sur le modem. Pour vrifier que ce matriel est configur pour le pays ou la rgion o il se trouve, reportez-vous au manuel de l'utilisateur qui l'accompagne. Si vous slectionnez un pays ou une rgion autre que celui ou celle dans lequel se trouve le modem, il risque de violer les lois de tlcommunications du pays ou de la rgion. De plus, votre modem risque de ne pas fonctionner correctement si vous ne slectionnez pas le bon pays ou la bonne rgion. Si, lorsque vous slectionnez un pays ou une rgion, un message indique que ce pays ou cette rgion n'est pas support, c'est que le modem n'a pas t agr dans ce pays ou cette rgion et ne doit donc pas tre utilis. 18 Chapitre 2 Avis de rglementation pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail personnelles Avis sur les modems pour les tats-Unis Cet quipement est conforme l'article 68 des rglementations FCC et aux conditions adoptes par l'ACTA. Une tiquette appose sur la face infrieure de l'ordinateur ou sur le modem comporte, entre autres informations, un identificateur de produit au format US: AAAEQ##TXXXX. Fournissez ces informations la compagnie tlphonique si elle vous le demande. Homologation applicable prise USOC = RJ11C. Les prises utilises pour connecter cet quipement aux cbles lectriques des lieux et au rseau tlphonique doivent tre conformes l'article 68 des rglementations FCC et aux conditions approuves par l'ACTA. Un cordon tlphonique et une prise modulaire conformes FCC sont livrs avec cet quipement. Il est conu pour tre branch sur une prise modulable galement conforme. Pour des dtails, reportez-vous aux instructions d'installation. Le REN permet de dterminer le nombre de priphriques pouvant tre raccords sur une ligne tlphonique. Si un nombre excessif d'appareils est prsent sur la ligne tlphonique, ceux-ci risquent de ne pas rpondre un appel entrant. Dans la plupart des cas (mais pas toujours), la somme des REN des priphriques raccords sur une ligne ne doit pas dpasser cinq (5). Pour tre sr du nombre d'appareils pouvant tre connects une mme ligne (dtermin par le numro REN), contactez la compagnie de tlphone locale. Pour les produits agrs aprs le 23 juillet 2001, le REN fait partie de l'identificateur du produit qui est au format amricain :

AAAEQ##TXXXX. Les chiffres reprsents par le signe ## constituent le REN sans virgule (par exemple, 03 reprsente un REN de 0,3). Pour les produits antrieurs cette date, le REN est affich sparment sur l'tiquette. Si cet quipement HP dtriore le rseau tlphonique, la compagnie de tlphone vous avisera par avance qu'une interruption de service peut tre requise. Si la compagnie de tlphone ne peut pas vous aviser par avance, vous serez inform ds que possible. Vous serez galement inform de vos droits de rclamation auprs de la FCC si vous le jugez ncessaire. La compagnie de tlphone peut apporter des modifications ses quipements, oprations ou procdures pouvant affecter le bon fonctionnement de votre matriel. Si cela se produit, la compagnie de tlphone vous informera par avance pour vous permettre d'apporter les modifications requises afin d'assurer un service tlphonique sans interruption. Si vous rencontrez des problmes avec cet quipement, contactez le support technique. S'il dtriore le rseau tlphonique, la compagnie tlphonique peut vous demander de le dconnecter jusqu' ce que le problme soit rsolu. Les seules rparations que vous pouvez effectuer sont celles qui sont prsentes dans la section Rsolution des problmes du manuel de l'utilisateur, si ce dernier est fourni. Le raccord des lignes partages est soumis aux tarifs en vigueur dans votre pays. Pour plus d'informations, contactez les commissions d'utilit publique, la commission de service public ou les commissions d'entreprise. Si votre domicile est quip d'un dispositif d'alarme spcial connect la ligne tlphonique, vrifiez que l'installation de cet quipement HP ne dsactive pas ce dispositif. Si vous avez des questions sur ce qui peut dsactiver le dispositif d'alarme, consultez votre compagnie de tlphone ou un installateur qualifi. La loi de 1991 sur la protection des usagers du tlphone interdit l'utilisation d'un ordinateur ou de tout autre dispositif lectronique, y compris les tlcopieurs, pour l'envoi d'un message, moins que ne soit inscrit clairement sur ce message (dans la marge, le haut ou le bas de chaque page ou sur la premire page) la date et l'heure de l'envoi ainsi que l'identit de la socit expditrice, de l'entit ou du particulier, ainsi que le numro de tlphone de la machine expditrice, de l'entit ou du particulier. Le numro de tlphone ne doit pas tre un numro commenant par 900 ni un numro dont le cot dpasse celui d'un appel local ou longue distance. Pour programmer ces informations dans votre tlcopieur, reportez-vous aux instructions relatives au logiciel d'envoi de tlcopies. Avis sur les modems 19 Avis sur les modems pour le Canada Cet quipement est conforme aux normes techniques Industrie Canada applicables. Le REN donne une indication sur le nombre maximum de priphriques qu'il est possible de relier une interface tlphonique. La terminaison d'une interface peut consister en une combinaison de priphriques quelconque condition que la somme des REN de ces dispositifs ne dpasse pas 5. Le REN de ce terminal de communication est 1. Avis sur les modems pour le Japon Si la marque de certification japonaise ne figure pas sur la base de l'ordinateur, reportez-vous la certification ci-dessous. Au Japon, la marque de certification pour le modem LSI Corporation PCI-SV92EX Soft est la suivante :

Dclarations sur les modems pour la Nouvelle-Zlande L'octroi d'un Telepermit pour n'importe quel terminal de tlcommunication indique uniquement que Telecom certifie que l'quipement est bien conforme aux exigences minimales de connexion son rseau. Il ne constitue aucunement une prise de responsabilit quant au produit par Telecom et n'apporte aucune sorte de garantie. Plus particulirement, il n'apporte aucune garantie que l'quipement fonctionnera correctement et en tous points avec un autre quipement Telepermit d'une marque ou d'un modle diffrent, et n'implique pas qu'un produit est compatible avec l'ensemble des services du rseau Telecom. Quelles que soient les conditions d'utilisation, ce matriel ne peut fonctionner correctement aux vitesses suprieures celles pour lesquelles il a t conu. Telecom dcline toute responsabilit si des difficults devaient apparatre dans de telles circonstances. Si cet quipement est dot de la composition impulsions, Telecom ne garantit pas la prise en charge permanente de la composition impulsions. L'utilisation de la numrotation par impulsions, sur une ligne partage par plusieurs dispositifs, peut provoquer un dclenchement de la sonnerie ou des parasites et galement une rponse errone. Si de tels problmes apparaissent, l'utilisateur ne doit pas contacter le service de rparation de Telecom. Certains paramtres ncessaires pour une conformit avec les exigences Telepermit de Telecom dpendent du matriel (PC) associ cet appareil. L'quipement associ doit tre configur de manire fonctionner dans les limites prescrites pour tre conforme aux spcifications Telecom :

a. Seules 10 tentatives d'appel maximum peuvent tre effectues au mme numro dans un intervalle de 30 minutes, pour n'importe quelle initialisation manuelle d'appel. Un intervalle minimum de 30 secondes doit s'couler entre la fin d'une tentative d'appel et le dbut de la suivante. Lorsque des appels automatiques sont effectus divers numros, un intervalle minimum de 5 secondes doit s'couler entre la fin d'une tentative d'appel et le dbut de la suivante. L'quipement doit tre configur de telle manire que les appels soient traits dans un dlai de 3 30 secondes partir de la rception de la sonnerie (il doit donc tre configur entre 2 et 10 secondes). b. c. d. 20 Chapitre 2 Avis de rglementation pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail personnelles Prise en charge vocale Toutes les personnes qui utilisent cet appareil pour enregistrer des conversations tlphoniques doivent se soumettre la lgislation de la Nouvelle-Zlande. Celle-ci exige qu'au moins une des deux parties participant la conversation doit tre au courant de l'enregistrement. En outre, les principes relatifs la nature des informations personnelles recueillies, aux objectifs de leur collecte, leur utilisation et la divulgation de ces informations des tiers, principes rpertoris dans la loi Privacy Act 1993, doivent tre respects. Ce matriel ne doit pas tre configur de manire passer des appels automatiques au numro d'urgence

(111) mis en place par Telecom. Avis de compatibilit lectromagntique Ce manuel prsente les avis de rglementation relatifs aux fonctions avec et sans fil des diffrents pays et rgions, ainsi que des informations de conformit de l'ordinateur. Certains de ces avis ne s'appliquent peut-

tre pas votre produit. Un ou plusieurs priphriques sans fil intgrs peuvent tre installs. Dans certains environnements, l'utilisation d'appareils sans fil peut tre limite. Ces restrictions peuvent s'appliquer dans les avions, dans les hpitaux, prs d'explosifs, dans des lieux dangereux, etc. Si vous n'tes pas sr des rgles qui s'appliquent ce produit, demandez si vous pouvez l'utiliser avant de le mettre sous tension. Avis de la FCC Cet quipement a t test et trouv conforme aux limitations relatives aux appareils numriques de classe B, en accord avec l'article 15 des rgles de la FCC. Ces limitations sont conues pour offrir une protection raisonnable contre les interfrences dans une installation rsidentielle. Cet quipement produit, utilise et peut mettre de l'nergie sous forme de radiofrquences. S'il n'est pas utilis conformment aux instructions, il peut produire des interfrences nuisibles aux communications radio. Cependant, il n'existe aucune garantie assurant qu'il n'y aura pas d'interfrence dans une installation particulire. Si l'utilisateur constate des interfrences lors de la rception d'missions de radio ou de tlvision (il suffit pour le vrifier d'allumer et d'teindre successivement l'appareil), il devra prendre l'une ou plusieurs des mesures suivantes pour les liminer savoir :

Rorienter ou repositionner l'antenne de rception. Accrotre la distance entre le matriel et le rcepteur. Brancher le matriel informatique sur une prise d'un circuit autre que celui sur lequel est branch le rcepteur. Demander conseil un revendeur ou un technicien de radio ou de tlvision expriment. Cet appareil est conforme l'article 15 des rglementations FCC. Son fonctionnement est soumis deux conditions :

1. 2. Cet appareil ne doit pas provoquer des interfrences nuisibles, et Cet appareil doit accepter toute interfrence reue, notamment des interfrences pouvant provoquer un fonctionnement non voulu. Pour toute question concernant ce produit, contactez :

HP Inc. 1501 Page Mill Road Palo Alto, CA 94304 ou appelez HP au 650-857-1501 Avis de compatibilit lectromagntique 21 Pour identifier ce produit, reportez-vous la rfrence de pice, de gamme ou de modle indique sur le produit. Modifications La FCC requiert que l'utilisateur soit averti que toute modification de cet quipement non approuve expressment pas la socit Hewlett-Packard pourrait annuler le droit de l'utilisateur d'utiliser l'quipement. Cbles Les cbles branchs cet quipement doivent tre blinds et comporter des protections de connecteur mtalliques de type RFI/EMI pour tre conformes aux directives et rglementations de la FCC. Produits quips de priphriques LAN sans fil Ce produit peut tre quip d'un priphrique de rseau local sans fil. Ce priphrique ne doit pas tre situ au mme endroit ou fonctionner en mme temps qu'une autre antenne ou un autre metteur. AVERTISSEMENT ! Exposition des missions de radiofrquence La puissance de sortie mise par ce priphrique est infrieure aux limites de la FCC sur l'exposition des missions de radiofrquence. Nanmoins, le priphrique doit tre utilis de faon ce que les risques de contact physique soient rduits pendant le fonctionnement normal de l'appareil. Pendant le fonctionnement normal : Pour viter tout risque de dpassement des limites d'exposition aux frquences radio dictes par la FCC, les antennes ne doivent pas se trouver moins de 20 cm (8 pouces) de l'utilisateur. Pour identifier l'emplacement des antennes sans fil, reportez-vous la documentation qui accompagne l'ordinateur. Dclaration sur les tlcommunications pour l'Australie L'ordinateur doit tre connect au rseau de tlcommunications par un cble rpondant aux critres de la norme AS/CA S008. AVERTISSEMENT !

pas tre installs dans un autre priphrique. Les modems sans connecteur RJ11 intgral qui sont livrs avec cet ordinateur ne doivent Cet quipement intgre un appareil de transmission et rception radiolectrique. Lors d'une utilisation standard, l'observation d'une distance de sparation de 20 cm permet aux niveaux d'exposition des frquences radio de respecter la conformit des normes australiennes et no-zlandaises. Avis pour le Brsil Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio. ATTENTION : A alimentao de energia predefinida para 220/230Vv. Se voc possuir tomada eltrica de 110/115Vv, por favor, altere a chave na parte traseira do seu computador para a tenso correta. avis pour le Canada Cet appareil numrique de Classe B respecte toutes les exigences des rglementations canadiennes sur les quipements pouvant causer des interfrences, CAN ICES-3(B)/NMB-3(B). Si ce priphrique est quip de fonctions WLAN ou Bluetooth, il est conforme aux normes RSS exemptes de licence dictes par Industrie Canada. Son fonctionnement est soumis deux conditions : (1) cet appareil ne doit pas gnrer d'interfrence et (2) cet appareil doit supporter toutes les interfrences reues, y compris les interfrences qui pourraient entraner un dysfonctionnement de l'appareil. 22 Chapitre 2 Avis de rglementation pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail personnelles AVERTISSEMENT ! Exposition aux radiations de frquence radio La puissance de rayonnement de cet appareil est infrieure aux limites d'exposition aux radiations mises par les frquences radio dictes par Industrie Canada. Toutefois, l'appareil doit tre utilis de sorte que les possibilits de contact humain soient rduites au maximum pendant son fonctionnement normal. Pendant le fonctionnement normal : Pour viter tout risque de dpassement des limites d'exposition aux frquences radio dictes par Industrie Canada, les antennes ne doivent pas se trouver moins de 20 cm

(8 pouces) de l'utilisateur. Pour identifier l'emplacement des antennes sans fil, reportez-vous la documentation qui accompagne l'ordinateur. ATTENTION : En cas d'utilisation d'un rseau LAN IEEE 802.11a, ce produit doit uniquement tre utilis l'intrieur d'un btiment, en raison de son fonctionnement sur la plage de frquence de 5,15 5,25 GHz. Industrie Canada exige que ce produit soit utilis l'intrieur d'un btiment pour la plage de frquence allant de 5,15 5,25 GHz afin de rduire le risque d'interfrences prjudiciables pour les systmes de satellites mobiles utilisant le mme canal. Les plages de 5,25 5,35 GHz et de 5,65 5,85 GHz sont alloues prioritairement aux radars haute puissance. Ces stations radar peuvent provoquer des interfrences avec cet appareil ou l'endommager. L'antenne de cet appareil ne se remplace pas. Toute tentative de modification par l'utilisateur peut endommager l'ordinateur. Avis de compatibilit lectromagntique 23 Avis pour l'Union europenne 24 Chapitre 2 Avis de rglementation pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail personnelles Dclaration de conformit Les produits portant la marque CE sont conformes une ou plusieurs directives de l'UE suivantes, le cas chant :

Directive sur les quipements hertziens et quipements terminaux de tlcommunications 1999/5/CE

(remplace en 2017 par RED 2014/53/EU) ; Directive "Basse tension" 2006/95/CE (remplace en avril 2016 par 2014/35/EU) ; Directive CEM 2004/108/CE (remplace en avril 2016 par 2014/30/EU) ; directive Ecodesign 2009/125/CE ; directive RoHS 2011/65/CE. La conformit ces directives est value l'aide des normes harmonises europennes applicables. L'intgralit de la dclaration de conformit est disponible sur le site Web suivant : http://www.hp.eu/

certificates (effectuez une recherche partir du nom de modle du produit ou de son numro de produit, accessible sur l'tiquette de conformit). Pour toute question portant sur les rglementations, envoyez un courrier : HP Deutschland GmbH, HQ-TRE, 71025, Boeblingen, Allemagne. Produits quips de fonctionnalit radio Cet quipement peut intgrer un appareil de transmission et rception radiolectrique. Lors d'une utilisation standard d'un ordinateur de bureau, l'observation d'une distance de sparation de 20 cm permet aux niveaux d'exposition des frquences radio de respecter la conformit des normes de l'UE. Restrictions pour les produits quips de fonctionnalit radio En cas de fonctionnement sur une bande de frquence comprise entre 5 150 et 5 350 MHz, ce produit est limit une utilisation en intrieur uniquement. Dclaration relative au rseau tlphonique europen (modem/fax) Le produit ci-joint est conforme aux spcifications de la directive 1999/5/CE applicable (annexe II) et porte en consquence la marque CE. Cependant, des diffrences existant entre les rseaux tlphoniques publics commuts (RTPC) nationaux prsents dans les diffrents pays/rgions, cette homologation en elle-mme ne garantit pas la russite de toutes les oprations sur tous les points de terminaison du RTPC. En cas de problme, prenez contact avec le fournisseur auprs duquel vous vous tes procur votre quipement. L'quipement a t conu pour fonctionner avec les rseaux DTMF analogiques. Cet quipement peut connatre des difficults d'interconnexion sur les rseaux RTPC prenant uniquement en charge la composition impulsions. Contactez votre oprateur rseau pour bnficier d'une aide supplmentaire. Avis sur l'ergonomie Allemagne Un systme informatique compos de produits de la marque HP respecte les exigences applicables relatives l'ergonomie si tous les produits inclus concerns portent la marque de conformit GS , par exemple un ordinateur de bureau professionnel, un clavier, une souris et un moniteur. Allemagne (texte en allemand) Ein aus HP Produkten bestehendes Computersystem erfllt die anwendbaren ergonomischen Anforderungen, wenn alle verwendeten Komponenten das GS Zeichen tragen, wie z. B. Business Desktop PC, Tastatur, PC-

Maus und Bildschirm. Avis de compatibilit lectromagntique 25 Avis pour le Japon Marques de certification des priphriques WLAN et Bluetooth If this device contains radio equipment, it is certified radio equipment. 26 Chapitre 2 Avis de rglementation pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail personnelles Avis pour le Mexique Declaracin para Mxico La operacin de este equipo est sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2) este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operacin no deseada. Si su producto se brinda con accesorios inalmbricos como un teclado o un mouse y necesita identificar el modelo del accesorio, consulte la etiqueta incluida en ese accesorio. Avis de rglementation pour la Russie HP Inc.

: 1501 Page Mill Road, Palo Alto, Californie 94304, tats-Unis 10 ,

. 4-, 5- 6 . 4- , 3 , 2013 . 5 6 , 12-

12 . HP Inc.

: 1501 Page Mill Road, Palo Alto, Californie 94304, tats-Unis 10

. 4-, 5- 6

. 4- , 3 2013 . 5 6

, , 12 12-

.

:

: .. , , 125171, . ,

, 16, .3, / : +7 495 797 35 00

: .. , , 050040, . , , -, 77/7,

/ :

+ 7 727 355 35 52

:

: A.O. , , 125171, , Avis de compatibilit lectromagntique 27

, 16A 3, / : +7 495 797 35 00

: .. ,

, 050040, ., , -

, 77/7, / : +7 727 355 35 52 Avis pour la Core du Sud Avis de la NCC pour Tawan Priphriques WLAN 802.11a Priphriques sans fil LAN 802.11/Priphriques Bluetooth/Priphriques courte porte 28 Chapitre 2 Avis de rglementation pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail personnelles 3 Avis de scurit pour les ordinateurs portables AVERTISSEMENT ! Pour rduire les risques de blessures graves, lisez le manuel Scurit et ergonomie du poste de travail. Il dcrit l'installation du poste de travail, la posture ainsi que les conditions de scurit et de travail appropries pour les utilisateurs, et fournit des informations importantes sur la scurit lectrique et mcanique. Vous trouverez ce manuel sur le Web l'adresse http://www.hp.com/ergo, ainsi que sur le CD de documentation qui accompagne le produit. Avis d'avertissement relatif la chaleur AVERTISSEMENT ! Pour viter tout risque de blessure associe la chaleur ou de surchauffe de l'ordinateur, ne placez pas ce dernier sur vos genoux et n'obstruez pas ses ouvertures d'aration. Utilisez toujours l'ordinateur sur une surface plane et rigide. La ventilation ne doit pas tre entrave par des lments rigides, tels qu'une imprimante, ni par des lments souples, tels que des coussins, du tissu ou un tapis pais. De mme, l'adaptateur secteur ne doit rester en contact ni avec la peau ni avec un lment souple, tel que des coussins, un vtement ou un tapis lorsque l'ordinateur est en cours de fonctionnement. L'ordinateur et l'adaptateur secteur sont conformes aux limites de temprature de surface accessible l'utilisateur, dfinies par la norme internationale sur la scurit du matriel informatique (CEI/EN 60950). Avis sur les risques lis la scurit Si vous observez l'une des situations suivantes (ou avez d'autres inquitudes en matire de scurit), n'utilisez pas l'ordinateur : bruit de crpitement, de sifflement ou de claquement ou forte odeur/fume en provenance de l'ordinateur. La survenue de l'une de ces situations est normale en cas de dfaillance d'un composant lectronique interne de manire neutralise et contrle. Cependant, ces situations peuvent galement signifier un risque de scurit. Ne partez pas du principe qu'il s'agit d'une dfaillance neutralise. Mettez l'ordinateur hors tension, dconnectez-le de sa source d'alimentation, puis contactez le support technique. Avis sur les batteries remplaables par l'utilisateur Il existe un risque d'explosion en cas de remplacement de la batterie par une batterie AVERTISSEMENT !

d'un type incorrect. liminez les batteries usages en respectant les instructions. AVERTISSEMENT ! Pour rduire le risque d'incendie ou de brlures, abstenez-vous de dmonter, d'craser, de perforer, de jeter dans l'eau ou dans le feu une batterie, ou encore de court-circuiter ses connecteurs externes. AVERTISSEMENT ! Ne laissez pas les batteries la porte des enfants. AVERTISSEMENT ! Pour limiter les risques lis la scurit, n'utilisez que la batterie fournie avec l'ordinateur, une batterie de remplacement fournie par HP ou une batterie compatible achete comme accessoire auprs de HP. Avis d'avertissement relatif la chaleur 29 Avis sur le niveau du volume du casque et des couteurs AVERTISSEMENT !

volumes levs pendant des priodes prolonges. Pour viter les dommages causs votre systme auditif, n'coutez pas des Avis sur les cordons d'alimentation AVERTISSEMENT ! Pour rduire les risques de choc lectrique ou de dtrioration du matriel :

Branchez le cordon d'alimentation sur une prise secteur facilement accessible tout moment. Coupez l'alimentation de l'ordinateur en dbranchant le cordon d'alimentation de la prise secteur. Si l'ordinateur portable est fourni avec une fiche tripolaire, branchez le cordon sur une prise lectrique tripolaire relie la terre. Ne dsactivez pas la broche de mise la terre du cordon d'alimentation en utilisant, par exemple, un adaptateur bipolaire. La broche de mise la terre constitue un lment de scurit essentiel. AVERTISSEMENT ! Pour limiter les problmes de scurit potentiels, utilisez avec cet ordinateur uniquement l'adaptateur secteur fourni avec l'ordinateur, un adaptateur secteur de remplacement fourni par HP ou un adaptateur secteur achet comme accessoire auprs de HP. Avis pour le Brsil Este equipamento deve ser conectado obrigatoriamente em tomada de rede de energia eltrica que possua aterramento (trs pinos), conforme a norma nbr abnt 5410,visando a segurana dos usurios contra choques eltricos. Nettoyage du clavier AVERTISSEMENT ! Pour rduire les risques de chocs lectriques ou de dommages aux composants internes, n'utilisez pas l'embout de l'aspirateur pour nettoyer le clavier. L'utilisation d'un aspirateur peut entraner le dpt de poussires mnagres sur le clavier. Nettoyez rgulirement le clavier pour viter que les touches ne deviennent collantes et pour supprimer la poussire, les peluches et les particules susceptibles de se loger sous les touches. Utilisez une bombe dpoussirante air comprim avec embout directionnel permettant d'insuffler de l'air sous le clavier et autour des touches et ainsi d'liminer les particules. Avis sur les dplacements AVERTISSEMENT ! Afin de rduire le risque d'lectrocution, d'incendie ou de dtrioration du matriel, n'essayez pas d'alimenter l'ordinateur avec un kit de conversion de tension pour lectromnager. Avis de scurit pour la Chine Chine : avis sur l'altitude Avis sur l'altitude pour les produits dont l'utilisation n'est pas certifie au-del de 5 000 m d'altitude 30 Chapitre 3 Avis de scurit pour les ordinateurs portables Icne Description Chine : avis sur une utilisation dans des conditions tropicales Avis pour les produits dont l'utilisation n'est pas certifie dans des conditions tropicales Icne Description Norvge et Sude : avis de mise la terre des cbles pour les produits quips d'un tuner TV ATTENTION : Pour limiter les risques lis la scurit, utilisez un isolant voltaque lors de la connexion un systme de distribution par cble. Avis de la BSMI pour Tawan Norvge et Sude : avis de mise la terre des cbles pour les produits quips d'un tuner TV 31 4 Avis de scurit pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail personnelles Informations importantes relatives la scurit AVERTISSEMENT ! Pour rduire les risques de blessures graves, lisez le manuel Scurit et ergonomie du poste de travail. Il dcrit l'installation du poste de travail, la posture ainsi que les conditions de scurit et de travail appropries pour les utilisateurs, et fournit des informations importantes sur la scurit lectrique et mcanique. Vous trouverez ce manuel sur le Web l'adresse http://www.hp.com/ergo, ainsi que sur le CD de documentation qui accompagne le produit. Pour rduire les risques de choc lectrique ou de dtrioration du matriel :

Branchez le cordon d'alimentation sur une prise secteur facilement accessible tout moment. Coupez l'alimentation de l'ordinateur en dbranchant le cordon d'alimentation de la prise secteur. Si l'ordinateur portable est fourni avec une fiche tripolaire, branchez le cordon sur une prise lectrique tripolaire relie la terre. Ne dsactivez pas la broche de mise la terre du cordon d'alimentation en utilisant, par exemple, un adaptateur bipolaire. La broche de mise la terre constitue un lment de scurit essentiel. L'ordinateur peut tre trs lourd ; assurez-vous d'adopter une position ergonomique adquate lors de sa manipulation. Installez l'ordinateur proximit d'une prise secteur. Le cordon d'alimentation secteur constitue le principal dispositif de dconnexion secteur de votre ordinateur et doit donc tre facilement accessible. Pour votre scurit, le cordon d'alimentation fourni avec votre ordinateur est quip d'une broche de mise la terre. Utilisez toujours le cordon d'alimentation avec une prise murale correctement relie la terre, afin de rduire les risques d'lectrocution. Pour rduire les risques de choc lectrique en provenance du rseau tlphonique, branchez votre ordinateur sur une prise secteur avant de le connecter une ligne tlphonique. Par ailleurs, dconnectez votre ligne tlphonique avant de dbrancher votre ordinateur de la prise secteur. Dbranchez le cordon du modem du rseau tlphonique avant d'installer ou d'enlever le capot de votre ordinateur. N'utilisez pas l'ordinateur lorsque le capot est enlev. Pour plus de scurit, dbranchez toujours l'ordinateur de sa source d'alimentation, de tout systme de tlcommunications (comme les lignes tlphoniques), des rseaux et des modems avant d'excuter toute opration de maintenance. Si vous ne respectez pas ces consignes, vous risquez de vous blesser ou de causer des dommages matriels. Le modem et l'alimentation de ce produit renferment des niveaux de tension dangereux. ATTENTION : Si votre ordinateur est quip d'un commutateur de slection de tension destin aux systmes fonctionnant sous 115 ou 230 V, ce commutateur a t prdfini sur la tension en vigueur dans le pays/rgion o il a t vendu initialement. Mettre le commutateur sur la mauvaise position peut endommager l'ordinateur et annuler toute garantie implicite. 32 Chapitre 4 Avis de scurit pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail personnelles Ce produit n'a pas t valu pour une connexion un systme d'alimentation informatique (un systme de distribution de courant alternatif sans connexion directe la terre, selon la norme CEI/EN 60950). Conditions d'installation Consultez les instructions d'installation avant de brancher cet quipement sur l'alimentation. AVERTISSEMENT !

L'quipement doit tre pourvu d'un raccordement la terre protecteur secteur appropri. Cet ordinateur peut contenir des pices sous tension et amovibles. Dbranchez le cordon d'alimentation avant de retirer le botier. Remettez le botier bien en place avant de remettre l'ordinateur sous tension. Avis sur le remplacement de la batterie Le produit peut contenir une pile ou un module de batterie interne alcalin, au dioxyde de AVERTISSEMENT !

lithium manganse ou au pentoxyde de vanadium. Il y a danger d'incendie et de brlures s'il n'est pas manipul correctement. Pour rduire les risques de blessure :

N'essayez pas de recharger la batterie. Ne l'exposez pas des tempratures suprieures 60 C (140 F). N'essayez pas de dmonter, d'craser, de percer la batterie, ni de court-circuiter ses bornes ou de la jeter dans le feu ou l'eau. Il existe un risque d'explosion en cas de remplacement de la batterie par une batterie d'un type incorrect. liminez les batteries usages en respectant les instructions. Remplacez uniquement par une batterie HP prvue pour ce produit. Pour plus d'informations sur le retrait d'une batterie, reportez-vous la documentation de l'ordinateur. Icne Description Les piles, modules de batterie et accumulateurs ne doivent pas tre jets avec les ordures mnagres. Pour permettre leur recyclage ou leur mise au rebut, veuillez utiliser les systmes de collecte publique ou renvoyez-

les HP, un partenaire HP agr ou leurs agents. Icne Description Taiwan EPA demande aux fabricants ou aux importateurs de piles, conformment l'Article 15 de la loi relative la mise au rebut (Waste Disposal Act), d'indiquer les mentions de rcupration des piles usages dans des points de vente, brochures ou publicits. Contactez une entreprise de recyclage qualifie pour la mise au rebut approprie de la pile. Avis sur le niveau du volume du casque et des couteurs AVERTISSEMENT !

volumes levs pendant des priodes prolonges. Pour viter les dommages causs votre systme auditif, n'coutez pas des Conditions d'installation 33 Scurit des lasers Pour les produits quips d'units optiques ou d'metteurs fibre optique. Ce produit peut tre quip d'un priphrique de stockage optique (c'est--dire un lecteur CD ou DVD) et/ou d'un metteur-rcepteur fibre optique. Ces lments comportent des lasers classs dans la catgorie des produits laser de classe 1, conformment la norme IEC/EN 60825-1, et sont conformes ses exigences. Chacun de ces produits laser est conforme aux rgulations 21 CFR 1040.10 et 1040.11 de la US FDA ou est conforme ces normes l'exception des diffrences conformment la notice des lasers No. 50, du 24 Juin 2007. L'utilisation de mthodes de contrle ou de rglage ou de procdures, autres que celles AVERTISSEMENT !

indiques dans ce document ou dans le manuel d'installation des appareils rayon laser, peut exposer l'utilisateur des radiations dangereuses. Pour rduire le risque d'exposition un rayonnement dangereux :

N'essayez pas d'ouvrir le botier du module. Il ne contient pas de composant rparable par l'utilisateur. N'effectuez pas de commandes, de rglages ou d'oprations sur l'appareil laser, en dehors de ce qui est indiqu dans le prsent manuel. Seuls les techniciens agrs HP sont autoriss rparer l'unit. Exigences relatives au bloc d'alimentation et au cordon d'alimentation Exigences relatives la mise la terre des alimentations de classe 1 Pour tre protg contre les courants de dfaut, l'quipement doit tre raccord une borne de terre. Branchez le cordon d'alimentation sur une prise secteur disposant d'une mise la terre raccorde la terre. Les cordons d'alimentation de remplacement ne fournissent pas une protection adquate contre les dfauts. Utilisez exclusivement le cordon d'alimentation fourni avec ce produit ou un cordon de remplacement agr par Hewlett-Packard. Avis pour le Brsil Este equipamento deve ser conectado obrigatoriamente em tomada de rede de energia eltrica que possua aterramento (trs pinos), conforme a norma nbr abnt 5410,visando a segurana dos usurios contra choques eltricos. Danemark Apparatets stikprop skal tilsluttes en stikkontakt med jord, som giver forbindelse til stikproppens jord. Finlande Norvge Sude Laite on liitettv suojakoskettimilla varustettuun pistorasiaan. Apparatet m tilkoples jordet stikkontakt. Apparaten skall anslutas till jordat uttag. 34 Chapitre 4 Avis de scurit pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail personnelles Exigences relatives au bloc d'alimentation Les alimentations sur certains produits sont quipes de commutateurs de tension externes. La fonction de slection de tension sur le produit autorise son fonctionnement sous toute tension comprise entre 100-127 ou 200-240 volts secteur. Les alimentations sur les produits dpourvus de commutateurs de tension externes sont quipes de circuits internes qui dtectent la tension d'entre et basculent automatiquement sur la tension approprie. Pour des raisons de scurit, n'utilisez que l'adaptateur secteur fourni avec l'quipement ou un adaptateur de remplacement autoris par Hewlett-Packard. Les rfrences de remplacement sont disponibles l'adresse http://www.hp.com/cgi-bin/hpsupport/index.pl. Pour une utilisation en Norvge Ce produit est galement conu pour un systme lectrique informatique avec tension phase-phase de 230 V. Exigences relatives au cordon d'alimentation Le cordon d'alimentation fourni avec le produit est conforme aux rglementations en vigueur dans le pays o le matriel a t achet l'origine. N'utilisez que le cordon d'alimentation fourni avec l'quipement ou un cordon d'alimentation de remplacement de Hewlett-Packard ou d'une source HP agre. Les rfrences de remplacement sont disponibles l'adresse http://www.hp.com/cgi-bin/hpsupport/index.pl. Les cordons d'alimentation destins tre utiliss dans d'autres pays doivent respecter les normes du pays o vous utilisez le produit. Pour plus d'informations sur les exigences de cordon d'alimentation, contactez votre revendeur, votre mainteneur ou votre fournisseur de services agr HP. AVERTISSEMENT ! N'utilisez pas de cordons d'alimentation d'autres produits. Un mauvais cordon d'alimentation peut entraner un risque de dcharge lectrique ou d'incendie. Les exigences prsentes ci-aprs s'appliquent tous les pays. 1. 2. Le cordon d'alimentation doit tre homologu par une agence accrdite, responsable de l'valuation dans le pays o le cordon sera install. La longueur du cordon doit tre comprise entre 1,8 m (6 pieds) et 3,6 m (12 pieds). Pour un cordon d'alimentation de 2 m (6,56 pieds) ou moins, le diamtre du cordon doit tre d'au minimum 0,75 mm2 ou 18 AWG. Si le cordon d'alimentation dpasse 2 m (6,56 pieds), le diamtre du cordon doit tre d'au minimum 1 mm2 ou 16 AWG. Le cordon d'alimentation doit tre branch un endroit dgag o il ne risque pas d'tre pitin ou coinc par des objets. Accordez une attention particulire la fiche, la prise murale et l'endroit o le cordon sort du botier de l'appareil. AVERTISSEMENT ! N'utilisez pas ce produit avec un cordon d'alimentation endommag. Si le cordon d'alimentation est endommag de quelque manire que ce soit, remplacez-le immdiatement. Un cordon endommag peut entraner des risques de blessure. Spcifications du cordon d'alimentation pour le Japon Pour une utilisation au Japon, utilisez uniquement le cordon d'alimentation fourni avec l'appareil. ATTENTION : N'utilisez pas le cordon d'alimentation fourni avec ce produit pour alimenter d'autres appareils. Exigences relatives au bloc d'alimentation et au cordon d'alimentation 35 Risque de pincement AVERTISSEMENT ! Observez les zones risque de pincement. N'approchez pas vos doigts des pices se refermant. Protection des connecteurs de l'antenne TV Mise la terre d'une antenne de tlvision externe Si une antenne externe ou un systme par cble est connect(e) ce produit, assurez-vous que l'antenne ou le systme par cble est mis(e) la terre lectriquement de faon vous protger contre les surtensions et les accumulations d'lectricit statique. L'article 810 du code lectrique national (ANSI/NFPA 70) fournit des informations sur la mise la terre de la monture et de la structure portante, la mise la terre du fil d'entre vers un dispositif de dcharge de l'antenne, la taille des conducteurs de mise la terre, l'emplacement du dispositif de dcharge de l'antenne, la connexion aux lectrodes de terre et les exigences relatives aux lectrodes de terre. Protection contre la foudre Pour mieux protger votre produit durant un orage ou lorsqu'il reste inutilis et sans surveillance pendant une priode prolonge, dbranchez le cble de raccordement lectrique, puis l'antenne ou le systme par cble. Vous viterez ainsi que la foudre ou des surtensions n'endommagent le produit. Tableau 4-1 Mise la terre de l'antenne Rfrence Composant de mise la terre 1 2 3 4 5 Compteur lectrique extrieur Systme d'lectrode de mise terre du compteur lectrique (code lectrique national, article 250, partie III) Colliers de mise la terre Conducteurs de mise la terre (code lectrique national, section 810.21) Dispositif de dcharge de l'antenne (code lectrique national, section 810.20) 36 Chapitre 4 Avis de scurit pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail personnelles Tableau 4-1 Mise la terre de l'antenne (suite) Rfrence Composant de mise la terre 6 7 Collier de mise la terre Fil d'entre de l'antenne Remarque destine aux installateurs de systmes de tlvision par cble Ce rappel a pour but d'attirer l'attention des installateurs de systmes de tlvision par cble sur la section 820.93 du code lectrique national, qui fournit des directives pour la mise la terre et spcifie notamment que le blindage du cble coaxial doit tre connect au systme de mise la terre du btiment, aussi prs que possible du point d'entre du cble. Avis de scurit pour la Chine Chine : avis sur l'altitude Avis sur l'altitude pour les produits dont l'utilisation n'est pas certifie au-del de 5 000 m d'altitude Avis de scurit pour la Chine 37 Icne Description Chine : avis sur une utilisation dans des conditions tropicales Avis pour les produits dont l'utilisation n'est pas certifie dans des conditions tropicales Icne Description Avis d'acoustique pour l'Allemagne Le niveau de pression acoustique (LpA) est nettement en dessous de 70 dB(A) (position oprateur, fonctionnement normal, selon ISO 7779). Les donnes d'mission de bruit acoustique sont disponibles dans les dclarations IT ECO relatives au produit, l'adresse : http://www.hp.com/go/ted Schalldruckpegel (LpA) ist weit unterhalb 70 dB(A) (Benutzerposition, normaler Betrieb, nach ISO 7779) Die Schallemissionswerte der Produkte knnen in den produktbezogenen IT ECO Declarations auf folgender Internet Adresse gefunden werden: http://www.hp.com/go/ted Avis de la BSMI pour Tawan 38 Chapitre 4 Avis de scurit pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail personnelles 5 Avis sur les conditions d'utilisation pour les ordinateurs portables Ce chapitre prsente des avis relatifs l'environnement des diffrents pays ou rgions et des informations de conformit. Certains de ces avis ne s'appliquent peut-tre pas votre produit. Recyclage du matriel lectronique, de l'emballage et de la batterie HP encourage ses clients recycler le matriel lectronique usag, l'emballage des cartouches dimpression dorigine HP et les piles rechargeables. Pour plus d'informations sur les programmes de recyclage, rendez-

vous sur http://www.hp.com/recycle. Pour plus d'informations sur le recyclage du produit au Japon, reportez-vous au site http://www.hp.com/jp/

hardwarerecycle/. Mise au rebut des quipements par les utilisateurs Ce symbole indique que vous ne devez pas jeter votre produit avec les dchets mnagers. Il est de votre responsabilit de protger la sant et l'environnement et d'liminer votre quipement en le remettant une dchetterie effectuant le recyclage des quipements lectriques et lectroniques. Pour plus d'informations, prenez contact avec votre service d'limination des ordures mnagres ou ouvrez la page http://www.hp.com/recycle. Mise au rebut des batteries alcalines au Brsil Icne Description Este produto eletroeletrnico e seus componentes no devem ser descartados no lixo comum, pois embora estejam em conformidade com padres mundiais de restrio a substncias nocivas, podem conter, ainda que em quantidades mnimas, substncias impactantes ao meio ambiente. Ao final da vida til deste produto, o usurio dever entreg-lo HP. A no observncia dessa orientao sujeitar o infrator s sanes previstas em lei. Aps o uso, as pilhas e/ou baterias dos produtos HP devero ser entregues ao estabelecimento comercial ou rede de assistncia tcnica autorizada pela HP. Para maiores informaes, inclusive sobre os pontos de recebimento, acesse: http://www.hp.com.br/reciclar No descarte o produto eletrnico em lixo comum Recyclage du matriel lectronique, de l'emballage et de la batterie 39 Informations sur le recyclage du matriel au Brsil Icne Description Este produto eletroeletrnico e seus componentes no devem ser descartados no lixo comum, pois embora estejam em conformidade com padres mundiais de restrio a substncias nocivas, podem conter, ainda que em quantidades mnimas, substncias impactantes ao meio ambiente. Ao final da vida til deste produto, o usurio dever entreg-lo HP. A no observncia dessa orientao sujeitar o infrator s sanes previstas em lei. Aps o uso, as pilhas e/ou baterias dos produtos HP devero ser entregues ao estabelecimento comercial ou rede de assistncia tcnica autorizada pela HP. Para maiores informaes, inclusive sobre os pontos de recebimento, acesse: http://www.hp.com.br/reciclar No descarte o produto eletrnico em lixo comum Certification ENERGY STAR (certains modles) ENERGY STAR est un programme de l'agence de protection environnementale des tats-Unis qui aide les entreprises et les personnes conomiser de l'argent et protger le climat par le biais de l'utilisation de produits prsentant une efficacit nergtique suprieure. Les produits certifis ENERGY STAR limitent les missions de gaz effet de serre en rpondant aux critres d'efficacit nergtique stricts dicts par l'Agence de protection environnementale des tats-Unis. En tant que partenaire ENERGY STAR, HP a suivi le processus avanc de certification des produits de l'EPA pour s'assurer que les produits portant le logo ENERGY STAR respectaient les rglementations ENERGY STAR. Le logo suivant apparat sur tous les ordinateurs respectant les spcifications ENERGY STAR :

Une exigence cl du programme ENERGY STAR pour les produits informatiques rside dans l'inclusion de fonctions de gestion de l'alimentation permettant de rduire sensiblement la consommation d'nergie lorsque le produit n'est pas utilis. La gestion de l'alimentation permet un ordinateur de passer automatiquement dans un mode basse consommation veille ou tout autre mode basse consommation, aprs une priode dfinie d'inactivit. Les fonctions de gestion de l'alimentation ont t prdfinies comme suit lorsque l'ordinateur fonctionne sur secteur :

Type d'ordinateur Dlai d'activation du mode veille de l'cran Dlai d'activation du mode veille de l'ordinateur (en minutes) Sortie du mode veille Notebooks, stations de travail mobiles

<= 15 minutes (selon le modle)

<= 30 minutes (selon le modle) Le produit quitte le mode veille lorsque vous appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation/veille. Si le Wake on Lan (WOL) est activ, le systme peut sortir du mode veille en rponse un signal rseau. Tablettes

<= 1 minute Non applicable Non applicable Pour les ordinateurs prenant en charge un profil d'utilisation toujours sous tension, toujours connect o l'accs Internet reste actif (par exemple sur les tablettes), des modes d'alimentation basse consommation alternatifs, comme les modes d'inactivit courte ou d'inactivit prolonge (tels que dfinis dans les exigences du programme ENERGY STAR pour les ordinateurs) sont fournis. Ils consomment trs peu d'nergie (<=

10 Watts) et le cas chant, optimisent l'autonomie du produit. Ces modes alternatifs sont dynamiques. Le mode veille de l'cran est activ aprs 1 minute d'inactivit de l'utilisateur. 40 Chapitre 5 Avis sur les conditions d'utilisation pour les ordinateurs portables L'ordinateur quitte le mode veille lorsque vous appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation/veille. Lorsque la fonction Wake On LAN (WOL) est active, l'ordinateur peut galement quitter le mode veille en rponse un signal rseau. Plus d'informations sur les conomies nergtiques et financires potentielles lies aux fonctions de gestion de l'alimentation sont prsentes sur le site Web de gestion de l'alimentation ENERGY STAR de l'EPA l'adresse http://www.energystar.gov/powermanagement. Plus d'informations sur le programme ENERGY STAR et ses avantages pour l'environnement sont disponibles sur le site Web ENERGY STAR de l'EPA l'adresse http://www.energystar.gov. ENERGY STAR et le label ENERGY STAR sont des marques dposes dtenues par l'Agence de protection environnementale des tats-Unis. Substances chimiques HP s'engage fournir ses clients des informations sur les substances chimiques contenues dans ses produits conformment aux dispositions lgales telles que REACH (rglement CE numro 1907/2006 du Parlement europen et du Conseil). Un rapport d'informations sur la conformit des substances chimiques de ce produit est disponible l'adresse : http://www.hp.com/go/reach. Avis sur l'environnement pour la Chine Substances chimiques 41 tiquette de consommation nergtique des ordinateurs pour la Chine Conformment la rglementation sur la mise en place d'une tiquette de consommation nergtique des micro-ordinateurs pour la Chine (CEL-30), ce micro-ordinateur est quip d'une tiquette d'efficacit nergtique. La classe d'efficacit nergtique (consommation nergtique typique) et la catgorie de produit, prsentes sur l'tiquette, sont dtermines et calcules selon la norme GB28380-2012. 1. Classes d'efficacit nergtique La classe est dtermine par la norme en calculant le niveau de consommation de base et en ajoutant la consommation des lments supplmentaires, tels que la mmoire principale et les cartes graphiques. Quelle que soit la classe, la consommation nergtique typique ne doit pas dpasser la valeur indique dans le tableau suivant :

Type de produit Micro-ordinateur de bureau, tout-en-un Ordinateur portable Consommation nergtique typique (kilowatt-heure) Catgorie A Catgorie B Catgorie C Catgorie D Catgorie A Catgorie B Catgorie C Classe 1 98+Efa 125+Efa 159+Efa 184+Efa 20+Efa 26+Efa 54,5+Efa Classe 2 148+Efa 175+Efa 209+Efa 234+Efa 35+Efa 45+Efa 75,0+Efa Classe 3 198+Efa 225+Efa 259+Efa 284+Efa 45+Efa 65+Efa 123,5+Efa REMARQUE : EFA est la somme du facteur de puissance de fonctions supplmentaires du produit. 2. 3. Consommation nergtique typique Le chiffre de la consommation nergtique indiqu sur l'tiquette correspond aux donnes mesures avec la configuration reprsentative qui couvre toutes les configurations de l'unit d'enregistrement slectionne conformment CEL-30. Par consquent, la consommation nergtique relle de ce micro-

ordinateur spcifique peut ne pas tre identique aux donnes prsentes sur l'tiquette. Catgorie de produit La catgorie de produit est dtermine par la norme selon la configuration du micro-ordinateur. La classification des produits est conforme aux rglementations dans le tableau suivant :

Type de produit Catgorie A Catgorie B Catgorie C Description de la configuration Micro-ordinateur de bureau, tout-en-un Ordinateur portable Micro-ordinateur de bureau et tout-en-un dont la configuration est en dehors du champ d'application de la catgorie B, C et D Ordinateur portable dont la configuration est en dehors du champ d'application de la catgorie B et C 2 curs physiques de processeurs et au moins 2 Go de mmoire systme Processeur graphique distinct Plus de 2 curs physiques de processeurs avec au moins l'une des fonctions suivantes :

1. Au moins 2 Go de mmoire systme Le produit possde au moins 2 curs physiques de processeurs et 2 Go de mmoire systme. Processeur graphique distinct avec 42 Chapitre 5 Avis sur les conditions d'utilisation pour les ordinateurs portables Type de produit Description de la configuration 2. Processeur graphique distinct une largeur de tampon de trame d'au moins 128 bits. Catgorie D Au moins 4 curs physiques de processeurs avec au moins l'une des fonctions suivantes :

1. 2. Au moins 4 Go de mmoire systme Processeur graphique distinct avec une largeur de tampon de trame d'au moins 128 bits Pour plus de dtails sur la spcification, veuillez vous reporter la norme GB28380-2012. tiquette de consommation nergtique des ordinateurs pour la Chine 43 44 Chapitre 5 Avis sur les conditions d'utilisation pour les ordinateurs portables Avis sur la restriction des substances dangereuses pour la Chine

(RoHS) Tableau des substances/composants dangereux et leur contenu Requis par les mthodes de gestion du contrle de la pollution par les produits d'informations lectroniques de Chine Matires dangereuses Nom de la pice Plomb

(Pb) Mercure

(Hg) Cadmium

(Cd) Batterie Cbles Camra Chssis/Autre Lecteur de carte mmoire flash Lecteur de disquette Disque dur Casque I/O PCAs Clavier cran LCD Support (CD/DVD/

disquette) Mmoire Carte mre, processeur, dissipateurs thermiques Souris Unit de disque optique Priphrique d'amarrage en option Adaptateur d'alimentation Source d'alimentation Tlcommande Lecteur de carte Smart Card/Java Haut-parleurs externes X X X X X X X X X X X O X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O Chrome hexavalent

(Cr(VI)) Diphnyles polybroms (PBB) thers diphnyles polybroms (PBDE) O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O Avis sur la restriction des substances dangereuses pour la Chine (RoHS) 45 Matires dangereuses Nom de la pice Tuner TV Unit mmoire flash USB Concentrateur USB Webcam Rcepteur sans fil Cartes sans fil Plomb

(Pb) Mercure

(Hg) Cadmium

(Cd) X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O Chrome hexavalent

(Cr(VI)) Diphnyles polybroms (PBB) thers diphnyles polybroms (PBDE) O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O Ce formulaire a t a prpar conformment aux dispositions de SJ/T 11364. O : Indique que la quantit de la substance dangereuse mentionne respecte les limites requises par GB/T 26572 dans tous les matriaux homognes du composant. X : Indique que la quantit de la substance dangereuse mentionne dpasse les limites requises par GB/T 26572 dans au moins un matriau homogne du composant. Tous les lments du tableau accompagns d'un X sont conformes la norme RoHS de l'Union europenne. REMARQUE :

d'utilisation du produit, telles que la temprature et l'humidit. La dure d'utilisation cologique en anne, en rfrence, a t dtermine sur la base de conditions normales

/

I/O PCA

(LCD) CD/DVD/

(Pb)

(Hg)

(Cd)

(Cr(VI))

(PBB)

(PBDE) X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O 46 Chapitre 5 Avis sur les conditions d'utilisation pour les ordinateurs portables

/Java

() port de chargement USB 3.0, identification USB

(Pb)

(Hg)

(Cd)

(Cr(VI))

(PBB)

(PBDE) X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O SJ/T 11364 O GB/T 26572 X GB/T 26572 X RoHS Avis sur la restriction des substances dangereuses pour l'Inde

(RoHS) Ce produit est en conformit avec le rglement indien 2011 de gestion des dchets lectroniques et interdit l'usage de plomb, de mercure, de chrome hexavalent, de polybromobiphnyles (PBB) ou de polybromobiphnylthers (PBDE) dans des concentrations suprieures 0,1 % en poids et 0,01 % en poids pour le cadmium, l'exception des exemptions mentionnes dans l'annexe 2 du rglement. Informations sur le rglement 1275/2008 de la Commission europenne Pour localiser les donnes sur la consommation lectrique des produits, y compris lorsque le produit est en mode veille en rseau et que tous les ports rseau cbls et les appareils sans fil sont connects, reportez-

Avis sur la restriction des substances dangereuses pour l'Inde (RoHS) 47 vous la section P14 Informations supplmentaires des dclarations IT ECO l'adresse http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/itecodesktop-pc.html. Le cas chant, activez et dsactivez le rseau sans fil en suivant les instructions incluses dans le manuel de l'utilisateur du produit ou du systme d'exploitation. Des informations sont galement disponibles l'adresse http://www.hp.com/support. Dclarations IT ECO Pour les ordinateurs portables, rendez-vous sur http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/

productdata/iteconotebook-o.html. Avis sur la restriction des substances dangereuses pour le Japon

(RoHS) A Japanese regulatory requirement, defined by specification JIS C 0950, 2008, mandates that manufacturers provide Material Content Declarations for certain categories of electronic products offered for sale after July 1, 2006. To view the JIS C 0950 material declaration for this product, visit http://www.hp.com/go/jisc0950. Ce produit a t tiquet conformment la loi du Mexique sur l'utilisation durable de l'nergie exigeant la divulgation de la consommation nergtique en utilisation normale (mode inactif) et en mode veille. Votre produit correspond l'une des nombreuses configurations de cette famille de modle ; la consommation nergtique du mode inactif de votre configuration spcifique peut tre diffrente des informations figurant sur l'tiquette. La consommation nergtique relle de votre produit peut tre suprieure ou infrieure la valeur signale sur l'tiquette de l'nergie du produit au Mexique en raison de facteurs tels que la configuration (composants et modules choisis) et de l'utilisation (tches ralises, logiciels installs et excuts, etc.). Rglementation EEE de la Turquie Avis sur la restriction des substances dangereuses pour l'Ukraine (RoHS) L'quipement est conforme aux exigences relatives aux rglementations techniques, approuves par la rsolution du Cabinet des ministres de l'Ukraine date du 3 dcembre 2008 1057, en termes de restrictions quant l'utilisation de certaines substances dangereuses dans les quipements lectroniques et lectriques. 48 Chapitre 5 Avis sur les conditions d'utilisation pour les ordinateurs portables Matriau compos de perchlorate : une manipulation particulire peut tre ncessaire Voir http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate. La batterie de l'horloge en temps rel ou la pile bouton de ce produit est susceptible de contenir du perchlorate et peut ncessiter une manipulation particulire lors de son recyclage ou de sa mise au rebut en Californie. Matriau compos de perchlorate : une manipulation particulire peut tre ncessaire 49 6 Avis sur les conditions d'utilisation pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail personnelles Ce chapitre prsente des avis relatifs l'environnement des diffrents pays ou rgions et des informations de conformit. Certains de ces avis peuvent ne pas s'appliquer votre produit. Recyclage du matriel lectronique, de l'emballage et de la batterie HP encourage ses clients recycler le matriel lectronique usag, l'emballage des cartouches dimpression dorigine HP et les piles rechargeables. Pour plus d'informations sur les programmes de recyclage, rendez-

vous sur http://www.hp.com/recycle. Pour obtenir des informations concernant le recyclage du produit au Japon, reportez-vous http://www.hp.com/jp/hardwarerecycle/. Mise au rebut des quipements par les utilisateurs Icne Description Ce symbole indique que vous ne devez pas jeter votre produit avec les dchets mnagers. Il est de votre responsabilit de protger la sant et l'environnement et d'liminer votre quipement en le remettant une dchetterie effectuant le recyclage des quipements lectriques et lectroniques. Pour plus d'informations, prenez contact avec votre service d'limination des ordures mnagres ou ouvrez la page http://www.hp.com/

recycle. Mise au rebut des batteries alcalines au Brsil Icne Description Este produto eletroeletrnico e seus componentes no devem ser descartados no lixo comum, pois embora estejam em conformidade com padres mundiais de restrio a substncias nocivas, podem conter, ainda que em quantidades mnimas, substncias impactantes ao meio ambiente. Ao final da vida til deste produto, o usurio dever entreg-lo HP. A no observncia dessa orientao sujeitar o infrator s sanes previstas em lei. Aps o uso, as pilhas e/ou baterias dos produtos HP devero ser entregues ao estabelecimento comercial ou rede de assistncia tcnica autorizada pela HP. Para maiores informaes, inclusive sobre os pontos de recebimento, acesse: http://www.hp.com.br/reciclar No descarte o produto eletrnico em lixo comum 50 Chapitre 6 Avis sur les conditions d'utilisation pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail personnelles Informations sur le recyclage du matriel au Brsil Icne Description Este produto eletroeletrnico e seus componentes no devem ser descartados no lixo comum, pois embora estejam em conformidade com padres mundiais de restrio a substncias nocivas, podem conter, ainda que em quantidades mnimas, substncias impactantes ao meio ambiente. Ao final da vida til deste produto, o usurio dever entreg-lo HP. A no observncia dessa orientao sujeitar o infrator s sanes previstas em lei. Aps o uso, as pilhas e/ou baterias dos produtos HP devero ser entregues ao estabelecimento comercial ou rede de assistncia tcnica autorizada pela HP. Para maiores informaes, inclusive sobre os pontos de recebimento, acesse: http://www.hp.com.br/reciclar No descarte o produto eletrnico em lixo comum Certification ENERGY STAR (certains modles) ENERGY STAR est un programme de l'agence de protection environnementale des tats-Unis qui aide les entreprises et les personnes conomiser de l'argent et protger le climat par le biais de l'utilisation de produits prsentant une efficacit nergtique suprieure. Les produits certifis ENERGY STAR limitent les missions de gaz effet de serre en rpondant aux critres d'efficacit nergtique stricts dicts par l'Agence de protection environnementale des tats-Unis. En tant que partenaire ENERGY STAR, HP a suivi le processus avanc de certification des produits de l'EPA pour s'assurer que les produits portant le logo ENERGY STAR respectaient les rglementations ENERGY STAR. Le logo suivant apparat sur tous les ordinateurs respectant les spcifications ENERGY STAR :

Une exigence cl du programme ENERGY STAR pour les produits informatiques rside dans l'inclusion de fonctions de gestion de l'alimentation permettant de rduire sensiblement la consommation d'nergie lorsque le produit n'est pas utilis. La gestion de l'alimentation permet un ordinateur de passer automatiquement dans un mode basse consommation veille ou tout autre mode basse consommation, aprs une priode dfinie d'inactivit. Les fonctions de gestion de l'alimentation ont t prdfinies comme suit lorsque l'ordinateur fonctionne sur secteur :

Type d'ordinateur Dlai d'activation du mode veille de l'cran Dlai d'activation du mode veille de l'ordinateur (en minutes) Sortie du mode veille Ordinateurs de bureau, ordinateurs de bureau intgrs, stations de travail

<= 15 minutes (selon le modle)

<= 30 minutes (selon le modle) Clients lgers

<= 15 minutes (selon le modle)

<= 30 minutes lorsque le mode veille est pris en charge par le systme d'exploitation (selon le modle) Le produit quitte le mode veille lorsque l'utilisateur interagit avec un priphrique d'entre, y compris la souris ou le clavier. Si le Wake on Lan (WOL) est activ, le systme peut sortir du mode veille en rponse un signal rseau. Si le mode veille est pris en charge par le systme d'exploitation, le produit quitte le mode veille lorsque l'utilisateur interagit avec un priphrique d'entre, y compris la souris ou le clavier. Si le Wake on Lan (WOL) est activ, le systme peut sortir Informations sur le recyclage du matriel au Brsil 51 Type d'ordinateur Dlai d'activation du mode veille de l'cran Dlai d'activation du mode veille de l'ordinateur (en minutes) Sortie du mode veille du mode veille en rponse un signal rseau. L'ordinateur quitte le mode veille lorsque vous appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation/veille. Lorsque la fonction Wake On LAN (WOL) est active, l'ordinateur peut galement quitter le mode veille en rponse un signal rseau. Plus d'informations sur les conomies nergtiques et financires potentielles lies aux fonctions de gestion de l'alimentation sont prsentes sur le site Web de gestion de l'alimentation ENERGY STAR de l'EPA l'adresse http://www.energystar.gov/powermanagement. Plus d'informations sur le programme ENERGY STAR et ses avantages pour l'environnement sont disponibles sur le site Web ENERGY STAR de l'EPA l'adresse http://www.energystar.gov. ENERGY STAR et le label ENERGY STAR sont des marques dposes dtenues par l'Agence de protection environnementale des tats-Unis. Substances chimiques HP s'engage fournir ses clients des informations sur les substances chimiques contenues dans ses produits, conformment aux normes juridiques en vigueur telles que le rglement concernant l'enregistrement, l'valuation et l'autorisation des substances chimiques, ainsi que les restrictions applicables ces substances (REACH, rglement CE N 1907/2006 du Parlement europen et du Conseil). Des informations sur les substances chimiques contenues dans ce produit sont disponibles l'adresse http://www.hp.com/go/reach. Avis sur le mercure Cette dclaration s'applique tous les ordinateurs tout-en-un quips d'crans intgrs qui n'utilisent pas le rtroclairage LED. Ce produit HP peut contenir les matriaux suivants qui requirent un traitement spcial la fin de leur cycle de vie :

Le mercure contenu dans la lampe fluorescente de l'cran cristaux liquides (LCD) Il se peut que l'limination du mercure soit rglemente en raison de considrations environnementales. Pour obtenir des informations sur l'limination et le traitement de cette substance, veuillez contacter les autorits locales concernes ou l'Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA) (http://www.eiae.org). Matriau compos de perchlorate : une manipulation particulire peut tre ncessaire La batterie de l'horloge en temps rel est susceptible de contenir du perchlorate et peut ncessiter une manipulation particulire lors de son recyclage ou de sa mise au rebut en Californie. Reportez-vous au site http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/. 52 Chapitre 6 Avis sur les conditions d'utilisation pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail personnelles Avis sur l'environnement pour la Chine tiquette de consommation nergtique des ordinateurs pour la Chine Conformment la rglementation sur la mise en place d'une tiquette de consommation nergtique des micro-ordinateurs pour la Chine (CEL-30), ce micro-ordinateur est quip d'une tiquette d'efficacit nergtique. La classe d'efficacit nergtique (consommation nergtique typique) et la catgorie de produit, prsentes sur l'tiquette, sont dtermines et calcules selon la norme GB28380-2012. 1. Classes d'efficacit nergtique La classe est dtermine par la norme en calculant le niveau de consommation de base et en ajoutant la consommation des lments supplmentaires, tels que la mmoire principale et les cartes graphiques. Quelle que soit la classe, la consommation nergtique typique ne doit pas dpasser la valeur indique dans le tableau suivant :

Type de produit Micro-ordinateur de bureau, tout-en-un Ordinateur portable Consommation nergtique typique (kilowatt-heure) Catgorie A Catgorie B Catgorie C Catgorie D Catgorie A Catgorie B Classe 1 98+Efa 125+Efa 159+Efa 184+Efa 20+Efa 26+Efa Classe 2 148+Efa 175+Efa 209+Efa 234+Efa 35+Efa 45+Efa Classe 3 198+Efa 225+Efa 259+Efa 284+Efa 45+Efa 65+Efa Avis sur l'environnement pour la Chine 53 Type de produit Consommation nergtique typique (kilowatt-heure) Catgorie C 54,5+Efa 75,0+Efa 123,5+Efa REMARQUE : EFA est la somme du facteur de puissance de fonctions suppmentaires du produit. 2. 3. Consommation nergtique typique Le chiffre de la consommation nergtique indiqu sur l'tiquette correspond aux donnes mesures avec la configuration reprsentative qui couvre toutes les configurations de l'unit d'enregistrement slectionne conformment CEL-30. Par consquent, la consommation nergtique relle de ce micro-

ordinateur spcifique peut ne pas tre identique aux donnes prsentes sur l'tiquette. Catgorie de produit La catgorie de produit est dtermine par la norme selon la configuration du micro-ordinateur. La classification des produits est conforme aux rglementations dans le tableau suivant :

Type de produit Catgorie A Catgorie B Catgorie C Catgorie D Description de la configuration Micro-ordinateur de bureau, tout-en-un Ordinateur portable Micro-ordinateur de bureau et tout-en-un dont la configuration est en dehors du champ d'application de la catgorie B, C et D Ordinateur portable dont la configuration est en dehors du champ d'application de la catgorie B et C 2 curs physiques de processeurs et au moins 2 Go de mmoire systme Processeur graphique distinct Plus de 2 curs physiques de processeurs avec au moins l'une des fonctions suivantes :

1. 2. Au moins 2 Go de mmoire systme Processeur graphique distinct Le produit possde au moins 2 curs physiques de processeurs et 2 Go de mmoire systme. Processeur graphique distinct avec une largeur de tampon de trame d'au moins 128 bits. Au moins 4 curs physiques de processeurs avec au moins l'une des fonctions suivantes :

1. 2. Au moins 4 Go de mmoire systme Processeur graphique distinct avec une largeur de tampon de trame d'au moins 128 bits Pour plus de dtails sur la spcification, veuillez vous reporter la norme GB28380-2012. 54 Chapitre 6 Avis sur les conditions d'utilisation pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail personnelles tiquette de consommation nergtique des ordinateurs pour la Chine 55 Restriction d'utilisation de substances dangereuses pour la Chine (ROHS) Tableau des substances/composants dangereux et leur contenu Requis par les mthodes de gestion du contrle de la pollution par les produits d'informations lectroniques de Chine Matires dangereuses Nom de la pice Plomb

(Pb) Mercure

(Hg) Cadmium

(Cd) Batterie Cbles Camra Chssis/Autre Lecteur de carte mmoire flash Lecteur de disquette Disque dur Casque I/O PCAs Clavier cran LCD Support (CD/DVD/

disquette) Mmoire Carte mre, processeur, dissipateurs thermiques Souris Unit de disque optique Priphrique d'amarrage en option Adaptateur d'alimentation Source d'alimentation Projecteur Tlcommande Lecteur de carte Smart Card/Java X X X X X X X X X X X O X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O Chrome hexavalent

(Cr(VI)) Diphnyles polybroms (PBB) thers diphnyles polybroms (PBDE) O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O 56 Chapitre 6 Avis sur les conditions d'utilisation pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail personnelles Matires dangereuses Nom de la pice Haut-parleurs externes Stylet Tapis tactile Tuner TV Unit mmoire flash USB Concentrateur USB Webcam Rcepteur sans fil Cartes sans fil Plateau de capture 3D/

plaque tournante Plomb

(Pb) Mercure

(Hg) Cadmium

(Cd) X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O Chrome hexavalent

(Cr(VI)) Diphnyles polybroms (PBB) thers diphnyles polybroms (PBDE) O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O Ce formulaire a t a prpar conformment aux dispositions de SJ/T 11364. O : Indique que la quantit de la substance dangereuse mentionne respecte les limites requises par GB/T 26572 dans tous les matriaux homognes du composant. X : Indique que la quantit de la substance dangereuse mentionne dpasse les limites requises par GB/T 26572 dans au moins un matriau homogne du composant. Tous les lments du tableau accompagns d'un X sont conformes la norme RoHS de l'Union europenne. REMARQUE :

d'utilisation du produit, telles que la temprature et l'humidit. La dure d'utilisation cologique en anne, en rfrence, a t dtermine sur la base de conditions normales

/

(Pb)

(Hg)

(Cd)

(Cr(VI))

(PBB)

(PBDE) X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O Restriction d'utilisation de substances dangereuses pour la Chine (ROHS) 57 I/O PCA

(LCD) CD/DVD/

/Java

() port de chargement USB 3.0, identification USB 3D /

(Pb)

(Hg)

(Cd)

(Cr(VI))

(PBB)

(PBDE) X X X O X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X O X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O SJ/T 11364 O GB/T 26572 X GB/T 26572 X RoHS 58 Chapitre 6 Avis sur les conditions d'utilisation pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail personnelles Avis sur la restriction des substances dangereuses pour l'Inde

(RoHS) Ce produit est en conformit avec le rglement indien 2011 de gestion des dchets lectroniques et interdit l'usage de plomb, de mercure, de chrome hexavalent, de polybromobiphnyles (PBB) ou de polybromobiphnylthers (PBDE) dans des concentrations suprieures 0,1 % en poids et 0,01 % en poids pour le cadmium, l'exception des exemptions mentionnes dans l'annexe 2 du rglement. Informations sur le rglement 1275/2008 de la Commission europenne Pour localiser les donnes sur la consommation lectrique des produits, y compris lorsque le produit est en mode veille en rseau et que tous les ports rseau cbls et les appareils sans fil sont connects, reportez-

vous la section P14 Informations supplmentaires des dclarations IT ECO l'adresse http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/itecodesktop-pc.html. Le cas chant, activez et dsactivez le rseau sans fil en suivant les instructions incluses dans le manuel de l'utilisateur du produit ou du systme d'exploitation. Des informations sont galement disponibles l'adresse http://www.hp.com/support. Dclarations IT ECO Ordinateurs de bureau et clients lgers http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/itecodesktop-pc.html?

jumpid=reg_R1002_USEN Stations de travail http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/itecoworkstatio.html Avis sur la restriction des substances dangereuses pour le Japon

(RoHS) A Japanese regulatory requirement, defined by specification JIS C 0950, 2008, mandates that manufacturers provide Material Content Declarations for certain categories of electronic products offered for sale after July 1, 2006. To view the JIS C 0950 material declaration for this product, visit http://www.hp.com/go/jisc0950. Mehiki zakon o uporabi trajnostne energije Ley para el Aprovechamiento Sustentable de la Energa de Mxico Se ha etiquetado este producto en conformidad con la Ley para el Aprovechamiento Sustentable de la Energa de Mxico, que requiere la divulgacin del consumo de energa del modo de uso normal (modo inactivo) y del Avis sur la restriction des substances dangereuses pour l'Inde (RoHS) 59 modo de espera. Su producto es una de las muchas configuraciones de esta familia de modelos; el consumo de energa del modo inactivo de su configuracin especfica puede diferir de la informacin de la etiqueta. El consumo real de energa de su producto puede ser mayor o menor que el valor informado en la etiqueta de energa de producto para Mxico a causa de factores como la configuracin (componentes y mdulos seleccionados) y el uso (tareas que se estn efectuando, software instalado y en ejecucin, etc.). REMARQUE : Esta ley no es aplicable a los workstations. This product has been labeled in compliance with the Mexico Sustainable Energy Use Law requiring disclosure of power consumption in the normal use (idle mode) and standby modes. Your product is one of many configurations in this model family; the idle mode power consumption of your specific configuration may vary from the information on the label. Actual power consumption of your product may be higher or lower than the value reported on the Mexico product energy label due to factors such as configuration (components and modules chosen) and usage (tasks being performed, software installed and running, etc.). REMARQUE : Workstations are not labeled because the law is not applicable to the workstation product category. Rglementation EEE de la Turquie Omejevanje uporabe nekaterih nevarnih snovi (RoHS) za Ukrajino The equipment complies with requirements of the Technical Regulation, approved by the Resolution of Cabinet of Ministry of Ukraine as of December 3, 2008 1057, in terms of restrictions for the use of certain dangerous substances in electrical and electronic equipment. 60 Chapitre 6 Avis sur les conditions d'utilisation pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail personnelles Certification TCO Certified Edge Cette section s'applique uniquement aux produits portant le logo TCO Certified Edge. Certification TCO Certified Edge 61 Index A avis avis sur les appareils sans fil WWAN de Thalande 9 batterie 10, 49, 50 batterie, remplacement par l'utilisateur 29 Brsil 3, 22, 30, 34 Canada 3, 22 clavier 30 cordon d'alimentation pour le Japon 17, 35 cordons d'alimentation 17, 30 Core du Sud 9, 28 environnement 39 Environnement 50 ergonomie 6, 25 Japon 7, 26 Macrovision Corporation 17 matriau compos de perchlorate 49, 52 Mexique 7, 27 mise au rebut des quipements 39, 50 modem 11, 18 niveau du volume du casque et des couteurs 30, 33 restriction d'utilisation de substances dangereuses pour l'Inde 47, 59 restriction d'utilisation de substances dangereuses pour l'Ukraine 48 restriction d'utilisation de substances dangereuses pour la Chine 45, 56 restriction d'utilisation de substances dangereuses pour le Japon 48, 59 scurit des lasers 11, 34 Singapour 8 Tawan 9, 28 Union europenne 4, 25 utilisation en vol 10 voyage 30 62 Index avis, ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail FCC (Federal Communications Commission) 21 avis, ordinateurs portables FCC (Federal Communications Commission) 2 avis, restriction d'utilisation de substances dangereuses pour la Chine 45, 56 avis, restriction d'utilisation de substances dangereuses pour le Japon 48, 59 avis de certification GS 6, 25 avis de restriction d'utilisation de substances dangereuses pour l'Inde 47, 59 avis de restriction d'utilisation de substances dangereuses pour l'Ukraine 48 avis pour l'Union europenne 4, 25 avis pour la Core du Sud 9, 28 avis pour le Brsil 3, 22, 30, 34 avis pour le Canada 3 Avis pour le Canada 22 avis pour le Japon 7, 26 avis pour Macrovision Corporation 17 avis pour Tawan 9, 28 avis relatif au clavier 30 avis relatif aux appareils sans fil pour le Mexique 7, 27 avis sur l'altitude 30, 37 Avis sur l'environnement 50 Avis sur l'environnement pour la Chine 41, 53 avis sur l'ergonomie 6, 25 avis sur la mise au rebut batterie 49, 50 batterie, remplacement par l'utilisateur 10 batterie scelle en usine 10 quipement 39, 50 avis sur la mise au rebut des quipements 39, 50 avis sur la scurit des lasers 11, 34 avis sur le niveau du volume, casque et couteurs 30, 33 avis sur le niveau du volume du casque et des couteurs 30, 33 avis sur les appareils sans fil pour Singapour 8 avis sur les appareils sans fil WWAN de Thalande 9 avis sur les conditions d'utilisation 39 avis sur les cordons d'alimentation 17, 30 avis sur les cordons d'alimentation pour le Japon 17, 35 avis sur les dplacements 30 avis sur les modems 11, 18 Canada 15, 20 Japon 15 Nouvelle-Zlande 16, 20 Systme amricain 13, 14, 19 avis sur les modems pour le Canada 15, 20 avis sur les modems pour le Japon 15 avis sur les modems pour les tats-

Unis 13, 14, 19 avis sur les utilisations en vol 10 avis sur une utilisation dans des conditions tropicales 31, 38 B batterie remplacement par l'utilisateur 29 batterie, avis 10, 49, 50 C Certification ENERGY STAR 40, 51 certification TCO Certified Edge 61 D dclaration sur les modems pour la Nouvelle-Zlande 16, 20 E tiquette de consommation nergtique des ordinateurs pour la Chine 42, 53 tiquettes, conformit 1 P priphriques de rseau local sans fil 22 priphriques LAN sans fil 3, 23 prise en charge vocale 16, 21 F FCC (Federal Communications Commission) R recyclage de la batterie 39, 50 recyclage du matriel lectronique et avis sur les ordinateurs de bureau, de la batterie 39, 50 Rglement 1275/2008 de la Commission europenne 47, 59 T tuner TV, notice de mise la terre des cbles 31 clients lgers et stations de travail 21 avis sur les ordinateurs portables 2 cble des ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail 22 cbles pour ordinateurs portables 2 modifications apportes aux ordinateurs portables 2 modifications des ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail 22 L loi du Mexique sur l'utilisation durable de l'nergie 48 M matriel lectronique et de la batterie, recyclage 39, 50 modifications, ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers, stations de travail FCC (Federal Communications Commission) 22 N notice de mise la terre des cbles 31 O obvestila omejevanje uporabe nekaterih nevarnih snovi za Ukrajino 60 obvestilo o omejevanju uporabe nekaterih nevarnih snovi za Ukrajino 60 ordinateurs portables, modifications FCC (Federal Communications Commission) 2 Index 63

User Guide Product notice Software terms This guide describes features that are common to most products. Some features may not be available on your computer. Not all features are available in all editions or versions of Windows. Systems may require upgraded and/or separately purchased hardware, drivers, software or BIOS update to take full advantage of Windows functionality. See http://www.microsoft.com. To access the latest user guides or manuals for your product, go to http://www.hp.com/

support, and select your country. Select Find your product, and then follow the on-screen instructions. By installing, copying, downloading, or otherwise using any software product preinstalled on this computer, you agree to be bound by the terms of the HP End User License Agreement (EULA). If you do not accept these license terms, your sole remedy is to return the entire unused product (hardware and software) within 14 days for a full refund subject to the refund policy of your seller. For any further information or to request a full refund of the price of the computer, please contact your seller. Copyright 2016 HP Development Company, L.P. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by HP Inc. under license. Intel, Celeron, and Pentium are trademarks of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and other countries. Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. First Edition: April 2016 Document Part Number: 843577-001 Safety warning notice WARNING! To reduce the possibility of heat-related injuries or of overheating the computer, do not place the computer directly on your lap or obstruct the computer air vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, to block airflow. Also, do not allow the AC adapter to come into contact with the skin or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, during operation. The computer and the AC adapter comply with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by the International Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment (IEC 60950-1). iii iv Safety warning notice Processor configuration setting (select products only) IMPORTANT: Select products are configured with an Intel Pentium N35xx/N37xx series or a Celeron N28xx/N29xx/N30xx/N31xx series processor and a Windows operating system. If your computer is configured as described, do not change the processor configuration setting in msconfig.exe from 4 or 2 processors to 1 processor. If you do so, your computer will not restart. You will have to perform a factory reset to restore the original settings. v vi Processor configuration setting (select products only) Table of contents 1 Starting right ................................................................................................................................................ 1 Visit the HP Apps Store .......................................................................................................................................... 1 Best practices ......................................................................................................................................................... 1 More HP resources ................................................................................................................................................. 2 2 Getting to know your computer ...................................................................................................................... 4 Locating hardware ................................................................................................................................................. 4 Locating software .................................................................................................................................................. 4 Right side ............................................................................................................................................................... 5 Left side ................................................................................................................................................................. 7 Display ................................................................................................................................................................. 11 Changing your notebook position (select products only) ................................................................. 13 Changing your notebook to an entertainment stand (select products only) ................................... 14 Changing your notebook to an interactive stand (select products only) ......................................... 15 Changing your notebook to a tablet (select products only) ............................................................. 15 Top ........................................................................................................................................................................ 16 TouchPad ........................................................................................................................................... 16 Lights ................................................................................................................................................. 17 Speakers ............................................................................................................................................ 18 Keys ................................................................................................................................................... 19 Using the action keys ........................................................................................................................ 20 Bottom ................................................................................................................................................................. 21 Labels ................................................................................................................................................................... 22 3 Connecting to a network .............................................................................................................................. 23 Connecting to a wireless network ....................................................................................................................... 23 Using the wireless controls ............................................................................................................... 23 Airplane mode key .......................................................................................................... 23 Operating system controls ............................................................................................. 23 Connecting to a WLAN ....................................................................................................................... 24 Using HP Mobile Broadband (select products only) .......................................................................... 24 Using GPS (select products only) ...................................................................................................... 25 Using Bluetooth wireless devices (select products only) ................................................................. 25 Connecting Bluetooth devices ........................................................................................ 25 Connecting to a wired networkLAN (select products only) ............................................................................. 26 Sharing data and drives and accessing software ................................................................................................ 26 vii 4 Enjoying entertainment features .................................................................................................................. 27 Using a webcam (select products only) ............................................................................................................... 27 Using audio .......................................................................................................................................................... 27 Connecting speakers ......................................................................................................................... 27 Connecting headsets ......................................................................................................................... 27 Using sound settings ......................................................................................................................... 28 Using video .......................................................................................................................................................... 28 Connecting devices using a USB Type-C cable (select products only) .............................................. 29 Connecting video devices using an HDMI cable ................................................................................ 30 Setting up HDMI audio .................................................................................................... 30 Discovering and connecting to Miracast-compatible wireless displays (select products only) ...... 31 Discovering and connecting to Intel WiDi certified displays (select Intel products only) ................ 31 5 Navigating the screen .................................................................................................................................. 32 Using TouchPad and touch screen gestures ........................................................................................................ 32 Tap ..................................................................................................................................................... 32 Two-finger pinch zoom ..................................................................................................................... 33 Two-finger scroll (TouchPad only) .................................................................................................... 33 Two-finger tap (TouchPad only) ........................................................................................................ 33 Four-finger tap (TouchPad only) ....................................................................................................... 34 Three-finger swipe (TouchPad only) ................................................................................................. 34 One-finger slide (touch screen only) ................................................................................................. 34 Using the keyboard and optional mouse ............................................................................................................. 35 Using the on-screen keyboard .......................................................................................................... 35 Using the integrated numeric keypad (select products only) ............................................................................. 35 6 Managing power .......................................................................................................................................... 36 Initiating and exiting Sleep and Hibernation ....................................................................................................... 36 Manually initiating and exiting Sleep ................................................................................................ 37 Manually initiating and exiting Hibernation (select products only) ................................................. 37 Setting password protection on wakeup (exiting Sleep or Hibernation) ......................................... 37 Using the power meter and power settings ........................................................................................................ 38 Running on battery power ................................................................................................................................... 38 Factory-sealed battery ...................................................................................................................... 38 Finding battery information .............................................................................................................. 39 Conserving battery power ................................................................................................................. 39 Identifying low battery levels ........................................................................................................... 39 Resolving a low battery level ............................................................................................................ 40 Resolving a low battery level when external power is available ................................... 40 Resolving a low battery level when no power source is available ................................. 40 viii Resolving a low battery level when the computer cannot exit Hibernation .................. 40 Running on AC power ........................................................................................................................................... 40 Troubleshooting power problems ..................................................................................................... 41 Shutting down (turning off) the computer .......................................................................................................... 41 7 Maintaining your computer .......................................................................................................................... 43 Improving performance ....................................................................................................................................... 43 Using Disk Defragmenter .................................................................................................................. 43 Using Disk Cleanup ............................................................................................................................ 43 Using HP 3D DriveGuard (select products only) ................................................................................ 43 Identifying HP 3D DriveGuard status .............................................................................. 44 Updating programs and drivers .......................................................................................................................... 44 Cleaning your computer ...................................................................................................................................... 44 Cleaning procedures .......................................................................................................................... 44 Cleaning the display ........................................................................................................ 45 Cleaning the sides or cover ............................................................................................. 45 Cleaning the TouchPad, keyboard, or mouse (select products only) ............................. 45 Traveling with or shipping your computer .......................................................................................................... 45 8 Securing your computer and information ....................................................................................................... 47 Using passwords .................................................................................................................................................. 47 Setting Windows passwords ............................................................................................................. 47 Setting Setup Utility (BIOS) passwords ............................................................................................. 48 Using Windows Hello (select products only) ....................................................................................................... 48 Using Internet security software ......................................................................................................................... 48 Using antivirus software ................................................................................................................... 49 Using firewall software ..................................................................................................................... 49 Installing software updates ................................................................................................................................. 49 Using HP Touchpoint Manager (select products only) ........................................................................................ 50 Securing your wireless network .......................................................................................................................... 50 Backing up your software applications and information .................................................................................... 50 Using an optional security cable (select products only) ..................................................................................... 50 9 Using Setup Utility (BIOS) ............................................................................................................................. 51 Starting Setup Utility (BIOS) ................................................................................................................................ 51 Updating Setup Utility (BIOS) .............................................................................................................................. 51 Determining the BIOS version ........................................................................................................... 51 Downloading a BIOS update .............................................................................................................. 52 ix 10 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) ..................................................................................................... 53 Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) to a USB device .................................................................... 53 11 Backing up, restoring, and recovering .......................................................................................................... 55 Creating recovery media and backups ................................................................................................................ 55 Creating HP Recovery media (select products only) ......................................................................... 55 Using Windows tools ........................................................................................................................................... 56 Restore and recovery ........................................................................................................................................... 57 Recovering using HP Recovery Manager ........................................................................................... 57 What you need to know before you get started ............................................................. 57 Using the HP Recovery partition (select products only) ................................................. 58 Using HP Recovery media to recover .............................................................................. 58 Changing the computer boot order ................................................................................ 59 Removing the HP Recovery partition (select products only) ......................................... 60 12 Specifications ............................................................................................................................................ 61 Input power .......................................................................................................................................................... 61 Operating environment ....................................................................................................................................... 61 13 Electrostatic Discharge .............................................................................................................................. 63 14 Accessibility .............................................................................................................................................. 64 Supported assistive technologies ....................................................................................................................... 64 Contacting support .............................................................................................................................................. 64 Index ............................................................................................................................................................. 65 x 1 Starting right This computer is a powerful tool designed to enhance your work and entertainment. Read this chapter to learn about best practices after you set up your computer, fun things to do with your computer, and where to find additional HP resources. Visit the HP Apps Store The HP Apps Store offers a wide choice of popular games, entertainment and music apps, productivity apps, and apps exclusive to HP that you can download to the desktop. The selection is updated regularly and includes regional content and country-specific offers. Be sure to check the HP Apps Store frequently for new and updated features. IMPORTANT: You must be connected to the Internet to access the HP Apps Store. To view and download an app:

1. Select the Start button, and then select the Store app. or Select the Store icon next to the taskbar search box. Select the app you want to download, and then follow the on-screen instructions. When the download is complete, the app appears on the All apps screen. 2. Best practices After you set up and register the computer, we recommend the following steps to get the most out of your smart investment:

Back up your hard drive by creating recovery media. See Backing up, restoring, and recovering on page 55. If you havent already done so, connect to a wired or wireless network. See details in Connecting to a network on page 23. Become familiar with the computer hardware and software. For more information, see Getting to know your computer on page 4 and Enjoying entertainment features on page 27. Update or purchase antivirus software. See Using antivirus software on page 49. Visit the HP Apps Store 1 More HP resources To locate resources that provide product details, how-to information, and more, use this table. Contents Overview of computer setup and features Online chat with an HP technician Support telephone numbers HP service center locations Proper workstation setup Guidelines for posture and work habits that increase your comfort and decrease your risk of injury Electrical and mechanical safety information Important regulatory notices, including information about proper battery disposal, if needed. Resource Setup Instructions HP support For HP support, go to http://www.hp.com/support. Safety & Comfort Guide To access this guide:

Select the Start button, select All apps, select HP Help and Support, and then select HP Documentation. or Select the Start button, select All apps, select HP, and then select HP Documentation. or Type support in the taskbar search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. Select My PC, select the Specifications tab, and then select User Guides. or Click the question mark icon in the taskbar. Select My PC, select the Specifications tab, and then select User Guides. or Go to http://www.hp.com/ergo. IMPORTANT: You must be connected to the Internet to access the latest version of the user guide. Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices To access this document:

Select the Start button, select All apps, select HP Help and Support, and then select HP Documentation. or Select the Start button, select All apps, select HP, and then select HP Documentation. or Type support in the taskbar search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. Select My PC, select the Specifications tab, and then select User Guides. or 2 Chapter 1 Starting right Resource Contents Click the question mark icon in the taskbar. Select My PC, select the Specifications tab, and then select User Guides. Limited Warranty*

Specific warranty information about this computer To access this document:

Select the Start button, select All apps, select HP Help and Support, and then select HP Documentation. or Select the Start button, select All apps, select HP, and then select HP Documentation. or Type support in the taskbar search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. Select My PC, select the Specifications tab, and then select User Guides. or Click the question mark icon in the taskbar. Select My PC, select the Specifications tab, and then select User Guides. or Go to http://www.hp.com/go/orderdocuments. IMPORTANT: You must be connected to the Internet to access the latest version of the user guide.

*You can find your HP Limited Warranty located with the user guides on your product and/or on the CD or DVD provided in the box. In some countries or regions, HP may provide a printed warranty in the box. For countries or regions where the warranty is not provided in printed format, you can request a copy from http://www.hp.com/go/orderdocuments. For products purchased in Asia Pacific, you can write to HP at POD, PO Box 161, Kitchener Road Post Office, Singapore 912006. Include your product name, and your name, phone number, and postal address. More HP resources 3 2 Getting to know your computer Locating hardware To find out what hardware is installed on your computer:

Type device manager in the taskbar search box, and then select the Device Manager app. A list displays all the devices installed on your computer. For information about system hardware components and the system BIOS version number, press fn+esc

(select products only). Locating software To find out what software is installed on your computer:

Select the Start button, and then select All apps. or Right-click the Start button, and then select Programs and Features. 4 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer Right side NOTE: Refer to the illustration that most closely matches your computer. Component Description

(1) Memory card reader Reads optional memory cards that enable you to store, manage, share, or access information. To insert a card:

1. 2. Hold the card label-side up, with connectors facing the computer. Insert the card into the memory card reader, and then press in on the card until it is firmly seated. To remove a card:

Press in on the card, and then remove it from the memory card reader. USB Type-C port Connects an optional USB device with a Type-C connector.

(2)

(3) USB 3.0 charging (powered) port

(4) HDMI port

(5) AC adapter and battery light Connects an optional USB device, such as a keyboard, mouse, external drive, printer, scanner, or USB hub. Standard USB ports will not charge all USB devices or will charge using a low current. Some USB devices require power and require you to use a powered port. NOTE: USB charging ports can also charge select models of cell phones and MP3 players, even when the computer is off. Connects an optional video or audio device, such as a high-

definition television, any compatible digital or audio component, or a high-speed High-Definition Multimedia Interface (HDMI) device. White: The AC adapter is connected and the battery is fully charged. Blinking white: The AC adapter is disconnected and the battery has reached a low battery level. Amber: The AC adapter is connected and the battery is charging. Off: The battery is not charging.

(6) Power connector Connects an AC adapter. Right side 5 Component Description

(1) Memory card reader

(2)

(3) USB 3.0 ports (2) HDMI port

(4) AC adapter and battery light Reads optional memory cards that enable you to store, manage, share, or access information. To insert a card:

1. 2. Hold the card label-side up, with connectors facing the computer. Insert the card into the memory card reader, and then press in on the card until it is firmly seated. To remove a card:

Press in on the card, and then remove it from the memory card reader. Connect optional USB devices, such as a keyboard, mouse, external drive, printer, scanner or USB hub. Connects an optional video or audio device, such as a high-

definition television, any compatible digital or audio component, or a high-speed High-Definition Multimedia Interface (HDMI) device. White: The AC adapter is connected and the battery is fully charged. Blinking white: The AC adapter is disconnected and the battery has reached a low battery level. Amber: The AC adapter is connected and the battery is charging. Off: The battery is not charging.

(5) Power connector Connects an AC adapter. 6 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer Left side NOTE: Refer to the illustration that most closely matches your computer. Component

(1) Power button

(2) Power light Description When the computer is off, press the button to turn on the computer. When the computer is on, press the button briefly to initiate Sleep. When the computer is in the Sleep state, press the button briefly to exit Sleep. When the computer is in Hibernation, press the button briefly to exit Hibernation. CAUTION: Pressing and holding down the power button results in the loss of unsaved information. If the computer has stopped responding and shutdown procedures are ineffective, press and hold the power button down for at least 5 seconds to turn off the computer. To learn more about your power settings, see your power options. Type power in the taskbar search box, and then select Power and sleep settings. or Right-click the Start button, and then select Power Options. On: The computer is on. Blinking: The computer is in the Sleep state, a power-

saving state. The computer shuts off power to the display and other unneeded components. Off: The computer is off or in Hibernation. Hibernation is a power-saving state that uses the least amount of power.

(3)

(4) Security cable slot Attaches an optional security cable to the computer. USB 3.0 port NOTE: The security cable is designed to act as a deterrent, but it may not prevent the computer from being mishandled or stolen. Connects an optional USB device, such as a keyboard, mouse, external drive, printer, scanner or USB hub. Left side 7 Component

(5) Audio-out (headphone)/Audio-in (microphone) combo jack Description Connects optional powered stereo speakers, headphones, earbuds, a headset, or a television audio cable. Also connects an optional headset microphone. This jack does not support optional standalone microphones. WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, adjust the volume before putting on headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, refer to the Regulatory, Safety, and Environmental Notices. To access this guide:

Select the Start button, select All apps, select HP Help and Support, and then select HP Documentation. NOTE: When a device is connected to the jack, the computer speakers are disabled.

(6) Volume button Control speaker volume on the computer.

(7) Drive light 1. 2. To increase speaker volume, press the back edge of the button. To decrease speaker volume, press the front edge of the button. Blinking white: The hard drive is being accessed. Amber: HP 3D DriveGuard has temporarily parked the hard drive. For information about HP 3D DriveGuard, see NOTE:

Using HP 3D DriveGuard (select products only) on page 43. NOTE: On select products, the drive light will always remain off. Component

(1) Power button Description When the computer is off, press the button to turn on the computer. When the computer is on, press the button briefly to initiate Sleep. When the computer is in the Sleep state, press the button briefly to exit Sleep. When the computer is in Hibernation, press the button briefly to exit Hibernation. 8 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer Component Description CAUTION: Pressing and holding down the power button results in the loss of unsaved information. If the computer has stopped responding and shutdown procedures are ineffective, press and hold the power button down for at least 5 seconds to turn off the computer. To learn more about your power settings, see your power options. Type power in the taskbar search box, and then select Power and sleep settings. or Right-click the Start button, and then select Power Options. On: The computer is on. Blinking: The computer is in the Sleep state, a power-

saving state. The computer shuts off power to the display and other unneeded components. Off: The computer is off or in Hibernation. Hibernation is a power-saving state that uses the least amount of power.

(2) Power light

(3)

(4)

(5) Security cable slot Attaches an optional security cable to the computer. USB 2.0 port Audio-out (headphone)/Audio-in (microphone) combo jack NOTE: The security cable is designed to act as a deterrent, but it may not prevent the computer from being mishandled or stolen. Connects an optional USB device, such as a keyboard, mouse, external drive, printer, scanner, or USB hub. Connects optional powered stereo speakers, headphones, earbuds, a headset, or a television audio cable. Also connects an optional headset microphone. This jack does not support optional standalone microphones. WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, adjust the volume before putting on headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, refer to the Regulatory, Safety, and Environmental Notices. To access this guide:

Select the Start button, select All apps, select HP Help and Support, and then select HP Documentation. NOTE: When a device is connected to the jack, the computer speakers are disabled.

(6) Volume button Control speaker volume on the computer.

(7) Drive light 1. 2. To increase speaker volume, press the back edge of the button. To decrease speaker volume, press the front edge of the button. Blinking white: The hard drive is being accessed. Amber: HP 3D DriveGuard has temporarily parked the hard drive. Left side 9 Component Description For information about HP 3D DriveGuard, see NOTE:

Using HP 3D DriveGuard (select products only) on page 43. NOTE: On select products, the drive light will always remain off. 10 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer Display NOTE: Refer to the illustration that most closely matches your computer. Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) WLAN antennas*

Internal microphones Webcam light Webcam Send and receive wireless signals to communicate with wireless local area networks (WLANs). Record sound. On: The webcam is in use. Records video and captures photographs. Some products allow you to video conference and chat online using streaming video. To use a webcam (integrated camera):

Type camera in the taskbar search box, and then select Camera.

*The antennas are not visible from the outside of the computer, and the antenna location may vary.For optimal transmission, keep the areas immediately around the antennas free from obstructions. For wireless regulatory notices, see the section of the Regulatory, Safety, and Environmental Notices that applies to your country or region. To access this guide:

Select the Start button, select All apps, select HP Help and Support, and then select HP Documentation. Display 11 Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5) WLAN antennas*

Send and receive wireless signals to communicate with wireless local area networks (WLANs). Infrared camera lights (2) (select products only) On: The infrared camera is in use. Internal microphones Webcam light Webcam Record sound. On: The webcam is in use. Records video and captures photographs. Some products allow you to video conference and chat online using streaming video. To use a webcam (integrated camera):

Type camera in the taskbar search box, and then select Camera.

(6) Infrared camera (select products only) Allows a facial recognition logon to Windows, instead of a password. For more information, see Using Windows Hello (select products only) on page 48.

*The antennas are not visible from the outside of the computer, and the antenna location may vary.For optimal transmission, keep the areas immediately around the antennas free from obstructions. For wireless regulatory notices, see the section of the Regulatory, Safety, and Environmental Notices that applies to your country or region. To access this guide:

Select the Start button, select All apps, select HP Help and Support, and then select HP Documentation. 12 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer Changing your notebook position (select products only) Your computer can function as a classic notebook, and in addition, the display can be rotated so that the computer transforms into an entertainment stand, an interactive stand, or a tablet. NOTE: The TouchPad and keyboard functions are locked during the entertainment and tablet modes. Display 13 Changing your notebook to an entertainment stand (select products only) To change your notebook to an entertainment stand, raise the display, and then rotate the display backward to a stand position (about 315 degrees). 14 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer Changing your notebook to an interactive stand (select products only) To change your notebook to an interactive stand, raise the display, and then rotate the display backward to a stand position (about 315 degrees). Position the notebook on its edges. Changing your notebook to a tablet (select products only) To change your notebook to a tablet, raise the display, and then rotate the display backward until it is flush with the computer bottom (360 degrees). NOTE: When the computer is in tablet mode, you can use the on-screen keyboard. See Using the on-screen keyboard on page 35. Display 15 Top TouchPad Component

(1)

(2)

(3) TouchPad zone Description Reads your finger gestures to move the pointer or activate items on the screen. For more information, see Using TouchPad and touch NOTE:

screen gestures on page 32. Left TouchPad button Right TouchPad button Functions like the left button on an external mouse. Functions like the right button on an external mouse. 16 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer Lights NOTE: Your computer may look slightly different from the illustration below. Component Description

(1)

(2) Caps lock light Mute light On: Caps lock is on, which switches the key input to all capital letters. Amber: Computer sound is off. Off: Computer sound is on. Top 17 Speakers NOTE: Your computer may look slightly different from the illustration below. Component Speakers Description Produce sound. 18 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer Keys NOTE: Your computer may look slightly different from the illustration below. Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6) esc key fn key Displays system information when pressed in combination with the fn key. Displays system information when pressed in combination with the esc key. Windows key Opens the Start menu. NOTE: Pressing the Windows key again will close the Start menu. Action keys Execute frequently used system functions. num lock key (select products only) NOTE: On select products, the f5 action key turns the keyboard backlight feature off or on. Alternates between the navigational and numeric functions on the integrated numeric keypad. Integrated numeric keypad (select products only) When num lock is on, the keypad can be used like an external numeric keypad. Top 19 Using the action keys An action key performs an assigned function. The icon on each action key illustrates the function for that key. To use an action key, press and hold the key. Icon Description Decreases the screen brightness incrementally as long as you hold down the key. Increases the screen brightness incrementally as long as you hold down the key. Switches the screen image between display devices connected to the system. For example, if a monitor is connected to the computer, repeatedly pressing this key alternates the screen image from the computer display to the monitor display to a simultaneous display on both the computer and the monitor. On select products, turns the keyboard backlight off or on. NOTE: To conserve battery power, turn off this feature. Plays the previous track of an audio CD or the previous section of a DVD or a Blu-ray Disc (BD). Starts, pauses, or resumes playback of an audio CD, a DVD, or a BD. Plays the next track of an audio CD or the next section of a DVD or a BD. Decreases speaker volume incrementally while you hold down the key. Increases speaker volume incrementally while you hold down the key. Mutes or restores speaker sound. Turns the airplane mode and wireless feature on or off. NOTE: The airplane mode key is also referred to as the wireless button. NOTE: A wireless network must be set up before a wireless connection is possible. 20 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer Bottom NOTE: Refer to the illustration that most closely matches your computer. Component Vents (2) Description Enable airflow to cool internal components. NOTE: The computer fan starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation. Component Vents (3) Description Enable airflow to cool internal components. NOTE: The computer fan starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation. Bottom 21 Labels The labels affixed to the computer provide information you may need when you troubleshoot system problems or travel internationally with the computer. IMPORTANT: Check the following locations for the labels described in this section: the bottom of the computer, inside the battery bay, under the service door, or on the back of the display. Service labelProvides important information to identify your computer. When contacting support, you will probably be asked for the serial number, and possibly for the product number or the model number. Locate these numbers before you contact support. Your service label will resemble one of the examples shown below. Refer to the illustration that most closely matches the service label on your computer. Component

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) Serial number Product number Warranty period Model number (select products only) Component

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) Model name (select products only) Product number Serial number Warranty period Regulatory label(s)Provide(s) regulatory information about the computer. Wireless certification label(s)Provide(s) information about optional wireless devices and the approval markings for the countries or regions in which the devices have been approved for use. 22 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer 3 Connecting to a network Your computer can travel with you wherever you go. But even at home, you can explore the globe and access information from millions of websites using your computer and a wired or wireless network connection. This chapter will help you get connected to that world. Connecting to a wireless network Your computer may be equipped with one or more of the following wireless devices:

WLAN deviceConnects the computer to wireless local area networks (commonly referred to as Wi-Fi networks, wireless LANs, or WLANs) in corporate offices, your home, and public places such as airports, restaurants, coffee shops, hotels, and universities. In a WLAN, the mobile wireless device in your computer communicates with a wireless router or a wireless access point. HP Mobile Broadband ModuleGives you wireless connectivity over a wireless wide area network

(WWAN), a much larger area. Mobile network operators install base stations (similar to cell phone towers) throughout large geographic areas, effectively providing coverage across entire states, regions, or even countries. Bluetooth deviceCreates a personal area network (PAN) to connect to other Bluetooth-enabled devices such as computers, phones, printers, headsets, speakers, and cameras. In a PAN, each device communicates directly with other devices, and devices must be relatively close togethertypically within 10 meters (approximately 33 feet) of each other. For more information about wireless technology, the Internet, and networking, see the Get started app. Select the Start button, and then select the Get started app. Using the wireless controls You can control the wireless devices in your computer using one or more of these features:

Airplane mode key (also called wireless button or wireless key) (referred to in this chapter as airplane mode key) Operating system controls Airplane mode key The computer may have an airplane mode key, one or more wireless devices, and one or two wireless lights. All the wireless devices on your computer are enabled at the factory. The wireless light indicates the overall power state of your wireless devices, not the status of individual devices. Operating system controls The Network and Sharing Center allows you to set up a connection or network, connect to a network, and diagnose and repair network problems. Connecting to a wireless network 23 To use operating system controls:

1. Type control panel in the taskbar search box, and then select Control Panel. Select Network and Internet, and then select Network and Sharing Center. 2. For more information, see the information provided in the Get started app. Select the Start button, and then select the Get started app. Connecting to a WLAN NOTE: When you are setting up Internet access in your home, you must establish an account with an Internet service provider (ISP). To purchase Internet service and a modem, contact a local ISP. The ISP will help set up the modem, install a network cable to connect your wireless router to the modem, and test the Internet service. To connect to a WLAN, follow these steps:

1. Be sure that the WLAN device is on. 2. Select the network status icon in the taskbar, and then connect to one of the available networks. If the WLAN is a security-enabled WLAN, you are prompted to enter a security code. Enter the code, and then select Next to complete the connection. If no WLANs are listed, you may be out of range of a wireless router or access point. If you do not see the WLAN you want to connect to, right-click the network status icon in the NOTE:

NOTE:

taskbar, and then select Open Network and Sharing Center. Select Set up a new connection or network. A list of options is displayed, allowing you to manually search for and connect to a network or to create a new network connection. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the connection. 3. After the connection is made, select the network status icon at the far right of the taskbar, to verify the name and status of the connection. NOTE: The functional range (how far your wireless signals travel) depends on WLAN implementation, router manufacturer, and interference from other electronic devices or structural barriers such as walls and floors. Using HP Mobile Broadband (select products only) Your HP Mobile Broadband computer has built-in support for mobile broadband service. Your new computer, when used with a mobile operators network, gives you the freedom to connect to the Internet, send e-mail, or connect to your corporate network without the need for Wi-Fi hotspots. You might need the HP Mobile Broadband Module IMEI and/or MEID number to activate mobile broadband service. The number may be printed on a label located on the bottom of your computer, inside the battery bay, under the service door, or on the back of the display. or You can find the number following these steps:

1. 2. 3. From the taskbar, select the network status icon. Select View Connection Settings. Under the Mobile broadband section, select the network status icon. 24 Chapter 3 Connecting to a network Some mobile network operators require the use of a subscriber identity module (SIM) card. A SIM card contains basic information about you, such as a personal identification number (PIN), as well as network information. Some computers include a SIM card that is preinstalled. If the SIM card is not preinstalled, it may be included with the HP Mobile Broadband documents provided with your computer, or the mobile network operator may provide it separately from the computer. For information about HP Mobile Broadband and how to activate service with a preferred mobile network operator, see the HP Mobile Broadband information included with your computer. Using GPS (select products only) Your computer may be equipped with a Global Positioning System (GPS) device. GPS satellites deliver location, speed, and direction information to GPS-equipped systems. To enable GPS, make sure location is enabled under the Windows privacy setting. 1. Type location in the taskbar search box, and then select Location privacy settings. Follow the on-screen instructions for using location settings. 2. For more information, see the Get started app. Select the Start button, and then select the Get started app. Using Bluetooth wireless devices (select products only) A Bluetooth device provides short-range wireless communications that replace the physical cable connections that traditionally link electronic devices such as the following:

Computers (desktop, notebook) Phones (cellular, cordless, smartphone) Imaging devices (printer, camera) Audio devices (headset, speakers) Mouse External keyboard Bluetooth devices provide peer-to-peer capability that allows you to set up a PAN of Bluetooth devices. For information about configuring and using Bluetooth devices, see the Get started app. Select the Start button, and then select the Get started app. Connecting Bluetooth devices Before you can use a Bluetooth device, you must establish a Bluetooth connection. 1. Type bluetooth in the taskbar search box, and then select Bluetooth settings. Turn on Bluetooth, if it is not already turned on. Select your device from the list, and then follow the on-screen instructions. 2. 3. NOTE:

If the device requires verification, a pairing code is displayed. On the device you are adding, follow the on-screen instructions to verify that the code on your device matches the pairing code. For more information, refer to the documentation provided with the device. NOTE:

devices may have additional requirements; refer to the documentation provided with the device. If your device does not appear in the list, be sure that Bluetooth on that device is turned on. Some Connecting to a wireless network 25 Connecting to a wired networkLAN (select products only) Use a LAN connection if you want to connect the computer directly to a router in your home (instead of working wirelessly), or if you want to connect to an existing network at your office. Connecting to a LAN requires an 8-pin, RJ-45 (network) cable and a network jack or an optional docking device or expansion port, if there is no RJ-45 jack on the computer. To connect the network cable, follow these steps:

1. 2. Plug the network cable into the network jack (1) on the computer. Plug the other end of the network cable into a network wall jack (2) or router. If the network cable contains noise suppression circuitry (3), which prevents interference from NOTE:

TV and radio reception, orient the circuitry end of the cable toward the computer. Sharing data and drives and accessing software When your computer is part of a network, you are not limited to using only the information that is stored in your computer. Computers connected to the network can exchange software and data with each other. For more information about sharing files, folders, or drives, see the information provided in the Get started app. Select the Start button, and then select the Get started app. NOTE: When a disc like a DVD movie or game is copy-protected, it cannot be shared. 26 Chapter 3 Connecting to a network 4 Enjoying entertainment features Use your HP computer as an entertainment hub to socialize via the webcam, enjoy and manage your music, and download and watch movies. Or, to make your computer an even more powerful entertainment center, connect external devices like a monitor, projector, TV, speakers, or headphones. Using a webcam (select products only) Your computer has a webcam (integrated camera) that records video and captures photographs. Some models allow you to video conference and chat online using streaming video. NOTE: Some products also have an infrared camera that allows you to log in to your computer using facial recognition software. For details, see Using Windows Hello (select products only) on page 48. To access the camera, type camera in the taskbar search box, and then select Camera from the list of applications. Using audio On your computer, or on select products using an external optical drive, you can play music CDs, download and listen to music, stream audio content from the web (including radio), record audio, or mix audio and video to create multimedia. To enhance your listening enjoyment, attach external audio devices such as speakers or headphones. Connecting speakers You can attach wired speakers to your computer by connecting them to a USB port or to the audio-out

(headphone)/audio-in (microphone) combo jack on your computer or on a docking station. To connect wireless speakers to your computer, follow the device manufacturer's instructions. To connect high-definition speakers to the computer, see Setting up HDMI audio on page 30. Before connecting speakers, lower the volume setting. Connecting headsets WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, lower the volume setting before putting on headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, see the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices. To access this document:

Select the Start button, select All apps, select HP Help and Support, and then select HP Documentation. Headphones combined with a microphone are called headsets. You can connect wired headsets to the audio-

out (headphone)/audio-in (microphone) combo jack on your computer. To connect wireless headsets to your computer, follow the device manufacturer's instructions. Using a webcam (select products only) 27 Using sound settings Use sound settings to adjust system volume, change system sounds, or manage audio devices. To view or change sound settings:

Type control panel in the taskbar search box, select Control Panel, select Hardware and Sound, and then select Sound. or Right-click the Start button, select Control Panel, select Hardware and Sound, and then select Sound. Your computer may include an enhanced sound system by Bang & Olufsen, DTS, Beats audio, or another provider. As a result, your computer may include advanced audio features that can be controlled through an audio control panel specific to your audio system. Use the audio control panel to view and control audio settings. Type control panel in the taskbar search box, select Control Panel, select Hardware and Sound, and then select the audio control panel specific to your system. or Right-click the Start button, select Control Panel, select Hardware and Sound, and then select the audio control panel specific to your system. Using video Your computer is a powerful video device that enables you to watch streaming video from your favorite websites and download video and movies to watch on your computer when you are not connected to a network. To enhance your viewing enjoyment, use one of the video ports on the computer to connect an external monitor, projector, or TV. IMPORTANT: Be sure that the external device is connected to the correct port on the computer, using the correct cable. Follow the device manufacturer's instructions. For information on using your video features, refer to HP Support Assistant. 28 Chapter 4 Enjoying entertainment features Connecting devices using a USB Type-C cable (select products only) NOTE: To connect a USB Type-C device to your computer, you need a USB Type-C cable, purchased separately. To see high-resolution display output on an external USB Type-C device, connect the USB Type-C device according to the following instructions:

1. Connect one end of the USB Type-C cable to the USB Type-C port on the computer. 2. 3. Connect the other end of the cable to the external device. Press fn+f4 to alternate the computer screen image between 4 display states. PC screen only: View the screen image on the computer only. Duplicate: View the screen image simultaneously on both the computer and external device. Extend: View the screen image extended across both the computer and external device. Second screen only: View the screen image on the external device only. Each time you press fn+f4 the display state changes. NOTE:

For best results, especially if you choose the "Extend" option, increase the screen resolution of the external device, as follows. Type control panel in the taskbar search box, select Control Panel, and then select Appearance and Personalization. Under Display, select Adjust resolution. Using video 29 Connecting video devices using an HDMI cable NOTE: To connect an HDMI device to your computer, you need an HDMI cable, purchased separately. To see the computer screen image on a high-definition TV or monitor, connect the high-definition device according to the following instructions:

1. Connect one end of the HDMI cable to the HDMI port on the computer. 2. 3. Connect the other end of the cable to the high-definition TV or monitor. Press f4 to alternate the computer screen image between 4 display states:

PC screen only: View the screen image on the computer only. Duplicate: View the screen image simultaneously on both the computer and the external device. Extend: View the screen image extended across both the computer and the external device. Second screen only: View the screen image on the external device only. Each time you press f4, the display state changes. NOTE:

For best results, especially if you choose the "Extend" option, increase the screen resolution of the external device, as follows. Type control panel in the taskbar search box, select Control Panel, and then select Appearance and Personalization. Under Display, select Adjust resolution. Setting up HDMI audio HDMI is the only video interface that supports high-definition video and audio. After you connect an HDMI TV to the computer, you can then turn on HDMI audio by following these steps:

1. Right-click the Speakers icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, and then select Playback devices. On the Playback tab, select the name of the digital output device. Click Set Default, and then click OK. 2. 3. 30 Chapter 4 Enjoying entertainment features To return the audio stream to the computer speakers:

1. Right-click the Speakers icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, and then click Playback devices. On the Playback tab, click Speakers. Click Set Default, and then click OK. 2. 3. Discovering and connecting to Miracast-compatible wireless displays (select products only) NOTE: To learn what type of display you have (Miracast-compatible or Intel WiDi), refer to the documentation that came with your TV or secondary display device. To discover and connect to Miracast-compatible wireless displays without leaving your current apps, follow the steps below. To open Miracast:

Type project in the taskbar search box, and then click Project to a second screen. Click Connect to a wireless display, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Discovering and connecting to Intel WiDi certified displays (select Intel products only) Use Intel WiDi to wirelessly project individual files such as photos, music, or videos, or to duplicate your entire computer screen to a TV or a secondary display device. Intel WiDi, a premium Miracast solution, makes it easy and seamless to pair your secondary display device;

provides for full-screen duplication; and improves speed, quality, and scaling. To connect to Intel WiDi certified displays:

Type project in the taskbar search box, and then click Project to a second screen. Click Connect to a wireless display, and then follow the on-screen instructions. To open Intel WiDi:

Type Intel WiDi in the taskbar search box, and then click Intel WiDi. Using video 31 5 Navigating the screen You can navigate the computer screen in the following ways:

Use touch gestures directly on the computer screen (select products only) Use touch gestures on the TouchPad Use keyboard and optional mouse (mouse purchased separately) Use an on-screen keyboard (select products only) Using TouchPad and touch screen gestures The TouchPad helps you navigate the computer screen and control the pointer using simple touch gestures. You can also use the left and right TouchPad buttons as you would use the corresponding buttons on an external mouse. To navigate a touch screen (select products only), touch the screen directly using gestures described in this chapter. You can also customize gestures and view demonstrations of how they work. Type control panel in the taskbar search box, select Control Panel, and then select Hardware and Sound. Under Devices and Printers, select Mouse. NOTE: Unless noted, gestures can be used on the TouchPad or a touch screen (select products only). Tap Use the tap/double-tap gesture to select or open an item on the screen. Point to an item on the screen, and then tap one finger on the TouchPad zone or touch screen to select the item. Double-tap an item to open it. 32 Chapter 5 Navigating the screen Two-finger pinch zoom Use the two-finger pinch zoom to zoom out or in on images or text. Zoom out by placing two fingers apart on the TouchPad zone or touch screen and then moving your fingers together. Zoom in by placing two fingers together on the TouchPad zone or touch screen and then moving your fingers apart. Two-finger scroll (TouchPad only) Use the two-finger scroll to move up, down, or sideways on a page or image. Place two fingers slightly apart on the TouchPad zone and then drag them up, down, left, or right. Two-finger tap (TouchPad only) Use the two-finger tap to open the menu for an object on the screen. NOTE: The two-finger tap performs the same function as right-clicking with the mouse. Tap two fingers on the TouchPad zone to open the options menu for the selected object. Using TouchPad and touch screen gestures 33 Four-finger tap (TouchPad only) Use the four-finger tap to open the action center. Tap four fingers on the Touchpad to open the action center and view current settings and notifications. Three-finger swipe (TouchPad only) Use the three-finger swipe to view open windows and to switch between open windows and the desktop. Swipe 3 fingers away from you to see all open windows. Swipe 3 fingers toward you to show the desktop. Swipe 3 fingers left or right to switch between open windows. One-finger slide (touch screen only) Use the one-finger slide to pan or scroll through lists and pages, or to move an object. To scroll across the screen, lightly slide one finger across the screen in the direction you want to move. To move an object, press and hold your finger on an object, and then drag your finger to move the object. 34 Chapter 5 Navigating the screen Using the keyboard and optional mouse The keyboard and optional mouse allow you to type, select items, scroll and to perform the same functions as you do using touch gestures. The keyboard also allows you to use action keys and key combinations to perform specific functions. NOTE: Depending on the country or region, your keyboard may have different keys and keyboard functions than those discussed in this section. Using the on-screen keyboard The computer has an on-screen keyboard that is displayed when you are in tablet mode. 1. To display the on-screen keyboard, tap the keyboard icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. Begin typing. To access settings for the on-screen keyboard, type control panel in the taskbar search box, select Control Panel, select Devices and Printers, and then select Typing. 2. NOTE: Suggested words may be displayed above the on-screen keyboard. Tap a word to select it. Using the integrated numeric keypad (select products only) On select products, the computer includes an integrated numeric keypad, and it also supports an optional external numeric keypad or an optional external keyboard that includes a numeric keypad. For more details about the integrated numeric keypad, see Keys on page 19. Component num lock key Integrated numeric keypad Description Controls the function of the integrated numeric keypad. Press the key to alternate between the standard numeric function found on an external keypad (this function is turned on at the factory) and the navigational function (indicated by the directional arrows on the keys). NOTE: The keypad function that is active when the computer is turned off, is reinstated when the computer is turned back on. Function like an external numeric keypad. To alternate between this numeric function and the navigational function (indicated by the directional arrow keys), press the num lock key. Using the keyboard and optional mouse 35 6 Managing power Your computer can operate on either battery power or external power. When the computer is running on battery power only and an AC power source is not available to charge the battery, it is important to monitor and conserve the battery charge. Initiating and exiting Sleep and Hibernation CAUTION: Several well-known vulnerabilities exist when a computer is in the Sleep state. To prevent an unauthorized user from accessing data on your computer, even encrypted data, HP recommends that you always initiate Hibernation instead of Sleep anytime the computer will be out of your physical possession. This practice is particularly important when you travel with your computer. Windows has two power-saving states, Sleep and Hibernation. SleepThe Sleep state is automatically initiated after a period of inactivity. Your work is saved to memory, allowing you to resume your work very quickly. You can also initiate Sleep manually. For more information, see Manually initiating and exiting Sleep on page 37. HibernationThe Hibernation state is automatically initiated if the battery reaches a critical level. In the Hibernation state, your work is saved to a hibernation file and the computer powers down. You can also initiate Hibernation manually. For more information, see Manually initiating and exiting Hibernation

(select products only) on page 37. CAUTION: To reduce the risk of possible audio and video degradation, loss of audio or video playback functionality, or loss of information, do not initiate the Sleep state while reading from or writing to a disc or an external media card. 36 Chapter 6 Managing power Manually initiating and exiting Sleep You can initiate Sleep in any of the following ways:

Close the display. Select the Start button, select the Power icon, and then select Sleep. You can exit Sleep in any of the following ways:

Briefly press the power button. If the computer is closed, raise the display. Press a key on the keyboard. Tap the TouchPad. When the computer exits Sleep, the power lights turn on and your work returns to the screen. NOTE:

before your work returns to the screen. If you have set a password to be required on exiting Sleep, you must enter your Windows password Manually initiating and exiting Hibernation (select products only) You can enable user-initiated Hibernation and change other power settings and timeouts using Power Options. 1. Type power options in the taskbar search box, and then select Power Options. or Right-click the Power meter icon

, and then select Power Options. 2. 3. In the left pane, select Choose what the power button does. Select Change Settings that are currently unavailable, and then, in the When I press the power button area, select Hibernate. or Under Shutdown settings, select the Hibernate box to show the Hibernate option in the Power menu. Select Save changes. 4. To exit Hibernation:

Briefly press the power button. When the computer exits Hibernation, the power lights turn on and your work returns to the screen. NOTE:

password before your work returns to the screen. If you have set a password to be required on exiting Hibernation, you must enter your Windows Setting password protection on wakeup (exiting Sleep or Hibernation) To set the computer to prompt for a password when the computer exits Sleep or Hibernation, follow these steps:

1. Type power options in the taskbar search box, and then select Power Options. or Initiating and exiting Sleep and Hibernation 37 Right-click the Power meter icon

, and then select Power Options. 2. 3. 4. In the left pane, select Require a password on wakeup. Select Change Settings that are currently unavailable. Select Require a password (recommended). NOTE: To create a user account password or change your current user account password, select Create or change your user account password, and then follow the on-screen instructions. If you do not need to create or change a user account password, go to step 5. 5. Select Save changes. Using the power meter and power settings The power meter is located on the Windows taskbar. The power meter allows you to quickly access power settings and view the remaining battery charge. To view the percentage of remaining battery charge and the current power plan, place the mouse pointer over the power meter icon

. To use Power Options, rightclick the power meter icon can also type power options in the task bar search box, and then select Power Options.

, and then select an item from the list. You Different power meter icons indicate whether the computer is running on battery or external power. Placing the mouse pointer over the icon reveals a message if the battery has reached a low or critical battery level. Running on battery power When a charged battery is in the computer and the computer is not plugged into external power, the computer runs on battery power. When the computer is off and unplugged from external power, the battery in the computer slowly discharges. The computer displays a message when the battery reaches a low or critical battery level. Computer battery life varies, depending on power management settings, programs running on the computer, screen brightness, external devices connected to the computer, and other factors. Factory-sealed battery To monitor the status of the battery, or if the battery is no longer holding a charge, run HP Battery Check in the HP Support Assistant app. 1. Type support in the taskbar search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. or Click the question mark icon in the taskbar. Select My PC, select the Diagnostics and tools tab, and then select HP Battery Check. If HP Battery Check indicates that your battery should be replaced, contact support. 2. The battery[ies] in this product cannot be easily replaced by users themselves. Removing or replacing the battery could affect your warranty coverage. If a battery is no longer holding a charge, contact support. When 38 Chapter 6 Managing power a battery has reached the end of its useful life, do not dispose of the battery in general household waste. Follow the local laws and regulations in your area for battery disposal. Finding battery information To access battery information:

1. Type support in the taskbar search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. or Click the question mark icon in the taskbar. Select My PC, select the Diagnostics and tools tab, and then select HP Battery Check. If HP Battery Check indicates that your battery should be replaced, contact support. 2. HP Support Assistant provides the following tools and information about the battery:

HP Battery Check Information about battery types, specifications, life cycles, and capacity Conserving battery power To conserve battery power and maximize battery life:

Lower the brightness of the display. Select the Power saver setting in Power Options. Turn off wireless devices when you are not using them. Disconnect unused external devices that are not plugged into an external power source, such as an external hard drive connected to a USB port. Stop, disable, or remove any external media cards that you are not using. Before you leave your work, initiate Sleep or shut down the computer. Identifying low battery levels When a battery that is the sole power source for the computer reaches a low or critical battery level, the following behavior occurs:

The battery light (select products only) indicates a low or critical battery level. or The power meter icon shows a low or critical battery notification. NOTE:

settings on page 38. For additional information about the power meter, see Using the power meter and power The computer takes the following actions for a critical battery level:

If Hibernation is disabled and the computer is on or in the Sleep state, the computer remains briefly in the Sleep state and then shuts down and loses any unsaved information. If Hibernation is enabled and the computer is on or in the Sleep state, the computer initiates Hibernation. Running on battery power 39 Resolving a low battery level Resolving a low battery level when external power is available Connect one of the following to the computer and to external power:

AC adapter Optional docking or expansion device Optional power adapter purchased as an accessory from HP Resolving a low battery level when no power source is available Save your work and shut down the computer. Resolving a low battery level when the computer cannot exit Hibernation 1. 2. Connect the AC adapter to the computer and to external power. Exit Hibernation by pressing the power button. Running on AC power For information about connecting to AC power, refer to the Setup Instructions poster provided in the computer box. The computer does not use battery power when the computer is connected to AC power with an approved AC adapter or an optional docking/expansion device. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, use only the AC adapter provided with the computer, a replacement AC adapter provided by HP, or a compatible AC adapter purchased from HP. Connect the computer to AC power under any of the following conditions:

WARNING! Do not charge the computer battery while you are aboard aircraft. When charging or calibrating a battery When installing or modifying system software When writing information to a disc (select products only) When running Disk Defragmenter on computers with internal hard drives When performing a backup or recovery When you connect the computer to AC power:

The battery begins to charge. The screen brightness increases. The power meter icon changes appearance. When you disconnect AC power:

40 Chapter 6 Managing power The computer switches to battery power. The screen brightness automatically decreases to save battery life. The power meter icon changes appearance. Troubleshooting power problems Test the AC adapter if the computer exhibits any of the following symptoms when it is connected to AC power:

The computer does not turn on. The display does not turn on. The power lights do not turn on. To test the AC adapter:

1. 2. 3. Shut down the computer. Connect the AC adapter to the computer and to the power cord, and then plug the power cord into an AC outlet. Turn on the computer. If the power lights turn on, the AC adapter is working properly. If the power lights remain off, check the connection from the AC adapter to the computer and the connection from the power cord to the AC outlet to be sure that the connections are secure. If the connections are secure and the power lights remain off, the AC adapter is not functioning and should be replaced. Contact support for information about obtaining a replacement AC power adapter. Shutting down (turning off) the computer CAUTION: Unsaved information is lost when the computer shuts down. Be sure to save your work before shutting down the computer. The Shut down command closes all open programs, including the operating system, and then turns off the display and computer. Shut down the computer under any of the following conditions:

When you need to access components inside the computer When you are connecting an external hardware device that does not connect to a USB or video port When the computer will be unused and disconnected from external power for an extended period Although you can turn off the computer with the power button, the recommended procedure is to use the Windows Shut down command. NOTE:

pressing the power button. If the computer is in the Sleep state or in Hibernation, first exit Sleep or Hibernation by briefly 1. 2. Save your work and close all open programs. Select the Start button, select the Power icon, and then select Shut down. Shutting down (turning off) the computer 41 If the computer is unresponsive and you are unable to use the preceding shutdown procedures, try the following emergency procedures in the sequence provided:

Press ctrl+alt+delete, select the Power icon, and then select Shut down. Press and hold the power button for at least 5 seconds. Disconnect the computer from external power. 42 Chapter 6 Managing power 7 Maintaining your computer It is important to perform regular maintenance to keep your computer in optimal condition. This chapter explains how to use tools like Disk Defragmenter and Disk Cleanup. It also provides instructions for updating programs and drivers, steps to clean the computer, and tips for traveling with (or shipping) the computer. Improving performance You can improve the performance of your computer by performing regular maintenance tasks with tools such as Disk Defragmenter and Disk Cleanup. Using Disk Defragmenter HP recommends using Disk Defragmenter to defragment your hard drive at least once a month. NOTE:

It is not necessary to run Disk Defragmenter on solid-state drives. To run Disk Defragmenter:

1. 2. Connect the computer to AC power. Type defragment in the taskbar search box, and then select Defragment and optimize your drives. Follow the on-screen instructions. 3. For additional information, access the Disk Defragmenter software Help. Using Disk Cleanup Use Disk Cleanup to search the hard drive for unnecessary files that you can safely delete to free up disk space and help the computer run more efficiently. To run Disk Cleanup:

1. Type disk in the taskbar search box, and then select Free up disk space by deleting unnecessary files or Uninstall apps to free up disk space. Follow the on-screen instructions. 2. Using HP 3D DriveGuard (select products only) HP 3D DriveGuard protects a hard drive by parking the drive and halting data requests under either of the following conditions:

You drop the computer. You move the computer with the display closed while the computer is running on battery power. A short time after the end of one of these events, HP 3D DriveGuard returns the hard drive to normal operation. NOTE: Only internal hard drives are protected by HP 3D DriveGuard. A hard drive installed in an optional docking device or connected to a USB port is not protected by HP 3D DriveGuard. Improving performance 43 NOTE: Because solid-state drives (SSDs) lack moving parts, HP 3D DriveGuard is unnecessary for these drives. For more information, see the HP 3D DriveGuard software Help. Identifying HP 3D DriveGuard status The hard drive light on the computer changes color to show that the drive in a primary hard drive bay and/or the drive in a secondary hard drive bay (select products only) is parked. To determine whether a drive is currently protected or whether it is parked, view the icon on the Windows desktop in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. Updating programs and drivers HP recommends that you update your programs and drivers on a regular basis. Updates can resolve issues and bring new features and options to your computer. For example, older graphics components might not work well with the most recent gaming software. Without the latest driver, you would not be getting the most out of your equipment. Go to http://www.hp.com/support to download the latest versions of HP programs and drivers. In addition, register to receive automatic notifications when updates become available. If you would like to update your programs and drivers, follow these instructions:

1. Type support in the taskbar search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app.

- or -

Click the question mark icon in the taskbar. Select My PC, select the Updates tab, and then select Check for updates and messages. Follow the on-screen instructions. 2. 3. Cleaning your computer Use the following products to safely clean your computer:

Dimethyl benzyl ammonium chloride 0.3 percent maximum concentration (for example, disposable wipes, which come in a variety of brands) Alcohol-free glass-cleaning fluid Solution of water and mild soap Dry microfiber cleaning cloth or a chamois (static-free cloth without oil) Static-free cloth wipes CAUTION: Avoid strong cleaning solvents that can permanently damage your computer. If you are not sure that a cleaning product is safe for your computer, check the product contents to make sure that ingredients such as alcohol, acetone, ammonium chloride, methylene chloride, and hydrocarbons are not included in the product. Fibrous materials, such as paper towels, can scratch the computer. Over time, dirt particles and cleaning agents can get trapped in the scratches. Cleaning procedures Follow the procedures in this section to safely clean your computer. 44 Chapter 7 Maintaining your computer WARNING! To prevent electric shock or damage to components, do not attempt to clean your computer while it is on. 1. 2. 3. CAUTION: To prevent damage to internal components, do not spray cleaning agents or liquids directly on any computer surface. Liquids dripped on the surface can permanently damage internal components. Turn off the computer. Disconnect AC power. Disconnect all powered external devices. Cleaning the display Gently wipe the display using a soft, lint-free cloth moistened with an alcohol-free glass cleaner. Be sure that a display is dry before you close the computer. Cleaning the sides or cover To clean the sides or cover, use a soft microfiber cloth or chamois moistened with one of the cleaning solutions listed previously, or use an acceptable disposable wipe. NOTE: When cleaning the cover of the computer, use a circular motion to aid in removing dirt and debris. Cleaning the TouchPad, keyboard, or mouse (select products only) WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to internal components, do not use a vacuum cleaner attachment to clean the keyboard. A vacuum cleaner can deposit household debris on the keyboard surface. CAUTION: To prevent damage to internal components, do not allow liquids to drip between the keys. To clean the TouchPad, keyboard, or mouse, use a soft microfiber cloth or a chamois moistened with one of the cleaning solutions listed previously or use an acceptable disposable wipe. To prevent keys from sticking and to remove dust, lint, and particles from the keyboard, use a can of compressed air with a straw extension. Traveling with or shipping your computer If you have to travel with or ship your computer, follow these tips to keep your equipment safe. Prepare the computer for traveling or shipping:

Back up your information to an external drive. Remove all discs and all external media cards, such as memory cards. Turn off and then disconnect all external devices. Shut down the computer. Take along a backup of your information. Keep the backup separate from the computer. When traveling by air, carry the computer as hand luggage; do not check it in with the rest of your luggage. CAUTION: Avoid exposing a drive to magnetic fields. Security devices with magnetic fields include airport walk-through devices and security wands. Airport conveyer belts and similar security devices that check carry-on baggage use X-rays instead of magnetism and do not damage drives. Traveling with or shipping your computer 45 If you plan to use the computer during a flight, listen for the in-flight announcement that tells you when you are allowed to use your computer. In-flight computer use is at the discretion of the airline. If you are shipping the computer or a drive, use suitable protective packaging and label the package FRAGILE. The use of wireless devices may be restricted in some environments. Such restrictions may apply aboard aircraft, in hospitals, near explosives, and in hazardous locations. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of a wireless device in your computer, ask for authorization to use your computer before you turn it on. If you are traveling internationally, follow these suggestions:

Check the computer-related customs regulations for each country or region on your itinerary. Check the power cord and adapter requirements for each location in which you plan to use the computer. Voltage, frequency, and plug configurations vary. WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not attempt to power the computer with a voltage converter kit sold for appliances. 46 Chapter 7 Maintaining your computer 8 Securing your computer and information Computer security is essential for protecting the confidentiality, integrity, and availability of your information. Standard security solutions provided by the Windows operating system, HP applications, the Setup Utility

(BIOS), and other third-party software can help protect your computer from a variety of risks, such as viruses, worms, and other types of malicious code. IMPORTANT: Some security features listed in this chapter may not be available on your computer. Using passwords A password is a group of characters that you choose to secure your computer information and to protect online transactions. Several types of passwords can be set. For example, when you set up your computer for the first time, you were asked to create a user password to secure your computer. Additional passwords can be set in Windows or in HP Setup Utility (BIOS), which is preinstalled on your computer. You may find it helpful to use the same password for a Setup Utility (BIOS) feature and for a Windows security feature. To create and save passwords, use the following tips:

To reduce the risk of being locked out of the computer, record each password and store it in a secure place away from the computer. Do not store passwords in a file on the computer. When creating passwords, follow requirements set by the program. Change your passwords at least every 3 months. An ideal password is long and has letters, punctuation, symbols, and numbers. Before you send your computer for service, back up your files, delete confidential files, and then remove all password settings. For additional information about Windows passwords, such as screen-saver passwords:

Type support in the taskbar search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. or Click the question mark icon in the taskbar. Setting Windows passwords Password User password Administrator password Function Protects access to a Windows user account. Protects administrator-level access to computer contents. NOTE: This password cannot be used to access Setup Utility

(BIOS) contents. Using passwords 47 Setting Setup Utility (BIOS) passwords Password Administrator password Power-on password Function Must be entered each time you access Setup Utility (BIOS). If you forget your administrator password, you cannot access Setup Utility (BIOS). Must be entered each time you turn on or restart the computer. If you forget your power-on password, you cannot turn on or restart the computer. To set, change, or delete an administrator or power-on password in Setup Utility (BIOS):

CAUTION: Use extreme care when making changes in Setup Utility (BIOS). Errors can prevent the computer from operating properly. NOTE: To start Setup Utility, your computer must be in notebook mode and you must use the keyboard attached to your notebook. The on-screen keyboard, which displays in tablet mode, cannot access Setup Utility. 1. Start Setup Utility (BIOS):

Computers or tablets with keyboards:

Turn on or restart the computer, quickly press esc, and then press f10. Tablets without keyboards:

1. Turn on or restart the tablet, and then quickly hold down the volume down button.

- or -

Turn on or restart the tablet, and then quickly hold down the Windows button. Tap f10. 2. Select Security, and then follow the on-screen instructions. 2. Your changes take effect when the computer restarts. Using Windows Hello (select products only) On products equipped with a fingerprint reader or an infrared camera, you can use Windows Hello to sign in by swiping your finger or looking at the camera. To set up Windows Hello, follow these steps:

1. 2. Select the Start button, select Settings, select Accounts, and then select Sign-in options. Under Windows Hello, follow the on-screen instructions to add both a password and a 4-digit PIN, and then enroll your fingerprint or facial ID. Using Internet security software When you use your computer to access email, a network, or the Internet, you potentially expose your computer to computer viruses, spyware, and other online threats. To help protect your computer, Internet 48 Chapter 8 Securing your computer and information security software that includes antivirus and firewall features may be preinstalled on your computer as a trial offer. To provide ongoing protection against newly discovered viruses and other security risks, security software must be kept up to date. It is strongly recommended that you upgrade the security software trial offer or purchase the software of your choice in order to fully protect your computer. Using antivirus software Computer viruses can disable programs, utilities, or the operating system, or cause them to function abnormally. Antivirus software can detect most viruses, destroy them, and in most cases, repair any damage they have caused. To provide ongoing protection against newly discovered viruses, antivirus software must be kept up to date. An antivirus program may be preinstalled on your computer. It is strongly recommended that you use the antivirus program of your choice in order to fully protect your computer. For more information about computer viruses, type support in the taskbar search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. or Click the question mark icon in the taskbar. Using firewall software Firewalls are designed to prevent unauthorized access to a system or network. A firewall can be software you install on your computer and/or network, or it can be a combination of both hardware and software. There are two types of firewalls to consider:

Host-based firewallsSoftware that protects only the computer it is installed on. Network-based firewallsInstalled between your DSL or cable modem and your home network to protect all the computers on the network. When a firewall is installed on a system, all data sent to and from the system is monitored and compared with a set of user-defined security criteria. Any data that does not meet those criteria is blocked. Installing software updates HP, Windows, and third-party software installed on your computer should be regularly updated to correct security problems and improve software performance. CAUTION: Microsoft sends out alerts regarding Windows updates, which may include security updates. To protect the computer from security breaches and computer viruses, install all updates from Microsoft as soon as you receive an alert. You can install these updates automatically. To view or change the settings:

1. 2. 3. Select the Start button, select Settings, and then select Update & Security. Select Windows Update, and then follow the on-screen instructions. To schedule a time for installing updates, select Advanced Options, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Installing software updates 49 Using HP Touchpoint Manager (select products only) HP Touchpoint Manager is a cloud-based IT solution that enables businesses to effectively manage and secure their company assets. HP Touchpoint Manager helps protect devices against malware and other attacks, monitors device health, and enables you to reduce time spent solving end-user device and security issues. You can quickly download and install the software, which is highly cost effective relative to traditional in-house solutions. Securing your wireless network When you set up a WLAN or access an existing WLAN, always enable security features to protect your network from unauthorized access. WLANs in public areas (hotspots) like coffee shops and airports may not provide any security. Backing up your software applications and information Regularly back up your software applications and information to protect them from being permanently lost or damaged through a virus attack or a software or hardware failure. Using an optional security cable (select products only) A security cable (purchased separately) is designed to act as a deterrent, but it may not prevent the computer from being mishandled or stolen. To connect a security cable to your computer, follow the device manufacturer's instructions. 50 Chapter 8 Securing your computer and information 9 Using Setup Utility (BIOS) Setup Utility, or Basic Input/Output System (BIOS), controls communication between all the input and output devices on the system (such as disk drives, display, keyboard, mouse, and printer). Setup Utility (BIOS) includes settings for the types of devices installed, the startup sequence of the computer, and the amount of system and extended memory. NOTE: To start Setup Utility on convertible computers, your computer must be in notebook mode and you must use the keyboard attached to your notebook. Starting Setup Utility (BIOS) CAUTION: Use extreme care when making changes in Setup Utility (BIOS). Errors can prevent the computer from operating properly. Turn on or restart the computer, quickly press esc, and then press f10. Updating Setup Utility (BIOS) Updated versions of Setup Utility (BIOS) may be available on the HP website. Most BIOS updates on the HP website are packaged in compressed files called SoftPaqs. Some download packages contain a file named Readme.txt, which contains information regarding installing and troubleshooting the file. Determining the BIOS version To decide whether you need to update Setup Utility (BIOS), first determine the BIOS version on your computer. To reveal the BIOS version information (also known as ROM date and System BIOS), use one of these options. HP Support Assistant 1. Type support in the taskbar search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. or Click the question mark icon in the taskbar. Select My PC, and then select Specifications. 2. Setup Utility (BIOS) 1. 2. 3. Start Setup Utility (BIOS) (see Starting Setup Utility (BIOS) on page 51). Select Main, select System Information, and then make note of the BIOS version. Select Exit, select No, and then follow the on-screen instructions. To check for later BIOS versions, see Downloading a BIOS update on page 52. Starting Setup Utility (BIOS) 51 Downloading a BIOS update CAUTION: To reduce the risk of damage to the computer or an unsuccessful installation, download and install a BIOS update only when the computer is connected to reliable external power using the AC adapter. Do not download or install a BIOS update while the computer is running on battery power, docked in an optional docking device, or connected to an optional power source. During the download and installation, follow these instructions:

Do not disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet. Do not shut down the computer or initiate Sleep. Do not insert, remove, connect, or disconnect any device, cable, or cord. NOTE:

software updates, especially system BIOS updates. If your computer is connected to a network, consult the network administrator before installing any 1. 2. 3. 4. Type support in the taskbar search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. or Click the question mark icon in the taskbar. Click Updates, and then click Check for updates and messages. Follow the on-screen instructions. At the download area, follow these steps:

a. Identify the most recent BIOS update and compare it to the BIOS version currently installed on your computer. If the update is more recent than your BIOS version, make a note of the date, name, or other identifier. You may need this information to locate the update later, after it has been downloaded to your hard drive. Follow the on-screen instructions to download your selection to the hard drive. Make a note of the path to the location on your hard drive where the BIOS update is downloaded. You will need to access this path when you are ready to install the update. b. BIOS installation procedures vary. Follow any instructions that appear on the screen after the download is complete. If no instructions appear, follow these steps:

1. Type file in the taskbar search box, and then select File Explorer. Click your hard drive designation. The hard drive designation is typically Local Disk (C:). Using the hard drive path you recorded earlier, open the folder that contains the update. Double-click the file that has an .exe extension (for example, filename.exe). The BIOS installation begins. Complete the installation by following the on-screen instructions. 2. 3. 4. 5. NOTE: After a message on the screen reports a successful installation, you can delete the downloaded file from your hard drive. 52 Chapter 9 Using Setup Utility (BIOS) 10 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) HP PC Hardware Diagnostics is a Unified Extensible Firmware Interface (UEFI) that allows you to run diagnostic tests to determine whether the computer hardware is functioning properly. The tool runs outside the operating system so that it can isolate hardware failures from issues that are caused by the operating system or other software components. When HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) detects a failure that requires hardware replacement, a 24-digit Failure ID code is generated. This ID code can then be provided to support to help determine how to correct the problem. NOTE: To start diagnostics on a convertible computer, your computer must be in notebook mode and you must use the keyboard attached. To start HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI), follow these steps:

1. 2. Turn on or restart the computer, and quickly press esc. Press f2. The BIOS searches three places for the diagnostic tools, in the following order:

a. Connected USB drive NOTE: To download the HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) tool to a USB drive, see Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) to a USB device on page 53. b. c. Hard drive BIOS 3. When the diagnostic tool opens, select the type of diagnostic test you want to run, and then follow the on-screen instructions. NOTE:

If you need to stop a diagnostic test, press esc. Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) to a USB device NOTE: The HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) download instructions are provided in English only, and you must use a Windows computer to download and create the HP UEFI support environment because only .exe files are offered. Go to http://www.hp.com/go/techcenter/pcdiags. The HP PC Diagnostics home page is displayed. In the HP PC Hardware Diagnostics section, select the Download link, and then select Run. There are two options to download HP PC Hardware Diagnostics to a USB device. Download the latest UEFI version 1. 2. Download any version of UEFI for a specific product 1. 2. Go to http://www.hp.com/support. Select Get software and drivers. Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) to a USB device 53 3. 4. 5. Enter the product name or number. or Select Identify now to let HP automatically detect your product. Select your computer, and then select your operating system. In the Diagnostic section, follow the on-screen instructions to select and download the UEFI version you want. 54 Chapter 10 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) 11 Backing up, restoring, and recovering This chapter provides information about the following processes. The information in the chapter is standard procedure for most products. Creating recovery media and backups Restoring and recovering your system For additional information, refer to the HP support assistant app. Type support in the taskbar search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. or Click the question mark icon in the taskbar. If you will be performing recovery procedures on a tablet, the tablet battery must be at least IMPORTANT:

70% charged before you start the recovery process. IMPORTANT:

beginning any recovery process. For a tablet with a detachable keyboard, connect the keyboard to the keyboard dock before Creating recovery media and backups The following methods of creating recovery media and backups are available on select products only. Choose the available method according to your computer model. Use HP Recovery Manager to create HP Recovery media after you successfully set up the computer. This step creates a backup of the HP Recovery partition on the computer. The backup can be used to reinstall the original operating system in cases where the hard drive is corrupted or has been replaced. For information on creating recovery media, see Creating HP Recovery media (select products only) on page 55. For information on the recovery options that are available using the recovery media, see Using Windows tools on page 56. Use Windows tools to create system restore points and create backups of personal information. For more information, see Recovering using HP Recovery Manager on page 57. NOTE:

If storage is 32 GB or less, Microsoft System Restore is disabled by default. Creating HP Recovery media (select products only) If possible, check for the presence of the Recovery partition and the Windows partition. From the Start menu, select File Explorer, and then select This PC. If your computer does not list the Windows partition and the Recovery partition, you can obtain recovery media for your system from support. See the Worldwide Telephone Numbers booklet included with the computer. You can also find contact information on the HP website. Go to http://www.hp.com/support, select your country or region, and follow the on-screen instructions. Creating recovery media and backups 55 You can use Windows tools to create system restore points and create backups of personal information, see Using Windows tools on page 56. If your computer does list the Recovery partition and the Windows partition, you can use HP Recovery Manager to create recovery media after you successfully set up the computer. HP Recovery media can be used to perform system recovery if the hard drive becomes corrupted. System recovery reinstalls the original operating system and software programs that were installed at the factory and then configures the settings for the programs. HP Recovery media can also be used to customize the system or restore the factory image if you replace the hard drive. Only one set of recovery media can be created. Handle these recovery tools carefully, and keep them in a safe place. HP Recovery Manager examines the computer and determines the required storage capacity for the media that will be required. To create recovery discs, your computer must have an optical drive with DVD writer capability, and you must use only high-quality blank DVD-R, DVD+R, DVD-R DL, or DVD+R DL discs. Do not use rewritable discs such as CDRW, DVDRW, double-layer DVDRW, or BD-RE (rewritable Blu-ray) discs; they are not compatible with HP Recovery Manager software. Or, instead, you can use a high-

quality blank USB flash drive. If your computer does not include an integrated optical drive with DVD writer capability, but you would like to create DVD recovery media, you can use an external optical drive (purchased separately) to create recovery discs. If you use an external optical drive, it must be connected directly to a USB port on the computer; the drive cannot be connected to a USB port on an external device, such as a USB hub. If you cannot create DVD media yourself, you can obtain recovery discs for your computer from HP. See the Worldwide Telephone Numbers booklet included with the computer. You can also find contact information on the HP website. Go to http://www.hp.com/

support, select your country or region, and follow the on-screen instructions. Be sure that the computer is connected to AC power before you begin creating the recovery media. The creation process can take an hour or more. Do not interrupt the creation process. If necessary, you can exit the program before you have finished creating all of the recovery DVDs. HP Recovery Manager will finish burning the current DVD. The next time you start HP Recovery Manager, you will be prompted to continue. To create HP Recovery media:

IMPORTANT:

beginning these steps. For a tablet with a detachable keyboard, connect the keyboard to the keyboard dock before 1. Type recovery in the taskbar search box, and then select HP Recovery Manager. Select Create recovery media, and then follow the on-screen instructions. 2. If you ever need to recover the system, see Recovering using HP Recovery Manager on page 57. Using Windows tools You can create recovery media, system restore points, and backups of personal information using Windows tools. NOTE:

If storage is 32 GB or less, Microsoft System Restore is disabled by default. For more information and steps, see the Get started app. Select the Start button, and then select the Get started app. 56 Chapter 11 Backing up, restoring, and recovering Restore and recovery There are several options for recovering your system. Choose the method that best matches your situation and level of expertise:

IMPORTANT: Not all methods are available on all products. Windows offers several options for restoring from backup, refreshing the computer, and resetting the computer to its original state. For more information see the Get started app. Select the Start button, and then select the Get started app. If you need to correct a problem with a preinstalled application or driver, use the Reinstall drivers and/or applications option (select products only) of HP Recovery Manager to reinstall the individual application or driver. Type recovery in the taskbar search box, select HP Recovery Manager, select Reinstall drivers and/or applications, and then follow the on-screen instructions. If you want to recover the Windows partition to original factory content, you can choose the System Recovery option from the HP Recovery partition (select products only) or use the HP Recovery media. For more information, see Recovering using HP Recovery Manager on page 57. If you have not already created recovery media, see Creating HP Recovery media (select products only) on page 55. On select products, if you want to recover the computer's original factory partition and content, or if you have replaced the hard drive, you can use the Factory Reset option of HP Recovery media. For more information, see Recovering using HP Recovery Manager on page 57. On select products, if you want to remove the recovery partition to reclaim hard drive space, HP Recovery Manager offers the Remove Recovery Partition option. For more information, see Removing the HP Recovery partition (select products only) on page 60. Recovering using HP Recovery Manager HP Recovery Manager software allows you to recover the computer to its original factory state by using the HP Recovery media that you either created or that you obtained from HP, or by using the HP Recovery partition (select products only). If you have not already created recovery media, see Creating HP Recovery media (select products only) on page 55. What you need to know before you get started HP Recovery Manager recovers only software that was installed at the factory. For software not provided with this computer, you must either download the software from the manufacturer's website or reinstall the software from the media provided by the manufacturer. IMPORTANT: Recovery through HP Recovery Manager should be used as a final attempt to correct computer issues. HP Recovery media must be used if the computer hard drive fails. If you have not already created recovery media, see Creating HP Recovery media (select products only) on page 55. To use the Factory Reset option (select products only), you must use HP Recovery media. If you have not already created recovery media, see Creating HP Recovery media (select products only) on page 55. If your computer does not allow the creation of HP Recovery media or if the HP Recovery media does not work, you can obtain recovery media for your system from support. See the Worldwide Telephone Numbers booklet included with the computer. You can also find contact information from the HP Restore and recovery 57 website. Go to http://www.hp.com/support, select your country or region, and follow the on-screen instructions. IMPORTANT: HP Recovery Manager does not automatically provide backups of your personal data. Before beginning recovery, back up any personal data you want to retain. Using HP Recovery media, you can choose from one of the following recovery options:

NOTE: Only the options available for your computer display when you start the recovery process. System RecoveryReinstalls the original operating system, and then configures the settings for the programs that were installed at the factory. Factory ResetRestores the computer to its original factory state by deleting all information from the hard drive and re-creating the partitions. Then it reinstalls the operating system and the software that was installed at the factory. The HP Recovery partition (select products only) allows System Recovery only. Using the HP Recovery partition (select products only) The HP Recovery partition allows you to perform a system recovery without the need for recovery discs or a recovery USB flash drive. This type of recovery can be used only if the hard drive is still working. To start HP Recovery Manager from the HP Recovery partition:

IMPORTANT:

beginning these steps (select products only). For a tablet with a detachable keyboard, connect the keyboard to the keyboard dock before 1. 2. 3. Type recovery in the taskbar search box, select Recovery Manager, and then select HP Recovery Environment.

- or-

For computers or tablets with keyboards attached, press f11 while the computer boots, or press and hold f11 as you press the power button. For tablets without keyboards:

Turn on or restart the tablet, and then quickly hold down the volume down button; then select f11.

- or -

Turn on or restart the tablet, and then quickly hold down the Windows button; then select f11. Select Troubleshoot from the boot options menu. Select Recovery Manager, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Using HP Recovery media to recover You can use HP Recovery media to recover the original system. This method can be used if your system does not have an HP Recovery partition or if the hard drive is not working properly. 1. 2. If possible, back up all personal files. Insert the HP Recovery media, and then restart the computer. NOTE:

boot order. See Changing the computer boot order on page 59. If the computer does not automatically restart in HP Recovery Manager, change the computer 3. Follow the on-screen instructions. 58 Chapter 11 Backing up, restoring, and recovering Changing the computer boot order If your computer does not restart in HP Recovery Manager, you can change the computer boot order, which is the order of devices listed in BIOS where the computer looks for startup information. You can change the selection to an optical drive or a USB flash drive. To change the boot order:

IMPORTANT:

beginning these steps. For a tablet with a detachable keyboard, connect the keyboard to the keyboard dock before 1. 2. Insert the HP Recovery media. Access BIOS:

For computers or tablets with keyboards attached:

Turn on or restart the computer or tablet, quickly press esc, and then press f9 for boot options. For tablets without keyboards:

Turn on or restart the tablet, and then quickly hold down the volume down button; then select f9.

- or -

Turn on or restart the tablet, and then quickly hold down the Windows button; then select f9. 3. 4. Select the optical drive or USB flash drive from which you want to boot. Follow the on-screen instructions. Restore and recovery 59 Removing the HP Recovery partition (select products only) HP Recovery Manager software allows you to remove the HP Recovery partition to free up hard drive space. IMPORTANT: After you remove the HP Recovery partition, you will not be able to perform System Recovery or create HP recovery media from the HP Recovery partition. So before you remove the Recovery partition, create HP Recovery media; see Creating HP Recovery media (select products only) on page 55. NOTE: The Remove Recovery Partition option is only available on products that support this function. Follow these steps to remove the HP Recovery partition:

1. Type recovery in the taskbar search box, and then select HP Recovery Manager. Select Remove Recovery Partition, and then follow the on-screen instructions. 2. 60 Chapter 11 Backing up, restoring, and recovering 12 Specifications Input power The power information in this section may be helpful if you plan to travel internationally with the computer. The computer operates on DC power, which can be supplied by an AC or a DC power source. The AC power source must be rated at 100240 V, 5060 Hz. Although the computer can be powered from a standalone DC power source, it should be powered only with an AC adapter or a DC power source that is supplied and approved by HP for use with this computer. The computer can operate on DC power within the following specifications. Operating voltage and current varies by platform. The voltage and current for your computer is located on the regulatory label. Input power Rating Operating voltage and current 5 V dc @ 2 A / 12 V dc @ 3 A /15 V dc @ 3 A 45 W USB-C 5 V dc @ 3 A / 9 V dc @ 3 A / 10 V dc @ 3.75 A / 12 V dc @ 3.75 A / 15 V dc @ 3 A / 20 V dc @ 2.25 A 45 W USB-C 5 V dc @ 3 A / 9 V dc @ 3A / 10 V dc @ 5.0 A / 12 V dc @ 5.0 A / 15 V dc @ 4.33 A / 20 V dc @ 3.25 A 65 W USB-C 5 V dc @ 3 A / 9 V dc @ 3 A / 10 V dc @ 5.0 A / 12 V dc @ 5.0 A / 15 V dc @ 5.0 A / 20 V dc @ 4.5 A 90 W USB-C 19.5 V dc @ 2.31 A 45 W 19.5 V dc @ 3.33 A 65 W 19.5 V dc @ 4.62 A 90 W 19.5 V dc @ 6.15 A 120 W 19.5 V dc @ 7.70 A 150 W 19.5 V dc @ 10.3A 200 W DC plug of external HP power supply (select products only) NOTE: This product is designed for IT power systems in Norway with phase-to-phase voltage not exceeding 240 V rms. Operating environment Factor Temperature Operating Metric U.S. 5C to 35C 41F to 95F Input power 61 Nonoperating

-20C to 60C

-4F to 140F Relative humidity (noncondensing) Operating Nonoperating Maximum altitude (unpressurized) Operating Nonoperating 10% to 90%

5% to 95%

-15 m to 3,048 m

-15 m to 12,192 m 10% to 90%

5% to 95%

-50 ft to 10,000 ft

-50 ft to 40,000 ft 62 Chapter 12 Specifications 13 Electrostatic Discharge Electrostatic discharge is the release of static electricity when two objects come into contactfor example, the shock you receive when you walk across the carpet and touch a metal door knob. A discharge of static electricity from fingers or other electrostatic conductors may damage electronic components. To prevent damage to the computer, damage to a drive, or loss of information, observe these precautions:

If removal or installation instructions direct you to unplug the computer, first be sure that it is properly grounded. Keep components in their electrostatic-safe containers until you are ready to install them. Avoid touching pins, leads, and circuitry. Handle electronic components as little as possible. Use nonmagnetic tools. Before handling components, discharge static electricity by touching an unpainted metal surface. If you remove a component, place it in an electrostatic-safe container. 63 14 Accessibility HP designs, produces, and markets products and services that can be used by everyone, including people with disabilities, either on a stand-alone basis or with appropriate assistive devices. Supported assistive technologies HP products support a wide variety of operating system assistive technologies and can be configured to work with additional assistive technologies. Use the Search feature on your device to locate more information about assistive features. NOTE:

for that product. For additional information about a particular assistive technology product, contact customer support Contacting support We are constantly refining the accessibility of our products and services and welcome feedback from users. If you have an issue with a product or would like to tell us about accessibility features that have helped you, please contact us at +1 (888) 259-5707, Monday through Friday, 6 a.m. to 9 p.m. North American Mountain Time. If you are deaf or hard-of-hearing and use TRS/VRS/WebCapTel, contact us if you require technical support or have accessibility questions by calling +1 (877) 656-7058, Monday through Friday, 6 a.m. to 9 p.m. North American Mountain Time. NOTE: Support is in English only. 64 Chapter 14 Accessibility Index A AC adapter and battery 5, 6 AC adapter, testing 41 accessibility 64 action keys 20 identifying 19 airplane mode 23 airplane mode key 20, 23 antivirus software, using 49 audio 28 audio-out (headphone)/audio-in

(microphone) jack, identifying 8, 9 B backing up software and information 50 backups 55 battery conserving power 39 discharging 39 factory-sealed 38 finding information 39 low battery levels 39 resolving low battery level 40 battery information, finding 39 battery power 38 best practices 1 BIOS determining version 51 downloading an update 52 starting the Setup Utility 51 updating 51 Bluetooth device 23, 25 Bluetooth label 22 boot order changing 59 bottom 22 buttons left TouchPad 16 power 7, 8 right TouchPad 16 volume 8, 9 C caps lock light, identifying 17 caring for your computer 44 cleaning your computer 44 components bottom 21 display 11 left side 7 right side 5 top 16 connecting to a WLAN 24 connector, power 5, 6 corporate WLAN connection 24 critical battery level 39 D Disk Cleanup software 43 Disk Defragmenter software 43 drive light 8, 9 E electrostatic discharge 63 esc key, identifying 19 external AC power, using 40 F fingerprints, registering 48 firewall software 49 fn key, identifying 19 four-finger tap TouchPad gesture 34 G GPS 25 H HDMI port connecting 30 identifying 5, 6 HDMI, configuring audio 30 headsets, connecting 27 Hibernation exiting 37 initiated during critical battery level 39 initiating 37 high-definition devices, connecting 30, 31 HP 3D DriveGuard 43 HP Apps Store, visiting 1 HP Mobile Broadband activating 24 IMEI number 24 MEID number 24 HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) using 53 HP Recovery Manager correcting boot problems 59 starting 58 HP Recovery media creating 55 recovery 58 HP Recovery partition recovery 58 removing 60 HP resources 2 HP Touchpoint Manager 50 I IMEI number 24 infrared camera, identifying 12 infrared webcam lights, identifying 12 initiating Sleep and Hibernation 36 input power 61 installing optional security cable 50 integrated numeric keypad, identifying 19, 35 internal microphones, identifying 11, 12 Internet security software, using 48 J jacks audio-out (headphone)/audio-in

(microphone) 8, 9 K keyboard and optional mouse using 35 Index 65 keys action 19 airplane mode 20 esc 19 fn 19 Windows 19 L labels Bluetooth 22 regulatory 22 serial number 22 service 22 wireless certification 22 WLAN 22 lights AC adapter and battery light 5, 6 caps lock 17 drive 8, 9 mute 17 power 7, 9 locating information hardware 4 software 4 low battery level 39 M maintenance Disk Cleanup 43 Disk Defragmenter 43 HP 3D DriveGuard 43 updating programs and drivers 44 managing power 36 MEID number 24 memory card reader, identifying 5, 6 memory card, identifying 5, 6 minimized image recovery 58 minimized image, creating 57 Miracast 31 mobile broadband activating 24 IMEI number 24 MEID number 24 mute light, identifying 17 N num lock key, identifying 35 O one-finger slide touch screen gesture 34 operating environment 61 original system recovery 57 P passwords Setup Utility (BIOS) 48 Windows 47 ports HDMI 5, 6, 30 Miracast 31 USB 2.0 9 USB 3.0 6, 7 USB 3.0 charging 5 USB Type-C 5, 29 power AC 40 battery 38 power button, identifying 7, 8 power connector, identifying 5, 6 power lights, identifying 7, 9 power meter, using 38 power settings, using 38 product name and number, computer 22 public WLAN connection 24 R recover options 57 recovery discs 56, 58 HP Recovery Manager 57 media 58 starting 58 supported discs 56 system 57 USB flash drive 58 using HP Recovery media 56 recovery media creating 55 creating using HP Recovery Manager 56 recovery partition removing 60 regulatory information regulatory label 22 wireless certification labels 22 S security cable slot, identifying 7, 9 security cable, installing 50 serial number 22 serial number, computer 22 service labels, locating 22 setting password protection on wakeup 37 Setup Utility (BIOS) passwords 48 shipping the computer 45 shutdown 41 Sleep exiting 37 initiating 37 Sleep and Hibernation initiating 36 slots memory card reader 5, 6 security cable 7, 9 software Disk Cleanup 43 Disk Defragmenter 43 HP 3D DriveGuard 43 software updates, installing 49 sound settings, using 28 speakers connecting 27 identifying 18 supported discs, recovery 56 system recovery 57 system restore point creating 56 system restore point, creating 55 T tap TouchPad and touch screen gesture 32 testing an AC adapter 41 three-finger swipe TouchPad gesture 34 touch screen gestures one-finger slide 34 TouchPad buttons 16 using 32 TouchPad and touch screen gestures tap 32 two-finger pinch zoom 33 TouchPad gestures four-finger tap 34 66 Index wireless controls button 23 operating system 23 wireless light 23 wireless network (WLAN) connecting 24 corporate WLAN connection 24 functional range 24 public WLAN connection 24 wireless network, securing 50 WLAN antennas, identifying 11, 12 WLAN device 22 WLAN label 22 WWAN device 24 three-finger swipe 34 two-finger scroll 33 two-finger tap 33 TouchPad zone, identifying 16 traveling with the computer 22, 45 turning off the computer 41 two-finger pinch zoom TouchPad and touch screen gesture 33 two-finger scroll TouchPad gesture 33 two-finger tap TouchPad gesture 33 U unresponsive system 41 updating programs and drivers 44 USB 2.0 port, identifying 9 USB 3.0 charging port, identifying 5 USB 3.0 port, identifying 6, 7 USB Type-C port, connecting 29 USB Type-C port, identifying 5 using external AC power 40 using passwords 47 using power meter settings 38 using power settings 38 using sound settings 28 using the integrated numeric keypad 35 using the keyboard and optional mouse 35 using the TouchPad 32 V vents, identifying 21 video 28 volume buttons, identifying 8, 9 W webcam identifying 11, 12 using 27 webcam light, identifying 11, 12 Windows system restore point 55, 56 Windows Hello using 48 Windows key, identifying 19 Windows passwords 47 Windows tools using 56 wireless button 23 wireless certification label 22 Index 67

Request for Modular/Limited Modular Approval Date: March 6, 2020 Subject: Manufacturers Declaration for - Limited Modular Approval

- Limited Split Modular Approval

- Modular Approval - Split Modular Approval Confidentiality Request for: ______PD93165NG_____ For Items Marked NO(*), the Limited Module Description Must be Filled Out on the Following Pages Modular Approval Requirement Requirement Met 8 Basic Requirements FCC Part 15.212(a)(1) 1. The modular transmitter must have its own RF shielding. This is intended to ensure that the module does not have to rely upon the shielding provided by the device into which it is installed in order for all modular transmitter emissions to comply with FCC limits. It is also intended to prevent coupling between the RF circuitry of the module and any wires or circuits in the device into which the module is installed. Such coupling may result in non-compliant operation. The physical crystal and tuning capacitors may be located external to the shielded radio elements. 15.212(a)(1)(i)

- YES - NO(*) Details: The module contains a metal shield which covers all RF components and circuitry. The shield is located on the top of the board next to antenna connector. See photo provided with this filing. 2. The modular transmitter must have buffered modulation/data inputs (if such inputs are provided) to ensure that the module will comply with FCC requirements under conditions of excessive data rates or over-modulation. 15.212(a)(1)(ii)

- YES - NO(*) Details: Data to the modulation circuit is buffered as described in the operational description provided with the application>

3. The modular transmitter must have its own power supply regulation on the module. This is intended to ensure that the module will comply with FCC requirements regardless of the design of the power supplying circuitry in the device into which the module is installed. 15.212(a)(1)(iii)

- YES - NO(*) Details: The module contains its own power supply regulation. Please refer to operational description filed with this application 4. The modular transmitter must comply with the antenna and transmission system requirements of 15.203, 15.204(b), 15.204(c), 15.212(a), and 2.929(b). The antenna must either be permanently attached or employ a unique antenna coupler (at all connections between the module and the antenna, including the cable). The professional installation provision of 15.203 is not applicable to modules but can apply to limited modular approvals under paragraph 15.212(b). 15.212(a)(1)(iv)

- YES - NO(*) Details: The module connects to its antenna using an UFL connector which is considered a non-standard connector. The antenna and connector specification are provided with this filing. 5. The modular transmitter must be tested in a stand-alone configuration, i.e., the module must not be inside another device during testing. This is intended to demonstrate that the module is capable of complying with Part 15 emission limits regardless of the device into which it is eventually installed. Unless the transmitter module will be battery powered, it must comply with the AC line conducted requirements found in Section 15.207. AC or DC power lines and data input/output lines connected to the module must not contain ferrites, unless they will be marketed with the module (see Section 15.27(a)). The length of these lines shall be length typical of actual use or, if that length is unknown, at least 10 centimeters to insure that there is no coupling between the case of the module and supporting equipment. Any accessories, peripherals, or support equipment connected to the module during testing shall be unmodified or commercially available (see Section 15.31(i)). 15.212(a)(1)(v)

- YES X

- NO(*) Details: The module was tested in OEM host PC and is limited to installation in the host described in this filing. 053019-02a 6. The modular transmitter must be labeled with its own FCC ID number, or use an electron display (see KDB Publication 784748). Modular Approval Requirement Requirement Met If using a permanently affixed label with its own FCC ID number, if the FCC ID is not visible when the module is installed inside another device, then the outside of the device into which the module is installed must also display a label referring to the enclosed module. This exterior label can use wording such as the following: Contains Transmitter Module FCC ID: XYZMODEL1 or Contains FCC ID:

XYZMODEL1. Any similar wording that expresses the same meaning may be used. The Grantee may either provide such a label, an example of which must be included in the application for equipment authorization, or, must provide adequate instructions along with the module which explain this requirement. In the latter case, a copy of these instructions must be included in the application for equipment authorization. If the modular transmitter uses an electronic display of the FCC identification number, the information must be readily accessible and visible on the modular transmitter or on the device in which it is installed. If the module is installed inside another device, then the outside of the device into which the module is installed must display a label referring to the enclosed module. This exterior label can use wording such as the following: Contains FCC certified transmitter module(s). Any similar wording that expresses the same meaning may be used. The user manual must include instructions on how to access the electronic display. A copy of these instructions must be included in the application for equipment authorization. 15.212(a)(1)(vi)

- YES - NO(*) Details: There is a label on the module as shown in the labeling exhibit filed with this application. Host specific labeling instructions are shown in the installation manual .filed with this application. 7. The modular transmitter must comply with all specific rule or operating requirements applicable to the transmitter, including all the conditions provided in the integration instructions by the grantee. A copy of these instructions must be included in the application for equipment authorization. For example, there are very strict operational and timing requirements that must be met before a transmitter is authorized for operation under Section 15.231. For instance, data transmission is prohibited, except for operation under Section 15.231(e), in which case there are separate field strength level and timing requirements. Compliance with these requirements must be assured. 15.212(a)(1)(vii)

- YES - NO(*) Details: The module complies with FCC Part 15C requirements. Instructions to the OEM installer are provided in the installation manual filed with this application. 8. The modular transmitter must comply with any applicable RF exposure requirements. For example, FCC Rules in Sections 2.1091, 2.1093 and specific Sections of Part 15, including 15.319(i), 15.407(f), 15.253(f) and 15.255(g), require that Unlicensed PCS, UNII and millimeter wave devices perform routine environmental evaluation for RF Exposure to demonstrate compliance. In addition, spread spectrum transmitters operating under Section 15.247 are required to address RF Exposure compliance in accordance with Section 15.247(b)(4). Modular transmitters approved under other Sections of Part 15, when necessary, may also need to address certain RF Exposure concerns, typically by providing specific installation and operating instructions for users, installers and other interested parties to ensure compliance. 15.212(a)(1)(viii)

- YES - NO(*) Details: The module meets mobile/portable conditions levels as shown in the RF exposure test report filed with this application. 053019-02a Limited Module Description When Applicable

* If a module does NOT meet one or more of the above 8 requirements, the applicant may request Limited Modular Approval (LMA). This Limited Modular Approval (LMA) is applied with the understanding that the applicant will demonstrate and will retain control over the final installation of the device, such that compliance of the end product is always assured. The operating condition(s) for the LMA;

the module is only approved for use when installed in devices produced by grantee. A description regarding how control of the end product, into which the module will be installed, will be maintained by the applicant/manufacturer, such that full compliance of the end product is always ensured should be provided here. Details: The module was tested in the OEM host PC and is limited to installation in the PC described in this application. Software Considerations KDB 594280 / KDB 442812 (One of the following 2 items must be applied) Requirement Requirement Met 1. For non-Software Defined Radio transmitter modules where software is used to ensure compliance of the device, technical description must be provided about how such control is implemented to ensure prevention of third-party modification; see KDB Publication 594280.

- Provided in Separate Cover Letter

- N/A Details: The firmware of the device cannot be modified or adjusted by the end user as described in a separate cover letter filed with this application. 2. For Software Defined Radio (SDR) devices, transmitter module applications must provide a software security description; see KDB Publication 442812.

- Provided in Separate Cover Letter

- N/A Details: <example N/A>

Split Modular Requirements Requirement Provided in Manual 1. For split modular transmitters, specific descriptions for secure communications between front-end and control sections, including authentication and restrictions on third-party modifications; also, instructions to third-party integrators on how control is maintained.

- Provided in Separate Cover Letter

- N/A Details: <example N/A >

053019-02a OEM Integration Manual Guidance KDB 996369 D03 Section 2 Clear and Specific Instructions Describing the Conditions, Limitations, and Procedures for third-parties to use and/or integrate the module into a host device. Requirement Is this module intended for sale to third parties?

- YES

- No, If No, and LMA applies, the applicant can optionally choose to not make the following detailed info public. However there still needs to be basic integration instructions for a users manual and the information below must still be included in the operational description. If the applicant wishes to keep this info confidential, this will require a separate statement cover letter explaining the module is not for sale to third parties and that integration instructions are internal confidential documents. Items required to be in the manual See KDB 996369 D03, Section 2 As of May 1, 2019, the FCC requires ALL the following information to be in the installation manual. Modular transmitter applicants should include information in their instructions for all these items indicating clearly when they are not applicable. For example information on trace antenna design could indicate Not Applicable. Also if a module is limited to only a grantees own products and not intended for sale to third parties, the user instructions may not need to be detailed and the following items can be placed in the operational description, but this should include a cover letter as cited above. 1. List of applicable FCC rules. KDB 996369 D03, Section 2.2 a. Only list rules related to the transmitter. 2. Summarize the specific operational use conditions. KDB 996369 D03, Section 2.3 a. Conditions such as limits on antennas, cable loss, reduction of power for point to point 3. Limited Module Procedures. KDB 996369 D03, Section 2.4 systems, professional installation info a. Describe alternative means that the grantee uses to verify the host meets the necessary limiting conditions b. When RF exposure evaluation is necessary, state how control will be maintained such that compliance is ensured, such as Class II for new hosts, etc. 4. Trace antenna designs. KDB 996369 D03, Section 2.5 a. Layout of trace design, parts list, antenna, connectors, isolation requirements, tests for design verification, and production test procedures for ensuring compliance. If confidential, the method used to keep confidential must be identified and information provided in the operational description. 5. RF exposure considerations. KDB 996369 D03, Section 2.6 a. Clearly and explicitly state conditions that allow host manufacturers to use the module. Two types of instructions are necessary: first to the host manufacturer to define conditions (mobile, portable xx cm from body) and second additional text needed to be provided to the end user in the host product manuals. 6. Antennas. KDB 996369 D03, Section 2.7 a. List of antennas included in the application and all applicable professional installer instructions when applicable. The antenna list shall also identify the antenna types

(monopole, PIFA, dipole, etc note that omni-directional is not considered a type) 7. Label and compliance information. KDB 996369 D03, Section 2.8 a. Advice to host integrators that they need to provide a physical or e-label stating Contains FCC ID: with their finished product a. 8. Information on test modes and additional testing requirements. KDB 996369 D03, Section 2.9 Test modes that should be taken into consideration by host integrators including clarifications necessary for stand-alone and simultaneous configurations. Provide information on how to configure test modes for evaluation 9. Additional testing, Part 15 Subpart B disclaimer. KDB 996369 D03, Section 2.10 b.

- All Items shown to X the left are provided in the Modular Integration Guide (or UM) for Full Modular Approval (MA) or LMA. Therefore the Sincerely, 053019-02a By:

Sr. Regulatory Engineer __________________________ __Steven C Hackett______________________

(Signature/Title1)

(Print name) 1 - Must be signed by applicant contact given for applicant on the FCC site, or by the authorized agent if an appropriate authorized agent letter has been provided. Letters should be placed on appropriate letterhead. 053019-02a

December 10, 2018 Federal Communications Commission 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, Maryland 21046 USA Subject: Model 3165NGW Wireless LAN mini-PCIe Card FCC ID: PD93165NG IC: 1000M-3165NG Gentlemen:

Please be advised that the Model 3165NGWNGW 802.11a/b/g/n/ac/ax + BT Wireless LAN mini-PCIe card is manufactured for the global market but when marketed in the U.S. under FCC ID: PD93165NG and in Canada under IC: 1000M-3165NG. The non-

volatile memory (NVM) will be programmed at the factory to only actively scan and operate on these specific channels during normal WLAN operation. During Wi-Fi Direct mode the device may act as a group owner (GO) to establish a peer-to-peer (P2P) network including conditions when no master device is present on these specific channels. Channels 1-13,2412-2472MHz 802.11b mode Channels 1-13, 2412-2472MHz 802.11g mode Channels 1-13, 2412-2472MHz 802.11n mode (20MHz channel) Channels 3-11, 2422-2462MHz 802.11n mode (40MHz channel) The device operates as a client without radar detection capability and will be programmed at the factory to passively scan on the following dynamic frequency selection (DFS) channels and will only listen for a master device and cannot send a probe request to initiate communication on these DFS channels. Accordingly passive scanning provides protection for TDWR operations and preventing transmission in the 5600MHz 5650MHz frequency band. Client software and drivers will never enable the device to act as a master or GO for operation in DFS frequency bands and therefore ad-hoc mode is always disabled on these passive scan DFS channels. Channels 52-64, 5260-5320MHz 802.11a mode Channels 52-64, 5260-5320MHz 802.11n mode (20 MHz channel) Channels 52-64, 5260-5320MHz 802.11ac mode (20 MHz channel) Channels 54-62, 5270-5310MHz 802.11n mode (40MHz channel) Channels 54-62, 5270-5310MHz 802.11ac mode (40MHz channel) Channel 58, 5290MHz 802.11ac mode (80MHz channel) Channel 50, 5250MHz 802.11ac mode (160MHz channel) Channels 100-140, 5500-5700MHz 802.11a mode Channels 100-140, 5500-5700MHz 802.11n mode (20 MHz channel) Intel Corporation 100 Center Point Circle Columbia, SC 29210 Channels 100-144, 5500-5720MHz 802.11ac mode (20 MHz channel) Channels 102-134, 5510-5670MHz 802.11n mode (40MHz channel) Channels 102-142, 5510-5710MHz 802.11ac mode (40MHz channel) Channels 106 &138, 5540 & 5690MHz 802.11ac mode (80MHz channel) Channel 114, 5570MHz 802.11ac mode (160MHz channel) This device meets the requirements of FCC Part 15.202 and accordingly will be programmed at the factory to active scan on the following non-DFS channels to initiate communication during normal WLAN operation. When operating in Wi-Fi Direct mode on these non-DFS channels, it may operate as a P2P client device or GO to establish a P2P network if, and only if, a master device is present and network communication is maintained between a master device and the GO. Channels 36-48, 5180-5240MHz 802.11a mode Channels 36-48, 5180-5240MHz 802.11n mode (20 MHz channel) Channels 36-48, 5180-5240MHz 802.11ac mode (20 MHz channel) Channels 38-46, 5190-5230MHz 802.11n mode (40MHz channel) Channels 38-46, 5190-5230MHz 802.11ac mode (40MHz channel) Channel 42, 5210MHz 802.11ac mode (80MHz channel) Channels 149-165, 5745-5825MHz 802.11a mode Channels 149-165, 5745-5825MHz 802.11n mode (20 MHz channel) Channels 149-165, 5745-5825MHz 802.11ac mode (20 MHz channel) Channels151-159, 5755-5795MHz 802.11n mode (40MHz channel) Channels151-159, 5755-5795MHz 802.11ac mode (40MHz channel) Channel 155, 5775MHz 802.11ac mode (80MHz channel) This information when programmed into the NVM will not be accessible and cannot be changed by the end user. The transmitter is approved as a non-software defined radio and OEMs and third party system integrators do not have the ability through software to allow configuration controls that would permit the device to operate outside the grant conditions per FCC KDB 594280. Sincerely, Steven C. Hackett Wireless Regulatory Engineer Intel Corporation Mobile Wireless Group Intel Corporation 100 Center Point Circle Columbia, SC 29210

Federal Communications Commission 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, Maryland 21046 USA Date : 03/01/2020 Dear Examiner, Ref: FCC Class II Permissive change for FCC ID: PD93165NG This is to request a Class II permissive change for module approval FCC ID: PD93165NG, originally granted on 01/23/2015. Change #1: This change is for a device previously granted under rule parts of 5.407(b)(4)(ii) (Grant note 49) and is now applying for approval under current band edge requirements of 15.407(b)(4)(i) allowing for the marketing, sale and importation of products after March 2, 2020 (Grant note 38). There are no changes to the hardware or approved conducted output powers. Sincerely, By:

__________________________ Steven C. Hackett Title:

Wireless Regulatory Engineer On behalf of: Intel Mobile Communications e-mail:

steven.c.hackett@intel.com Intel Mobile Communications 100 Center Point Circle, Suite 200 Columbia, South Carolina 29210 USA

FCC ID: PD93165NGW SoftwareSecurityDescriptionKDB594280D02v01r02SectionII GeneralDescription 1. Describehowanysoftware/firmwareupdatewillbe obtained,downloaded,andinstalled.Softwarethatis accessedthroughmanufacturerswebsiteordevices managementsystem,mustdescribethedifferentlevels ofsecurity. There is no downloadable software provided by the manufacturer that can modify critical radio transmitter parameters. All critical parameters are programmed in OTP memory at the factory and cannot be modified or overridden by third parties. 2. Describealltheradiofrequencyparametersthatare modifiedbyanysoftware/firmwarewithoutany hardwarechanges.Aretheseparametersinsomeway limited,suchthat,itwillnotexceedtheauthorized parameters?

3. Describeindetailtheauthenticationprotocolsthat areinplacetoensurethatthesourceofthe software/firmwareislegitimate.Describeindetailhow thesoftwareisprotectedagainstmodification. There are no rf parameters that can be modified. All rf parameters are programmed in OTP memory at the factory and cannot be modified or overridden by third parties. The firmware is programmed at the factory and cannot be modified by third parties. 4. Describeindetailtheverificationprotocolsinplace toensurethatinstalledsoftware/firmwareislegitimate. The firmware is programmed at the factory and cannot be modified by third parties. 5. Describeindetailanyencryptionmethodsusedto supporttheuseoflegitimatesoftware/firmware. The firmware is programmed at the factory and cannot be modified by third parties therefore no encryption is necessary. 6. Foradevicethatcanbeconfiguredasamasterand client(withactiveorpassivescanning),explainhowthe deviceensurescomplianceforeachmode?Inparticular ifthedeviceactsasmasterinsomebandofoperation andclientinanother;howiscomplianceensuredin eachbandofoperation?

This is a client module only. ThirdPartyAccessControl 1. Explainifanythirdpartieshavethecapabilityto operateaUSsolddeviceonanyotherregulatory domain,frequencies,orinanymannerthatisin violationofthecertification. 2. WhatpreventsthirdpartiesfromloadingnonUS versionsofthesoftware/firmwareonthedevice?

Describeindetailhowthedeviceisprotectedfrom flashingandtheinstallationofthirdpartyfirmware suchasDDWRT.(See,forexample,http://www.dd Third parties do not the capability to operate in any manner that is violation of the certification in the U.S. RF parameters are programmed into OTP memory at the factory and cannot be reprogrammed or re-flashed by third parties. wrt.com/) 3. ForCertifiedTransmittermodulardevices,describe howthemodulegranteeensuresthathosts manufacturesfullycomplywiththesesoftwaresecurity requirementsforUNIIdevices.Ifthemoduleis controlledthroughdriversoftwareloadedinthehost, describehowthedriversarecontrolledandmanaged suchthatthemodulartransmitterparametersarenot modifiedoutsidethegrantofauthorization. FCC ID: PD93165NG There are no rf parameters that can be modified. All rf parameters are programmed in OTP memory at the factory and cannot be modified or overridden by third parties. The module is not controlled by driver software on the host and cannot override critical rf parameters stored in module OTP memory. SOFTWARECONFIGURATIONDESCRIPTIONKDB594280D02v01r02SectionIII USERCONFIGURATIONGUIDE 1. TowhomistheUIaccessible?(Professionalinstaller, enduser,other.) No UI provided. a) Whatparametersareviewabletotheprofessional None installer/enduser?

b) Whatparametersareaccessibleormodifiableto None theprofessionalinstaller?

i) Aretheparametersinsomewaylimited,sothat theinstallerswillnotenterparametersthatexceed thoseauthorized?

The module micro-code reads the parameters from the module OTP memory. These parameters cannot be modified or overridden by sw drivers. ii) Whatcontrolsexistthattheusercannotoperate thedeviceoutsideitsauthorizationintheU.S.?

Default mode is always FCC compliant. Other country modes cannot be activated without receiving three independent country codes from different APs, otherwise remains in FCC default mode (always FCC compliant) c) Whatconfigurationoptionsareavailabletothe None enduser?

i) Aretheparametersinsomewaylimited,sothat theinstallerswillnotenterparametersthatexceed thoseauthorized?

The module micro-code reads the parameters from the module OTP memory. These parameters cannot be modified or overridden by sw drivers. ii) Whatcontrolsexistthattheusercannotoperate thedeviceoutsideitsauthorizationintheU.S.?

Default mode is always FCC compliant. Other country modes cannot be activated without receiving three independent country codes from different APs, otherwise remains in FCC default mode (always FCC compliant) d) Isthecountrycodefactoryset?Canitbechanged intheUI?

Default country code is set in the factory and no UI is provided for modification. i) Ifso,whatcontrolsexisttoensurethatthe devicecanonlyoperatewithinitsauthorizationinthe Programmed for default mode which is always FCC compliant. Always set for default for all start-ups, resets, timeouts or other host or network events. U.S.?

isrestarted?

e) Whatarethedefaultparameterswhenthedevice Always FCC compliant FCC ID: PD93165NG 2. Cantheradiobeconfiguredinbridgeormeshmode?

Ifyes,anattestationmayberequired.Further informationisavailableinKDBPublication905462D02. No 3. Foradevicethatcanbeconfiguredasamasterand client(withactiveorpassivescanning),ifthisisuser configurable,describewhatcontrolsexist,withintheUI, toensurecomplianceforeachmode.Ifthedeviceacts asamasterinsomebandsandclientinothers,howis thisconfiguredtoensurecompliance?

4. Foradevicethatcanbeconfiguredasdifferenttypes ofaccesspoints,suchaspointtopointorpointto multipoint,andusedifferenttypesofantennas, describewhatcontrolsexisttoensurecompliancewith applicablelimitsandtheproperantennaisusedfor eachmodeofoperation.(SeeSection15.407(a)) This is a client device. This device is not an access point. Name and surname of applicant (or authorized representative):

Date: March 1, 2020 Signature: